-:' KEY TO PELTON'S NEM.AND IMPROVED SERIES OP 0 OUTLINEE MAP'S. DESIGNED FOR SCHOOLS AND ACADEMIES. IBY13 I:C. PELTON, A. M. / PHILADELPHI A: -'.; SOWER & BARNER, No -; NORTH THIRD STREET. ^^ 1:1i ^^^.I HIDSTE'I ^^^s- B^~^' _______^ ^^ ^^ KEY TO PELTON'S NEW AND IMPROVED SERIES OF OUTLINE MAPS CONTAINING ALL THE IMPORTANT GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES IN THE KNOWN WORLD, RMIRISING ITS CONTINENTS, ISLANDS, PENINSULAS, ISTHMUSrS, CAPES, MOUNTAINS, E^' TOGETHER WITH ITS OCEANS, SEAS, GULFS, BAYS, STRAITS, CHANNELS, SOUNDS, LAKES, AND RIVERS, ARRANGED IN VERSE FOR MUSICAL RECITATIONS; TO WHICH IS ADDED A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PRESENT STATE OF THE WORLD, CONFINED TO THE MOST INTERESTING AND CHARACTERISTIO MATTEZ BY C. PELTON, A. M. PHILADELPHIA: SOWER & BARNES, No. 33 NORTH THIRD STREET 1856. PUBLISHERS NOTICE. TuIE Publishers will be pleased to receive orders by mail from Booksellers, School Committees, Trustees, and Agents, for Pelton's Outline Maps and Keys, and assure them that they will be faithfully executed, and at as low prices as if given personally. Those who have purchased the Hemispheres can at any time obtain the remaining 3Maps of the Second Series. Teachers, even in the most distant parts of the United States, can obtain Pelton's Series of Outline Maps, by enclosing Twenty-five Dollars, in the presence of a Post-master, and forwarding it by mail, at the risk of the Publishers. Maps or Keys securely packed, and forwarded with care and de.patch to any part of the United States. Address, SOWER AND BARNES, Booksellers and Publishers, No. 84 North Third Street, Philadelphia, Pa. BQ Teachers and Agents supplied, at the loucestl rice, with " Baldwin'3 Universal Pronouncing Gazetteer." Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1817, BY C. PELTON, m the Clerk's Office of the District Court of thl United States in and for the Eastern District of'Pnnyllvania. I'lINTITD BY -M51!TI A: l l'.i:0. Franklin Blilins. Sixth Str..t, i.~<\~v.'., i'.1i..l1 1 li.. ADVERTISEMIENT TO THE AUTHOR'S OUTLINE MAPS AND KEYS. IT is now conceded by Educators of the greatest experience, both in this co intry and Europe, that the method of teaching Geography from large and boldly delineated 1Maps without names, is superior to all others in respect to facility of acquire-;enlt —durability of impression-and discipline of mind. The rationale of this method of instruction is-teaching by the eye-based on that law of intellect " that the o'jects of sight nmore readily become the subjects of conceptioln and me/mory than those of the other senses; and the more distinctly they are seen, the more lively is the conception, and more lasting the imnpression on the mlind." To afford the American youth, therefore, the best facilities for acquiring a knowledge of Geography, the author has constructed, from the most reliable authorities, the two following Series of Standard Outline Maps, adapted in all particulars to the wants of the Primary, Granmmar, and Ililg Sclools of the United States. These Maps, together with the Key, which accoinpaonies each Series, and enables the learner to zanle and locate the Political Divisions, Islands, Mountains, Seas, G;uifs, Bays, Straits, Lakes, Rivers, &c., represented thereon, comprise a succinct and comnprehensive system (f lhysical, Political, and Descriptive Geography-and their superiority over every other Series of Outline Maps, as regards construction, ex'Crct'i/oli, size, nmiber, cheaplness, and adapted/ness to interest the learner and impress upon the mind a clear and vivid outline of the Physical Features and Political Divisions of the Earth, is worthy of the especial notice of the friends of Education. FIRST SERIES. The First Series embraces the Western and Eastern Iemispheres. These splendid and highly finished Maps are nearly qucadrlple the size of any heretofore publisihed. They exhibit the Physical Features of the Earth, and also give an accurate view of its Political Divisions, showiing the relative size of each, with their 7atztralt( and coinvetionial boundaries. In fine, they show, at one view, the World as it now is-and are, therefore, especially adapted to beyiinners, who obtain, at tie outset, a clear and correct conception of the relative size of every Physical and Political division, effectually preventing the erroneous impressions so often conveyed by Maps isolated and pn several different scales. By an ingenious application of colors. signs, and diagramns, they present tho whole subject of PIYSICAL GEOGRAPIIY, inc'ulding the Geologica:l for'ml'l:in )f the world, its Oceanic Currents, Atmiospheric changes. Isothermal Lines, Ve(r.ile Dimensions, Distribution of Rain, &c., &c., in a maniner so simple and beautiful as to he easilv tau ht and comprehended. These Maps constitute the first two of the Second Series, and are designed as introdzctory to that thorough and practical knowledge of geography which may be obtained therefrom. 1. lap) of tIle Western Hell i.sphJcre, 7 feet by 7 feet. 2. MoLap of the Easlern liel misphere, 7 fJet by 7 feet. Price of the Two, with Key, $10.00. SECOND SERIES. The Second Series embraces, in addition to the Western and Eastern Hemispheres, Maps of the Five Grand Divisions of the Earth, with a large and full Map of the United States. This Series, comprising Six large and brilliantly colored Maps, exhibits, in bold and vivid outline, the lrading features of nature; and also the Political Divisions of the Earth, with their natural and conventional boundaries. giving a distinct and accurate view of eah country on a large scale, sufficiently distinct to be seen and studied from the most distant parts of the 4 ADVERTISEMENT. school-room-and, in connection with the Key, presents to the learner a h''"ii picture of the Earth-its moral, political, and physical aspect —with a gralphic description of each country, confined to the most interestilng ancd character.stie matter. 1. Polilical and Phtysical Macp of Western lcm i.spc re, 7 feet by 7 fect 2. Political and PhysicalY Map of Easternz Ilemi. isplhere, 7 f c t 7y f7 Jcl. 3. Map of the United States, British Protvices, M'i;xico, Central America, and the TWest I(nia Islandls, 7 /f et 7b/ 7 feet. 4. atp of Eu7rop le,.....,f e/t byfj f;cet 10 in. 5. Map of Alsia,...... );t by 6 f ct 8 ia. 6. M3iap of Soutll Amenrica and Africa a y... e; / b fcit. Price of the Series.' 5.r)O0. These Maps are superior to any Series of Outline Maps published in this )untry or Europe, and the publishers invite the attention of School Committees, Irustees, and Teachers to the following considerations: 1. They are the largest, best executed, most comprehensive, and the most distincti dellineated. 2. They are printed on superfine paper. 3. They are colored with the most brilliant, expensive, andl durable colors. 4. They are mounted witi rollers and mouldings in the most substantial nI'.iner. 5. Thley are weil sized and highlly varnished, which preserves the brilliancy of the colors, and gives them strength and durability. Hence, whenever they become soilel by long exposure or otherwise, they can be cleansed with a moist spolge or clothl, without receiving any injury. (. In their construction, the author has availed himself of the most relia!le inflormation furnlished I tle liberality of our own governllent, ald also of' tile rich stores of ee:ri-phical works furnishied by the governments of Europe, especially those of tl'nce and E ngland. These laps are accompanied by a Key, containing a large numbler of tile most important g'eoglraphical names in the known world, arranged in verse. This, as experietice proves-'t, not only renders the study highly attracti-ve, but greatly facilitates the acquisitil of the leading features of geography as well as the prolnunciation of eogr: llicall names. The spellin;r of Oriental and some other names, in the Key, will be found occasionally to differ from that which occurs in our school atlases. As the same name is often spelled differently on different maps, cau-ing great em'barrassment to both teacher and pupil, and sometimes giving rise to serious errors, the author has, atrer a careful examination of the subject, adopted the admirable system set forth in Baldwin's I'ronouncing Gazetteer, page 28, section XV. This system will, he is persualded, be found at once complete, simple, and satisfactory. In teaching geo^eralphll, nothing is more important, and nothing has occasioned more emllarrassmenieit to the thorough and conscientious teacher, than theproounciati:'n of ge oogralphical names. The author has, therefore, been at great pains to give the correct pronunciation of many difficult names in the Key, and to niake tile acceiituation of the names occurring in the verse correspond with the true prolnunciation. as established by the best authorities. It is believed, therefore, tiiat in point of accuracy, (apart from its other merits,) the Key to either series ct 31Mt s will be found superior to any other work of the sort hitherto published.'lie iwlant of a correct and perfectly reliable system of geographical pronunciation has been felt by every good teacher, and it affords the author great pleasure t.o be able now to state that Baldwinl's Pronouncing Gazetteer, containing the pronunciation of all the difficult names found in our best school atlases and geographies, supplies this want in the most satisfactory mainner. It is invaluable to every teacher and learner, and should be used as a text-book in every schooi in the Umlited States. The author would observe that to this work he must refer as his authority f r ihe spellin:g and pronunciation of names occurring in the Key to either series of his Maps, and for the full explanation of many points in connection with these Lubjects, to which the plan and limits of this work only permit him to allude. Philadelphia, t"i51. PREFACE. IN offering to the public a work like the present, which, in some of its important charac tenrstics, is entirely new-the author feels himself called upon to explain briefly the object of the work, and the motives which induced him to prepare it for publication. Geography, as has been truly said, is one of the most interesting, useful, and practical of t!e sciences. Nothing has contributed more to the general intelligence of the people of the United States-to their knowledge of the natural and physical condition of the earth-to their familiarity with the soil and productions of every climate-to their acquaintance with the inhabitants of all countries, in all their vast variety from barbarism to refinement-to:heir extensive intercourse and commerce with all nations-and to the perfection of our social and civil institutions, and the enhancement of individual enjoyment-than the universa. study of Geography in all our schools. Yet, the knowledge of this science, heretofore acquired during the long period of elementary education, has been the result of long and tedious labor on the part of the learner. The obiect of the author, therefore, has been, in preparing this work for publication, in connection with his Series of Outline Maps, to render the study of Geography more pleasing and interstinF, and to put the learner in possession of facilities for accquiring a more extensive and iermanent knowledge of this useful science in a short period of time. A desire to acconri:sh this object led to the publication of the author's first Series of Outline Maps, several cairs ago, and it is now the concurrent testimony of the educators of the highest respectabil ty and of the greatest experience, both in this country and in Europe, that the method of t-.aching Geography from large and boldly delineated maps without names, is superior to al others in respect-first, to facility of acquirement; secondly, durability of impression; and t..i'dly, discipline of the mind. Tie principle oI this method of instruction is,-teaching bhi the e:i/e.-based on that law of iitellect, that " the objects of sight more readily become the suljects of conception and menmory. tlai those of the other senses, and the more distinctly they are seen, the more lively is the conce.pion, and more lasting the impression on the mind." The Maps have been constructed on a large scale, with special reference to this principle, and by presenting to the eye a bold, clear, and attractive representation of the earth, the mind is early led abroad to survey its Continents and Islands, its Oceans and Seas, its Lakes and Rivers, its Soil and Productions, the Physical and Moral condition of man, and receives an expansion which no other study could equally afford. To accomplish his object more successfully, and to render the study of Geography in the highest degree pleasing and interesting to the pupil, the author has connected with it the science of music-a science which seldom fails to awaken the feelings, and arouse both the plihsical and intellectual powers into renewed and vigorous action. Every day furnishes proof abundant and positive, of the exhilarating effect and controlling influence of music over the youthful mind. If it is employed as a means of giving expression to the purest anl nost refined sentiments of the heart, and the sublimest emotions of the soul, shall its aid be de-iied in awakening and securing the attention of the young, and impressing upon the mind tlacs pertaining to one of the most useful and practical of the sciences? With respect to the versification, it is merely necessary to say, that the design has been to r.' sal the important aeographical localities on the globe, in connection with much valuable i.';.ier, in a form that can be the most easily committed to memory; and it is confid le"ly t -:eved. that the exhilarating effect of harmonious sounds will greatly facilitate the acquisii-, of this knowledge, and care has been taken that none but popular and approved airs be ltIs.rted in the work.'The difficulties which attend the adaptation of verse to such purposes, (especially whlen trevity and comprehensiveness are required,) can be estimated only by those who.ave tried a similar experiment. TO TEACHERS. THE FIRST LESSON TO BE LEARNED BY THE PUPIL EXPLANATION OF THE KEY, OR DIRECTIONS FOR ASCERTAINING THE NAME AND SITUATION OF ANY COUNTRY, ISLAND, LAKE, RIVER, ETC., ON THE MAPS. BY looking on the Map of the Western Hemisphere, you will see that it is divided into a large number of small Spaces or Areas by the Parallels of Latitude and Jleridians,-lines running across the Map, from side to side, and from the top to the bottom. In the Jiddle of these small Spaces or Areas, you will see a Figure or Number, 1, 2, 3, 5, 20, 50, 56, 86, 91, 127, 130, &c. These Figures or Numbers will often be found in the Ke/, after the name of a Country, Island, Lake, &c., with the letters M., N., S., E., W., &c. When these letters are found in the Key in connection with the Numbers, they have reference to different parts of the Spaces or Areas on the Map. M. refers to the Middle of the Space or Area on the Map; N. refers to the North part of the Space or Area; S. refers to the South part of it; E. refers to the East part of it; W. refers to the West part of it; N. E. to the North-east part; S. E. to the South-east part; N. W. to the North-west part; S. W. to the South-west part. By the aid of the Numbers and Letters found in the Key, you will be able to find any Country, Island, Lake, River, &c., represented on the Map. EXAMPLES. On page 20, see-Russian America, 20, 21. On the Map of the Western Hemisphere you will see the same Numbers, 20, 21, in Russian America, which show where it is on the Map. On page 34, see-Great Slave Lake, 24 S. You will see Great Slave Lake on the Map, in the South part of the Space or Area numbered 24. Great Bear Lake, 23 E., 24 W. You will see Great Bear Lake partly in the East part of the Space numbered 23, and partly in the West part of the Space numbered 24. Athabasca Lake, 43 N. W. Michigan, 53 M. You will see the State of Michigan on the lMap, in the Middle of the Space numbered 53. Newfoundland, 56 N.' See this island in the North part of the Space numbered 66. Hayti, 91 N. E. Cuba, 78 S. E., 79 S. W. Gulf of Mexico, 77, 78. Caribbean Sea, 91, 92. Mackenzie's River, 22 N., 23 M. & S. E. Orinoco River, 105 MI. & N. ABBREVIATIONS. Ala. Alabama Ky. Kentucky. Mt. Mount. R. T. Rhode Island. Ark. Arkansas. L. Lake. Mts. Mountains. S. South. C. Cape. La. Louisiana. N. North. S. E. South-east. Cap. Capital. Lat. Latitude. N. C. North Carolina. S. C. South Carolina Ch. Channel. Long. Longitude. N. E. North-east. sq. ma. square miles. Ct. or Conn. Connecticut. Me. Maine. N. HI. New Hampshire. Str. Strait. Del. Delaware. Mass. Iassachusetts. N. J. New Jersey. S. South-wesr. E. East. 3Md. Maryland. N. W. North-west. Tenn. Tennessee. Flor. Florida. 3Mich. Michigan. N. Y. New York. T'r. Territory. ft. feet. m. in 1. miles in length. 0. Ohio. U.S. United States. Ga. Georgia. m. 1. miles long. Pa. Pennsylvania. Va. Virginia. I. Island. m. w. miles wide. Pop. Population. Vt. Vermont. 111. Illinois. Miss. 3ississippi Pt. Point. WV. West. la. or Ind. Indian., Mo. iissour. R. River. Wis. Wisoonain. lo. Iowa. KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. PART FIRST. Ara —Juld Lang Sync.* IT is Geography we learn, a science of great worth, Which makes us well acquainted with the surface of the earth; The various customs of each clime, it pleasingly makes known. And teaches us, from foreign lands, to estimate our own. It shows our race progressively, from barbarous nations rude, To where refinement and the arts have all their blessings strew'j; Here use and entertainment join to charm both age and youth, For to the zest of Novelty, we add the force of Truth GEOGRAPHICAL DEFINITIONS. 1. GEOGRAPHY is a description of the surface of the Earth. 2. The Earth is a large globe, ball, or sphere. 3. Its surface is composed of land and water. 4. About one-fourth of its surface is land, and three-fourths water. AIR —.uld Lang Syne.* 1 2 The Earth is a large ball or globe Two hundred millions of square miles, Whose surface has been found, Earth's surface does embrace; Three-fourthswithoceanwavessubmerged, Eight hundred million people here And but one-fourth dry ground. All find a dwelling-place. Questions.-1. What is Geography? 2. What is the Earth? 3. Of what is its surface composed 4. How much of its surface is land, and how much water? NATURAL DIVISIONS OF LAND. 5. The land is divided into Continents, Islands, Peninsulas, Isthmuses, Capes, Promontories, Mountains, and Shores or Coasts. 6. A continent is a vast extent of land, no where entirely separated by water. 7. An island is a body of land entirely surrounded by water. 8. A peninsula is a portion of land almost surrounded by water. 9. An isthmus is a neck of land which joins a peninsula to the main land, or connects two parts of a continent. * r'i, mv delight. &c. To T'AC I^RES AND IEANETS.-TYou will perceive tnat verse of this measure. as well as:ncs' ai the other kinds of verse n the Key, is capable of be:ig adsapteed.o a rartety of Iirs. 7 8 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 10. A cape is a point of land extending into a sea, ocean, or some othe body of water. A high or rocky point of land, extending into the sea cr ocean, is called a promontory or head land. I1. A nlountain, is a vast elevation of land. Several mountains connected together are called a range or chain of mountains. When the land rises to a small height, it is called a hill. Land lying between hills or mountains is called a valley. 12. A volcano is a mountain that sends forth flame, smoke, and lava or melted stones, from an opening at the top, called a crater. 13. A plain is a level tract of land. In North America plains are called Prairies; in South America, Pampas or Llanos; in Europe, Steppes; in Asia, Savannas. 14. A desert is a vast sandy plain, mostly destitute of water and vegetation. Some deserts contain a few green and fertile spots. These spots are called oases, and resemble islands in the ocean. 15. A share or coast is the edge or margin of land bordering on the water. Questions.-5. How is the land divided? 6. What is a continentt 7. What is an island? 8. What is a peninsula? 9. What is an isthmus? 10. What is a cape? What is a promontory? 11. What is a mountain? What is a chain or range of mountains? What is a hill? What is a valley? 12. What is a volcano? 13. What is a plain? What are plains called in North America? In South America? In Europe? In Asia? 1-4. What is a desert? What do some deserts contain? What are these spots called, and what do they resemble? 15. What is a shore or coast? NATURAL DIVISIONS OF WATER. 16. The wTater is divided into Oceans, Seas, Archipelagoes, Gul!s, Bays, Straits, Channels, Sounds, Lakes, and Rivers. 17. An ocean is a vast body of salt water. 18. A sea is a large body of salt water, smaller than an ocean, and mostly surrounded by land. 19. An archipelago is a sea interspersed* with many islands. 20. A gzlf or bay is a part of some larger body of water, extending into the land. 21. A strait is a narrow passage of water, separating two portions of land, and connecting two bodies of water. 2. A channel is a passage of water generally wvider than a strait.'23. A\ sou td is a passage of water so shallow that its depth may he nioasutred with a lead and line. 24. A lia:e is a large body of fresh water mostly surrounded by land. ^lnall lakes are called ponds. 25. A ri;er is a large stream of fresh water, fowing. from montlais,r hligh la;nd, into an ocean, sea, or some other body of waier. Stml stre ara ei (r- called brooks, creeks, ard 7ivelets. The source o Ca river ia! thie place where it rises. The mouth of a river is the piace where it enlmptIies into an ocean, sea, or some other body of water. The right bank * Interspersed, scattered, or set here and there among other things. GEOGRAPHICAL DEFINITIONS. 9 of a river is the bank on the right hand side as you descend it; the left bank, the bank on the left hand side. 26. A port, harbor, or haven, is a small part of the sea nearly surrounded by land, where ships can anchor with safety. Qucstions.-16. How is the water divided? 17. What is an ocean? 18. What is a sea? 19 What is an archipelago? 20. What is a gulf or bay? 21. What is a strait? 2'2. What is a channel 23. What is a sound? 24. What is a lake? What are small lakes calltd? 25. What is a river? What are small streams called? What is the source ol a river? What is the mouth of a river? Which is the right bank of a river? Which the left i 26. What is a port, harbor, or haven? MIAPS. To THE TF ACTTrR. — V'ile the class is studying a lesson, the map should be suspended so that its various nratlres can 1ie seen distinctly by each pupil in the class, and while reciting, the teacher or oiie oi tie class should stand at tle nap with a pointer, and locate or point out each object nalned, trac jll tlie course of rivers, mountains, &c. EASTT-ERN inAX ) WESTERN HEMISPHERES BEFORE THE PUPIL 27. A.':t i' n rolresr'ntatti: n of the whole or part of Lhe earth's surface. 2;. t'il:^,a, ir tlhe, I;/JI'ld/, or the Eastern and Vestern eremispheres;re ar rpro'-:(n tailin o the whole of the earlh's surtlce. 29. 1Th: t(,') i' every map is North; the bottom, South; the right-hanrd sile, East; the l&ft-hand side, West. 30. North, South, East, and West, are called the cardinal or principai points oF tihe compass. 31. A cotnpass is an instrument used by seamen or sailors, to point ois, their courise at sea. The needle of the compass points North and South. 32. The point half way between North and East is North-east; the point hi1lf way between South and East is South-east; the point half way between North and West is North-west; the point half way between South and \West is South-west. 33. N. stands for North-S. for South-E. for East-W. for WestN. E. for North-east-S. E. for South-east-N. WV. for North-west-S. W for South- west. MAPS. 1 4'Tis our first purpose to explain The principal, or cardinal points, The Mlaps, which here unfiirl'd, Upon the compass shown, [points Present inl simple outline form, Are North, South, East, and West, which A picture of the world. The needle does make known. 2 5 Maps represent the whole or part The compass is an instrument, Of this vast ball or sphere; To seamen a sure gulide; Maps of the world display the whole, The needle still points North and Southl All countries far and near. VWherever ships may ride. 3 6 The top of every IMap is North, In oceans vast or trackless sand, Tie lbottomn Soulth we make, WVherever man may roam, Tlie rig-ht side East, the left side West, The compass is a ftitlhffil friend Pr-eventing all mistake. That points him to his home. NOTE -The pupil should be made familiar with the points of the compasa. 2 10 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Questions.-27. What is a map? 28 What does the map of the world, or the East. tern and Western Hemispheres represent? 29. Which part of the map is North t Which South? Which East Which West? 30. What are the cardinal or principal points of the compass? 31. What is a compass? Which way does the needle of the compass point? 32. What are the names of the points half-way between the cardinal points 33. What letters stand for the different points of the compass t Point to the N. part of the map. To the S. part. To the E. part. To the WV. part. To the N. E. part. To the S. E. part. To the N. W. part. To the S. W. part. HEMISPHERES, CONTINENTS, AND GRAND DIVISIONS OF TILE EARTH. 34. A Hemisphere is half of a globe or ball. When applied to the earth, it means half of the earth. 35. The Eastern Hemisphere shows what is on the eastern half of the earth, and the Western Hemisphere, what is on the western half. 36. The Eastern Hemisphere contains the Eastern Conltinent. 37. The Western Hemisphere contains the Western Continent. To THE PUPIL.-You will perceive that the yellow, red, green, &c., on the map, represent land, and that the sea-green represents water. Rivers are represented by crooled liines which are smallest where the rivers rise, and largest where they empty. Deserts, and sand banks in the ocean are represented by a great number of small dots. 38. The Eastern Continent is divided into three divisions, Europe, Asia, and Africa.* The largest and most eastern division is Asia. The smallest division, lying West of Asia, is Europe. The division, lying South of Europe, is Africa. 39. The Western Continent is divided into two divisions, North America and South America.t The name of the Northern Division is North America; the name of the Southern Division is South America. 40. These are called Grand Divisions of the Earth. Asia is the largest Grand Division, Africa is the second in size, North America is the third, South America is the fourth, and Europe is the smallest. 41. Another Grand Division has been added by late geographers, called Oceanica, composed entirely of islands lying S. and S. E. of Asia, and W. of N. and S. America. 42. Australia or New Holland, lying S. E. of Asia, is the largest island in the world. 43. A large extent of land near the South Pole, partly in the Eastern and partly in the Western Hemisphere, called the Antarctic Continent, was discovered January 19th, 1840, by the United States. JIEISPIIERES, CONTINENTS, AND GRAND DIVISIONS OF TIE EARTH. 1 3 A Hemisphere is half a globe, The Eastern Continent contains The earth has two,'tis clear; All Asia's spacious lands, One is the Eastern called —nd one All European regions fair, The Western Hemisphere. And Afric's burning sands. 2 4 Two Continents of vast expanse The Western Continent includea These hemispheres have claimed, America alone, One is the Eastern Continent, Divided into North and South, And one the Western named. As by the map is shown. v See, small Map of " Eastern Hemisphere." t See, small Map of "Western Hemisphere. These Divisions are divided into Empires, KiUg dome, States, &:., called Political Divisions. GEOGRAPHICAL DEFINITIONS. 1I 5 8 t'ive Grand Divisions of the Earth To these divisions we may add Both Continents comprise; A sixth, of islands made, Asia, (the scene of great events,) Called Oceanica, which long Is foremost as to size. Unknown to Europe laid. 6 9 To Africa, the second place In southern seas their station is, We properly assign, And there Australia lies, And, North America, we make By some New Holland called,-vast ise! The third position thine. Unequalled as to size. 7 10 Then South America the fourth And bv discoveries later still, In magnitude we call, A large extent of ground, And Europe,-(great in many things,) Call'd tie Antarctic Continent, Is smallest of them all. Has farther south been found. Que.tions.-34. What is a hemisphere? When applied to the earth what does it mean t 35. What do the Eastern and Western Hemispheres show? 36. What does the Eastern Hemisphere contain? 37. The Western Hemisphere? 33. How is the Eastern Continent divided? Which is the largest and most eastern dlvis:o: t WVhich is the smallest division? What division lies S. of Europe? 39. flow is the Western Continent divided? What is the name of the Northern division? The Southern division? 40. What are these divisions called, and how do they compare with each other in size? 41. What other Grand Division has been added by late geographers, and of what is it composed? 42. What large island S. I. of Asia, and what is its comparative size? 43. What large extent of land near the S. Poles partly in the Eastern and partly in the Western Hemisphere, and when discovered. Which is the larger, the Eastern or Western Continent? Which grand division of the Eastern Continent extends farthest S. Which extends farthest E.? Which extends farther V., Europe or Africa? North America or South America? Which extends farther S., Africa or South America? Europe or Asia? North America or Europe? South America or Australia What grand division E. of Europe? South? West? What grand division W. of Africa? North? Northeast? In what direction from North America is South America? Europe? Asia? Africa? In what direction from Europe is Asia? Africa? North America? South America? OCEANS. 44. The great body of salt water on the globe is called the sea or ocean. 45. There are five oceans: viz. 1. the Northern or Arctic ocean; 2. the Southern or Antarctic; 3. the Atlantic; 4. the Pacific; 5. the Indian. 46. The Northern or Arctic Ocean lies N. of North America, Europe, and Asia. 47. The Southern or Antarctic Ocean lies S. of South America, Africa,,nd Australia. 4S. The Atlantic Ocean lies E. of North and South America, and WV. of Europe and Africa. 49. The Pacific Ocean lies E. of Asia, and IV. of North and South A merica. 50. The Indian Ocean lies S. of Asia, and between Africa and Australia. 51. The Pacific is the largest, the Atlantic is the second in extent, the Indian is the third, the Southern or Antarctic is the fourth, and the Northern or Arctic is the fifth. 1]2 KEY TO PELTO I'S OUTLINE XAPS. OCEANS. 1 3 These vast collections of salt waves, The Atlantic, second in extent, Old Neptune's blue domains, Here shows its wide expanse, Are oceans called, and sometimes seas; And thirdly comes the Indian sea, And five this earth contains. Distinguished at a glance. 2 4 The broad Pacific first we name, The Southern or Antarctic Sea, Uneqftili'd as to size, In magnitude ranks next, It from A-nerica (due west, And last the Arctic ocean comes, And east oi Asia lies. With icy isles perplexed. Questions.-44. What is the great body of salt water on the globe called? 45. How many Oceans are there, and what are they called? 46. Where does the Northern or Arctic Ocean ie? 47. The Southern or Antarctic? 48. The Atlantic? 49. The Pacific? 50. The Ind.an? Point out on the map the Northern Ocean. The Southern. The Atlantic. The Pacific. The Indian. 51.. Which is the largest Ocean? The second in extent? The third? The fourth? The fifth? MiOTIONS OF THE EARTH. 52. The diameter of the earth is the shortest distance through its centre, fra;m one side to the other. 53. The circzrmference of the earth is the greatest distance round it. 54. The earth is about 8,000 miles in diameter, and 25,000 in circumference. 55. The axis of the earth is an imaginary* straight line, passing through its centre from North to South. 56. The 1;oles of the earth are the two ends of its axis; one is called the iNorth Pole atinld tile other the South Pole. 57. The earth has two motions: It revolvest on its axis once every cay, causing day and night-and moves round the Sun once every year, causing, the succcssiont of the seasons, Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winiter. MOTIONS OF TKE EARTH. 1 4 Br earth's diameter we mean Earth's axis is a fancied line, The shortest distance through, That througrh the globe extends A fancied line from side to side, From North to South, the centre cuts, To touch the centre too. And at the poles it ends. 2 5 Now, through the centre of this sphere, Two different motions has the earth; The shortest distance take, One, on its axis made, Ei.rht thousand miles diameter, W hich brings the clorious liight of day, The measurement will make. And night's succeeding slhade. 3 6 pBT earth's circumference, we mean It has its motion round the sun, The greatest distance round; Whichl occupies a vear; Just five and twenty thousand miles, Spring, Surmer, Auturmn, tinter, hence That distance hias been found. Successively appear. O?:estioa-~52. WVhat is meant by the diameter of the earth? 5 t.!'B the circumference" 54. What is the diameter and circumference of the e e earh? 55. ie th! 53. What are the poles of the earth? 57. How many motions has the earth? * Imaginary, not real t Revolve, to ro ro round. Succession. follJowsng in order GEOGRAPIIICAL DEFINITIONS. 13 CIRCLES ON THE GLOBE. 59. THE EaUATJ-R is an imaginary circle, extending East and West round'he earth, at an equal distance from each Pole, and dividing it into.he Northern and Southern Hemispheres. 59. LATITUDE is distance from the Equator. 60. Nolvrt LATITUDE is distance North of the Equator. 61. SOUTIH LATITUDE is distance South of the Equator. 62.'PARALLELS OF LATITUDE are imaginary circles, extending East anfd West round the earth, parallel to the Equator. 63. Latitlude is reckoned in clegrees from the Equator to each Pole. At lhe Equator it is nothing; at the Poles it is 90 degrees, one-bourth of 36.0 degrees, the distance round the earth. 64. The Jigures along the sides of maps, and the edge of the H-emlispheres, express the number of degrees of latitude N. or S. of the Equator. 65. A degree is 60 geographical, or 69~ common or English miles; 60 seconds make one minute, and 60 minutes or niles, one degree. 66. MIEJIDIA-s are imaginary circles, extending North and South throutgh the Poles of the earth, and intersecting the Elquator a right angles. 67. LONGITUDE is distance East or West fiom any given meridian. It is marked in degrees on the Equator, or at the top and bottom of the mnap. 6S. E.,ST LONGITUDE is distance East of any given meridian. 693. WESTr LONGITUDE is distance West of any given meridian. Most nations reckon Longitude from the Capital of their own country. On the nM:ap of the World, or on the Hemispheres, Longitude is reckoned from the meridian of Greenwich near Lond,. 70. THIE TROPICS are two imagrinary circles drawvn round tne eart!, parallel to the Equator,-one 23 degrees and 2S minutes North of it, called the Tropic of Cancer; and the other, 2:3 degrees and 28 minutus South of it, called the 2Topic of Capricorn. NorT.-_Tronic signifies "to return." When the sun has reached one of the Tropics it returns t: the other. 71. THIE POLAR CIRCLES are two imaginary circles drawn round the earth, parallel to the Tropics,-one 23 degrees and 2S minutes from tlhe N. Pole, called the Arctic Circle; and the other, 23 degrees and 2S minutes from the S. Pole, called the Antarctic Circle. CIRCLES ON THE GLOBE. 1 3 The circles on the globe we name; Northern and Southern Iemirispheres, Imaginary things, Thus are their names express'd; From which the scientific mind, And the Equator takes its course Important uses brings. Precisely East and West. 2 4 The Equator is a fancied ring From either Pole its distance is Around the earthly ball, Undoubtedly the same;;ividingr it in equal parts, And distance from the Equator North, Which hemispheres we call. North I,atitude we name. 14 &EY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 5 10 8outn Latitude is distance South East longitude is distance East, Of that same fancied ring, As by the words express'd, And parallels of latitude West longitude we can't mistake, To range with it we bring. To mean the distance West. 6 11 Like the Equator, East and West, The Tropics are in number two, These parallels ge round, Circles of vast extent, And on the sides of all our maps, To the Equator parallel, The mark'd degrees are found. Round earth by fancy bent. 7 12 Meridians, ranging North and South, Tropic of Cancer North is placed; Are fancied circles too; We from the Equator rate They touch each Pole as they proceed, Its distance twenty-three degrees, And cut the Equator through. And minutes twenty-eight. 8 13 By longitude we understand T-opic of Capricorn due South The distance East or West From the Equator lies, From some meridian that we choose, Its distance just the same from it, Whichever we think best. In measurement precise. 9 14 Some people Washington will take, At the same distance from the Pole, And some will Greenwich choose, Each Polar Circle trace; And several other points there are The Arctic Circle on the North, Which different nations use. The Antarctic, South we place. Questions.-What is the Equator? 59. What is Latitude? 60. What is North Latitude? 61. What is South Latitude? 62. What are Parallels of Latitude? 63. How is Latitude reckoned? What is it at the Equator? At the Poles? 64. What do the figures along the Eides of maps and edge of the Hemispheres express? 65. What is a degree? How many seconds make a minute or mile? How many minutes or miles make a degree? 66. What are Meridians? 67. What is Longitude? flow is it marked? 68. What is L-ast Lcngitude? 69. What is West Longitude? From wihat place do most nations reckon,Lo.agitude? From what place is it reckoned on the N1ap of the WVorld, or on the Hemipieres? 70. What are the Tropics? 71. What are the Polar Circles? Point to Europe on the map. Is it in North or South Latitude? Why in North Latitude? Ans. Because it is North of the Equator. In what latitude is Australia? Why in South latitude? In what latitude is Asia? Why? In what latitude is North America? In what latitude is South America? An.,. Partly in N. and partly in S. latitude? In what latitude is Africa? Why? What parallel of latitude crosses the S. part of Africa? Ans. The parallel of 30~ S. latitude. The N. part? The S. part of Europe? The N. part of Asia? The middle of North America? The N. part? The S. part? In what longitude is Asia? Ans. In E. longitude. Why? Ans. Because it is E. of the first or principal meridian. In what longitude is N. and S. America? Ans. In W. longitude. Why? Ans. Because they are W. of the principal meridian. In what longitude is Australia? What meridian crosses the western part of Africa? Ans. The meridian of 109 W. longitude? What meridian crosses the Eastern part? Ans. The meridian of 50~ E. longitude. What meridian crosses the Eastern part of S. America? The Western part? The Eastern part of Australia? The Western part of N. America? What two hemispheres do both tropics cross? What two continents What grand divisions does the Tropic of Cancer crcoss? What two oceans does it cross? What grand divisions does the Tropic of Capri corn cross? What three oceans does it cross? What large island? What three grand divisions does the Arctic Circle cross? What ocean does it cross? What ocean does the Antarctic Circle cross? GEOGRAPHICAL DEFINIT1ONS. 15 ZONES..2. ZONES are divisions of the earth's surface, formed by the Tropics and Polar Circles. There arefive zones, viz:-one Torrid, two Tenmperate, and two Frigid. 73. THE TORRID ZONE is that part of the earth's surface, lying between the Tropics. This Zone is the hottest part of the earth's surface, because it is the most exposed to the heat of the sun. It has but two seasons, a wet winter and a dry summer. The vegetable productions are Oranges, Lemons, Pine-apples, Figs, Cocoa-nuts, Tea, Coffee, Sugar, Spices, Indigo, &c. The forests are clothed in perpetual verdure, and abound in birds of the most brilliant and beautiful plumage. The animals are the Elephant, Rhinoceros, Lion, Tiger, Leopard, Camel, Antelope, Crocodile, Lama, &c. Serpents and insects abound, many of which are extremely venomous. 74. THE TEMPERATE ZONES are those parts of the earth's surface, lying between the Tropics and Polar Circles. 75. THE NORTH TEMPERATE ZONE lies between the Tropic of Cancer and the Arctic Circle. 76. THE SOUTH TEMPERATE ZONE lies between the Tropic of Capricorn and Antarctic Circle. These Zones have four seasons,-Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter, and a temperate climate,-the most delightful in the world. The vegetable productions are Wheat, Corn, Rice, Cotton, and a variety of grains and fruits. The animals are the Horse, Ox, Sheep, Deer, Buffalo, Elk, Bear, Wolf, Panther, &. 77. THE FRIGID ZONES are those parts of the earth's surface, lying between the Polar Circles and the Poles. 78. THE NORTH FRIGID ZONE lies between the Arctic Circle and North Pole. 79. THE SOUTH FRIGID ZONE lies between the Antarctic Circle and South Pole. These Zones have two seasons,-a short summer, and a long, cold Winter. The days and nights near the poles are from four to six months long. Snow and ice cover the land and sea nearly the whole year. The vegetable productions consist of a few Shrubs, Berries, and a species of Moss. The animals are few and of the most hardy kind, consisting of the White Bear, Seal Musk Ox, Reindeer, &c. The inhabitants are few in number, of a dwarfish size, and swarthy complexion. ZONES. 1 2 Zones are divisions of the globe; North Temperate Zone embraces lands Two Zones we Frigid call, Where numerous blessings spring, One Torrid and two temperate; Tropic of Cancer this side bounds, Their number five in all. And that, the Arctic ring. 16 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. 3 4 South Temperate Zone its place beside The Frigid Zones between the Poles The Antarctic Circle takes, And Polar Circles lie; Tropic of Capricorn we see. The Tropics bound the Torrid Zone Its other boundary makes. Beneath a burning sky. Questions.-72. What are zones? How many zones are there, and what are they callea? 73. What is the Torrid Zone? Point it out on the map. How many degrees N. of the Equator does it extend? How many S.? Why is the Torrid Zone the hottest part of the earth? What part of N. America lies in this zone? Ans. The southern extremity. What part of S. America? Ans. The N. part. What grand division is almost wholly in this zone What part of Asia? What part of Australia? 74. What are the Temperate Zones? 75. Where is the N. Temperate Zone? 76. Where is the S. Temperate Zone? Point out the N. Temperate Zone on the map. The S. Tempeiate. What three grand divisions lie almost wholly in the N. Temperate Zone? What part ot S. America is in the S. Temperate Zone? What part of Africa? What part of Australia?,7 What are the Frigid Zones? 78. Where is the N. Frigid Zone? 79. Where is the S. Frigid Zone? Point out the N. Frigid Zone. The S. Frigid Zone. What part of N. America is in the N. Frigid Zone? What part of Europe? What part of Asia? What ocean in the N. Frigid Zone? What ocean in the S. Frigid? RACES OF MEN. 1. The human family consists of several varieties, differing from each other iil color, form, and features. 2. They derive their names from the grand divisions of the earth, which they chiefly inhabit, and are divided into five classes, viz: 1. The European or Caucasian race; 2. The Asiatic or Mongolian race; 3. The American or Indian race; 4. The African or Negro race; 5. The Oceanic or Malay race. 3. The Europeans are white; the Asiatics, olive yellow; the American Indians, red, or copper-colored; the Africans, black; and the Malays, dark brown. Questions.-1. Of what does the human family consist? 2. From what do they derive their names, and how divided? 3. What is the color of each race? STATE OF SOCIETY. 1. The nations of the earth may be divided, with respect to their social state, into five classes, viz: Savage, Barbarous, Half Civilized, Civilized, and Enlightened. 2. In the savage state, men subsist mostly by hunting, fishing, and on the spontaneous productions of the earth; live in the open air, or in rude huts, and can neither read nor write. 3. In the barbarous state, men derive their subsistence chiefly from pasturage and rude agriculture; live in tents, and wander from place to place with their flocks and herds. 4. In the half-civilized state, men understand agriculture and many of the arts, and have some books and learning, with established laws and religion. 5. In the cicilized state, men are acquainted with the arts and sciences, and derive their subsistence from agriculture, manufactures, and commerce. 6. In the enlightened state, men have carried the arts and sciences to the greatest perfection, and are distinguished for their industry, intelligence, and enterprise. Qulestiols.-1. How may the nations of the earth be divided with respect to their social state? 2. How do men subsist in the savage state? 3. In the barbarous state? 4. Describe tie half civilized state. 5. The civilized state. 6. The enlightened state. GB10ORAPHICAL DEFINITIONS. 1 POLITICAL DIVISIONS. 1 An empire is composed of several countries ruled by one man, called an emperor. 2. A kingdom is a country governed by a king or queen. 3. A republ1ic is a country in which the power is im the hands of persons electedl by the people. 4-. I'rncipalities, duchies, grand duchies,,-c., are monarchies cf small extent, governed by princes, dukes, grand dukes, &c. 5. An abs.olutle monarchy is a government in which a single person rules accordin' to his own will, and is styled monarch, sovereign, autocrat, emperor or kin. 6. A limited monarchy is a government whose laws limit the power of the monarch or sovereign. 7. A republic is a government whose rulers are chosen by the people. S. Savage and barbarous nations are usually governed by indlfep)ndenf Chiefs. 9. A ciceroy is a person appointed by a king or sovereign to rule over a remote part of his dominions. Questions. —1. Of what is an empire composed? 2. What is a kingdom? 3. What is a republic? 4. lViat are principalit:es, duchies, grand duchies, &c.? 5. \What is an absolute nlmiarclh? 6. A limited monarchy? 7. A republic? 8. lIow are savage and barbaroue nations usually governed? 9. What is a viceroy? RELIGION. 1. The prevailing religions of the world, are the Christian, Mohammedan, Pagan, and Jewish. 2. C'ristians are those who believe in Christ as the Saviour of the world. There are three great divisions of Christians, Prottllntls, IRomaln C.'athlic., and the Greek/ C'h/irch; distinguished from each other by peculiar doctrines and modes of worship. 3. 3Ioh/ammedans believe in Mohammed, an impostor of Arabia, who lived about 600 years after Christ, and pretended to be inspired. 4.'Pat ans or Heathen are those who believe in false gods, and worship idols 5. Tile Jews are those who believe in the Old Testament, but reject the New, and expect a Saviour yet to come. Questions.-1. What are the prevailing religions of the world? 2. Who are Christians? 3. in whom do Mohammedans believe? 4. Who are Pagans or I1cedio e? 5. Who are the eW6s? AMERICA. 1. AMERICA, or the Western Continent, was discovered in 1492, by Christopher Columbus, a native of Genoa, in Italy. After its discovery, the Europeans called it the New World. 2. The people who inhabited America at the time of its discovery were called Indians, because Columbus supposed that the country he had discovered was India. 3. It is more than 9000 miles long, and is divided into North and South America, which are connected together by the Isthmus of Panama', or Darien. Queetion,.-When and by whom was America discovered? By what other name is it called? 2. What name did Columbus give to the natives? 3. What is the length of Amexica, and how is it divided? NORTH AMERICA. Square miles, 8,000,000.-Population 38,500,000.-Population to sq. m. 5. North America comprises the northern division of the Western ContiuCnt. It is noted for the largest lakes of fresh water in the world, and for the number and size of its rivers, and its extended ranges of mountains. Questiots.-What does North America comprise? For what is it noted? What ocean bounds it on the N.? Ac. What ocean on the E.? Ac. What ocean on the W. and S. W.? Pc. In what latitude is it? What part is crossed by the Tropic of Cancer? By the Arctic Circle? In what zone is the greater part of it? N. Te. The S. part? Td. The N. part? Fd. NORTH AMERICA. AIR-Hail! Columbia. 1. 2. Land of Freedom! now we come MIany a lovely Isle is thine; T1) the cherii-h'd scenes of home! See thy glorious liters shine; LanId 1 Frlee loIn, hail to thee! Every scene is bright and fair, La.nd of Freelonm, hail to thee! Every scene is bright and fair, With the patriot's pride we turn Now delighted let us gaze All thiv wn-ders to discern. On thy noble Gulfs and Bays, LuJ! ialfl-it icently grand, On thy Channels, Straits, and Souncda N3o)untains rise and Lakes expand. And thy mighty Ocean bounds. Nature's b)eauties, everywhere, To thy clime indulgent heaven Deck thy scenery rich and rare; Has unnumbered blessings given; But nobler charms belong to thee. But nobler gifts belong to thee, Knowledge, Peace, and Liberty; Knowledge, Peace, and Liberty; Pride and glory of the West,- Pride and glory of the West,Land of Freedom, ever bless'd. Land of Freedom, ever bless'd DIRECTIONS TO THE TEACHER. 1. The Map in use. or. if csnvenient, all the Maps should be suspended before the Class. ~. The Class should be provided with two or more pointers, five or six feet in length. 3. The Teacher should point out on the Map, and name distinctly the first Example given to M, chanted. The Class should then repeat this several times in concert with the Teacher so as to acquire a correct pronunciation of each Geographical Name. 4. The Teacher should chant this example according to the directions given, and then require the Class to chant it with him until they are familiar with the Location and Shape of the Objects named in the Chant, and represented on the 3Iap. The following Example should be pointed out, repeated and chanted in a similar manner; and as each succeeding Example is learned, the Class should review several of the preceding ones, chanting them back and forth. When a chant comprises three Geogra. phical Names, they, also, should be chanted back andforth.. After the Political Divisions, or Islands of North America, for example, have been recited in the 18 NORTH AMERICA. 19 manner described, two or more of the Class should point them out on the Map, and the others snoua chant them. and sing the verse in connection with the chant, to deepen the impression and add interest to the exercise. The Teacher should ask the Questions in the Key, following each exercise. 6. After the Class are ramiliar with two or more Maps, the Teacher should point out Objects on them prorrrscunouly, sometires requiring the Class to chant the Objects pointed out, and sometimes to repeat them in concert. 7. When the Teacher has not time to point out the Objects to be recited, the Class can first learn their Locati.i and Shape from the Map by the aid of the Key, and then recite them as directecl. 8. Teachers who have no knowledge of Music as a science, can learn the Chants in a few minutes by the aid of some friend who understands Music. In nearly every school there are pupils who can eing, afd who will feel complimented in being called upon by the Teacher to take the lead of the Class, in chanting and in sin-ing the verse. 9. By following the Directions in the Key, Teachers can prepare themselves to teach this system without previ(iusly taking a course of lessons. EXPLANATION OF THE CHANTS.-Either of the following Chants is designed to be used in chanting the Political Divisions with their Capitals, also the Oceans, Seas, Bays, Gulfs, Straits, Lakes, &c., which are arrangre, in the Kiey with special reference to this purpose. A line thus - shows the extent of each Chant, and separates it from the succeeding one. See line under British America, New South Wales, &c. The first Example given to be chanted is, " United States, the capital is Washington," arranged ander the first Chant. The second Example is, " Arctic lIilghlands, Mount Ilecla, Alleghany Mountains," arranged under the second Chant. Each Example should be chanted twice in succession. Use the choice notes" ulternately in the first Chant. I'he Te:acher should require the Class to learn these Chants thorouighly and then they will be able to s'bnt every Example given in the Key. _u_ ________ ________ _____________ 1 (Repea'. U ~ ni - ted States, the cap-i tal is Wash-ing-ton. uI.F _ Arczic l:alads Arctic Highlands, ouiU I A naecla, | Alleghany Mountains. A c Hihlan, i Alleghany ounta. nlount fle~cla Alount Heclab POLITICAL DIVISIONS. Greenland,*... 13, 14, 31. Nova Scotiat the ca- M NrcenlSov-a Seotia,-f thle ca-} 55 M. Russian America,. 20, 21. pital is Halifax. British America.* 2 26; 43) United States, the ca- 50, 5, 54 ____47. pital is Washing,- New B Lin,... 22,43, 47. ton.~__ 62 64, 65. INew North WAales, Iexico, the capital is}t New South Walles. e ico. i; Ea~st IMain, included Yucatan, the capital is 78 S. W., in Labir-ador. Merida.... 89 N. E. Canadat, Toronto-t 13 N 54 Central Amierica,O the 90 1. S. and Quebec + t3 N 54. capital, San Salva-, WV. dor..... Newi Brunswick, - ali the ) 90., bcapital is Frederick- 55 N.. f. lze, te cpital tween Yuca ton.'' tan & C. A. NOTE.-British America embraces the vast country of New Britain, the provinces of Canada, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, &c. New Britain embraces all British America north of the United States and Canada. It includes New North Wales and New South Wales, undefined tracts of land, lying along the north-west and south-west coasts of Iudson's Bay. It also includes East Main, lying along the east coast of Hudson's Bay, together with Labrador, which comprises the territory lying between Itudion's Bay and the Atlantic. The Lnited States, extending from the Atlantic to the Pacific, embrace all the territory betweer British America, and Mexico, and the Gulf of Mexico (77, 78). * See explanation of the Key as applied to the Maps, page 6. t These Divisions are defined on the 5Map by dots and deeper shades of color. I The Capitals of countries are surrounded by dots. NWashington (66 N. W.), in the District of Columbia, lying on the east bank of the Potomac, 1 t3 eat of the general government of the United States. i Or Guatemala-;-jwah-tay-mah'-lah. 20 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. POLITICAL DIVISIONS. AB.-Bonny Doon. 1. 3. Let North America be first New Britain, New North Wales we In our descriptive rhyme rehearsed; name, [claim; Its northern bound the Arctic waves, And New South Wales shall notion Its east th' Atlantic Ocean laves. And next East Main we may explore, The Gulf of Mexico we see Then the bleak coast of Labrador. Upon its southern boundary; To Canada we now repair, Its western and south-western sides Toronto and Quebec rule there; Are washed by the Pacific tides. New Brunswick next in order trace, And Frederickton is its chief place. 2.'We shall proceed to tell you how 4. This region is divided now; To Nova Scotia next repair, First Greenland comes, and that, we And IIalifax is regent there; fear, These lands to foreign rule are bound, A cold beginning will appear. But freedom's home shall next be found. Russian America we note, In the United States we find In northern regions far remote; The rule to Washington assign'd; British America behold, Let Mexico attention claim, A climate comfortless and cold. Which gives its capital its name. 5. To Yucatan we make our way, Where Merida maintains the sway; Central America explore, Its capital San Salvador. And, all these rapid movements past, To the Balize we come at last, Whose capital the natives please To give the title of Balize. QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES ON THE MAP. Which is the most north-eastern division of North America? Gd. To what country does it belong? Ans. To Denmark. Which is the most north-western division? R. Aa. To what country does it belong? Ans. To Russia. Which are the two largest divisions of North America? B. Aa., U. S. To what empire does British America belong? Ans. To the British empire. What division in the S. W., bordering on the United States? Mo. What division on the N. E. of the southern part of Mexico? Yn. What division on the S. E. of Mexico? Ga. This is also called " Central America." What small division on the E. of the southern part of Mexico? Be. What three divisions border on the Arctic Ocean? Gd., B. Aa., R. Aa. What \hree on the Atlantic? Gd., B. Aa., U. S. What five on the Pacific? R. Aa., B. Aa., U. S., Mo., Ga. What two extend from the Atlantic to the Pacific? B. Aa., U. S. In what zone is the greater part of Greenland? Fd. In what zone is the greater part of British and Russian America? AnM. In the northern part of the North Temperate Zone. In what zone are the United States? N. Te. In what zone is the northern part of Mexico? N. Te. The southern part? Td. In what zone is Yucatan? Td. Central America? Tid Walize? Td. What are the capitals of Canada? To., Qc. What is the capital of New Brunswickt Fn. Nova Scotia? xII. United States? Wn. Mexico? Mo. Yucatan? Ma. Central America? S. Sr. Balize? Be. NORTH AMERICA. 21 OCEANS, SEAS) GULFS, BAYS, STRAITS, CHANNELS, AND SOUNDS. Atlantic Ocean 8000 E. of North Bay of Fundy,.. 5 1* & 3000 wt and South 54 S. & S. m. 0. America. Long Island Sound, of Con. Pacific Ocean,11,000 of orth Delaware Ba, 66 N. bet, 0 and South N. J. & Del. ~1Amnerica. Chesapeake Bay,. Arctic Ocean,. Arctic Ocean,. of NorthC h EpartofVa. Plr__________ ) oAmerica. Gulf Streamll from 3 79 N. 1W1., Polar Sea... 4S., 6S. to 5 miles per hour, 67 N. Barrow's Strait,.. 8 M., 9 IM. Baffin's Bay, 050 m. 10MI.,11 I. Caribb6an**Sea, 1600 91 2. in w. 30 N.. in.... Lancaster Sound,..9 E., 10 W. Gulf of Mexico, 1000 Smith's Sound,.. 10 N. m. i. & 800 w. 77, 8 Melville Bay,... 12 MI. Nortl-Eas Bay,.. 13 S. W. Bay of Campeachy,. 77 S., 89 N. South-East Bay,.. 31 N. W. Channel of Yucatan, 78 S. Davis' Strait,.. 30 I. & W. Bay of Honduras,. 90N N.NW. ~'~ ^ ~, p ^ Amatique' Bay,.. 90 W. Cumberland Strait,. 29 I. & W... Bay of Guatemala,. 90 S. E Frob'isher's Strait, 2f net lS G. of Tehuantepec,tt 89 I. hudson's Strait,. l._' udsons Strait, in order. Gulf of California, 5 E. &. Iudson's Bay, 1200 27 S. 45 N. 700 m. in 1. in. 1. & 600 -w. Francisco Bay,.. 1 N. E. Fox Channel,... 27 E. Str. of Juan de Fuca, 49 N. E. Welcome Strait,.. 27 N. W. Gulf of Georgia,..41 S. Chesterfield Inlet,. 26 S. of 3I. James' Bay,... 45 S. E. Q. Charlotte's Sound, 41 S. W Richmond Gulf,. 46 W. Washington's Sound, 40 bI. S. E. Iusquito Ba,.. 28 S.'. PrinceWilliam's Sound, 39 N., 21 S. Ungaa B^ay,.. 47 N. W~. Cook's Inlet,... 20 S. E. Strait of Bellisle,.. 48 S. W. Bristol Bay,. 3 N. 35 N. W. Gulf of St. Lawrence, 55N.&N.E. Norton's Sound, 19 55, between T Str.. iNova Scotia Behring's Strait,.. 18E.,19W Northumberland Str. Q. and Pr. Ed- Coronation Gulf,.. 24 N. ward's I. Bathurst Inlet. 24 N. E., 5.7, between Bathurst Inlet.. N55, between __________ theN.E.part Gulf of oothia 26 N., Strait of Canso,. of Nova Sco- 27 N. W. tia, and Cape iRegent's Inlet,. 8E., 9 W. Breton I.~ Winter Harbor,.. 6 I. * m. I.. miles long. f w., wide. m. in w. mfles in wkitb. See Prince Edward's and Cape Breton Islands, p. 2.5. The Gulf Stream flows from 3 to 5 miles per hour.,ng-gah'-va car-ib-be-an. *t Ta-wan-ta-pek'. 22 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. OCEANS, SEAS, GULFS, BAYS, STRAITS, CHANNELS, AND SOUN N'. AIR-Bonny Doon.a 1. 9. We now recite what Oceans, Bays, To Bay of Delaware we speed, Seas, Gulfs, and Straits, this land dis- And then to Chesapeake proceed, With the Atlantic Sea begin, [plays; To Gulf Stream, Caribbean Sea, That hems the Eastern border in. And Gulf of Mexico we flee. 2. 10. Pacific Ocean takes its post Campeachv Bay shall next be tracer Upon the West and South-west coast; On which old Vera Cruz is placed The Arctic Ocean will be found Channel of Yucatan survey, Extended on the Northern bound. And scan awhile Hlonduras Bay. *0~~~~ ^~~~~11 The Polar Sea we next survey, Ba Amatique befre us, Then Barrow's Strait and Bafin's Bay; And Guatemala Bay likwise; In this same Bay two Sounds appear, G o T e Whose names are Smith's and Lan- Gulf of Calirni too 1And Gulf of CaliforniaL too. caster. 4. 12. To Melville Bay we next shall turn, Francisco Bay we now descry, And North-East Bay's position learn; Jun de Fuca's Strait we sil; Note South-East Bay, then Davis' o Geori's Gulf in finc- Iund, Strait. And pause awhile at Clharlutte's Sound. Which West of Greenland we locate. 13. 5. And now the muse delighted runs Cumberland Strait we now may view, To seek the Sound called WashingFrob'isher's Strait and Hudson's too; ton's See Ilulson's Bay (in size'tis great), Prince William's Soundl is in our way, Fox Channel mark and Welcome Strait. Couk's Inlet too, and LBristol Bay. 6. 14. rhy Inlet, Chesterfield, we spy, Pass farther Xorth, en Russian ground, And James' Bay next attracts the eye; To take a glance at Norton's Sound; [lere Richmond Gulf we find, and there To Behring's Strait Awe next shall post Mlusuito Ba- (a small affair). Fast by the Asiatic coast. Vn-ava Bay we note awhile, 1 IV.n a.B e rie hile, To Coronation Gulf we sail,'hen seek tlitv narrow strait, Bellisle; A fel the rctic's icy gil * i *1 /"'M - T ~* And it'ol the Arctic s icy g~,le; A-while at (Gulf St. Lawrence wait, a Fhon -N othunb.rad'thy To Bathnurst Inlet nest wve,,_~, St rait. orthum erlan Where oft the Polar templests blow. Strait. 8. 1A. lthe Strait of Canso, small in size, A little farther go to greet Nortil-east of Nova Sc,tia lies; The (Gulf f Bcotlhia's col retreat; fie BItv of Flundl v next is found, To Regent's Inlent tihei w e skip, &nd then we seei Long, Island Sound. And T inter Ilarbur ends oc!r trip. Que.stio, s. —0What is an Ocean? See Definition 17.-Describe tlhe Atlantic Occan.b Ans. [t is one of the largest bodies of water on the globe, lying between N. and S..America, and a Or. " The WindiiL W'aav. &c. b'K.:xITI:s.Scam,(t I til ti,-,,l,-r'ive the Importance of the answers to all qluost;tin cn the Maps. and the autllicr wovuli respcctfullvy s-iest tle necessity of thiir re'juirin thieir pllcils tt, bei-,ci t-im flilia witli tht-in. ai, by lookinu on the mi.p, tLey will be able, with a little practice, to give them with ease anit facilitv. Thle':n:,were. iven to the questions on this and the succeediinr pares. are (sin-imd t)o,idl the pupil* in llaswlc ril!-r the remainiirl.' iiuilar (luestiOns in thle Ke —; ianl'after they (cn r,: iiilv I (i!it out ths vari,,ills lIc-ttitie's n th- mnai's. th re is no exercise. the authlir lelit-ves. nicore,r-fi::iiltl..:le'. no wa.y in 1iich theit- l)ctiiities cain }.e molere cirrcctly iand p)ersincs,, til inrlres'sed ulon tle:cii. tliau by re(uiDhir the iu,'ils to anlswer the qlle-tions correctly. ace'orriuc to tie frnm ris ive inl tlic I yv. After tle pui'is },eil f;tllii; ar wtitli the firmns.ivein, whichl should be retiuirc di(l f!iem. and can reaclils''cIi c1r the lte-tionl lc thi allci a fliw of the eucciete linnr paes.l]-e tlle tc:t iiic, r cr ill lc ive that tL}i, Wiil l-ii- thle answers t tthe rellmaniinin quIesti',,i in the K\ey wsith'eae rInd fiacility, atnd, by repeatint theiii a fe," tines, will; 1 t c ive to helm winiithout tlhe aid if the mats. Let tlle Tl' lher, r one of thi class. first rzivu tihe lanswer to eti(ch,tiquestilon. anl then lt the class repeat It twvice s. Iwlv cld clistinctlv in concert. with cr without the Tealcher. Two of tli class in the mniantimte shlull dilict ont out on tlie imap e:li oljeit to te les-criell,. as soon as the ijuestiuu is asked by the T'eacher- tracing the cvurjso,,f l.ivers, direcetin of Mouutains, &.C NORTH AMERICA. 23 Europe and Africa, and is about 3000 miles wide and 8000 long from the Northern to the Southern Ocean. Describe the Pacific Ocean. Ans. It is the largest body of water on the globe, extending from Behring's Strait, which connects it with the Arctic Ocean, about 7000 miles to the limits of the Southern Ocean, and from America to Asia, about 11,000 miles, or nearly half round the globe. It contains numerous groups of islands lying chiefly between the Tropics. Describe the Arctic Ocean. Ans. It is one of the largest bodies of water on the globe, lying North of North America, Europe, and Asia, around the North Pole, and contains numerous islands. What is a Sea? See Definition 18.-Where is the Polar Sea? Ans. It borders on the North of the Western part of British America, and is a part of the Arctic.Ocean. —What s a Strait? See Definition 21.-Where is Barrow's Strait? Ans. It separates the most Northern part of B. America from the most Eastern of the North Georgian Islands,a and connects the Polar Sea with Baffin's Bay. What is a Gulf or Bay? See Definition 20.-Where is Baffin's Bay? Ans. It is between the North-eastern part of B. America or Prince William's Land,b and the Western part of Greenland-is a part of the Arctic Ocean-and 350 miles wide. What is a Sound? See Definition 23.-Where is Lancaster Sound? Ans. It is between the Northern part of Prince William's Land, and the most Eastern of the North Georgian Islands, and is a part of Baffin's Bay.-Smith's Sound? Ans. It is between the most Western part of Greenland and the most Eastern of the North Georgian Islands, and is a part of Baffin's Bay.-Melville Bay? Ans. It is in the Northwestern part of Greenland, and is a part of Baffin's Bay.-North-East Bay? Ans. It is in the Western part of Greenland, and is a part of Baffin's Bay.-South-East Bay? Ans. It is in the Western part of Greenland, and is a part of Baffin's Bay. Where is Davis' Strait? Ans. It separates the Southwestern part of Greenland from the Southeastern part of Prince William's Land, and connects Baffin's Bay with the Atlantic Ocean.-Cumberland Strait, Frobisher's Strait, and Hudson's Strait? Ans. They are between the Southern part of Prince William's Land, and the Northern part of East Main x.ad Labrador, and connect Hudson's Bay with the Atlantic Ocean.-Hudson's Bay? Ans. It is in the Eastern interior of British America, and is 1200 miles long and 600 wide. What is a Channel? See Definition 22.-Where is Fox Channel? Ans. It is between the Southwestern part of Prince William's Land and the Eastern part of Southampton Islandc and the Peninsula of Melville, and is a part of Hudson's Bay.-Welcome Strait? Ans. It separates the Western part of Southampton Island from British America, and is a part of Hudson's Bay. —Chesterfield Inlet?. Ans. It is in New North Wales, and is a part of Hudson's Bay.-James' Bay? Ans. It is between the eastern part of New South Wales and the Western part of East Main, and is a part of Hudson's Bay.-Richmond Gulf? Ans. It is in the Western part of East Main, and is a part of Hudson's Bay. Where is Musquito Bay? Ans. In the Northwestern part of East Main, and is a part of Hudson's Bay.-Ungava Bay? Ans. It is in the Northern part of Labrador, and is part of the Atlantic Ocean.-Strait of Bellisle? Ans. It separates the Southeastern part of Labrador from the Island of Newfoundland,d and connects the Gulf of St. Lawrence with the Atlantic Ocean. Where is the Gulf of St. Lawrence? Ans. It borders on the Southern part of Labrador, the Eastern part of Canada and New Brunswick, the Northeastern part of Nova Scotia, and the Western part of Newfoundland, and is a part of the Atlantic Ocean.-Northumbers land Strait? Ans. It separates Prince. Edward's Island from New Brunswick and Nova Scotia, and connects different parts of the Gulf of St. Lawrence.-Strait of Canso? Ans. It separates Cape Breton Island from Nova Scotia, and connects the Gulf of St. Lawrence with the Atlantic Ocean. Where is the Bay of Fundy? Ans. It is between Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, and a North Georgian Islands, 6, 7, 8, 9. See Map. b Pr'.ce William's Land forms the N. E. part of British America 7 27 M. bee Map. S 56 N.., 57 N. W. See Map. 24 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. is a part of the Atlantic Ocean.-Long Island Sound? Ans. It lies between the State of Connecticuta and Long Island, and is a part of the Atlantic Ocean.-Delaware Bay? AnA at is between the Eastern part of Delaware and the Southern part of New Jersey, is a part of the Atlantic Ocean, and 65 miles long.-Chesapeake Bay? Ans. It is in the Eastern part of Maryland and Virginia, is a part of the Atlantic Ocean, and 200 miles long.-G-ulf Stream? Ans. It is a remarkable current in the Atlantic Ocean, flowing from the Gulf of Mexico along the East coast of the United States from Florida to Newfoundland, at the rate of five miles an hour where it is narrowest, diminishing in rapidity as it flows North. Where is the Caribbean Sea? Ana. It borders on the Eastern part of Yucatan, Balize, and Guatemala, and on the Northern part of South America, having the West India Islands on the North and East, and is 1600 miles long.-Gulf of Mexico? Ans. It borders on the Southern part of the United States, the Eastern part of Mexico, the Northern part of Yucatan, and is 1000 miles long and 800 wide.-Bay of Campeachy? Ans. It lies between the Southeastern part of Mexico and the Western part of Yucatan, and is a part of the Gulf of Mexico. Where is the Channel of Yucatan? Ans. It separates the Northeastern part of Yucatan from the Western part of the Island of Cuba,b and connects the Gulf of Mexico with the Caribbean Sea.-Bay of Honduras? Ans. It is between the Northern part of Guatemala and the Eastern part of Yucatan, and is a part of the Caribbean Sea.-Amatique Bay? Ans. It is between the Southern part of Balize, and the Northern part of Guatemala, and is a part of the Bay of Honduras.-Bay of Guatemala? Ana. It is in the Eastern part of Guatemala, and is a part of the Caribbean Sea. Where is the Gulf of Tehuantepec? Ans. It is in the Southeastern part of Mexico, and is a part of the Pacific Ocean.-Gulf of California?c Ans. It is in the -, is a part of, and miles long.-Francisco Bay? Ans. It is in -, and is a part of. —Strait of Juan de Fuca? An. It separates the Southeastern part of Vancouver's Islandd from the Northwestern part of Washington Territory, and connects the Gulf of Georgia with the Pacific Ocean.-Gulf of Georgia? Ans. It is between - and Vancouver's Island, and is a part of-. Where is Queen Charlotte's'Sound? Ans. It is between the Northwestern part of Vancouver's Island and British America, and is a part of the Pacific Ocean. —Washington's Sound? Ans. It is between - and Queen Charlotte's Island, and is a part of.Prince William's Sound? Ana. It is in the Southern part of -, and is a part of-. -Cook's Inlet? Ans. It is in the, and is a part of. —Bristol Bay? Norton's Sound? Behring's Strait? Ans. It separates - from the Northeast part of Asia, and connects - with the —.-Coronation Gulf? Bathurst Inlet? Gulf of Boothia? Regent's Inlet? Winter Harbor? Ans. It is in the Southern part [of Melville Island, and is noted for the winter residence of Captain Parry and his crew, whence it received the name of " Parry's Winter Harbor." a See Map of the United States. b 71 S. See Map. c Answers to the preceding questions have been given as examples to aid in answering the remaining similar questions in the Key. A form for answering a question to a Gulf or Bay, which, with slight variations, will be found applicable in all cases. Question. - Bay? Ans. It is in (or between) -, is a part of -, and - miles long, and - wide. A form for answering a question to a Strait. Question. - Strait? Ans. It separates -- from and connects - with - (and is - miles wide). Examples and forms for answering questions to Islands, Capes, Lakes, Rivers, &c., will also be given. d Vancouver's Island, 50 N. W. NORTH AMERICA. 25 PENINSULAS. Alaska,... 37 E., 38 W. Florida,.. 78 N. E. Melville,. 27 N. Yucatan,.. 78 S.W., 90N.W. Nova Scotia. 55 M. California,.. 75 N. & E. PENINSULAS. AMR-Auld Lang Syne. i. 2. Now the Peninsulas we sing, In Southern regions, Florida, Alaska leads the rhyme; With Yucatan we meet; Then Melville, Nova Scotia come, And California follows next, All in the Northern clime. To make the list complete. Questions.-What is a Peninsula? See Definition 8.-Where is the Peninsula of Alaska? Aus. It is the Southwestern part of Russian America, extending into the Pacific Ocean. Melville? Ans. A Northeastern part of British America, between Hudson's Bay and the Gulf of Boothia.-Nova Scotia? Florida? Yucatan? California? ISLANDS. North Georgian Is.,. 6, 7, 8, 9. Bahama lands 79 W., M., Iceland,33 E. Bahama slnds, & S E Disco Island... 30 N. E. Greater Antilles9 S. W., 91 ________-___ G reater Antilles' N& N. E. Prince William's Land, 9 S., 28, 29. Lesser Antilles.c. 92 E. & S. Southampton Island, 27 M.' Newfoundland,. 56 N. ua t tala 79 S. W Havana.... Newfoundland, the ca- Jamaica, the capital 91 N. W pital is St. John's. is Spanish Town. Anticosti Island,.. 55 N. E. Hayti, the capital is 91 N. E Cape Breton Island,. 55 E. Port au Prince. )able Islan 55, & S. of Porto Rico, the capi-92 N. Sable Island, j. Breton I. tal is St. Johns. Prince Edward's Is- 55 & W. of ibo Island 103 N. E' land, the capital is Cape Breton Revllagigedo,. 87N. E. Charlotte Town. Island. San Francisco, 7 N. E. Nantucket Island,. 54 S. E. Tiburon' Island,. } S. } 54S. E. & Martha's Vineyard, W. of Nan- St.nes Island,. 62S. tucket I. ) 62 S. at the, Long Island.. 54 S. Ignacio Island, head of Gulf'~ ~~~ ~'. ~: of California, Azores,.... 69 N. W. Vancouver's Island. 49 N. Cape Verd Islands,. 94. Queen Charlotte's I. 40 S. E. Bermuda Islands.. 67. Sitka Island,... 40 N. N. W. West India Islands, Kodiac Island,.. 38 M. comprising three 79, 91, 92. Aleutian Islands,.. 35, 36, 37. divisions... ) Nun'nivack Island.. 19 S. W. a North Georgian Is. comprise Melville (6 M.), Bank's Land, Sabine, Byam Martin, Bathurst, and' Cornwallis. b The West India Islands comprise three divisions, the Bahama Islands, the Greater Antilles, and thg Leaser Antilles. The Bahamas embrace a large group of arid, rocky islets, extending about 700 miles from northwest to southeast, but only a few are inhabited. The Greater Antilles comprise four islands, Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti, and Porto Rico. The Lesser Antilles embrace all the Caribbean group (east of the Caribbean Sea), and those along ths northern coast of South America. c An-teel' d Hay'-te. e Ke'-bo. /fRBy-Tveel-yah-he-hha^y'd 4 26 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. ISLANDS. AIm-Aud La Syne, 1. 8. The Islands let us now repeat; Now, o'er the Ocean let us speed North Georgian Isles come first, To the Bermuda Isles, Arising from the Polar Seas, A clime superlatively bless'd, Where Arctic storms are nurs'd. Where spring perpetual smiles. 2. 9. Melville, Bank'sLand, and Sabine Isles, The numerous Isles,West Indies called, Are to this group assigned; In three divisions trace; There Byam Martin, Bathurst Isles, Bahamas first, then Great Antilles, Cornwallis too we find. Then Lesser Antilles place. 3. 10. Iceland in Northern Seas behold, On Cuba's more extensive grounds Then Disco Isle survey; [too. We presently appear; Prince William's Land, Southampton Then to Jamaica, farther South, The last in Hudson's Bay. And Hayti's Isle we steer. 4. 11. And next we come to Newfoundland, Here Porto Rico may be seen, Then Anticosti trace; There Quibo Island lies, Adjacent to St. Lawrence Gulf But Revillagigedo see Cape Breton Isle we place. More westerly arise. 5. 12. South of Cape Breton as we go, Then in the Californian Gulf, See Sable Isle arise; See San Francisco set; But in St. Lawrence Gulf enclosed, St. Ines there and Tiburon, Prince Edward's Island lies. Are with Ignacio met. 6. 13. Then southward as our course inclines, Vancouver's and Queen Charlotte's Nantucket Isle is seen, Are seen'midst ocean's foam, [Isles And Martha's Vineyard, west of that Both wild uncultivated tracts, Arrayed in brightest green. Where savage nations roam. 7. 14. Long Island of superior size, Still farther North is Sitka Isle Now rises to our view; And Kodiac's frozen ground; To Azores next and Cape Verd Isles And lastly shall Aleutian Isles Our journey we pursue. And Nunnivack be found. Questions.-What is an Island?a See Definition 7.-Where are the North Georgian Islands, viz., Melville, Bank's Land, Sabine, Byam Martin, Bathurst, and Cornwallis? Ans. They are in the Arctic Ocean, North of British America. Iceland? Ans. It is in -, S. E. of —. Disco Island? Ans. It is in -, W. of -. Prince William's Land? Ans. It is surrounded oy the waters of-, and forms the N. E. part of British America.-Southampton I.? Where is Newfoundland?a Ans. It is in —, S. E. of —. Anticosti I.? Cape Breton I.? Sable I.? Prince Edward's I.? Nantucket I.? Martha's Vineyard? Long I.? Azores Is.? Cape Verde Is.? Bermuda Is.? West India Is.? Ans. They are a large group of islands in the Atlantic Ocean and Caribbean Sea, lying between N. and S. America.-Bahama Islands? Ans. They are a group in -, S. E. of the Peninsu.a of Florida.-Cuba? Jamaica? Hayti? Porto Rico? Lesser Antilles? Quibo is.? Revillagigedo Isles? San Francisco I.? Tiburon I.? St. Ines.? Ignacio I.? Vancouver's I.? Queen Charlotte's I.? Sitka I.? Kodiak I.? Aleutian Is.? Nunnivack L? a In giving an arswer to an Island, firs tell what body of water it i in, and then what direction from the nearest larger body of land. NORTH AMERICA. 27 CAPES. Cape Brewster,.. 33 N. W. Cape Gracias a Dios/ 90 M. ) 33,theN.W. Cape Corrientes,.. 76 S. E. North Cape,.. - point of Ice- Cape St. Lucas.. 75 S. E. Cape Farewell.. l. Morro Hermoso, 5 N. 31____ 5. Cape Mendocinod.49 S. Cape Walsingham,. 29 E. Cape Orford.... 49 S. of M. King's Cape,.. 28 W. )49N.,theN. Cape Chudleigh.a. 29 S. Cape Flattery,. W. point of Cape St. Lewis,.. 48 W. W Tr Cape St. John, 468. Cape Elizabeth,.. 38 N. E. i 56e, the S. E. Cape Romanzoff.. 19 S. of M. Cape Race,.. 5pointofNew- C. Prince of Wales,. 19 W. ____ foundland. 18,&W.of C. East Cape,. 55, the S.W Pr. of Wales. Cape Sable,.. point of No- Icy Cape,... 19 N. W. va Scotia. Pt. Barrow,.. 3 S. W. Cape Cod,. 55 S. W. Pt. Beechey,... 3. Oape Hatteras.. 66 AM. Pt. Demarcation.. 4 S. Cape Sable. 78 E. Cape Bathurst,.. 5 S. W. ) 78, the W. Pt. De Witt Clinton, 23 N. Cape St. Antonio,. point of 9, the N. W. )Cuba. Cape York... point of Pr. Cape Catoche.b.. 78 S. W. Wm.'s Land CAPES. AIR-Long, long ago. 1. Capes of this clime, your names we shall rhyme Seize on the harp, rouse up the lay, Brewster Cape first, and then North Cape we chime To Cape Farewell then away. Walsingham Cape is the next we shall name, King's Cape is seen o'er the blue misty main, Chudleigh, St. Lewis, we must not disdain, And Cape St. John we survey. 2. Speed to Cape Race, then Cape Sable we trace; Glance at Cape Cod, then pass along; Find for the stormy Cape Hatteras a place, Sable Cape place in the song. Now let us go, St. Antonio to meet, Catoche and Gracias a Dios we greet, Cape Corrientes, thy name we repeat, St. Lucas we add to the throng. 3. Morro Hermoso is next to be sung; Sweetly the name falls on the ear; Sound Mendocino on each tuneful tongue, Orford Cape then let us hea". a Incorrectly spelled Chidley. b Kah-to.tche. GOrah'-e-as-ah-dee'oce. d Men-do-se-no. 28 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS Now we a place for Cape Flattery find, Oh I let us be to Elizabeth kind; Cape Romanzoff in our song is enshrined, Cape Prince of Wales shall appear. 4. East Cape and Cold Icy Cape shall succeed; Point Barrow see, nearer the Pole; On with the song-to Point Beechey we speed, Where northern storms have control. Onward to Point Demarcation we bound, Glance at Cape Bathurst, on desolate ground; Point De Witt Clinton more Eastward is found, York Cape is last on the scroll. Q.estions.-What is a Cape? See Definition 10.-Where is Cape Brewster? Ane. It is an Eastern point of Greenland, extending into the Arctic Ocean.-North Cape? Anso The most Northwestern point of Iceland, extending into the Arctic Ocean.-C. Farewell? Ans. It is the most Southern point of -, extending into -. C. Walsingham? King's C.? C. Chudleigh? C. St. Lewis? C. St. John? Ans. A Northern point of -,extending into —. C. Race? C. Sable? C. Cod? C. Sable? C. St. Antonio? C. Catoche? C. Gracias a Dios? C. Corrientes? C. St. Lucas? Morro Hermoso? C. Mendocino? C. Orford? C. Flattery? C. Elizabeth? C. Romanzoff? C. Prince of Wales? East C.? Icy C.? Pt. Barrow?a Pt. Beechey? Pt. Demarcation? C. Bathurst? Pt. De Witt Clinton? C. York? MOUNTAINS. Arctic Highlands,. 12, 13 N Black Hills,.. 51M.&N.E. Mt. Hecla,.. 33 E. S. E. (22, 41, 50, Mt. Katah'din... 55, in Me Rocky Mts.,c. E., 63 W., White Mountains, 54E., inN. Sierra Madre.d. 76, 89, 90. ii. _ 76, 89, 90. Green Mountains,. 54, in Vt. Mt. St. Elias,. 21 S. E. 54 S. of M., Mt. Fairweather,. 40 N. Catskill Mountains in N.Y. Cascade Range. 49 E. Blue Ridge,... 65,E., 66W. 61, along 66 N.W., 65 Coast Ms., the coast Alleghany Mts., E., between ierra N da 62 W., 49. N. C. & Ten. S.Neva.da S E Cumberland Mts... 65 M. Wahsatch Mts.. 62 N. E. Ozark' Mts.,... 64M.&N.E. Popocatapetl,.. 89 N. W. Camanche Peak,.. 64 S. W. Water Volcano,. 89 E. Guadalupeb Mts.. 63 S. E. Cosiguina.g... 90 M. a Capes are sometimes called Points. b Gau-da-loop'. c In Mexico and Guatemala these mountains are called " Sierra Madre." d Se-er'-rah Mah'-dray. e Se-er'-rah Ne-vah'-dah. f Po-po-kah'-tah-petl. g Ko-se-ghee-nah. NORTH AMERICA. 29 MOUNTAINS. AnR-Bonny Doon, 1. 3. fSe lofty mountains, hail! to you Westward we seek ridge Guadalupe, Our observation now is due. And then to humbler Black Hill stoop Amid the gloom of polar skies, Next let our wandering gaze be bent Behold the Arctic Highlands rise! On Rocky Mountains' vast extentO'er Iceland's frozen plains we seek These, follow'd up, will lead us where Mount Hecla's famed volcanic peak; Sierra Madre mounts in air; Katah'din Mount in Maine we post, Behold where St. Elias shrouds White Mountains are New Hampshire's His head among the drooping clouds I boast. 2, 4. Green Mountains give Vermont aname, To Mount Fairweather now we change, The Catskill ridge New York may claim; Southeastwardseek the Cascade Range; The Blue ridge note, and then survey CoastMountainspass,-thysnow-capp'd The Alleghany's grand array. Sierra Nevada, is in sight. [height, Now on Kentucky's southeast side, There Wahsatch chain its summits The Mounts of Cumberland are spied; Here Popocatapetla glows! [shows, Ozark', thy unobtrusive chain, Water Volcano next we trace, And then Camanche's Peak we gain. And rest at Cosiguina's a base. Questions.-What is a Mountain? See Definition 1I.-Where are the Arctic Highlands? Ans. They are in the N. W. part of Greenland.-Mt. Hecla? Ans. It is a volcanic Mountain in the Southern part of Iceland, and is 5530 feet high.-Mt. Katahdin? White Mts? Green Mts.? Catskill Mts.? Blue Ridge? Allegheny Mts.? Ans. They are in the E. part of the United States, extending N. E. & S. W.-Cumberland Mts.? Ozark Mts.? Camanche Peak? Guadalupe Mts.? Black Hills? Rocky Mts.? Ans. They are in the W. part of N. America, extending from Mexico to Russian America, and are 1000 miles long.-Sierra Madre? Mt. St. Elias? Mt. Fairweather? Cascade Range? Coast Mts.? Sierra Nevada? Ans. They are in -—, and are 15,500 feet high.-Wahsatch Mts.? Popocatapetl? Ans. It is in the S. part of Mexico, and is 17,^723 feet high.-Water Volcano? Ans. It is in —, and is 12,620 feet high.-Cosiguina? DESERTS AND BANKS. Sandy Desert,.. 62 M. Grand Bank, 600 Great American Desert, 63 E. & N. miles long and 56 E., 57 W Green Bank.. 56 M. 200 wide. DESERTS AND BANKS. Am-Bonny Doon. 1. 2. The deserts vast we now approach, Of Sandy Shoals or Banks that keep And without railroad-car or coach, In ambuscade beneath the deep, Their pathless wilds will travel o'er, Two will we name, of great extent, And then the sandy banks explore. Beneath the foaming billows pent. To Sandy Desert first we haste, Green Bank, a shoal of wondrous size, A most uncomfortable waste; Eastward of Nova Scotia lies; Then let us range that desert wild Grand Bank, in size most truly "grand" Which "Great American" is styled. Southeastward lies of Newfoundland. Questions.-What is a Desert? See Definition 14.-Where is Sandy Desert? Ans. It is in the interior of California,b or the western part of the United States.-Great American Desert? Green Bank? As. It is in the Atlantic Ocean S. of Newfoundland.-Grand Bank? a Volcano - b California, 61 N. E., 62 M.. andN. W. 30 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. LAKES Richmond Lake,. 46 N. of E. Winnipeg Lake,? Seal Lake,.. and next S. 300 m. in. 1. 4. W. of Richmond Apiokac'umish. L. in order. Lake Manitoba, & 44 L. Caniapuscaw,. 47 W. 43, and nextN. L. Nitcheguon,a. 47 S. W. Little Winnipeg, W. of L. Mani46 and nextW.) toba. L. Copimescaw. of,L. Nitche- Buffalo Lake..43 W. _guon. Deer Lake,. 43 N. E. of M. Lake Mistissin'ny,. 46 S. Wollaston Lake, 43, and next N. Lake Abbitib'be,. 53 N. E. of Deer L. Temiscaming L. } 54, and next S. Indian Lake.. 44 N. W. ofL. Abbitibbe North Lined L.. 26 S. W. L. Ontario, 190m. 26, and next N.in 1... 5. Y}ath Kyeed L. of. Lined L. L. Erie, 250 m. in 1. 53 S. E. Doobaunt Lake, 2andnext'-~~~~~~~oo tLke ofYathKyed L Lake St. Clair, 27 and next Great Bear L., 160 1 23 in of the W. part. in 1. M. in 1... of L.'Erie. m. in 1.. — Great Slave L., 300 24 S. Lake Huron, 280 { 53 E. of M. m. in 1... m. in... in. in l~.. D) * Athabasca Lake, I 43 N W Lake Manitou'line, l 53, and next N. 200 m. in 1.. 170 m. in 1. i E. of L.Huron. Little Slave L.,. 42 M. L. Michigan,b 330 53 W. of M. Lake Shelekhof,. 38 N. m. in 1... \ North Lake... 32 S. W. Lake Superior, 400 } 53 N. W., 52 South Lake,.. 50 N. W. m.inn i.. N. E. Flat Bow Lake,. 50 N. Riny Lake, 40 m) 52 N. E., and Kull'uspelm' L.. 50 N. of I. iny ake 40 m connected with 50, and next E. _ * * _L. Superior. Flat Head Lake, of Kulluspelm. L of the Woods, 52. Lake. 100 m. in 1. 5 Great Salt Lake,. 50 S. E Tulee Lakes... 62 W. L. Sal, 100 m. in l. 44 S. E. Lake. of M. Lake Cayman,f. 76 N. of M. Cat Lake, 60 m, 144, andnext N. LakeChapala,.. 76 S. in 1.... of L. Sal. Lake Nicara'gua,. 90 S. a Nitch —gwon'. b Mis'.e-gun. c Yath-kide. d Or Chelekhof c Too'le..f i-man'. Chah-pah'-lah. A Nik ar-ah'-gwah. NORTH AMERICA. Bl LAKES. Am-Bruce's.ddras 1. 8. Now the Lakes our verse demand Now to Rainy Lake we go, Which like inland seas expand Then Lake Woods proceed to show; In dimensions vast and grand, At a glance Lake Sal we know, In North America. Cat and Winnipeg. 2. 9. First we mention Richmond Lake, Now Lake Manitoba clear, Not for size but order's sake, And Little Winnipeg appear, Seal Lake next, and then we take Then Lakes Buffalo and Deer Apiokac'umish. Sparkling merrily. 3. I 10. Cnniap'uscaw shall lead, Next in order let us take Nitcheguon shall next succeed, Wollaston and Indian Lake; (Names unfit for verse indeed,) To North Lined a visit make, Then Copim'escaw. Likewise Yath Kyed view. 4. 11. Mistissin'ny now we note, Doobaunt Lake demands our care, Not from Hudson's Bay remote, Great Slave Lake and Great Lake Bear; Then Lake Abbitib'be quote, Athabasca, bright and fair, Then Temis'caming. Slumbers tranquilly. 5. 12. Ontario, Erie are survey'd, Little Slave Lake we survey Twixt them is the grand cascade; T'wards the mountains far away; And mirror-like, St. Clair's display'd, Shelekhof,'neath Russian sway, Shining brilliantly. Sparkles freezingly. 6. f13. Next our notice shall be bent North Lake, South Lake notice claim, To Lake Huron's vast extent, Flat Bow Lake and Kulluspelm, Numerous bays its shores indent, Flat Head Lake we next shall name, Shape irregular. Lakes Great Salt and Tule. 7. 14. Manitouline next we call, At Cayman a glance we cast, Michigan, by no means small, Lake Chapala, and the last, And the largest of them all, Nicaragua;-hold all fast Lake Superior. In your memory. Questions.-What is a Lake? See Definition 24.-Where are Lakes Richmond, Seal and Apiokacumish? Ans. They are in the interior of Labrador, E. of the Southern part of Hudson's Bay. —Lakes Caniapuscaw and Nitcheguon? Lakes Copimescaw and Mistissinny? L. Abhitibbe? Temiscaming L.?-For Answers to Lakes Ontario, Erie, St. Clair, Huron, Manitouline, Michigan, Superior, Rainy Lake, and Lake of the Woods, see Map of the United States.-Where is L. Sal? Ans. In the Southern part of New Britain, S. W. of Hudson's Bay.-Cat L.? Winnipeg L.? L. Manitoba? Little Winnipeg? Buffalo L.? Deer L.? Wollaston L.? Indian L.? North Lined, Yath Kyed, and Doobannt Lakes? Great Bear L.? Great Slave L.? Athabasca L.? Little Slave L.? L Shelekhof? North and South Lakes? Flat Bow L.? Kulluspelm L.? Flat Head L.? Great Salt L.? Tule Lakes? L. Cayman? L. Chapala? L.Nicaragua? 32 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. RIVERS. Miles Miles Ms ocation on the MlesLocation on the in Map. in Map. length. ength. P Mackenzie's R., 250022 N. 23. Saguenayb R.,. 400 54 N. E. Peel River,.. 250 22 M. St. Maurice R., 300 54 N. of M. Liard's River.. 500 23 S. & S. W. Ottawa River.. 600 54 M.,53N. Hay River,.. 30042 N. W. J55 flows 24S. E.42 St. John's R.. 4501 ]55 M. flows Slave River 1 24S.E.,42 S. E. Slave Riv,.0 N. E. Mississippi R., 41002 E., 64 E. Peace River. 800 41 E. 42. Ohio River..1300 65 N. Finlay River,. 250 41N.W.ofM. M ouriRiv 00 64 N.52 S. Athabasca R.,. 60042 M. & N. E. River,., 51 N. Coppermine R. 250 24 N. Arkansas River 2000 64.&. Great Fish R., 600 25 M., 26 W. 65 E. Wa'ger River,. 300 26 N. of M. 63 E., 64 Chesterfield R. 400 }25 S.E.26 Red River.. 1200 W. M.& S. W. E. Knap's River,. 200 26S. RiGrande,. 1800 6 S76 N Churchill River, 900 N. W. 7 N. flo York River. 400 44.. 0 of Conchas River, 300 N. into the ______ Churchill Rio Grande Nelson's River,a 1600 in order. Santander R. 250 7 W., 76 E. Saskatch'awan, 1200 43 M. & E. Tula River,. 20077S.V. North Branch. 60042 E., 43 W. Tobasyo River, 25089 N. South Branch, 800 43 S. W. South Branch, 80043 S. W. Usumasin'taR. 30089 N. E. Red River,. 500 52 M. & N. Balize River,. 15090 W., 89 E., 52 N. W. San Juanc River, 100 90 S. Assin'ibain R.. 400 43 S. E. Balsas River.. 300 88 N. E. Severn River,. 3004 E., 45 W. Rio Grande,. 45076 S. Equan River,. 350 45 S. of M. Yaquid River,. 400 75 N. E. 76 } 44S.E.,45 Gilae River, 80062 S. of E. Albany River.. 500 S.W. & S.61 N.E. S. WV. & S. ~ 61 N. E. 53 N. E.; San Joaquin.R 300 flo N. Abbitib'be R.,. 400 E SanJoaquinR. 300into the Sa 45 S. E.' cramento. Harican'aw R., 400 61 N4S. E., cram.ento. 46 S. W. Sacramento R., 50061 N. E. Rupert River.. 300 46 S. 49. E. 49 E-, 50 East Main River, 500 46 net N. Columia River. 1200 N. W. Great Whale R 400 I ____ NfWuper reat Whale R., 400?of Rupert Lewis' River,. 800 50 M. & W. eart n lars River,. 600der. 650 M.&N.W. North River, 5047.&NW. Frazer's River. 70041.,49N.. St. Lawrence R. 2200 54M.55N.W. NoTE.-Rivers and their lengths can be recited according to the musical arrangement; but theq should be recitedfirst without their lengths. a The length here given includes the Saskatchawan River. When a river is formed by the junelio af two rivers, the length given includes thft of its longest branch. b Sag-en-nay. c San-hu-an'. Ya-kee' * Ues(-la. f SatnHc/-ah-keee. NORTH AMERICA. 33 RIVERS. Am-Bruce'e Address. 1.:13. Rivers, gliding to the sea, See the Haricanaw stray, Shall our present subject be; To the eastward of James' Bay; First Mackenzie's River see, River Rupert next survey, Northward far away. East Main River too. 2. 14. Note Peel River's rapid course; Farther North, the frosts congeal Liard's River, from its source Great Whale River, River Seal; Chilled by mountain breezes hoarse, And North River too must feel Courses easterly. The chill atmosphere. 3. 15. To Hay River let us pass, Koksak River's merry dance And Slave River, smooth as glass; Is a subject for romance; These among the smaller class Then at great St. Lawrance glance, Will we register. Stream remarkable! 4. 16. Now our rapid history strides Now let active fancy go, Where Peace River calmly glides; Saguenay, to see thy flow, Finlay River's sloping sides And St. Maurice rambling slow, Now we're visiting. Sight most beautiful. 5. 17. Now on Athabasca gaze, River Ottawa is spied, Wand'ring in a glittering maze; Then may be St. John's descried, Then our roving muse surveys Mississippi's mighty tide, River Coppermine. And Ohio too. 6. 18. Great Fish River now she sees, To Missouri then we fly, Quivering to the northern breeze; Turbulent Arkansas spy, Wager River'midst the trees, Nor o'erlook as we pass by, Flowing silently. Bold Red River's tide. 7. 19. Rivers Chesterfield and Knap's Soon on Rio Grande we gaze; Shall some notice have perhaps, There the River Conchas strays: Tho' they figure on our maps Brightening in the solar rays, Not extensively. Here Santander see I 8. 20. Churchill river now survey, Tula's stream will next appear, Flowing into Hudson's Bay; And Tobasco bright and clear,, Then by Nelson's river stray; Then as southwardly we steer See York River too. Usumasinta see! 9. 21. See Saskatch'awan's wide mouth, By a river called Balize (Two its branches, North and South,) Let us woo the evening breeze;Flowing, to prevent a drouth, Then, amidst embowering trees In Lake Winnipeg. Mark San Juan's streams 10. 22. Now Red River we espy, Now to Balsas stream we go, Crooked in its course and sly; Then see Rio Grande's flow, Then Assiniboin descry, And in plains of Mexico, Gliding pleasantly. Yaqui River see I 11. 23. River Severn's glittering stream, Next is Gila River seen, Worthy of our verse shall seem; Ere we reach San Joaquin; Equan River, too, we deem Sacramento's wave serene Quite poetical. And Columbia. 12. 24. Then a line we shall decree, tLewis River's turbid tide, River Albany, to thee; And Clark's River next are spied, Then bright Abbitibbe see, Then on Frazer's grassy side Flowing northwardly. Pause amazingly. 34 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Questions.-What is a River? See Definition 25.-Where is Mackenzie's River? A". It forms the outlet of Great Slave Lake in the western interior of British America, flows a northwesterly course into the southern part of the P. Sea, and is 2500 miles long.-Peel R.? Ans. It rises in the northwestern part of British America, flows first a northwesterly, then a northeasterly course into Mackenzie's River, and is 250 miles long.-Liard's..? Ans. It rises in the western part of British America, flows first a northeasterly, then a southeasterly, then an easterly, and lastly a northerly course into Mackenzie's River, and is 500 miles long.-Hay R.? Where is Slave R.? Ana. It forms the outlet of -, flows into, and is - miles long.-Peace R.? Ans. It rises in the western part of B. America, flows first in easterly, then a northerly, and lastly a northeasterly course into -, and is.Finlay R.? Athabasca R.? Coppermine R.? Great Fish R.? Wager R.? Chesterfield R.? Knap's R.? Churchhill R.? Ans. It rises in the southwestern interior of B. America, flows a general northeasterly course into the western part of Hudson's Bay, and is 900 miles long.-York R.? Where is Nelson's R.? Ans. It forms the outlet of Winnipeg Lake, flows a northeasterly course into the western part of Hudson's Bay, and, including the Saskatchawan, is 1600 miles long.-Saskatchawan R.? An. It is formed by the junction of the N. Branch and S. Branch, flows first a northeasterly, then a southeasterly course into the northwestern part of Winnipeg Lake, and, including its longest Branch, is 1200 miles long.-North Branch? Ans. It rises in the Rocky Mountains, in the southwestern part of B. America, flows first a northeasterly, then a southeasterly, and lastly an easterly course, and unites with the South Branch to form the Saskatchawan, and is 600 miles long.-South Branch? Ans. It rises in the -, flows first -, then -, and unites with the N. Branch to form the Saskatchawan, and is - miles long. Where is Red R.? Assiniboin R.? Severn R.? EquanR.? Albany R.? Abbitibbe R.? Haricanaw R.? Rupert R.? East Main R.? Great Whale R.? Seal R.? North R.? Koksak R.? An8. It forms the outlet of Lake Caniapuscaw, in the S. part of Labrador, flows first a general northerly, then a northwesterly course into Ungava Bay, and is 500 miles long. Where is St. Lawrence R.? Ans. It forms the outlet of the great Lakes on the border of the U. States and Canada, flows a northeasterly course into the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and, including the chain of Lakes, is 2200 miles long.-Saguenay R.? St. Maurice R.? Ottawa R.? St. Johns R.? Mississippi R.? Ohio R.? Missouri R.? Arkansas R.? Red R.? Rio Grande? Conchas R.? Santander R.? Tula R.? Tobasco R.? Usumasinta R.? Balize R.? San Juan R.? Balsas R.? Rio Grande? Yaqui R.? Gila R.? S tJoaquinR.? Sacramento R.? Columbia R.? Lewis R.? Clark'sR.? Frazer's R. UNITED STATES. Square miles, 3,260,000.-Population, 23,256,973.-Pop. to sq. m. 81-. 1. THE United States are the most populous, powerful, and enlightened eountry on the Western Continent. 2. They were formerly colonies of Great Britain. 3. On the 4th of July, 1776, they declared themselves independent, and assumed the title as a nation of " TE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA." 4. The number of the original* States was thirteen. Eighteen other States have since been formed and admitted into the Union. 5. The country is at present divided into 31 States, 1 District, and 6 Territories. Qucstions.-1. What is said of the United States? 2. What were they formerly? 3. When did they declare themselves independent, and what title did they assume? 4 What was the number of original states t How many have since been formed and admitted into the Uniln t.i How is the country at present divided I'TNITED STATES. AIR-Home, sweet home. Hail, land of Columbia! our dear native land, Where all that is lovely and all that is grand, By nature is blended in forest and plain, In lake and in river, and mountainous chain. Hail! hail! fair and free! There's no land like thee,-there's no land like thee. 2 Hail, land of Columbia! where fate has combin'd, The blessings of nature and triumphs of mind; Oh! proud is the form which thy destiny takes, As high as thy mountains, and bright as thy lakes. Hail! hail! fair and free! There's no land like thee;-there's no land like thee. 3 On thee shall the tide of prosperity roll, Like thy own mighty torrents that scorn all control; Here knowledge and science shall spread and arise, Expand like thy prairies and shine like thy skies. Hail! hail! fair and free! There's no land like thee;-there's no land like thee. * Ongnal, first, at the beginning. 35 36 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. STATES AND TERRITORIES. State of Maine, the) 12 S.27 N. Louisiana, the capital 45 S. E., 46 capital, Augusta. 2 is Baton Rouge. S. W. New Hampshire,* the 27 N.W., 26 Texas, the capital is) 4 capital is Concord. 5 E. Austin.... 53. Vermont, the capital, 26 N. E., the capit 35 S E., 36 26 N. E. Arkansas, the capital|S.W 4 5 N. Montpelier... j is Little Rock.. S W. 45 N. l4assachusetts,* the E. asacusetts*ostohne } 26 E.; 27 W. Tennessee, the capital 36 S. E., 37 is Nashville. S. S.W.& S. Rhode Island,* Pro-. Rhode Island* Pro 27 W., and Kentucky, the capital 36 E., 37 M. oiec a n N S. of Mass. is Frankfort.. & W. -Po *_ ~ *-_ J, Ohio, the capital, Co- 24 S.E.,25 S. Connecticut,. * 6 E lumbus... W.,37 N.E. Hartford and New,an. 9 S. THaven.b.b e5S. of Mass. Michigan, the capital.., 9 S. Haven.. W. 24 MI. & is Lansing. W. New York,* the capi- 25 E. & 26 tal is Albany.. M. & W. Indiana, the capital, 24 S. W., Indianapolis.. 37 N. V. N4ew Jersey,* the ca- 26 S.,,39 N. Illinois, the capital is } a N. pital is Trenton. 23 S., 36 N. Springfield... Pennsylvania,* the Missouri, the capital 35 N. E., capital is Harris- 25 S. an is Jefferson City. 36 W. burg... 26 W. Iowa, the capital is) 22 M. & E., Iowa City... 23 W. Delaware,* the capi-39 N.W.and Wisconsin, the capi- 8 S. W., 23 tal is Dover.. S.W. of N.J. tal is Madison.. N. Maryland,* the capi- 38 N. E. & California, the capital 16 S. E., 29 tal, Annapolis. 39 N. i nia 30, 40, & 41 ___ is Benecia. N. W. District of Columbia,) 39 N W., in Minesota Territory, Washington. o. W. part the capital is St. 6, 7, 22 N. ______Md. Paul..... Virginia,* the capital). 4 5, 19N.E,20 is Richmond.. NebraskaTerritory, W. 21S. & W. North Carolina,* the 38 HKanzas Territory, N3 35 capital is Raleigh. 34 M. & SE,35 South Carolina,* the48 IndianTerritory, 4. W., 45 N. W. capital, Columbia. * Washington Territo-) Georgia,* the capital 7 M E ry, lying North of 1) 2, 3 M. is Milledgville. Oregon. Oregon Territor, the 117 18 Florida, the capital, 47 S., 56 N. capital is Salem. 1'' Tallahassee... E. & 57 W. Utah Territory, the 18 & 19 S., capital is Fillmore 1 19 5., Alabama, the capipl,) l is re 31 & 32 N. Montgomery. 46 E.. 47W. City.... Montgomery. C132. U 31, 32 & 83 Mississippi, the capi- New Mexico, the capi- 1 3 & 3 talissJsspp e caco 46 M. - tal is Santa Fe. 3 4 tal is Jackson. 43 N. * The Thirteen Triginal States are marked with a Star. a Providence, N. —Newport, S. b Hartford, N.-New Haven, S. c Bat-on-rooah UNITED STATES. 37 STATES AND TERRITORIES. AIR —.uld Lang Syne.* Our country, the United States, shall now engage our rhyme, And Washington is capital of this most favor'd clime; Now every individual State, in order we repeat, New England, or the Eastern States, our notice first shall meet. 2 Of these the State of Maine comes first, where hills and woods abound, Aagusta is the capital, for river trade renown'd; New Hampshire next we celebrate, and Concord its chief town, There beauteous lakes expanded lie, and gloomy mountains frown. 3 Vermont-Montpelier there presides-our minstrelsy employs, By hardy folks inhabited, the brave "Green Mountain Boys;" Then Massachusetts comes in place, an enterprising land, There Boston holds supremacy, right worthy to command. 4 Rhode Island is the smallest State, two capitals are there, Newport and Providence their names, and handsome towns they are; Connecticut, for morals famed, is learning's favor'd seat, At Hartford and New Haven both, its legislators meet. 5 Now to the Middle States we come;-of these New York stands firts, And Legislative wisdom there in Albany is nursed; New Jersey is the next we name, a fruit-producing State, At Trenton, its metropolis, the Hessians met their fate. 6 Then Pennsylvania's fertile fields we joyfully explore, Its capital is Harrisburg, on Susquehanna's shore; Then Delaware by Dover ruled, we note thy sandy soil, Which, taught by art and industry, rewards the farmer's toil. 7 And now the Southern States we reach, and Maryland is spied. Its capital Annapolis, on Severn's placid tide; The District of Columbia with Washington is graced, The national metropolis, by broad Potomac placed. 8 Virginia is by Richmond ruled, a region highly praised, Tobacco there and Presidents abundantly are raised; North Carolina, famed for tar, and turpentine, and gold, By Raleigh, on the river Neuse, is legally controll'd. 9 South Carolina's marshy fields, its rice and cotton see, Columbia is its capital, upon the Congaree; And Georgia has its mines of gold, and farming there is bless'd, Its capital is Milledgeville, of moderate trade possess'd. 10 Florida, named from blooming fields, once property of Spain, There Tallahassee rules and has a rich and fair domain; In Alabama see a new and cotton-growing state, And at Montgomery, we find, its law-makers debate. *'Tis my delight, The Rose of Allandale, &c. PS8;I'Y TO PELTON'S -OUTLINE MAPS. 11 lo Mississippi's fertile State, our verse shall prove no churl Its capital is Jackson call'd, upon the river Pearl; Now Louisiana's sugar fields before us are espied, The capital is Baton Rouge on Mississippi's side. 12 To Texas, recently annex'd, attention now is paid, Austin, on Colorado's stream, the capital is made; Now to the Western States we come; Arkansas, first of tnese, Its legislative regency to Little Rock decrees. 13 And now to Tennessee we turn, whose sceptre Nashville wields Tobacco, corn, and cotton, fill abundantly the fields; Kentucky, on the limestone rock, may most substantial seem, Its capital is Frankfort cali'd, upon Kentucky's stream. 14 Ohio, pride of Western plains, where grain and pork abound, Columbus is thy capital, and fertile is thy ground; Next Michigan invites our lay, among the lakes it lies, A growing town,'tis Lansing called, a capital supplies. 15 A rich and thriving state we next in Indiana meet, It has at Indianapolis its legislative seat; To Illinois, the prairie state, our poesy has sped, Its capital is Springfield called, its wealth is coal and lead. 16 Missouri next shall be our theme, whose mineral wealth is great, Jefferson City holds the rule o'er this extensive state; Iowa has a generous soil and a salubrious clime, Iowa City, its chief town, outstrips the march of time. 17 Wisconsin in the way to wealth a rapid progress maxes, Its capital, called Madison, is placed between two lakes; To California have we come, Benecia rules that land, And now the Territories vast our notice shall command. 18 Of these comes Minesota first, Nebraska then we name, And Kanzas next, with Indian, our observation claim; Now Oregon's extensive wilds, then spacious Utah see, And a concluding line we give, New Mexico, to thee. Questions.-Under how many divisions are the U States spoken of from their situation im different parts of the Union?* Ans. Four; the Eastern or New England States, the Middle States, the Southern States, and the Western States. Name the New England or Eastern States. Which is the largest? Which is zhe smallest? Which lies on the W. of Maine? Which on the W. of New Hampshire? Which lies on the S. of New Hampshire and Vermont? Which two on the S. of Massachusetts? Name the four middle States. Which is the largest? N. Y. The second in size The third Which is the smallest? Which extends farthest N.? South? Name the 10 Southern States. The 11 Western States. How is the District of Columbia situated Ans. On the Potomac River, in the S. W. part of Maryland. What city does i contain? Ans. WASHINGTON —the capital of the U. States. Name the Territories * See verse of the U. States UNITED STATES. 39 OCEANS, GULFS, BAYS, AND SOUNDS. Atlantic Ocean. Chatham Bay,. 57 S. W 8000 n. 1. and E. of the Ut Charlotte Harbor, 56 S. E. 3000 w. States. Tampa Bay... 56 E. Pacific Ocean}, lW. of the United Vacassar Bay,. 56 N. E. and 7000 W. States. Apalacheb Bay, 56 N. and 7000 w. 4 S.E.,&intbe 46 S. E., &in the PassamaquoddyB., 12 S.E.,13 S.W. Penscoaay. W. partof Flor. 27 N., and E. Penobscot Bay, 27 N, and E. of Augusta. Mobile Bay, 46,&in the S.W. CascoBay 27 N. W. and S. MOb part of Ala. Casco Bay. of Augusta. 55 N., & N. of s 27W., and in the Black Bay,. the mouth of the Massachusetts B. part of Ma Miss. River. Cape Co y 27& the S. part 55 N., & in the Cape Cod of Mass. Bay. Baratar'ia Bay. S. of the E. part 27, and in the ofLouisiana. Plymouth Bay. W. part of Cape 5 ~_______ Cod Bay. Atchafalay'ac Bay, 55 N. W. 27oBd Ba 55N.W.,&W.of Buzzard's Ba, 27, and S. W. of Cote Bance B. Atchafalaya B. C ape Cod Bay. Vermillion Bay.. 54 N. E. Vineyard Sound, 27, and S. of Buzzard's Bay. 54 N., and in Narraganset Bay. 27, andin the E. Gal'veston Bay, the S. E. part of _part of R. I. Texas. Long I. Sound, 126 &. Matagorda Bay, 53N.E.,54N.W. 120 m. inl a, 1S.ofon. ) 53, & S. W. of' Matagorda Bay. Delaware Bay, } 39, between N.. atagorda Bay 65 m. in. J. and Delaware. Monterey Bay,. 30 S. W. Chesapeake Bay, ) 39,.. San Francisco B. 29 E. 200mh. in 1. e9aW.&N.W. I ay 29, in the E.paL Suisun Bay... of San Francisco Albemarle Sound, 39, & intheN.E. Bay. 60 m. in 1.. 5 part of N. C.ext T3lmlic v~Q~^,1000 ill, ~) and ~,, s~w. Saginaw Btty,. i 24 N.E.',extendPamlico Sound; } 80 m in S. I 39 S.W. Saginaw Bay,. ingS.W.intothe )interior of Mich. Gulf of Mexico, 55 56 63 Thunder Bay, 24 N.E., &N. of 1000 m. and Thunder Bay Saginaw Bay. 800 w.. Green Bay... 8S.E.,23N.E OCEANS, GULFS, BAYS, AND SOUNDS. Am —Auld Z. an Sne 1. 2. What Ocean borders on the shore And now for a beginning take Of these United States, The broad Atlantic tide, And all the Gulfs and BaysandSounds, Which bounds thesesame United States Our melody relates. Upon their eastern side. a The learner will perceive that many localities are more distinctly represented on the map of Vermont, New Hampshire, Massachlustts, Rhode Island, and Connecticut. b Ap-a-lah'-che. cAtchaf-a-li'-a. d Ko-pah-n. 40 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 3. 9, Pas'samaquod'dy Bay we see To Tampa and Vacassar Bays, On Maine's most eastern bound; (Within the Gulf), we drive; Penobscot Bay and Casco both And now at Apalachee Bay, In Maine are likewise found. (More northward), we arrive. 4. 10. Then Massachusetts Bay we reach, The Bay of Pensacola now (A noble bay in size,) And Mobile Bay we find; Thiswith Cape Cod and Plymouth Bays Black Bay to Louisiana's coast In Massachusetts lies. Is properly assigned. 5. 11. There Buzzard's Bay is likewise seen, On Louisiana's southern shore And also Vineyard Sound; See Barataria Bay; But Narraganset Bay indents Atchafalaya Bay we next Rhode Island's rocky ground. More westerly survey. 6. 12. See southward of Connecticut, CoteBlancheBaythenstill farther west, Long Island Sound extend; - We readily discern; The Bay of Delaware enfolds And shortly to Vermillion Bay, New Jersey's southern end. And Galveston we turn. 7. 13. Southwesterly we then proceed The last, with Matagorda Bay, To find the Chesapeake; To Texas is assigned; And then the Sounds called Albemarle Copano too;-but Monterey, And Pamlico we seek. In California find. 8. 14. Now to the Gulf of Mexico, Then San Francisco farther north, We willingly repair, And now Suisun we meet; And soon we meet with Chatham Bay, Green, Saginaw and Thunder Bay And Charlotte Harbor there. Will make our list complete. Questions.-Describe the Atlantic Ocean. See page 22.-Where is Passamaquoddy Bay? Ans. It is between the southeastern part of Maine and the southwestern part of New Brunswick, and is a part of the Atlantic Ocean.-Penobscot B.? Ans. It is in the south part of-, and is -.-Casco B.? Massachusetts B.? Cape Cod B.? Plymouth B.? Buzzard's B.? Vineyard Sound? Ans. It is between a southeastern part of Mass. and Martha's Vineyard,c and is a part of-. Where is Narraganset Bay? Ans. It is in the -, and is.-Long Island Sound? Ans. It is between the south part of — and Long I.," is a part of -, and - miles long.-Delaware B.? Chesapeake B.?b Albemarle Sound? Pamlico Sound? Gulf of Mexico?b Chatham B.? Charlotte Harbor? Tampa Bay? Vacassar B.? Apalachee B.? Pensacola B.? Mobile B.? Black B.? Barataria B.? Atchafalaya B.? Coto Blanche B.? Vermillion B.? Galveston B.? Matagorda Bay? Copano Bay? Saginaw B.? Thunder B.? Green B.? Monterey B.? San Irancisco B.? SuisunB.? ISLANDS. Nantucket Island, 27 S. Block Island,. 27, & S. of R. L Martha's Vine- 27, &W. of Nan- Fisher's Island. 27, & next W. of yard,.. tucket Island. Block Island. No Man's Land 27, & S. of Mar- Long Island,. 26 S.E. ___ thas Vineyard. Florida Reefs,.. 66N.W. Rhode IslJ, 27, in Narragan- T T. 65N. E. & W. of set Bay. orgas lorida Reefs. a See Islands of U.. b See page 24. UNITED STATES. 41 ISLANDS. As —Bonny Doon. ~~1' ~4 Come, listen to our song and hear Rhode Island next we shall locate What Islands in the States appear; Southeastward in Rhode Island State, Their various names we will unfold, In Narraganset Bay'tis set; And their positions shall be told. Block Island farther south is met. 2 5 First with Nantucket let us start, But let us not New York beguile Of Massachusetts'tis a part, Of that small tract called Fisher's Isle; Tho' twenty miles of sea divide Long Island's more extensive ground Its borders from the main-land side. In New York State is likewise found. 3 6 Two other isles of note are traced, Proceeding southward far away, Within the Bay State's bounds embraced; We find the Reefs of Florida; The first, as Martha's Vineyard famed, Then westwardly from there behold The second, "No Man's Land" is named. Tortugas Isles —and all is told. Questions.-What is an island? See definition 7.-Where is Nantucket I.? Ans It is in the Atlantic Ocean, S. E. of Massachusetts.-Martha's Vineyard? No Man's Land? Rhode Island? Block I. Fisher's I.? Long I. Florida Reefs? Tortugas Is.? CAPES. Cpe Ann,. 27, in the N. part Cp Charles 39, at the mouth Cape Ann, Of Mass. Ba. Cape Charles, akeB 5of Mass. Bay. Cae Henry f Chesapeake B. Cape Cod 27, E. & N. E. of Hny in order. Cape Co, Cape Cod Bay. Cape Malabar. 1 27, a S. E. point Cape Hatteras, n the coast of ___- Jdabar. of Mass. Cape Lookout, N. C. in order. Montak Point, 27, S. W., the E. Cpe Fear. ) point of Long L. Cape Sable,. 57 S. Sandy Hook,. 2S the E.point Cape Roman,. 57 S. W. 39 the S. point Cape San Blas..56 N. W. 39, the S. pointa Cape May. o' J. of N. J. Point Conception, 40 N. ~ 39, in the S. E. Cape Mendocino,. 16 S. W. Cape Henlopen, part of Del. at the t N. W. point of )mouth of Del. B. Cape attery, Wash. Territory. CAPES. Am-Long, long ago. 1. 2. Sing to the Capes a delectable air, Cape Hatteras now, and Capes Lookout Capes of our land, sing we to you; and Fear, First to Cape Ann in New England Mark our east coast,'midst ocean's repair, spray; [near, And then Cape Cod we review. Next Sable Cape and Cape Roman we Malabar Cape and Point Montauk With Cape San Blas in Florida. behold, To Point Conception our course we Have Sandy Hook in the schedule pursue, [view; enrolled; [unfold, Cape Mendocino then next we shall May, and Henlopen, Cape Charles we Speedonourwayerewecloseourreview, With Henry Cape to your view. Till Flattery Cape ends our lay. 6 -2 RKEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Questions.-What is a Cape? See Definition 10. Where is Cape Ann? Ans. It is an eastern point of Massachusetts, extending into the Atlantic Ocean.-Cape Cod? C.'Malabar? Montauk Point? Sandy Hook? C. May? C. Henlopen? C. Charles? C. Henry? C. Hatteras? C. Lookout? C. Fear? C. Sable? C. Roman? C. San Blas? Point Conception? C. Mendocino? C. Flattery? MOUNTAINS. Mt. Sugar Loaf,. 12 M. Blue Ridge N. E.. Hill, 12, in the N. E. jS.W.,37 S.E. s * 5 * part of Me. l M 385S.W.,apeak Mt. Kata'din.. 12 S. ac'' of Blue Ridge. White Mts.,.. 27N.W.,inN.H.8 N. & W., 37 highest peak of Alleghany Mts., S. E. between Mt. Washington, White Mts. KTenn. & N. C. Wachusett Mt.. 27 W. Cumberland Mts., E & 37 S. W. ) 26 E.,&in Mass. Ozark Mts... 35 E. & S. Mt. Holyoke,. Mt. H. near the Pilot Knob, 36 W., from S Ylt. HolyFoke, Mt T. near E., MW. T. near Iron Mt.,.. to N. in order. Mt. Tom,.. ~ toN. in order. the W. bank of High Peak.. 44 E. the Conn. R. Green Mts.. 26 N.E., run N. Guadalupe Mts.,. 44N.W.,43N.E. G _re 5 &S.throughVt. Green Mts.,.. 33 W. & N. W. Rocky Mts.. 3, 10, 33, 43. Mohegan Mts.,. 26 N. W R Wind River Mts., 19 M. Mt. arcy,. highest peak of Black Hills,. 20 N. & W. t 2, inohegan Ms. Spanish Peaks.. 33 M. 26 M., in the S. Caskillts. E. part of N.Y. Pike's Peak,.. 33 N. W. Long's Peak,..20 S. W. Blue Mts.,.. 26 S.W. WFremont's Peak.. 19 W. MOUNTAINS. AIm —AuZd Lang Syne, 1. I5. The lofty mountains of the States The Catskill Mountains in New York, Our music shall resound, Much admiration gain; [Ridge, Beginning with Mt. Sugar Loaf, Then see Blue Mountains and Blue On Maine's disputed ground. Each shows a wondrous chain. 2. 6. Mars Hill, Katahdin Mount we pass, Black Mountain all that azure ridge Then in New Hampshire, seek In altitude transcends; White Mountains, where Mount Wash- Wondrous Alleghany's range Appears the tallest peak.:ington Through various States extends. 3. 7. To Massachusetts then we come, The mountains Cumberland o'erlook See Mount Wachusett there; Virginia's western bound; Andlo! Mount Holyokeand Mount Tom But Ozark Mounts with Pilot Knob Their pleasant summits rear. Are in Missouri found. 4. 8. Green Mountains giveVermonta name, There too the Iron Mountain stands; And through that State extend; High Peak attracts our gaze; Mohegan range behold, o'er which The Texan Ridge, called Guadalupe Mount Marcy's heights ascend. Its misty tops displays. UNITED STATES. 43 9. 10. Green Mountains, (not the Vermont Wind River Mountains and BlackHills, Ridge) And Spanish Peaks are view'd; Are now before our eyes; With Pike's Peak, Long's and Fremont's And soon the famous Rocky Mounts Peaks, Majestically rise. Our mountain rhymes conclude. Questions.-What is a Mountain? See Definition 11.-Where is Mt. Sugar Loaf? Ans. It is in Canada, near the N. W. boundary of Maine.-Mars Hill? Ans. It is near the eastern boundary of the northern part of Maine.-Mt. Katah'din? Ans. It is in the northern interior of Maine, and is 5300 feet high. Where are the White Mountains? Mt. Washington? Ans. It is the highest peak of the White Mts., and is 6234 feet high.-Wachusett Mt.? Mt. Holyoke? Mt. Tom? Green Mts.? Ans. They extend N. and S. through the State of Vt., and the western part of Mass. into Conn.-Mohegan Mts.? Mt. Marcy? Ans. It is the, and is 5467 feet high.-Catskill Mts.? Blue Mts.? Blue Ridge? Black Mt.? Ans. It is a peak of the Blue Ridge in the northwestern part of N. Carolina, and is 6476 feet high.-Alleghany Mts.? Cumberland Mts.? Ozark Mts.? Pilot Knob? Iron Mt.? High Peak? Guadalupe Mts.? Green Mts.? Rocky Mts.? Wind River Mts.? Black Hills? Spanish Peaks? Pike's Peak? Long's Peak? Fremont's Peak? LAKES. M/oosehead Lake 25 E. & next N. 35m. in. 12 Canandaigua L W. of Seneca L. Chesuncook L., 24 12, & N. of Chautau'que L. 2 M., in the S. W.- part of N. Y. m. in 1. Moosehead L. W. part o Schoodic Lakes,. 12 S. E. Lake Ontario, 190 25N.E 6N.W. Lak 27 N. W., bet. m. inl.. 2., Umbagog Lake Me. and N. H. Lake Erie 250 m. Winnipisiogeea 27, in the inte- 25 M. & W. Lake... rior of N. H.''' L. Mtemphrema'- 11. E., 26 NLake St. Clir 27 24 E. gog, 27 m l. in 1. E.in Lake Champlain, I 26 N., &between Lake Huron, 280 24 N.E. 9 S.E 120 m. in 1. Vt. and N. Y. in. 26, in N. Y. and L. Manitouline, 10 s. connected with 170 m. in 1. of M Lake George) 0 the S. part of L. Lake Nipissing, 65 }o10 & N. of ManiChamplain. in i m. in 1.. touline L. 2 a little W. of the Onei'da Lake,. central part of Lake Michigan, 23E.&N.E.,24 N. Y. 330 m. in 1. W. & N. W. Skeneateles Lake. Lake Superior, 8 M. E 9W Owasco Lake,. 26, &S.W. of 400 m.inl. Cayuga Lake,. Oneida Lake, in Rainy Lake,.. 7 N. E. Seneca Lake,. order. L. of the Woods,. 7 N. Crooked Lake, J Devil Lake.. 6 M. ~C~a Winro-oked akee. a Win-ne-pe-solkee. 44 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Red Lake, 7. W.. Ponchar 46 S., and N.of Sabinea Lake, 54 N. New Orleans. Calcasieub Lake. L 54 N. E., 45 S..Borgne46 S., & E. of. --- E. Bor c Pontchartrain. L. Okecho'bee..57 W. LAKES. AI —Haste thee, Wtfer.d 1. Lakes that beautify our land, You our music shall command; Moosehead Lake the theme begins, Then a place Chesuncook wins; Schoodic Lakes appear in sight, Umbagog looks fair and bright. 2. jWinnipisiogee slumb'ring lies Where the granite hills arise; Memphremagog now survey In Vermont and Canada; Lake Champlain is next in sight, And Lake George shines clear and bright. 3. Now a westward course we take, Glance we at Oneida Lake; Then to Skeneateles pass, And Owasco, clear as glass; Lake Cayuga is in sight, Seneca shines clear and bright. 4. Be the morning mists dispell'd Crooked Lake is then beheld; Canandaigua is reveal'd, Shining like a silver shield; Lake Chautauque is in sight, And Ontario clear and bright. 5. Now to Erie and St. Clair, And Lake Huron we repair; Manitouline next we scan, Nipissing' and Michigan; Lake Superior is in sight, Rainy Lake is clear and bright. 6. Next in place Lake Woods is found, On our country's northern bound; Red Lake then shall take its place Ere we southward run our race; Devil Lake is now in sight, Darkly named, but clear and bright. a S~-eenr. b Kal-ka-shu. d "The Schoolmaster," "When shall we three meet again," &o. UNITED STATES. 4 7. Now we seek out Lake Sabine, Next Lake Calcasieu is seen; On to Pontchartrain proceed, Then Lake Borgns will notice need; Last of. all appears in sight, Okechobee fair and bright Questions.-What is a Lake? See Definitioa — TWnere is Mooseneaca ake? Ans. It is in the interior of the western part of Maine, and is 35 miles long.-Chesuncook L.? Schoodic Lakes? Umbagog L.? Ans. It is in the western part of Maine and the northeastern part of New Hampshire. -Winnipisiogee L.? L. Memphremagog? L. Champlain? L. George? Oneida L.? Skeneateles, Owasco, Cayuga, Seneca, and Crooked Lakes? Canandaigua L.? Chautauque L.? Where is L. Ontario? Ans. It borders on the northwestern part of N. Y., and the southeastern part of Canada West, and is 190 miles long.-L. Erie? Ans. It borders on the western part of N. Y., the northwestern part of Pa., the northeastern and northern part of 0., the southeastern part of Mich., and the southern part of Canada West, and is - long. Where is L. St. Clair? Ans. It is between the southeastern part of Mich., and the southwestern part of Canada West, and is - long.-L. Huron? Ans. It borders on the eastern part of Mich. and the western part of Canada West, and is - long.-L. Manitonline? Ans. It is in Canada West, N. E. of L. Huron, and is - long.-L. Nepissing? Ans. It is in the interior of Canada West, and is - long.-L. Michigan? Ans. It borders on the western and northern part of Mich., the northwestern part of Ia., the northeastern part of Ill, and the eastern part of Wisconsin, and is long.-L. Superior? Ans. It borders on the northern part of Mich., the northwestern part of Wis., the eastern part of Minnesota Ter., the southern part of New Britain, and the northwestern part of Canada West, and is- long.-Rainy L.? Ans. It is between the northern part of Minnesota Ter., and the southern part of New Britain.-L. of the Woods?.Ans. It is in the southern part of New Britain, bordering on the northern part of Minnesota Territory. Where is Devil L.? Red L.? Sabino L? Calcasieu L.? L. Pontchatraain? I. Borgne? L. Okeechobee 46 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. RIVERS. Miles Miles in Location on the Map. in Location on the Map. length. length. StLawrence200 26 N.W., 11 S. On 26, in the N. River, E., 12W.& N.E. part of t., N. t YLawrence W.& N. Lam[oille R., 75 e St.John'sR. 450 12 E., 13 S. W.L ile R 75 rof Otter Creek, Walloos'took 150 branches of St. Misssqe. in order. River.. John's R. in the St. Francis 11 S. E., 12 S. Allagah R. 75 N. part of Me. River,. 200 W Aroos'took 0 from WV. to E. Richelieu 75 ) 11, the outlet of River,. in order. River,. 3 L.Champlain. St. Croix R. 100 12S.. 26 in the N.W. Penobseot )3001 12 S. 7 N. fl of N.., ows 300 into Penobscot W. into Lake River,. S Bay. _Ontario. 12S.27 N.flows 26, and S. W. KennebecR. 250 from Moosehead Oswego R. 15 of Black River. ) Lake. 25, in the W. of Androscog- 250 27, next W. of Genesee R., 150 N. Y., flows N. gin R.. Kennebec R. into L. Ontario. 27,in the E. part Niagara R. 35 between L. Erio aco. 1: of N. H. & in __ and L. Ontario. of M Fthe S. 3W. part1 26, M.& S., bet. E1the S. W. part Delaware R. 3502.. of Me. Pa. & N. J. Pi scataqa 5 27, between the 26, in the E. of Rir au50 S.W. part ofMe. Lehigh R., 75 { Pa., a branch of -Rive, and N.H. the Del. R. Merrimack & Schuylkill 1 26, in the S. E. R. i') 27,Cin M.&1S. of. 26, in the S. E. River, 200 N.H.intheN iver. S15 of Pa., a branch E. of Mass. Rve. of the Del. R. Thamesb R., 100 26, in theE. part Susquehan- 450 26 S. W., 39 N. Thames^R., ~ of Conn. na River, W. Connecticut 400 27 N. V., 26 E. N. Branch, 325 26 M. and W. River,. "25, 26, in the inHousatonic 150 26, in the W. terior of Pa.,River,. part of Conn. W. Branch. 200 flows E. & S. B. 26, in the E. and into the SusqueHudson R., 300 S. E. part of N. hanna R. 5 York. )25,&S.oftheW. A26 M., flows E.-., 150 ^Branch,flows Mohawk R., 150 S. E. intothe Ju a R. into thuo he Susquoe Hudson. hanna. 26,intheW.Wpart I ) 38 N. E., bet Otter Creek. 100 of Vt., flows N. Potomac R. Md. and Va. IW. a Bau'-ko. b tensa. c Called also the Sorelle and Chambly, pronounce reesh-eh'-lu' UNITED STATES. 47 Miles Miles in Iocation on the Map. in Location on the Map. I lengtngth. 38, rises in the 48 W. and next hen'andoah 200 interior of Va., OgecheeR., 200 S.. of SavanRiver,. flows N. E. into nah. the Potomac. 47, 48, flows 38 E., 39 W., through the inRappahan- 00 ext S. of the Altamaha 400 terior and S. E. nook R., 2 Potomac in or- part of Ga. into York R.,. 200 Jder. ____ the Atlantic. James R.. 500 l 38 M. & E., 39 47 in the inte....._ ^ ^ Oco'nee R., 250 ] Otnee R., 250 or of Georgia, 38, 39, flows S. OmulgeeR. 250fm N. the Chowana R., 200 l E. & S. into Al- W.in order,form bemarle Sound. - the Altamaha. 38, flows S. E. & Satilla R. 200 47,net S. of.the: Altamaha. RoafnokebR., 450 E. into Albe- _____ theAltamaha. marle SoundS. S MarsR 100 47,S.E.between 38 S. E., & S. ^ t.Mary Is. 1 Ga. and Flor. Tar River. 200 of Roanoke in St. 250 59 N. W., 48 Neuse R., 300 order, flow S. E. W. into Pamlico S. 47, S. E., flows Cape Fear 0Suwa'nee R. 250 S. into the Gulf River, 0038 S., 48 N.. ) of Mexico. 38, 48, rses in Oscilla R., 100 47 S., next W. the N. W. part Ockloko'ny of Suwanee, in Great Pedee of N.., flows S. River, 150 order. River.. E through the Apalachico- 550 47N.,M., & S. N.E. part ofS. la.!. } 0. into the AtIC the At- Flint River, 300 47 M., from E. ___~__ tlantic. Chatah to W. in order, Little Pedee 0 48N.,flowsS.in- ch - form the ApalaRiver,. to the G. Pedee. chicola. Santee R., 400 48 M. & N. W. Cctaw'hat- 47 S. W., next 48, the North chee 200 W. of Apalachi. Wateree R. 275 branch of the cola. Santee. E a. 46 S. E., in the 48 N. W., the W. part of Flor. CongareeR., 200 W. branch of obile. 46 in the S. W. the Santee. 650 part of Ala. 47, 48, the W. A. 600 47 N. and W., Saluda R. 150 branch of the 46 S. E. Congaree. Tombigbeeg 500 }46 N. & E 48, the next S. River, 50046N.&E Ed'isto R., 200 ( W. of the San- Coosa R.,. 300 47 N. & W. )tee. Tallapoosa 20 47 next E. of Savannah R. 450 } 48 W., 47 N. E., River.. 2 Coosa River. Savannah R. 450 bet. Ga. & S. C. a Cho-wa;n. b Ro-a-noke'. 6 Nuse. d O.ghee'-oho e Aul-ta-ma-haw'. f Ap-pa-lach-cola g Tom-beek'be. 48 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Miles Miles.in Location on the Map. in Location on the Map. length. length. Black War- i46 E., flows S. Muskingum 250 38 N. W., 25 S. lack Wa- 250. W. intoTombig- River, W. rior., ) bee R. Scioto R.,. 250 37 N.E., 24 S.E Pascagoula 250 46, in the S. E. Miamia R. 200 37 N., 24 S. River,'. part of Miss.) 24 S., fows N. Pearl R.. 350 46 M. & S. Mauee E. into L. Erie Mississippi 4100 7, 23, 36, 46, & ) 24, E., between River,. 55 N. Detroit R., 28 L. Erie & L. St. Big Black 250 46 M., flows S. Clair. River,. W.into the Miss. Thamesb R. 200 25 W., 24 E. source 46 N., 24 E., between Yazoo R.. 400 flows S. W. into St. Clair R., 40 &L. St. Clair & the Miss. Lake Hvron. Ohio R., 1300 36 M. & E., 37 Saginaw R., 10024 flows N.into -ennesee3M & 038 N. W. Saginaw Bay. 36 S. E., 46 N. Cheboygan i' TennesseeR. 900 36. E, 46 N e 100 9 S. "E., 37 S.& S. E. River. 37 S. E., 38W., Betsey's R., 75 24 N. W. Holston R. 300 tfrom S. to N. in M R.,100 24 next S of Clinch R.. 250 order, flow S.W. Monistic R.,100 24 next S. ofin J into Tenn. R. Maskegon Betsey's R. in ) 36 S. E., flows 24 M., flows N. Duck River, 200 W. nto the Ten- Grand R.,. 200 W. &W. into I nessee. Michigan. Cumberland 60 37 M. & S. W., Kalamazoo 24 M., flows W. River. 5 36.B ERiver,. 3 into L. Mich. Green R.. 300 36 E., 37 W. St. Joseph's 00 24, in the S. W. Salt River,:- 100 37, next N. E. River.. part of Mich. 5 of Green R. Wabashc R., 500 36N.E.,24 S.W. 37 E., flows W. 36, 37 N. W. KentuckyR. 350 &N. W. into the flows thro' the Ohio River.. White R. 300interior & S. W. 37, in the N. E. part of Ia. into Licking R, 20 part of Ky., the Wabash. R 250 flows N. W. in- 37 N. W., flow J to the Ohio. East Fork. 250 S. W., unite and Big SandyR. 250 37 E& between West Fork, 250 JRiver Ky. & Va. J River. Kanaw'haR. 400 38'. of & 36, rises in the N. W. I. part of Ill., onongahe- 38 i the. Kaskaskia R 300 E. part of Ill., Monongahe- 38, in the N. flows S. W. into la R.,. 300 part of Va., 17 the Mississippi S. Illinois R. 500 23 E. &., 36 Alleghany 350 25 3I. & S. N. o. River,. 36 N., 23 South, )25 in the W. SangamonR 200 flowsW. into the Beaver R.. 100 partof Pa.,flows Illiois S. into the Ohio. a Mi-ahn-me. b Tems. a Waw-bash. UNITED STATES. 49 Miles - Miles in Location on the gap. in Location on the Map. length. length. 23 E.,the largest Clark's Fork 200 19 N.E., 4 S. E. Fox River, 200 N. Branch of I. Big Horn R. 600 19 M., 20 N. W. River. Tongue R., 400 20 N., 5 S. Rock River. 300 23 MW*. flows S. Little Mis- 250 1 5 E. & s. E 5 W. into the Miss sour.. Wisconsin 400 )23 N., flows S. Shienned R., 200 21 N. W. River, & S. W. into the R & Mississippi.n Te nt' R., 250 20, 21, next S. Mississippi, le o ^ of Shienne R. Wolf River, 100 23 N. E., 8 S. 21 W., 20 E. & Menomonee 150 8 S. E. White R. 00 2S. of Teton R. ~~River. ~S. of Teton R. ^River_.___''' Running 400 21 M. & W., 20 hippeway 200 8 S.W.,23 N.W. Water R., E. River,. *at R,.. 10 19 E., 20, 21, St. Croix R. 100 7 S. E. Platte R. 1200 22 S.. Rum R. 15}0 7, next W. of St. North Fork. 450 19 E., 20 M. _St._Louis. 150 7E. South Fork, 450 20 S., 33 N. W. St. Louis R. 15 7 E. ) 21, a branch of Red River, 500 7 W., 6 N. E. Lou Fork, 250 the Platte R St. Peter'sR 300 22 N., 7 S. W. Kanzas R. 800 35 N. W., 34 M. Upper Iowa 200 22 23, in the N. Republican River,. E. part of Iowa. Fork, 60 21. 34 N. Turkey H., 200 122, 23, next S. Solomon's )o0 N N. of Upper Iowa. Fork, 60034N. N.W. Makoquetaa r di MaRoquetaa 150 23 W., next S. GrandSaline300 34 next S. of 300Re34 nexto S. oY R ivr of Turkey R. in ork.. Solomon's Fork, Wapsipine'- 150 order. Smoky Hill 450 in order. con.. Fork,. 22, E., 23, flows Osage R.. 450 35 M. & E. Iowa R.,. 350 thro'theinterior GasconadeR 200 35 E., 36 W. Ioa& S. E. of o. 36, flows S. thro' Jinto the Miss. 1 t f Red Cedar R 300 [ 22 h., 23 W., a St. Francis h400 oS. & Mo. & N.Epart RededarR300 branch of Io. 0 Mo & N.E. part _____ branch of o. R. River, of Ark. into the Des Moinesb 450 22 M. 23 S. W Miss. River,. WhiteWater o20 36,an E. branch Salt River, 200 35N.E.,36N.W. River,. of St.Francis R. Missouri R. 3000 4,5,6,21,22,35. 6 46 N. W. 36 S. SiouxcRiver, 200 21, N.E.,22 W. W e.. W., 35 S. E. James' R. 400 6 S. E., 21N.E. 36 W.& S.W, William'sR. 200 -5 N. W. BigBlackR. 300 a branch of the Maria's R. 200 4 N.W. White R. Jefferson's 10 19 N. W., in or- Arkansas 2000 45 N E., 35S. & River,. der from W. to W.,34 M. 33 M. Madison'sR. 100 E.-sources of 35,intheE. part Gallatin's R. 100 J the Mo. Neosho 250 of Indian Ter YellowStone ) 5 M. &.., flows S. E. & SO Riier,5 19 N. 00 into Ark. R. ihBer,. 10 b19 M. ___ d S a Mah-ka'-ka-ta. b De-moin. Soo. d She-eai/ 7 50 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. Miles Miles in Location on the Map. in Location on the iMap le lengtth: Cimarron R. 400 34 W., M.,& E. Guadalupe R 250 53 N. & N. E. Nesuketon- 300 34, 35, next S. an Anto53, nextS.W. oaf ga,a. of Cimarone R. S Anto 250 Guadalupe R. Canadian R. 900 34 S. Nuecesf R. 350 53 N. W., & E. )34, 35, S.W., aPecos R.. 600 43 N.,M., & S. North Fork, 700 Vbranch of Cana- Rio Grande. 1800 dian R. 33 W. Red River, 1200 45 M.,44 N. Gila River, 800 41E.,42W.&M. Washitab R. 500 45 E. 41 False Washi- Colorado R., 2000 4 32. ta, 250 44 N.., 34 S. Buenaven 00 a 2Bv 00 310'S W. Sabine R., 400 45 M. & S., bet. tura R.. Texas & La. SanJoaquinh 300 Nechesc R. 300 45, next W. of River,.. Sabine R. Sacramento 50 30N.W.,16 Trinity R., 450 45 W, & S. River, 0N.W.,16.E JaT +int ^) 145 S., flows into 30 N. W. 17 S. San Jacinto, 150 rao 45. flos ito 30 N. W., 17 S. San ^ Jacnto Galveston Bay. Feather R. 200 branch of SacraBrazos' R. 650 l44 M. & E., 45 mento R. R S. W. Klamath R., 300 16 M., 17 W. 154 N. W., 44 S. C1 ) 1 S. E.,2 S.W., Colorado R., 700 E., source 53 ColM., & N. E.. P N. W. Willamette 20 16 N.. Pasigono R, 350 44 W., 43 E. River. 2501 S. E. 16N.E. SaladoB R. 250 )43 E., 44 West, Fall River, 200 2 S.W.,17N. W. -dieo Tunite and form 2S. E., 18 N. Red Rver 250 f Pasigono R. Sa- Lewis' R. 800 & M. Texas, ) lado is the N. R. Clark'sj R. 600 2 E., 3 W. & M, RIVERS. AmI —O Came, Come Away. 1. Oh! come, let us sing our country's noble rivers, St. Lawrence gay begins the lay, St. John's now we see. Walloostook, Allagash we note, Aroostook and St. Croix we quote And then a line devote, Penobscot, to thee. 2. Here mark Kennebec, there Androscoggin quivers To Saco stray, Pissataqua, And Merrimack seek; To Thames, Connecticut we hie, The Housatonic then descry, Next Hudson, Mohawk spy, And then Otter Creek a Ne-su-ke-tong'-ga. b Wosh'-e-tau. c Netch-ez. d Brah'-zos, e Sah-lah'-do. fNwa'-ces. g Hee'-lah. h is-ho'-ah-kee ~.Or, Snake River. j Or, Flat Head River. UNITED STATES. 3. Now Onion river mark, Lamoille, Missisque glisten, St. Francis view, and Richelieu, Black River pass by; Then note Oswego, Genesee, But soon we turn to gaze on thee, Oh great Niagara! Then Delaware espy. 4. Now Lehigh we reach, and Schuylkill, Susquehanna, North Branch behold and West Branch bold, Then speed, speed away; Be Juniata's banks of green, Potomac, Shenandoah seen; Note Rappahannock's sheen, York River survey. 5. Now James River see, Chowan and Roanoke Rivers; Tar River view, Neuse River too, And River Cape Fear. See Great Pedee and Small Pedee, Santee and River Wateree, Then let the Congaree In beauty appear. 6. Saluda we pass; see Ed'isto, Savannah; Ogeechee's stream shall be our theme, And Altamaha. Oconee's stream of silvery hue, Ocmulgee and Satilla view, St. Mary's River too, As southward we draw. 7. St. John's and Suwanee in Georgia's sunlight glitter Oscilla bright is next in sight, Then speed, speed away, Where sportive Ockloko'ny bounds, And Apalachicola sounds, And then in Georgia's grounds, Flint River survey. 8. Behold Chattahoochee and the Choctawhatchee! Escambia view and Mobile too, Then speed, speed away; Now Alabama shall appear, Tombigbee see and Coosa clear, To Tallapoosa steer; Black Warrior survey. 9. And lo! Pascagoula, Pearl and Mississippi, Then Big Black stream shall be our theme; Yazoo next is seen. Ohio, Tennessee look grand, By Holston, Clinch, and Duck we stand; See River Cumberland, Then note River Greetr Q^2 HKEY TOPELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. 10. Salt River we pass, Kentucky too and Licking Big Sandy Stream becomes our theme, Kanawha rolls by. Monongahela is in sight, See Alleghany, Beaver bright, Muskingum do not slight, Scioto espy. 11. Miami we hail, Maumee, Detroit Rivers; To Thames repair, then see St. Clair, Next Saginaw view Cheboygan, Betsey's River clear, 1 mistic, Maskegon appear; To River Grand we steer, And Kalamazoo. 12. St. Joseph's now greet, then Wabash and White Rive Now East Fork view and West Fork too, Then speed, speed away; Kaskaskia, Illinois we spy, And Sangamon, Fox stream descry, Rock River passing by, Wisconsin survey. 13. Now Wolf River see, Menomonee flows gaily, Then Chippeway, St. Croix array; Rum River we spy. St. Louis see, Red River gay, Minnesota Upper Iowa, And Turkey stream survey, As onward we fly. 14. Mako'queta see, oh! St is a charming river, Behold it stray through Iowa, Then haste, haste along The Wapsipinecon to view, And Iowa's bright course pursue; Red Cedar River too Finds place in our song. 15. Des Moines now appears, Salt River and Missouri; See River Sioux, James River too, Then speed, speed away, Where William's River sparkling runs, Maria's too and Jefferson's; Now glance at Madisons, And Gallatin's gay. 16. We reach Yellow Stone, Clark's Fork and Big Horn Rivers And River Tongue shall next be sung; Small Missouri name; Shienne and Teton Rivers see, To White Stream, Running Water flee, Then Platte, with branches three, Our song shall proclaim. UNITED STATES. 53 17. Now North Fork is seen; South Fork and Loup Fork passing To Kanzas fair we next repair, Hasto on-onward still To Fork Republican we go, On Solomon's a glance bestow, Then Grand Saline we show, And Fork Smoky Hill. 18. To Osage River come; see Gasconade, St. Francis; White Water stream is now our theme, White River is shown; Big Black, Arkansas streams appear; Next to Neosho's banks draw near; And then we westward steer, To reach Cimarron. 19. Now Nesuketonga, Canadian leaving, North Fork we view, Red River too, Then onward we fly; For Washita must nextbe seen, False Washita and the Sabine; In Texan meadows green The Neches we spy 20. Lo I Trinity now and San Jacinto Rivers; Where Brazos shines our course inclines, Proceed with the lay; To Colorado let us turn, Nor humble Pasigono spurn, Salado's course discern, While rippling away. 21. See Texan Red River and Gaudalupe flowing; Each graceful stream shall be our theme, Then speed, speed away; To San Antonio draw nigh, Nueces and Pecos spy; To Rio Grande we hie, And hasten our lay. 22. To Gila we come and next to Colorado, Buenaventura we see, And then San Joaquin; Sacramento then is nigh, Feather's golden sands we spy, Klamath pass,'and then we hie To Columbia's stream. 23. And now we can hear the roar of Willamette; And as we glide, Fall River's tide Comes rushing on its course; Lewis' River next and Clark's, After hardy men of mark, Who nobly did their country's work, Fitly end our verse. 541 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Questions.-What is a river? Where is St. Lawrence River? See answer on page 35.St. John's R. 1 Ans. It is formed by the junction of the Walloostook and Allagash, in th. northwestern part of Maine, flows first a northeasterly, then a southeasterly, then a southerly, and lastly a southeasterly course into the Bay of Fundy, and is 450 miles long. Where is Walloostook R.? Ans. It rises in the high lands between the northwestern part of Maine and Canada, flows a northeasterly course, and unites with the Allagash to form the St. John's, and is - long.-Allagash R t Ans. It rises in the N. W. part of Me., flows a northeasterly course, and unites with the Walloostook to form the St. John's, and is -- long.-Aroostook R.? Ans. It rises in -, flows - into -, and is - long.-St Croix R.? Ans. It rises in -, flows - into -, forming a part of the boundary between Maine and New Brunswick, and is --— long. Where is Penobscot R.? Ans. It rises in the western part of Me., flows frst an easterly, then a northerly, then a southeasterly, and lastly a southerly course into Penobscot Bay, and is - long.-Kennebec R.? Androscoggin R.? Ans. It forms the outlet of Umbagog Lake, flows first a general southerly, then an easterly, and lastly a southerly course uniting with the Kennebec, and is - long.-Saco R.? Piscataqua R.? Merrimack R.? Ans. It rises in the northern interior of N. H., flows first a southerly, then a northeasterly course through the N. E. of Mass. into the Atlantic Ocean, and is -- long.-Thames R.? Where is Connecticut R.? Ans. It rises in the northern part of N. H., flows first a southwesterly, then a southerly, and lastly a southeasterly course, forming the boundary between N. H. and Vt., passing through the western part of Mass. and the interior of Conn. into Long Island Sound, and is - long.-Housatonic R.? Hudson R.? Mohawk R? Otter Creek? Onion R., Lamoille R.? Missisque R.? St. Francis R.? Richelieu R.? Black R.? Oswego R.? Genesee R.? Where is Niagara R.? Ans. It constitutes the outlet of Lake Erie, and flows a northerly course into Lake Ontario, forming a part of the boundary between N. Y. and Canada, and is 35 miles long. At its outlet it is three-quarters of a mile wide, and from 40 to 60 feet deep. As it proceeds, it widens and embosoms Grand Island, 12 miles long, and from 2 to 7 miles wide, a mile below which its entire waters are precipitated over a precipice 160 feet high, forming the Niagara Falls, the most sublime cataract on the globe. Where is Delaware R.? Lehigh R.? Schuylkill R.? Susquehanna R.? Ans. It is formed by the junction of the N. Branch and W. Branch, in the interior of Pa., flows first a -- then. a - into —, and is -- long.-North Branch? West Branch? Juniata R.? Potomac R.? Shenandoah R. Rappahannock R.? York R.? James R? Chowan R.? Roanoke R. Tar R.? Neuse R.? Cape Fear R.? Great Pedee R.? Little Pedee R.? Santee R.? Wateree R.? Congaree R.? Saluda R.? Edisto IR? Savannah R.? Ogeechee R.? Altamaha R.? Oconee R.? Ocmulgee R.? Satilla R.? St. Mary's R.? St. John's R.? Suwanee R.? Oscil a R.? Ocklockony R.? Apalachicola R.? Flint R.? Chattahoochee R.? Choctawhatcher R.? Escambia R.? Wheie is Mobile R.? Ans. It is formed by the junction of the Alabama and Tombigbee, in the S. W. part of Ala., flows -- into - and is -- long.-Alabama R.? Ans. It is formed by the junction of the Coosa and Tallapoosa in the eastern interior of Ala., flows first a westerly, then a southwesterly course, unites with the Tombigbee to form the Mobile, and is - long.-Tombigbee R.? Ans. It rises in the northeastern part of Miss., flows a general southerly course, unites with the Alabama to form the Mobile, and is - long.Coosa R.? Tallapoosa R.? Black Warrior R.? Pascagoula R.? Pearl R.? Mississippi R.? Ans. It rises in Itasca Lake, flows first a northerly, then an easterly, then alternately a general southwesterly and southeasterly course, passing through the interior of Minnesota Ter., forming the boundary between the S. E. part of Minnesota Ter and Wis., the boundary between Wis. and Io., Io. and Ill., Ill. and Mo., Mo. and Ky., Mo. and Tenn., Tenn. and Ark., Ark. and Miss., part of the boundary between Miss. and La., passes through the southeastern part of La. into the Gulf of Mexico, and is 4100 miles long.-Big Black R? Yaoo R.? Where is the Ohio R.? Ans. It is formed by the junction of the Monongahela and Alle ghany in the western part of Pa., flows alternately a general northwesterly and southwesterly course into the Miss., forming the boundary between Va. and 0., 0. and Ky., Ky. and Ia., Ky and Ill., and is - long.-Tennessee R. Ans. It rises in the western part of N. C., flows first a northwesterly, then a general southwesterly course through the eastern part of Tenn, then a westerly course through the northern part of Ala, lastly a general northerly course through the western part of Tenn. and Ky. into the 0., and is - long. UNITED STATES. 55 Where is Hioluton R.? Clinch t.? Duck R.? Cumberland R.? Green R.? Salt R.? Kentucky R.? Licking R.? Big Sandy R.? Kanawha R.? Monongahela R.? Ans. It rises in the northern interior of Va., flows a northerly course, unites with the Alleghany to form the 0., and is - long. Where is Alleghany R.? Beaver R.'? Muskingum.? Scioto R.? Miami R? Maumee R.? Detroit R.? Ane. It connects Lake St. Clair with Lake Erie, flows a southerly course, and is - long.-Thames t.? St. Clair R.? Saginaw R.? Cheboygan R.? Betsey's R.? Monistic R.? Maskegon R.? Grand R.? Kalamazoo R.? St. Joseph's R.? Wabash R.? White.? East Fork? West Fork? Kaskaskia.? Illinois R.? SangamonR.? Fox R.? Rock.? Wisconsin R.? Wolf R.? Menomonee R.? Chippewa R.? St. Croix R.? Rum.? St. Louis.? Red R.? St. Peter's R.? Upper Iowa R.? Turkey R.? Makoqueta R.? Wapsipinecon R.? Iowa R.? Red Cedar R.? Des Moines R.? Salt R.? Where is Missouri R.? Ans. It is formed by the junction of Jefferson's, Madison's, and Gallatin's Rivers in the southwestern part of Mo. Ter., flows first a northerly, then an easterly, then a northeasterly, and lastly a general southeasterly course, passing through Mo. Ter., forming the boundary between Indian Ter. and Io., part of the boundary between Indian Ter. and Mo., passes through the interior of Mo. iatv the Miss. River, and is long.-Sioux R.? James' R.? William's R.? Maria's.2?, Jefferson's R.? Madison's R.? Gallatin's R.? Yellowstone R.? Clark's Fork? Big Horn R.? Tongue R.? Little Missouri R.? Shienne R.? Teton R.? White R.? Running Water R.? Platte R.? North Fork? South Fork? Loup Fork? Kaizas R.? Republican Fork? Solomon's Fork? Grand Saline Pork? Smoky Hill Fork? Osage R.? Gasconade.? St. Francis R.? White Water R.? White R.? Big Black R.? Arkansas R.? Neosho R.? Cimarron R.? Nesuketonga R.? Canadian R.? North Fork? Red R.? Washita R.? False Washita R.? Sabine R.? Neches R.? Trinity R.? SanJacinto R.? Brazos R.? Colorado R.?-PasigonoR.? Salado R.? Red River of Texas? Guadalupe R.? San Antonio R.? Nueces R.? Pecos R.? Rio Grande? Gila R.? Colorado R.? Buenaventura R.? San Joaquin R.? Sacramento R.? Feather B.? Klamath R.? Columbia R.? Willamette R.? Fall R.? Lewis' R.? Clark's RI.? SOUTH AMERICA. Square miles, 7,050,000.-Population, 15,250,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 21. 1. SOUTH AMERICA is about one million square miles smaller than North America. 2. It is noted for the height and length of its mountains, the grandeur of its rivers, and the extent of its plains. 3. It surpasses every other division of the earth in its rich and extensive mines of gold, silver, platina, mercury, and diamonds. 4. The Andes, an immense chain of lofty mountains, the seat of numerous volcanoes, extend along the whole length of the western side of S. America, at a distance varying from 50 to 100 miles from the coast. 5. East of the Andes are immense plains called Llanos or Pampas. They are well wooded near the streams, but elsewhere covered with grass, and over many of them range vast herds of wild horses, cattle, and sheep. 6. The climate is various; on the low plains it is hot and frequently unhealthy, and the temperature is that of perpetual summer. The.table. lands* and valleys of the Andes enjoy perpetual spring. Seed-time and harvest are always present, and the hues of spring and autumn are blended in the same landscape, while the summits of the mountains are constantly covered with snow. 7. The' inhabitants of S. America consist of whites, Indians, negroes, mestizoes, mulattoes, and samboes. Questions.-1. What is the comparative size of S. America? 2. For what is it noted? 3. In what does it surpass every other division of the earth? 4. What is said of the Andes? 5. What is the face of the country east of the Andes? 6. What is the climate? 7. Of what do the inhabitants consist? What isthmus connects S. America with N. America? Dn. What sea washes the northern coast I Ans. The Carribbean Sea. ~ What ocean on the E.? Ac, What ocean on the W.? Pc. SOUTH AMERICA. AIRa-duld Lang Syne. The noblest rivers upon earth, with mineral treasures vast, And tropic vegetation too, abundant, unsurpass'd,These, South America, are thine; what gifts to make thee bless'd, Were science and true liberty but added to the rest. 2 Extensive plains with verdure crown'd, and many a dizzy height, Grandeur of scenery to amaze, and beauty to delight; These are thy boast;-but noxious things lie hid among thy flowers, And dread volcanoes on thy fields discharge their sulphurous showers. * Table-land, elevated, flat land. 56 SOUTH AMERICA. 57 POLITICAL DIVISIONS. New Grena'da, the 3Paraguay, the capital, 7 M. & N capital is Bogota' a Assumpsion... Venezuela,b the capi. 38. & N. Uruguay, the capital 90 M. & N. tal, Carac'cas.. Montevideo..,.. Guianac comprises 1 39 W., M. &Buenos Ayres,g the three divisions.. E. capital is Buenos 89, 77. 1. English Guiana, the) Ayres. capital is George. 39 W. Patagonia, inhabited 97 E., 98W., town.d.. by Indians.. 103 N. W. 2. Dutch Guiana, the) Chili, the capital, 88 E., 76 S. capital, Par'amar'. 39 M. Saatia'go.. E. ibo......) Bolivia, the capital, 65 M. & S. 3. French Guiana, ) Chuquisa'ca.^... 77 N. the capital is Cay. 39. Peru, the capital c ne/.I.,64 1S. enne.___a. 0 Lima.i... Brazil/the capital is 52, 54, 66, Ecuador', the capital l 51 N., 37 S. Rio Janeiro. 67. is Quito.k... W. POLITICAL DIVISIONS. AIL-Bonny Doon. 1 5 Now South America we greet, Then pass we on to Paraguay, And its divisions all repeat; And there Assumpsion holds the sway; First New Grena'da is enrolled, To Uruguay we next proceed, By Bogota' it is controll'd. Where Montevideo takes the lead. 2 6 To Venezuela then repair, Let Buenos Ayresf notice claim, Caraccas holds dominion there; Which gives its capital its name; Then let us at Guiana touch, To Patagonia then we come, Possess'd by English, French and Dutch. Where Indian tribes still find a home. 3 7 English Guiana first we name, Our music now to Chili glides, Whose regency may Georgetown claim; And Santia'go there presides; But Dutch Guiana's rule we find Next on Bolivia's soil we stand, To Paramar'ibo assign'd. Where Chuqfiisacah takes command. 4 8 We pass to French Guiana then, The region of Peru we gain, And its metropolis, Cayenne;e Where Limai rules the rich domain; Brazil extends o'er ample space, And lastly Ecuador we greet, Rio Janiero its chief place. Quitok its governmental seat. Questions.-Name and point out the political divisions of S. America, with their capitals What divisions border on the Caribbean Sea? What on the Atlantic? On the Pacific? What divisions are crossed by the equator? By the parallel of 10~ N. latitude? By the parallel of 10~ S. latitude? By the parallel of 20~ S. latitude? By the Tropic of Capri. corn t By the parallel of 30~ S. latitude? By the parallel of 400 S. latitude? In what zone is the greater part part of S. America? Td. In what zone is the S. part? S. Te. a Bo.go-tah'. b ven.ez-weet-la. e ghe.ah-'na. d On the coast ir the N. part. e ki.enn''biah.zeel'.' bo'-nos.a'-riz. h hoo.ke.sah'kah. ilee'nmah. jek-vih.-dora. kkee'to 6 58 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. OCEANS, SEAS, GULFS, BAYS, AND STRAITS. Atlantic Ocean, 8000 N.E. & E. ofBay of St. George, 98 M. m. 1. & 3000w. S. America. Straitof Magel'lan, 1 02 N. E,, Pacific Ocean, 11000 I W. of South 103 N. m. 1. & 7000 w.. America. Strait of Le Maire. 103 M. Caribbe'an Sea, 1600 ), Gulf of Peias,t. 97 S. of M. m. in 1. 23 Gulf of Guaite'ca,t 97 M. & N. E. ) 37 N. W., a Gulf of Guayaquil'.~ 51 Gulf of Darien,.. part of the 3' Caribbean S. Sardinas Bay,.. 37 S.. Gulf of Venezuela,. 23 S. E. Bay of Choco,. 37 W. Bay of All Saints.. 68 N. ofW. 37 N. W., a Blanco Bay,.. 89 S.. Bay of Panama'.. part of the St. Mathias Bay,. 98 N. Pa 98-next S. Desenganio* Bay... of St. MaJ thias Bay. OCEANS, SEAS, GVULFS,, BAYS, AND STRAITS. AIR-The Rose of.llandals. 1 5 Of South America we tell, The Bay of St. Mathias mark, In geographic verse; Glance Desengano* o'er; Its Oceans, Seas, its Bays, its Straits, These with St. George's Bay indent Its Gulfs and Sounds rehearse. The Patagonian shore. 6 Th' Atlantic Ocean on the east, Magellan Strait, (a crooked pass,) Pacific west is found; The Strait we call Le Maire, Then comes the Caribbean Sea In Patagonia find a place, To make a northern bound.' And Penasf Gulf is there. 3 7 The Gulf of Darien on the north And Gulf Guaite'cat now we note, Observing eyes may trace; Then northward speed away More eastward Venezuela Gulf To see the Gulf of Guayaquil',& May likewise find a place. And hail Sardinas Bay. 4 8 Lo! on the east Brazilian coast, Now on Grenada's western side, The Bay of All Saints lies; The Bay of Choco see; But Blanco Bay much farther South And then the Bay of Panama' The travelling muse descries. Our closing theme shall be. Questions. —Vhat is an Ocean? Describe the Atlantic Ocean. See page 22. The Pacihc Ocean. See page 22. Caribbean Sea.' See page 23. Where is the Gulf of Darien?. Ans. It is in the N. W. part of New Grenada, and is a part of the Caribbean Sea.-Gulf of Venee zuela? Bay of All Saints? Blanco Bay? St. Mathias Bay? Desengano Bay? Bay ofSL George? Strait of Magellan? Ans. It separates - from -, and connects- with — ~ Strait of Le Maire? Gulf of Peias? Gulf of Guaiteca? Gulf of Guayaquil? Sardinas Bay Bay of Choco? Bay of Panama? * des-en gan'yo. t pain'yas, $ gwi-tay'kah. ~ gwi-ah-keel' SOUTH AMERICA. 59 ISLANDS. Bermuda Islands,., 3 S. Sandwich Land,. 107 S. W. West India Islands,. 13,23N.,24. South Orkney Islands, 113 N. W. Joannesasland., e 54 N.W., 53 South Shetland Is. 111, 112. St. Paul's Island,, 41 S.. TerradelFuego,. N Fernando Noron'ha,b 55 N. E. Staten Land,.., 103 E. Itamara'cacsland., 55 S. Hermit Island.. 103 W. Abrolhosd Islands,, 68 S. W. 97, next S. of Trinidad Islands,,. 80 N. W. Wellington Island,. the Gulf of Saxemburg Island.. 91 N. Penas. St. Sebastian I.,,. 79 M. Chiloef Island,. e. 97 N. E. Canane'alsland,.. 79 W. Juan Fernandez Is. 88 W St. Catharina... 79 S. W. 87 N. E. 103 N. E., Mas a Fuera,.. 87 N. E. Falkland Islands,. 104 N. W. Selkirk's Island,.,88 N. W. East Falkland,,.. 104 N. W. St. Felix Island.. 75 E. West Falkland... 103 N. E. St. Ambrose Island,. 76 W. Aurora Islands,., 105 N. W. Punahlsland,.. 50 N. of E South Georgia Islands, 105 E., 106 Isle of Rey.. 37 N. W. South GeorgaIslands, W. Traverse Islands.. 106 N. E. ISLANDS. AIR-Juld Lang Syne. 1 6 The Isles of South America Aurora Islands then we pass; Our present theme supply, A seaward course pursue, Commencing with Bermuda Isles, And lo! South Georgian Isles appear, That in th' Atlantic lie. And Traverse Islands too. 2 7 [Isles, West India Isles we register, Then Sandwich Land, South Orkney Joannes and St. Paul's; South Shetland too, we spy; And then our glance poetical At Terra del Fuego touch, Upon Fernando falls. And Staten Land close by. 3 8 Itamara'ca, Abrolhos dIsles, Upon this region's south extreme Our careful muse shall heed, Is Hermit Island seen; Southeastwardly to Trinidad The Isle call'd Wellington's adorns And Saxemburg proceed. Pacific's breast serene. 4 9 Now dimly through the ocean mist, Then farther north see ChilX,f See St. Sebastian rise; In Chili's bounds embrac'd; Then farther to the southward glance, The Isles Juan Fernandez then Where Canane'a lies. Northwesterly are traced. 5 10 St. Catharina's Island then, Mas a Fueraf in that group, In bounds Brazilian note, With Selkirk's Isle appears; And Falkland Islands, East and West, From these our most erratic muse In southern seas remote. To Isle St. Felix steers. ~Zho.an'-nes. b no.rone'yah. cee-tah.mah.rah-kah'. da-brol6-yoce. ke4.k.naays.aL fcheo o-ay'. g mas.ah.foo.ay'rah. A poo'-nah. 00 KEY TO PELTON'S OI TLINE MAPS. 11 12 St. Ambrose Island close beside Then in the Bay of Panama', St. Felix Isle is laid; Behold the Isle of Rey; But in the Gulf of Guayaquil' This shall the island list conclude, Is Puna Isle survey'd. And likewise end our lay. Questions.-What is an Island? Where are the Bermuda Islands? An s. In the Atlantic Ocean, E. of the southern part of the U. States. West India Is. t See page 27. Joannes I 1 Ans. In the northern part of Brazil, at the mouth of the Amazon River.-St. Paul's 1.? Fernando Noronha? Itamaraca Abrolhos I.? Trinidad I. Saxemburg I.? St. Sebastian I.? Cananea I. St. Catharina I. Falkland Is.? Aurora Is.? South Georgia Is.? Tra. verse Is.? Sandwich Land? South Orkney Is.? South Shetland Is. Terra del Fuego? Staten Land? Hermit I.? Wellington 1.? Chiloe 1.? Juan Fernandez Is. Mas a Fuera I.? Selkirk's I. St. Ambrose I. I Puna I.? Isle of Rey? CAPES. 23, the N.E. 98S. of M., Cape Gallinas,.'point of New & N. of the Granada. Cape Blanco,..- mouth ot 39 E., the N. Port Desire Cape Orange,,, point of Bra- JRiver. zil. Cape Horn.. 103 W. Cape North.9 S., 39. 102, the N Cape St. Roque,.. 55 M. W. extremi. Cape Frio,... 79 E. Cape Pllar,. ty of Terra 90, the most del Fuego. E. & S. E. )50, the most Cape St. Antonio.. points in or. Cape Blanco,.,. western point Cape Corrientes,. der on the of Peru coast of Bue. Cape St. Francisco.. 37 S. WV. nos Ayres. CAPES. AIR-The Merry Si iss Boy. To the Capes, to the Capes South American turn, All their names shall in order be told; We begin at the north, there Gallinas discern, Which the waves Caribbean enfold; Cape Orange then we shall explore Upon the North Brazilian shore; Speed away to Cape North, then thy aspect so stern Cape St. Roque through the mists we behold. 2 Then Cape Frio more southward appears in Brazil, St. Antonio next we glance o'er; And from thence to the Cape Corrientes we steal, Buenos Ayres,'tis found on thy shore; But on the Patagonian coast Capes Blanco, Horn, and Pillar post; Then another Cape Blanco Peru shall reveal lt. Francisco is thine, Ecuador. * free o., SOUTH AMERICA. 61 Questions.-What is a cape t Where is Cape Gallinas? Ans. It is the northeastern point of New Grenada, extending into the Caribbean Sea.-C. Orange? C. North? Ans. It is an eastern point of the northern part of - extending into -. C. St. Roque? C. Frio? C. St. Antonio C. Corrientes C. Blanco C. Horn? Ans. It is the southern point of Her mit Island, exLending into -. C. Pillar C. Blanco C. St. Francisco? MOUNTAINS, 1 extend along Vulcan Mts.,... 89 S. E. the whole Mt. Illimani, c. 65 W. Andes Mts., 4800 m. length of Sorata 65. & N. in 1.'the western' of Illimani. coast of S.. 51N. W., &S. America. Mt. Cotopaxi, E. of Quitoe AcarayaMts.,. 39 S., 38 S. E. Mt Pih h 51 N. W.,& GeralbMts.,... 65 N. Mt. fnca,S. s. of Quito. Brazilian Mts. 67 79. Mt Chimborazof 51 N. W., 50 Mt. Chimborazo.f SOUNTAINS. AIR.-TAe Old Granite State. 1 2 The Mountains are before us, Illimanic next in order Their snowy tops rise o'er us; Stands upon Bolivia's border And now in lively chorus, Like a bold gigantic warder; With Andes we commence; Then Sorata's heights ascend; See Acaray ascending, Cotopaxi next we mention; Lo Geral's cliffs impending, Give Pichincha some attention; Brazilian range extending, Then with the steep ascension And Vulcan's vapors dense. g Of Chimborazo end. g Questions.-What is a mountain? Describe the Andes. Ans. They are an immense chain of lofty mountains, extending along the whole length of the western side of S. America, at a distance varying from 50 to 100 miles from the coast, and are about 4800 miles long.Acaray Mts.? Ans. They are between the northern part of Brazil, and the southern part o: Guiana and the southeastern part of Venezuela, extending east and west.-Where are Gera Mts. Brazilian Mts?, Vulcan Mts? Mount Illimani? Ans. It is in the western part of Bolivia, and is 24,350 feet high.-Mt. Sorata? Ans. It is in, and is 25,250 feet high, the. highest mountain on the Western continent.- Mt. Cotopaxi? Ans. It is in -, and is 18,. 880 feet high.-Mt. Pinchincha? Ans. It is in -, and is 15,936 feet high.-Mt. Chimbo razo? Ans. It is in -, and is 21,430 feet high. LAKES. Lake Zapatosa,. 37 N. 89, & S. E. Lake Marakay'bo,'. 37 N. E. Lake Bevede'ro.. o Lake Gua. Lake Ipavai. o. 38 M. nacache. Lake Xaray'es^. 66 S. W. Porongos Lake,. 89 N. E. Lake Ibera'.. 78 S. W. Lake del Valle.. 77 S. Lake de los Patosm. 90 N. E. Lake Ubahy',. 65 S. E: 90, & S. W. Lake Titica'ca. 65 W. Lake Mirim,".. of De los 64, & N. E. \ Patos. l Jof Lima — Patos. Lake Rey'es.' of Lim Lake Coluguape,~ 97 E. Lake eye ourceofthe Lake Guanacache.P 89 N. W. J Amazon. aak-kah.ri'. zhay.ral'. ceel.yah.mahtne. dso-raht.ta. epechin'-chah. fchim.bo. rahl.zo. g Repeat the last four lines. h zah.pah-to'.sah. i mah-rah-ky'-bo. j e-pah'-vah. k hah-ry'-es. I e.bay'.rah. n day-loce.pah'-toce. n me-reem'. o koo.loo-gwah-pay p gwah nah-calh'-hay qdel.val'-yay. roo-bah-ee. atit-e-kah'-kah. t ray' es 62 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. LAKES. AIR-Bruce's Rddress. 1 5 Lakes that in this region shine, Eastward now of Uruguay, Near the Equinoctial Line, To Lake Mirim make our way; Those that farther south incline, And in Patagonia, Now commemorate. Coluguapeb see. 2 6 In Granada may be seen Guanacachec Lake we greet; Zapatosa's waters green, Next with Bevedero meet, And thy aspect bright, serene, Then in Buenos Ayres seat, Maracaybo Lake. The Porongos Lake. 3 7 Lake Ipava, (small in size,) Lake Del Valled then is found Venezuela's grounds comprise; Set in Buenos Ayrean ground; Xarayesa in Bolivia lies, But Lake Ubahy e is found Near Brazilian bounds. In Bolivia. 4 Now for Buenos Ayres make, In Bolivia and Peru, There to find Ibera Lake; Titicaca Lake we view, De los Patos then we take, Lake Reyes,f then a line for you, In Brazil it lies. To close the registry. Questions.-What is a Lake? Where is Lake Zapatosa? Ans. It is in the northern part of New Grenada.-L. Maracaybo? L. Ipava? L. Xarayes? L. Ibera? L. De los Patos? L. Mirim L. Coluguape? L. Guanacache? L Bevedero? Porongos L.? L. Del Valle? L. Ubahy? L. Titicaca L. Reyes? RIVERS. Miles Miles in Location the i Location the he Map. length length Magdalena 90 M39-next E. of River,. 37M. & N. Maroni R., 350 Surinam R. Cauca R.,.600 37 W. & N. OyapockR., 200 39 E. Oronoco R. 1500 38 NR.4000 53 N., 5251, Apu'r~es R..; 500 38 N. W., 37 64. Apu'res R. 500.' N.E. Arau'cah R. 500 ) 38 W., 37 E. Trobets 20 N., 39 500River, Meta River. 600 & S. of Apure e 53 N W Guavia'rejR 600 R. in order. Aniba'R,. 300 S.. 38 E flows N. egroR. 1500 52N. E. &N. Caromr R.. 450 into the Orono- g.. CO. 38 S. E. & 5 Essequi'bo 450 39 W. & S.W. Branco R., 600 38. E. & 52 Demara'ra 150 39 next E. of Padaviri'~ R. 200 38 S. River,. Essequibo in Casi ui' 38, connects Berbice' R., 100 order. iare 150 the Negro with Surinam R. 300, 39 S. & M. the Oronoco. a hah-ri'-es. b ko.loo.gwah.pay. c gwah-nah-cah'chay. dval'.yah. e oo-bah-ek. fray'es. g ah-poo'-ray. l ah-row'-kah. i may'tah. j gwah-ve-a0'-ray. k kah-ro-ne&.es-se-ke6-bo. mwmah-ro-ne6. n ah-nebahr e Dah-dah-ve-re6 p kah-se-ke-ah'-xay. SOUTH AMERICA. 63 Miles Miles in Location on the Map. in Location on the MSp. length. length. Caupesa R., 800 N. WpyR. ^ N &Wot 52 E: Gurapy~R. ~ 500 M. Japura^R.,.1200 52 N. & N.W., Maranham' 54 M., flows N. Japer,N200 > 51 N. River, N.E. Apapura R. 6001 51 N E.,'37 S. Parnahiba 11 N. River, Ap r R 0 & S. E. River, 800 54S. & N.E. Putumayoc 0 1 51,52-nextS. St.Francisco 1300 67 N. E. & S. River,.. 00 of the Japura Diamond R., 250 67 E. Napo River, 550 51, next S. W. Paraiba R., 450 79 N. E. C uraraydR. 400 of the Putu. Rio de la > mayoinorder. Plata.. 2400 90 M. &W. Plata. Tungura'gua 900 51 M., W. & Uruguay R., 1000 78S.&90N.W. River,.. S. W. Negro R., 400 90 N. HuallagafR, 500 51 S. & M. 90 N. M., 78 N&N aranaR.2000 Ucaya'liR. 1200 64 N. & N.E., Parana R. W. & N.. Paro River, 500 64N. E., 65N. Paranahy'ba 600 67 S.., 66 W. River, S. E. JavaryhR.,. 400 51 E. Rio Grande, 600 79 N. & N. W. JutayiRiver. 800 51 S. E., 52W. Paraguay R. 1200 66 S.W.,78W. Juru'aiR., 900 52 S.W. Tacoary'qR. 300 66 S. Purus R.,. 900 52S.&E.ofM. Cuya'b R. 400 66 M. Madeira R.. 2200 52 S. E., 65 N. Pilcomay'o 1100 77 N.78 NW Beni'kRiver, 600 65 W er. Mamore R., 1200 65 M. & S. Vermejo R., 1000 77 E., 78 W. BrancoR.. 1000 65 S. E. & M. Sala'do R., 900 77M. & S.E. Guapo're R., 500 65 E. & N. E. Dul'ce R. 600 77-next Sa. Topayos'R., 1100 53 M.&S. ___ of Salado. Tres Barras 250 Tercero R., 400 89 N. E. River.. 25 53S. SaladillosR., 400 89 E., 90 W. ArinhosmR., 300 66 N. Colorado R. 1000 89 M. & S. E. Xingu-n R., 1300 53 N.E.& S. E. Rio Negro, 700 89 S. 66 N. B. Camarones Para' River. 1300 54 N. W. Rivr 400 98 M. & N.W. Tocantins'R.1200 54W., 67 M. Port Desire 400 97E. 98.W Araguay R.,11200 54 S.W., 66 E. River.. a wow'.pes. b hah-poo'-rah. c poo-too-my.o. d koo.rah.ry'. e toong-goo-rahr-gwah. f wal-yalh.gah. goo-ki-ah' -lay. hah-voh-re. i hoo-ty' j hoo-roo'.ah. kbay-lied I o-py'.yoce. m ahreen'.yoce. t Written also Chingu. It is to be observed that Brazilian names are pronouncea according to the sounds of the Portuguese while the names of the rest of South America, as well as those of Mexico, conform to the sounds of the Spanish language. The principal points of difference are the following: —In Portuguese, as in French, j and also g before e or i, sound like zh, or like s in pleasure; x and ch aie pronounced like our sh; hence Chingu and Xingu are pronounced, precisely alike. On the other hand,j and x in Spanish have the sound of a strongly aspirated h; and ch is prolounced just as it is in the English word chill; accordingly we must say chah'gres, and not shah'gres; che-wah'wah, and not she-wah'wah. (See BALDWIN'S PRONOUNCING GAZETEER, Introduction, XXVI., 3, 5, 6 and 11; also, XXVII. 5. 9, 12 and 17.) In the pronunciation of geographical names, it would be well for the teacher frequently to call the attention of his pupils to the fact that in nearly all foreign names a sounds as in the English word father-sometimes approaching the a in fat; e as in there or met; and i as in marine. o gou.rah-pee. ppah-rah-ee-bah. q tal -quah-re6. r ver-may'-ho. s sah-lah-deel.yo. 64 FEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. RIVERS. AIu-Bruce's address. 1' 11 Streams of South Americe, Now JapuraTT is in sight, Rolling on your rapid way, Apapura's aspect bright Now in verse we shall array Sparkles in the mellow light; Your names melodious. Putumayo see! 2 12 IMagdalena River sing, Napo River then we note; Flowing from its mountain spring; On Curaray** in fancy float; Then our way to Cauca wing, Then to thee a line devote, Orinoco see. Tunzura'gua fair. 3 13 Now Apura* comes to view, See Uallagatf to the last And the slow Arauca too; From its mountain source flows fast Then a southward course pursue Ucayali then is passed, And the Meta see. Paro River too. 4 14 Guavia'ref is enscrolled, Thence removing, we draw nigh Caronit we then behold; To Javarytt and Jutay;~ See Guiana's plains enfold Then the pleasant banks we spy Essequibo's stream. Of Jurua's stream. 5 15 Demarara we present, Purus and Madeira see, Which in ocean waves is spent, From the mountains flows Beni;ll Then a stream of short extent, Then Mamore's place shall be Berbice River called. In Bolivia. 6 16 Surinam and Maroni', Branco decks Bolivian grounds, In Guiana both we see, Which GuaporeITT northeast bounds, Then a line we troll to thee, But Topayos murmuring sounds River Oyapock. Through Brazilian lands. 7 17 But what object meets our gaze t In those lands Tres Barras too, Who can look without amaze, And Arinhos*** and Xingu, Where Brazil thy stream displays, All a northern course pursue Mighty Amazon! To the Amazon. 8 18 Trombetas River, next in place, Tocantins, Para' combine Shall our poesy embrace; Near the equatorial line, River Aniba' we trace, There uniting with the brine In Brazilian grounds. Of th' Atlantic sea. 9 19 Negro River, large and long, Lo the River Araguay Is inserted in our song, Northward makes its rapid way; Branco's current, swift and strong, See Gurapy to ocean stray, And Padaviri.b Also Maranham. 10 20 Now to Casiquiare haste, Parnahi'ba northward goes, Link between two rivers placed; Swol'n by streams from mounta in snows, But the Uaupesll may be trace& Seaward St. Francisco flows, In Grenada's plains. Through Brazilian grounds. * ah-poo'rah. t gwah-ve.ah'-re. t kah-ro-nee'. d pah-dah-ve-ree'. II wow.p-c, ~ hah-poo'rah. h hoo-rah-r0'. tt wal-yah'-gah. 14 hah-vah-ree'. ~~ hoo( t IIU ba-nee'. T1r gwah-po'ray. *** al reen'yoce SOUTH AMERICA. 5 21 24 Diamond River boldly leaps Paranahy'ba now survey, J)own the mountain's dizzy steeps; Rio Grande* fair and gay, C(alnily Paraiba creeps Then the River Paraguay, To th' Atlantc wave. And the Tacoary.f 22 25 The La Plata you may deem Cuya'ba, Pilcomayo seek, Witnout doubt a " silver stream;" Vermejo add Salado eke; Uraguay is now our theme, Of Dulcet and Tercero] speak, Bright and beautiful. Saladillo see. 23' 26 Negro River then we see, Colorado next admire, Flowing, Uraguay, to thee; Negro shall a line require; But the Parana' shall be Camarones, Port Desire Buenos Ayres, thine. Close the melody. Questzons. —What is a river? Where is the Magdalena River? Ans. It rises in the southwestern part of New Grenada, flows a northerly course into the Caribbean Sea, and is 900 miles long.-Cauca R.? Qrinoco R.? Ans. It rises in Ipava Lake in the southern part of Venezuela, flows first a northeasterly, then a southeasterly, then a southwesterly, then a northerly, and lastly an easterly course, into the Atlantic, and is 1500 miles long. Where is Apure R.? Arauca R.? Meta R.? Guaviare R.? Caroni R.? Essequibo R. Demerara R.? BerbiceR. Surinam R.? Maroni R. Oyapock R.? Amazon R.? Ans. It is formed by the junction of the Tunguragua and Ucayali in the southeastern part of Ece ador, flows a general easterly course into the Atlantic, is 4000 miles, and 180 miles wide at its mouth, being the largest river in the world. Where is Trombetas R. Aniba R.? Negro R.? Branco R.? Padaviri R.? Casiquiare R? Ans. It is in the southern part of Venezuela, connecting the Negro River with the Oronoco, and is 150 miles long.-Uaupes R.? Japura R.? Apapura R. Putumayo R.? Napo R.? Curaray R? Tunguragua R. Ans. It rises in the western part of Peru, flows first a northwesterly,.then a general easterly course, unites with the Ucayli to form the Amazon, and is - long.-Huallaga R.? Where is Ucayali R. Ans. It rises in Lake Reyes in the western part of Peru, flows a southeasterly, then a northeasterly, and lastly a general northerly course, unites with the Tunguragua to form the Amazon, and is - long.-Paro R.? Javary R.? Jutay R.? Jurua R.? Purus R.? Madeira R.? Beni R.? Mamore R.? Branco R.? Guapore R.? To. payos R.? Tres Barras R.? Arinhos R. Xingu R.? Para R.? Ans. It is in the northeastern part of Brazil, flows a northeasterly course into the Atlantic, and, including the Tot cantins, is 1300 miles long. Where is Tocantins R.? Araguay R.? Gurapy R. Maranham R. Parnahiba R? St. Francisco R.? Diamond R.? Paraiba R.? Rio de la Plata Ans. It is formed by the junction of the Parana and Uruguay, flows a southeasterly course into the Atlantic, forming a part of the boundary between Buenos Ayres and Uruguay, and, including the Parana, is 2400 miles long.-Uruguay R.? Negro R. Parana R.? Paranahyba R? Rio Grande? Paraguay R. Tacoary R.? Cuyaba R.? Pilcomayo R. Vermejo R.? Salado R.? Dulce RI rerceroR. Saladillo R.? Colorado Rt Rio Negro? CamaronesR.? Port Desire R.? ~ res'o-grar'-day. t tah-kwah-reev. t dool'say. f ter-say'ro. 9 EUROPE. Square miles, 3,700,000.-Population, 235,880,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 63L. 1. EUROPE is the smalst, but the most enlightened, powerful, and thickly settled grand division of the earth. 2. It is inhabited almost entirely by civilized races of men. 3. The northern half, except parts of Norway and Sweden, is an imn mense plain; the southern half is generally mountainous. Questions.-1. What is Europe? 2. By whom is it inhabited? 3. What is the face of the country? What Ocean on the N. of Europe? Ac. What grand division of the earth on the E.? Ans. Asia. What sea on the S. Ans. The Mediterranean Sea. What ocean on the W? Ac. POLITICAL DIVISIONS. AIR~ —duld Lang Syne; 1 Europe, comparatively small, is boastful of her dower, Her intellectual eminence, her opulence and power; On every sea her navies ride, her banners are unfurl'd To civilize or subjugate all regions of the world. 2 Parent and nurse of useful arts, of boundless wealth possessed, Why is it that too frequently thy children are unbless'd l Extremes of wealth and poverty in every part we view, The wretched are the many there, the happy are the few. POLITICAL DIVISIONS. Norway, the capital 24, 8 S.E., 1. Naples, the capital 80 E., 81 S. Christiania... 9 N. is Naples... W., 92 E. Sweden, the capital is 40,26,9,10 2. Popedom,* the cap-. Stockholm.. 5 ital, the city of 80 M. & N Russia, the capital, St. 1 28, 32, 58, Rome. Petersburg.... 61. 80, a little Austria, the capital, ) 3. San Mari'no, the Repubic in Vienna.. 69, 70.- capital is San Ma. the N. E. ^ ]82 83. Popedom Turkey, the capitals 82 83 rino...... part Constantinople.. J Ppd Greece, the seat of go- 9 vernment is Athens. 9 67 S., 68 S. 4 Tuscany and Lu- 80I taly comprises nine 80, 81 tea, the capital is tDliv comprisions S.W.,92 Florence. J E., 91.. E., 79 S. E.' * Or States of the Church. 66 EUROPE. 67 5, Mod'ena, ) 80 N. W.,borders on Belgium, the) the capital is the W. of the N. capital is 53 S. E, 54 S. W. Mod'ena.. part of Popedom. Brussels.. 6. Parma, tlhe) N W 79 N Holland, the capital is Par- capital is the 53 E., 54 W. ma... Hague... 7. Lombardye Denmark, the S. E., 54 N. E. and Venicai 8 S. W., 67 S. EI capital, Co. 340SE., 5 N. E andVenice ^68 S. W., 67 S. E. SW. the capital is,. penhagen.. Milan...J _56, 55 M. & E., & 8 Sardinia, the 67 S., 79 N., 79 S. Prussia, the a detached part 54 capitl ist E., 91 N. E. capitalisBer- M. & S., lying on. lin... both sides of the 9. Mon'aco, 79, a small princ. _ River Rhine. the capital is pality in the S. par Germany,tthe 54, 55, 67, 68. Monaco f continental Sar- pital is Frankfort 54 S. E. i____ dinia.~Frankfort..) on the River Mayn. Switzerland, _ Berne, Lu- 67 M. & E., lies on 68 M. & N. W. A cerne,* and I the N. of Sardinia. Bavaria, the detached portion Zurich.*.J capital is Mu- (67 N.) lies on the France, the): nich.. N. of the E. part capital is Pa-. 6 of France. ris on the risneo theJ? Wurtemberg, 67 E., lying on the Seine... the capital is E., lying on ti ~o ~ ^~ --. ~the capital is f Spain,the capi Stuttgard Bavara. tal is Madrid! on the Mar 77 89. Saxony,theca- ) 55 S. E., lying on on the Man. pital is Dres. both sides of the zanares. den.,,.. Elbe. Portugal, the capital is Lis- 88. & N. 76 S. anover, the 5., 54. boan.'. capital is Ha- The west part lies nover.. on the Ems River. Wales,,the England and g Bad'en, the ca- 67 M. & N. E., & capital isLon- I52, (Wales 52 W.) pital Is Carls- lies on the N. of don. J...ruhe.. ) Wurtemberg. Scotland, the - c 67, N. of Baden, lies capital is Ed- 37 W. Hesse Darm. on both sides of inburgh. ~. stadt,thecap- the River Rhine, [relandtheca- E ital is Darm- and a part 54 S. E. Ireland, thetcap pital is Dub-51. stadt.,. on the N. E. of lin..J Frankfort. * Capitals. t Germany, an extensive country of central Europe, consists of 39 Independent States, united under the Germanic Confederation as established by an act of the Congress of Vienna, on the Sth of June, 1815. These States, each of which is independent in its own territory, are pledged not to attack, but to defend each other in war, and to submit their disputes to the decision of the Federative Diet, a body composed of members from the different states, which holds its sittings at Frankfort on the Mayn, and over which the Emperor of Austria presides.-See table of German States i Part Second. t karls'roo ~ ed'-in-bur-reh. 68 KEY TO PELTON9S OUTLINE MAPS. Hesse- Cassel, l Lippe. Schau- 54, a small division the capital is 54 S E. enburgethe ca. N. of Lippe-Det. Cassel.,. pital is Bucke- mold and on the S 54, 55, lies on the burg.. of Hanover. iolstei&L N. of Hanover Anhalt-Dessau, Holstein&Lau. along enburgGlu ck. along the River the capital is Elbe. Gluckstadt Dessau.. stadt. on the Elbe, Pop. Anhalt - 55 S. of M., on the 6000. thenhe Elbe in Prussia. thenthe capi- The capitals are, 1 67 N. W., 54 S. W. tal is Ccethen. Dessauin the S. Dessau in the S.E. It appears on the Anhalt Bern- CthenintheS.,Cethen in the S., map in t iv bg, two dvi- & Bernburg in the Luxemburg,the sions, the E. be- pital is Bern- S. W. capital is Lux- longs to Holland, burg... emburg. and the W. toSaxe- Alten. Belgium. The ca- burg, the capi 55, a small division pital is in the S. tal is Alten- in the W. part of E. part. burg. Saxony. Nassau, the ca- ) 54 S. The capi- Saxe-Weimarr pital, Wisba'. tal is near the the capital is den... Rhine.,, C i Weimar. ~r 55, 54, a small di- Saxe - Coburg,55. W The cap.. 1..,.i. ~1 1., t Iitals areWeirlarl in Brunswick, the vision lying in the the capital is the N. E., Gotha capital is S.. of Hanover, Gotha. theN.,Me in the N., & Mein. Brunswick.. consisting of two Saxe - Meinin gen in he W ingen in the W. & __ Jparts. P gen-Hildburg- W. of otha. Mecklenburg 55 N., borders on hausen, MeinSchwerin,b the N. E. part of ingen... Schwerin..)Hanover. Schwarzburg.i } Mecklenburg- 55, lies on the E. Rudolstadt, 55, a small division Strel'itz, New of Mecklenburg- Rudolstadt.. S. W. of Weimar. Strel'itz... Schwerin. Schwarzburgcraenburg, the 54 M., in the W. Son'dershau' 55, a small division capital is Old part of Hanover. sen, Sonders- in the S. W. of enburg.. J ehausen. Prussia. Reuss. Greitz,] Kniphausenc 54, in the capital is a small division 55 54, in the N. part Greitz. S. The capitals the capital, Oldenburg Greitz. S. The capitals Kniphausen. Reuss-Schleitz are Greitz in the the capital is E. & Lobenstein Upped - Det'. 54, a small division Lobenstein. in the W. mold, the cap- lying on the W. of Waldeck, he 54, a small division ital is Det- the S. W. part of capital is Ar'- in the N. W. part mold...J Brunswick. olsen...J of Hesse-Cassel. a:Low.en-burg. b shway.reent. c Kniphausen, according to Balbi, is a small, but indepen. Jifnt German state, containing 2859 inhabitants; but it has no voice in the Federative Diet dlip'peh. e shou'.en-burg. fko-ten. g sax-wy.mar. h go'.tah. i shwarts'-burg. j sons. ders-how'-zen. kruce-grytes. Iruce-schlites EUROPE. 69 Hesse - Hom. Frankfort, the) 54 S. E., a small burg,the cap- 54 S., between Nas- capital is Republic on both ital is Horn- sau & Frankfort. Frankfort. sides of the Mayn.;bu ___s g leJ -- Brem'en, the 54, asmall Republic Ioh en zollerna) 67 a small division capital is on the Weser, E. L Iechingeli in the S. WV. part Brem'en. of Oldenburg. Hechingen of Wurtemberg. g 55, a small Reechingen., The capitals areamburg, te a i s lh l Hechingen in the capital is public on the Sig~mairing~en, N., fin the S. of Holt Sigmarinen N., & Sigmaringen Hamburg. stein. Sigmaringen. J in the M.: en Lubeck,theca- 55 N. W., & lying 67, a small divisi i i Lichtensteine -, all division pital is Lubeck S N. E. of Hamburg. lihtens in, between the E. part the capital is of Switzerland & Va'dutz. J W. part of Austria. POLITICAL DIVISIONfL AIR;-Bonny Boon..1 8 Now be our geographic rhymes Then Mod'ena our verse enfolds, Transferr'd to European climes; A namesake town the sceptre holds; The grand divisions first we teach, To Parma then our course pursue, With the metropolis of each. Whose capital is Parma too. 2 9 Norway, a region bleak and cold, To Lombardy and Venice hie, By Christiania is controll'd; Where charming Mil'an meets the eye; Sweden, (that Charles the hero bred,) Sardinia sues for notice brief, Takes Stockholm for its chief and head. Turin among its towns is chief. 3 10 Russia in proud expansion sits, Then Monaco, with namesake town, And to St. Petersburg submits; (The last Italian state,) mark down. Austria, with its imperial crown, To Switzerland we come, where Berne Vienna takes for its chief town. Holds sway with Zurich8and Lucerne. 4 11 Turkey, in Southern Europe placed, France and its capital we gain, Is by Constantinople graced; The last is Paris on the Seine; Greece, once for arts and arms renown'd, To Spain we rapidly proceed, With glorious Athens still is crown'd. And its metropolis, Madrid. 5 12 To classic Italy we haste, And now for Portugal we steer, Innine divisions'tis embraced; Where Lisbon fair will soon appear; Naples comes first in our review, England and Wales we next behold, Its capital is Naples too. By London, (famous town!) controll'd. 6 13 Next to the Popedoni we repair, Scotland we reach, the "Land ofCakes' "1 mperial Rome" is regent there; The rule there Edinburghf takes; A line let San Mari'no claim, Ireland, tho' poor and much distress'd, Which gives its capital its name. Of beauteous Dublin is possess'd. 7 14 t We Tuscany and Lucca find And Belgium; (often doom'd to bleed,) Under one government combin'd; To Brussels has the rule decreed; Florence, the pride of Tuscan plains, Let Holland in the list be set, O'er both its regency maintains. Nor Hague, its capital, forget. a Hf ten.tsol-lern. b hek'ing-en. c lik'ten-styn6 d vah'doots e zu.rik. fedinborough 70 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 15 25 Let Denmark, on the Northern Deep, Then Anhalt-Dessau designate Itt court at Copenhagen keep; Where Dessau holds the helm of state Prussia behold, a warlike realm, The muse of Anhalt-Ccethen tells, And Berlin there may hold the helm. Whose government at Ccethen dwells 16 26 At Frankfort Germany locates On Anhalt-Bernburg next we call, The rule of nine-and-thirty states; Where Bernburg is the capital; Bavaria is our next resort, Saxe-Altenburg our rhymes embrace, Which still at Munich keeps its court. And Altenburg is its chief place. 17 27 ThenWurtemberg more westward greet, Let not our verse Saxe-Weimar slight, Stuttgard its governmental seat; O'er which to rule is Weimar's right; Next, Saxony, we turn to thee, Saxe-Coburg too in rhyme shall stand, And thy chief town, call'd Dresden, see. Where handsome Gotha takes command. 18 28 Lo Hanover, the nurse of kings, Saxe-Meiningen we next enroll, Its name to its chief city clings; Which bows to Meiningen's control, Bad'en, (so named from Baths,) we view, Then Schwarzburg-Rudolstadt we trace, Its capital is call'd Carlsruhe. And Rudolstadt is its chief place. 19 29 Hesse-Darmstadt lies upon the Rhine, But Schwarzburg-Sondershausen, thou Its rule to Darmstadt we assign; To Sondershausen's rule must bow; Hesse-Cassel next in place is met, Then with Reuss-Greitz the muse shall Where Cassel at the helm is set. At Greitz is held its ducal court. [sport 20 30 Holstein and Lauenburg succeed, Now to Reuss-Schleitz a place assign, Whose rule to Gluckstadt is decreed; Whose capital is Lobenstein; Next Luxemberg the muse shall name, The muse to Waldeck then repairs, Whose capital is call'd the same. Here Artolsen the sceptre bears. 21 31 On Nassau next our verse shall wait, Hesse-Homburg name among the rest, Wisbaden holds the helm of state; And Homburg with the rule invest; Brunswick to Hanover is join'd, Then Hohenzollern, tho' small sized, To Brunswick is its rule assign'd. In two divisions is comprised; 22 32 To Mecklenburg-Schwerin we glide, Hech'ingen, Sig'maringfen, they Whose rulers at Schwerin reside; Must each a namesake town obey. Then Strel'itz-Mecklenburg we gain, Proceed we now to Lichtenstein, And there New-Strelitz holds the rein. Its chief town Va'dutzt on the Rhine. 23 33 Then Oldenburg we must enroll, Frankfort, a small republic, note, Which bows to Oldenburg's control; Its rule to Frankfort town devote; Kniphausen* next the muse shall name, Then Brem'en in our route we find, Its seat of government the same. Whose rule to Bremen is assigned. 24 34 To Lippet-Detmold then we turn, Then Hamburg south of Holstein view And Detmold its chief town discern; Its capital is Hamburg too; To Lippe-Schauenburg we stray, Be Lubeck, (ruled by Lubeck,) view'd, WVhere Buckeburg maintains the sway. And here the German states conclude. Questions.-Name and point out each division with its capital. In what latitude is Europe? What countries are crossed by the parallel of 40" N. latitude? By the parallel of 45~? By the parallel of 50~? By the parallel of 55~? By the parallel of 60"'? By the parallel of 65c? By the Arctic Circle? In what zone is nearly the whole of Europe? In what zone is the N. part? What countries are crossed by the meridian of Greenwich or London? By the meridian of 5~ W. longitude? By the meridian of 50 E. longitude? By the meridian of 10~ E. longitude? By the meridian of 15~ E. longitude? By the meridian t 20~ E. longitude? By the meridian of 25~ E. longitude. * nip-how zen. t lip'peh. $ vah'doots. EUROPE. l7 OCEANS, SEAS, GULFS, BAYS, STRAITS, ANE CH GNNELS. Attlntic Ocealn,) L Gulf of Gen'oa, 79 N. E. 8000 m. 1. & W. of Europe. Gulf of Lyons. 78 E. 3000w...' ) - Strait of Gibral'. 88 S. E Arctic Ocean,. N. of Europe. tar, 15 m. in w. White Sea,. 13 S., 14. Bay of Biscay,, 65 S. W., 77 N TcheskayaaGulf. 15 M. 51 S. W., in the Sea of Azof, 200. Bantry Bay,. M. S. W. part of 73M.&S W. } ni. in 1. Ireland. Strait of Yeni.-7.. Galway Bay., 51 W. ca'le,h2 m. in w. 3' Donegal'gBay, 51 N. W. Black Sea, 760) North Channel,- 51 N.E., 36S.E. m. in 1... 84, 85. Frith of Clyde. 36 S.E., 37 S.W. Strait of Bos'. g Solway Frith,. 52N.W.,37S.W. Strait of Bos'-}:I51 N. E., 52 N. porus, 1- m. 83. E. Irish Sea,, 52 Sea of~ Matarlmora, )83 S. StGeorge's Chan- 151 E.,'Separates Sea of Mar'mora, ~ S. in0 w. in i.. the S. E. part of 150 m. in 1.., 83. St.George'sChan- the S. E. part of Ireland from the Strait of the Dar.S. W nel S W r of danelles, 83 S.. ~ S.W. part of ~~~~danelles, ~. ~ J ~Wales. Archipelago,.. 95 W., 94 E. SW ales Gulf of Saloni'ca.d 82 S., 94 N. Bristol Channel, 52S., & S of Gulf Egina, 94 E. of M.,S. & English Channel, 52 S., 65 N. W of NAthens. Strait of Dover. 53 S. W. ^ iies~ q94, & N. of t.he W Gulf of Lepan'to, Peninsula ofMo- North Sea, 450 38, 53. J rea. m. in w. ). 94 M.,&S.W. of Zuyder Zee,,, 54 W. Gulf ofNapoli. Egina Gulf. The Wash,. 53 W. Mediterranean - 90, 91, 93, 96.,S. Frith of Forth. 37 S. of M. Sea, 2250 m. 1. of Europe. Mo'ray Frith,, 37 N. of M. nGulf of Venice~ t81,-80 N. ). Skag'er Rack,,39 M. & E. Gulf of Venice,, 80 N. 7. 500 m.m ^ in 1 81,80 N.E.' Cattegat., 40 WV. Strait of Otranto, 81 S. E. BalticSea,800 41M. &S,42. Gulf of Tar'anto, 81 S., 93 N. m in 1. & N. W., 26 E. Strait of Messina.f 93 W Gulf of Dantzic, 56 N. E. 79 S E., sepa- Gulf of Ri'ga, 42 M. rates the Is of Gulf of Finland. 43 N., 28 S. fa'cio.. Sardinia &Cor-Gulf of Bothnia, 26 E., 27 N., 10 sica. 430 m. in 1. S. OCEANS, SEAS, GULFS, BAYS, STRAITS, AND CHANNELS. AIR —Juld Lang Syne. 1 2 Europe, thy Oceans, Seas, and Bays, The Arctic Ocean on the north, Thy Gulfs and Straits we chime; And White Sea next are named; And with th' Atlantic on the west, Tcheskay'a Gulf and Azof Sea, Begin the useful rhyme. Once as Maeotis famed. 4 ches.ky'.a. b yen'-ekah-lay. c Or the Channel of Constantinople. d sal-o-ne6 kah e nah'-Do-le f mes.se6-nah. g don-e-gaul. 72 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. 10 From hence through Yenica'le Strai, Gibralter Strait is interposed To the Black Sea we sail;'Twixt Africa and Spain; bnd soon the strait of Bos'porus, Then, by a northward passage, we And Mar'mora we hail. The Bay of Biscay gain. 4 11 Pass through the Strait of Dardanelles, Proceeding to the Irish coast, Where poor Leander died, We meet with Bantry Bay; And reach the Archipelago, Then Galway Bay and Donegal, On Turkey's southern side. Still farther north survey. 5 12 Proceed to Salonikca* Gulf, North Channel pass'd, in Scottish hounds Which Turkish lands comprise; We see the Frith of Clyde; Egi'na's celebrated Gulf, Then Solway Frith and Irish Sea Southwest of Athens lies. Successively are spied. 6 13 Lepanto's Gulf where Christians once St. George's Channel separates Defeated hordes of Turks; Th' Emerald Isle from Wales; The Gulf of Napoli behold, The muse then Bristol Channel sees, Renown'd for warlike works. And English Channel hails. 7 14 Mediterranean Sea we reach, The Strait of Dover separates In its dimensions great; The English shore from France; Then as we go to Venice Gulf, Next at North Sea and Zuyder Zee We pass Otranto Strait. Successively we glance. 8 15 Gulf Tar'anto in Italy, The Wash,-the Frith of Forth we pass, Northwestwardly inclines; At Moray Frith arrive; Messina Strait, a narrow pass, To Skager Rack and Cattegat, To Sicily adjoins. And Baltic Sea we drive. 9 16 Then Bonifacio Strait observe, And then awhile to Dantzic Gulf The Gulf of Gen'oa too, And Riga Gulf attend; And to the Gulf of Lyons next, The Gulfs of Finland, Bothnia, A westward course pursue. The catalogue shall end. Questions.-What is an ocean? Describe the Atlantic Ocean. See page 22. The Arctic Ocean. See page 22. What is a sea? Where is the White Sea? Ans. It is in the northern part of Russia, and is a part of the Arctic Ocean.-Tcheskaya Gulf? Sea of Azof? Ans It is in the southern part of Russia, and is 200 miles long.-Strait of Yenicale? Ans. It separates the Peninsula of Crimea from Circassia,t connects the Sea of Azof with the Black Sea, and is about 2i miles wide. Where is the Black Sea? Ans. It borders on the Southern part of Russia, on the eastern part of Turkey, on the northern part of Turkey in Asia, on the western part of Georgia,* and is 760 miles long.-Strait of Bosporus? Ans. It separates a part of Turkey in Europe from a part of Turkey in Asia, connects the Black Sea with the Sea of Marmora, and is 1I miles wide.-Sea of Marmora? Ans. It is between the southeastern part of Turkey in Europe and the northwestern part of Turkey in Asia, and is 150 miles long.-Strait of the Dardanelles? Ans. It separates a part of Turkey in Europe from a part of Turkey in Asia, connects the Sea of Marmora with the Archipelago, and is from 2 to 10 miles wide.-The Archipelago? Ans. It is between the eastern part of Greece and the western part of Turkey in Asia, and is usually called the Grecian Archipelago, Where is the Gulf of Salonica? Gulf of Egina? Gulf of Lepanto? Gulf of Napoli? Mediterranean Sea? Ans. It separates the southern part of Europe from the northern part of Africa, borders on the western part of Turkey in Asia, and is 2250 miles long.-The Gulf of Venice? Ans. It borders on the western part of Turkey, the southwestern part of Austria, and the northeastern part of Italy. It is a part of the Mediterranean Sea, and is 500 miles * sal-o-nee'lah. t See Circassia in Asia. T See Georgia in As a. EUROPE, 73 ing.-Strait of Otranto? Ans. It separates - from, and connects —— with - Gulf of Taranto? Strait of Messina? Ans. It separates- from -, and is a part ol the Mediterranean Sea.-Strait of Bonifacio? Ans. It separates - from, and is a part of-. Gulf of Genoa? Gulf of Lyonst Strait of Gibraltar? Ans. It separates the southern part of Spain from Africa, connects - with -, and is - miles wide.-Bay of Biscay? Ans. It borders on the west of France and the north of Spain, and is a part ot the Atlantic Ocean. Where is Bantry Bay? Galway Bay? Donegal Bay? North Channel? Frith of Clyde Solway Frith?' Irish Sea? St. George's Channel? Bristol Channel? English Channel. Strait of Dover? North Sea? Ans. It borders on -, and is - miles wide.-Zuyder Zee? TheWash? Frith of Forth? Moray Frith? Skager Rack? Ans. It separates th* northern part of Denmark from the southern part of Norway, and connects the Cattegat with the North Sea.-The Cattegat? Ans. It separates the northeastern part of Denmark from the southwestern part of Sweden, is connected with the North Sea by the Skager Rack, and with the Baltic Sea by the Sound, Great Belt, and Little Belt. The Sound is the eastern, the Great Belt the middle, and Little Belt the western passage. Where is the Baltic Sea? Ans. It borders on the eastern part of Sweden, the western part of Russia, the northern part of Prussia and Germany, and is 800 miles long.-Gulf of Dantzic? Gulf of Riga?, Gulf of Finland? Gulf of Bothnia? Ans. It is between the eastern part of Sweden and the western part of Russia, is the northern part of the Baltic Sea, and 430 miles long. PENINSULAS. Scandinavia, 9, 25, 40. so80,81S.& S.W. Jutland,.,. 39 S. E. taly,. 93 N. W. Crime'a.. 72 S. E. Spain & Portu- 77, 89. Morea,., 94 M. gal.. PENINSULAS. AIR-Haste thee, Winter.* 1 2 Sing we each Peninsula, Thou, Morea, art a piece European lands display; Of the classic ground of Greece; Scandinavia first is named, Next we Italy salute, Jutland next, by Denmark claim'd; Shaped, ('tis fancied,) like a boot; See Crimea, (nearly square,) Spain and Portugal we call Russia holds dominion there. Last and largest of them all. Questions.-What is a Peninsula? Where is the Peninsula of Scandinavia? Ans. It it in the northwestern part of Europe between the Baltic Sea and the Atlantic Ocean, comprising Norway and Sweden.-The Peninsula of Jutland? Ans. It is the western part of Denmark having the North Sea on the west, the Skager Rack on the north, and the Cattegat and Baltic Sea on the east.-Peninsula of Crimea? Ans. It is the southern part of Russia, and is nearly surrounded by the Black Sea and the Sea of Azof.-The Peninsula of Morea? Italy? Spain and Portugal? ISLANDS. Iceland,. 5, 6. Hit'teren Island.. 24 N. E. Qualoet Island,. 2 S. Funen Island,. 40 S. W. Soroet Island... 2 M. Zealand,... 40 S. & S. W. Sen'jen~ Island,. 9 N. the lrg'st. Mo'en Island. 40 S., 55 N. Loffo'den Isles,.. 8 N.E.9N.W. Fal'ster Island,.. 55 N. Elin'doen Island.. 8 N.R.9N.W. 55,nextW.of Ir~~~ w ~Laa'landjl Island,.r Lan'goen Island,. 8 N.. Langelan Island. lster Island Vigten Island,.. 25 N. W. I d in order. When shall we three meet again, &c. t quah' -lo. so'-ro. O sen' yan. I law'.,and 10 74 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 55 N. E., the N. hermi ) 94, ext W. of Ru'gen Island,. partof Prus- SyraI. sia. 94, next S. W. of Born'holm Island, 40 S. S. rpho Island, yra I. Oland Island, 41 W. 94 next S. E. of Siphanto Island.., next S. Eof Gothland Island, 41 E. Serpho 1. Dagoblsland... 42 N. Milo Island,,. W. of Siphanto Aland Island,. 27 S. W. Island. Karle Island,. S. E. Ionian Islands,i 94. & V., 93 Cyprus Island. 96 S.E. N.E. Candia Island,.95 S.W., 94 S..Cerigoksland. 94 S. 95, & N.E.ofthe Zante Island,.. 94 W. CarpathusIsland, E. part of Can. Cephalonia, 9, & next. dia Island. of Zante I. sle of Rhodes. 95, & N. E. -of Ithaca Island. 94, & next N.. Isle of Rhodes Carpathus. of Cephalonia. Isle of Samos,.95, nearest M. 94, & N.ofCeIsle of Patmos,. 95, next S. of Sa- Santa MauralI., phlonif, & W. mos I.' of the N.W. part Isle of Scio. Samos I Paxo Island,. 94 N. W Corfu Island.. 93 N. E. T''i iJad 95, next S.ofScio N _ Icarila Island Island. Malta Island,.. 92 S. E. Metec I sland.92, next N.W. of MetelincIsland,. 95,& N. ofScio I. Gozzo Island, 92,next Lem'nos Island.. 95 N. Malta. 94, a lare i. ne Pantellari'a... 92 S. of M. Ne 94, a large. near Negropont,.. 5 the E., & N. E. Sicily Island,, 92 E., 93 W. coast of Greece. Lip'ari Islands,. 92 N.E.93N.W. SkyrodIsland 94, & E. of Ne- UsticamIsland.. 92 N.;' gropont. Sardinia Island,. 79 S.E., 91N.E. TinoeIsland... 95 W. Corsica Island,. 79 E. 95, next S. E. of Elba Island... 0W.,the largest, My'oni Isl, Tino I. Balearic Islands, 90 N. & N. E. 95, next S. of Minorca Island, 90 N. E. Naxos Island,. y. ~ Myconi I. Majorca Island.. 90 N. Paros Island.. 95, next W. of 90N S. Naxos Island in vila Island, 0 Majorca. Antip'aros Island, order. Antip'aros Island, ) order. Formenteran. 90. & S. of Ivica. Amorgo Island. 95,thetwolargest Columbretes.. 90 N. W. Stampaliaflsland. nexo. o. Isle of Leon,. 88 S. E.; Naxosl.in order.t..T, a Scilly Islands,. 64 N. E. Andros Island,.94 E. Alderney Island. 65 N. Syraglsiand,,' 194 E., next S. of 65 N. & S. W.. o Syraglsland,. i 65 N. & S. W. of,Andros I. Guernseyolsland, 6Alderney.. 94, next N.W. of, e I Zeallsland. yra 1 Sark Island,,. 65, & S. of AlJersey Island.. derney in order. ae-sel. b dah'-go. cmet-e.leen'. dked-ro. c tee-no. fstam-pah-lee. g see-rah. a zee-ah i ther.me6ah. j The Ionian Islands, viz: Cerigo, Zante, Cephalonia, Ithaca, Santa Maura, Paxo, and Corfu, constitute the Ionian Republic, under the protection of Great Britain k cher'-e-go I sant-teli-mow'-rah. oos'-ti-kah. nfor-men.'ay'-rah o ghern'-ze EUROPE. 75 Isle of Wight,. 52 S. E. Lewis Island,. 36 N. E. An'lce I Island, 52,neartheN.W. North Uist.i. 36 M., the two coast of Wales, South Uist,.. largest. Isle of Man.. 52 N. W. Orkney Islands,t 37 N. AcTil Island,.} 51 N. W., 50 N. land.. 37N.,the largest Achil Isl,Mailand,. E.' ofthe Orkney Is. HebridesIslands,* 1 36, all theIs. W. Shetland Islands, 22 S. E. of Scotland.. 22. the largest of Isle of Skye...36 E. Mainland,. the Shetland s. Isle of Mull,. - 36, the largest I. Faroe Islands.. 21 M. S.ofSkye l. ISLANDS. AIRa-Haste thee, Winter. 1. 7 Isles of Europe,-'tis our aim, Patmos, we approach thy ground, All your titles to proclaim; Consecrated and renown'd; With cold Iceland we commence, Scio mark, a Grecian Isle, And due eastwardly from thence, Chios was its name erewhile; Qualoe Island shall we view, Next Icaria,I shall be seen, Soroe, Senjen Islands too. Then the Isle of Metelin. 2 8 Then Loffo'den Isles we post Lemnos, where the god of sleep On the bleak Norwegian coast; Once was feign'd his court to keep, Hin'doen is first of these, This and Negropont we note, Far away in northern seas; Then to Skyro Island float; Lan'goen will then appear, Tino Island next we trace, Next for Vigten let us steer. Then to Myconi give place. 3 9 Then let Hitteren be traced, Naxos now is to be named, Funen in the Baltic placed; Paros for its marble famed; Danish Zealand farther west, Then Antipa'ros we view, Moen Island with the rest; Amorgo, Stampalia too. Falster's insulated ground Andros see with forests crown'd, Is in Danish limits found. South of this is Syra found. 4 10 Laaland, Langeland: we gain, Now on Zea let us gaze, Both belonging to the Dane; Thermia then its shore displays; Rugen is to Prussia due, Then to Serpho~T let us speed, Bornholm, Denmark, falls to you; And Siphanto shall succeed; Oland is in Swedish bounds, Milo Island now survey, So are Gothland's fertile grounds. Bless'd with a capacious bay. 5 11 Now at Oesel] Isle we pause, Then Ionian Isles we show, Near the Gulf of Riga's jaws; Not forgetting Cerigo; This and Dago, Aland too, In the cluster just reviewed, To the hardy Russ are due; Zante Island we include; Karle Island we pass by, Cephalonia, Ithaca, And away to Cyprus fly. Santa Maura too survey. 6 12 Now to Candia draw near, Paxo soon o'er ocean smiles, Next will Car'pathus appear; Smallest of Ionian Isles; Rhodes our notice shall engage, To the Island of Corfu, Famed in the historic page; We a north-west course pursue; Samos, (now by Turkey claim'd,) Pause at Malta now awhile, Likewise is in history famed. Then proceed to Gozzo Isle. * Or Western Islands. t The Group. langel-and. i e'sel. ** wist. I Or Nicaria., Or Seqipbus. 76 KE Y TG PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 13 16 Then, north-westward let us go, Next is Formentera met, And Pantellaria* show; Southward of Ivica set; Sicily, we reach thy shores, Columbretes Isles appear, Where the grand volcano roars; Then to Leon Isle draw near; Isles of Lipari we see, Now to other seas we go, On the north of Sicily. And the Isles of Scilly show. 14 17 Then to Ustica we bound; In the English Channel now See Sardinia's spacious ground; Room for Alderney allow; North of this, nor far away, Guernsey in that channel view, Lies the Isle of Corsica; Sark and Jersey Islands too; Nearer to the Tuscan coast, Then the Isle of Wight we scan, Elba Island has its post. Anglesea and Isle of Man, 15 18 Ba earic Isles eve gain, Achil Island next we spy, Five their number, claim'd by Spain Hebrides, the Isle of Skye; In this group Minorca view, Mull is seen amid the mist, Here we find Majorca too; Lewis Island and North Uist; Here Ivicat likewise see, South Uist next appears-all these Tis the smallest of the three. Rank among the Hebrides. 19 Next on Orkney Isles we call, Mainland, largest of them all; Shetland Islands then we view, And their chief call'd Mainland too; Faroe Isles are next dispos'd, And the registry is closed. Questions.-What is an island? Where is Iceland? Ans. It is in the Atlantic Ocean west of Norway.-Qualoe and Soroe Is.? Ans. They are in the Arctic Ocean, near the northwest coast of Norway.-Senjen L.? Loffoden Isles, including Itindoen and Langoen Islands t Vigten I.? Hitteren I.? Where are Funen and Zealand Is.? Ans. They are in the southwestern part of the Baltic Sea, between the southern part of Sweden and the eastern part of the Peninsula of Jutland, and separated by the Great Belt. Funen is separated from the Peninsula of Jutland by the Little Belt, and Zealand from Sweden by the Sound.-Moen, Falster, Laaland, and Langeland Is.? Ans. They are in -, and south of Zealand.-Rugen I.? Bornholm I.? Oland 1.? GothlandI.? OeselI.? DagoI.? AlandI.? KarleI.? CyprusI.? Ans. Itis in -, south of the western part of Turkey in Asia.-Candia I.? Carpathus I.? Isle of Rhodes? Samos, Patmos, Scio, Icaria, Metelin, and Lemnos Is.? Ans. They are in the eastern part of the Archipelago, near the western coast of Turkey in Asia. Where is Negropont? Ans. It is in the western part of the Archipelago, near the eastern coast of Greece.-Skyro I.? Tino, Myconi, Naxio, Paros, Antiparos, Amorgo, Stampalia, Andros Syra, Zea, Thermia, Serpho, Siphanto, and Milo Is.? Ans. They are in the Archipelago, north of Candia. Where are the Ionian Is.? viz., Cerigo, Zante, Cephalonia, Ithaca, Santa Maura, Paxo, and Corfu? Ans. Cerigo is in the Mediterranean Sea, near the southern coast of Greece, and Zante, Cephalonia, Ithaca, Santa Maura, Paxo, and Corfu, are also in the Mediterranean Sea, near the western coast of Greece, and the southwestern coast of Turkey. Malta I.? Gozzo I.? Pantellaria? Sicily I.? Lipari Is.? Ustica I.? Sardinia I.? Corsica I.? Elba I.? Where are the Balearic Is. viz., Minorca, Majorca, Ivica and Formentera? Colunr bretes Is.? Isle of Leon? Scilly Is.? Alderney, Guernsey, Sark, and Jersey Is.? Isle of Wight? Anglesea Is.? Isle of Man? Achil I.? Where are the Hebrides Is. viz., Skye, Mull, Lewis, North Uist, Scath Uist, &c.? Orkney Is.? Mainland? Ans. It is the largest of the Orkney Is. Shetland Is.? Mainland? Faroe Is.? * pan-tel-lah-ree'ah. t e-vee'sah. wis. uRoPf. 77 CAPES. North Cape,. 2 E. Cape Palos.d. 89 E. Cape Sviatoi,a. 14 N. W. Cape de Gatt, 89 S. of M. Cape Matapan.'. 94 S. 88-in Spain near Cape di Leu'ca,. 93 N. Cape Trafalgar', the S. part of th ) 93-the S. point I. of Leon. Cape Spartivento of Naples. Cape St. Vincent. 88 S W. Cape Pas'saro.. 93 S. W.- Cape Carvoeiro, 88N.W. Cape Carvoeiro $8 N. W. Cape Sorel'lo,. 92 M. Cape Finisterre/ 76 W. N 91, the most S. Cape Ortegal',. 76 N. W. Cape Teula'da.. point of the I. Cape la Hogue,. 65 N. of Sardinia. Lands End,. 51 S. E. 91, the most S. Cape Clear... 51 S. W. Cape Carbona'ro.c E. point of the Cape Wrath 37 N C T Cape Wrath,& 37 N. W. _______ I. of Sardinia. 39-the S'W. Cape Corso, 79-the N. point The Naze,. point of Nor*Cape Cors, of Corsica. way. Cape St. Marti, I 90 N. W., an E. North Cape.. 5 M. point of Spain. CAPES. AIR —Fow gently, sweet Afton.g 1 Now the Capes European melodiously sound, And cold North Cape is first in this catalogue found, Then to Lapland proceeding, Cape Sviatoi* scan, On the south of Morea we find Matapan. 2 Cape di Leuca and Cape Spartivento appear, And to Pas'saro Cape we shall speedily steer; Cape Sorello and then Cape Teulada are traced, On the south of Sardinia the last shall be placed. 3 Then to Cape Carbona'ro northeastwardly sail, And Cape Corso in Corsica's Island we hail; Now we haste to St. Martin's, (a Spanish Cape that;) Then we pass by Cape Palos to reach Cape de Gatt. 4 On the Spanish coast too, we shall find Trafalgar','Tis a name much renown'd in the annals of war; Cape St. Vincent and Cape Carvoei'ro explore, Both are found upon Portugal's westernmost shore. 5 On the west coast of Spain we behold Finisterre, And to Ortegal Cape then more northward repair; Cape la Hogue we behold, then for England we steer, There Land's End we see, and in Erin Cape Clear. 6 Now away let us speed o'er the rough ocean path, Till we find, on the north coast of Scotland, Cape Wrath; Next we come to the Naze, which may signify "nose," Thence proceeding to Iceland, with North Cape we close. Questinns.-What is a cape? Where is North Cape? Ans. It is a northern point of Nor. way, extending into the Arctic Ocean.-C. Sviatoi? C. Matapan? C. di Leuca? C. Sparta a vee-ah-toi. btoolah'-dah. c ka'-bo-nah'-rah. d pahl-loc. eecar-vo-a —ro. f fin-is-tair'. g Araby's Daughter, Buy a Broom, &o. 78. KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. yento? C. Passaro? 0. Sorello? C. Teulada? C. Carboaar? C. Corso? C. St. Martin? C Palos? C. de Gatt? C. Trafalgar? C. St. Vincent? C. Carvoeiro? C. Finisterre? C. Ortegal C. la Hogue Land'sEnd? C.Clear? C. Wrath? The Naze? North Cape? MOUNTAINS. Dovrefielda Mts., 39 N.,24S.&E. CevenneseMts.,. 78 N. E. Scandinavian 2 9 10 Auvergne'fMts.,. 66 S., 78 N. Range,.. Montserrat.',, 78 S. UIral -Mts.. 34, 18. Sierra Nevadan, 89 S. Erzgebirge Mts., 55 S. E. 89-the highest Bohemian Mts, 68 N. & N. E,, Mt. Mulahacen', peak of the SiBohemian Mts.,.} cn ri X 69 N. W. erra Nevada. Carpathian Mts. 70 N. & S. E. ^ 88 E., 89 M., & Sierra Morena..,., Balkan' Mts. 81, 83.. 81, 8W. Mt. Etna,c.. 92 E. 93 W. o M 88 W.& N. E. Strom'boli... 93 N.W. Toedo Mt N W. 79 N. E., 80, 81 Sierra Estrella,i 76 S., 88 N. W. Ap'ennine Mts.,. S. & S.W.,93N. Mts. of Castile, 77 S. W., 76 S. w. ___' E. Mt.Vesuvius,cand 80 S. E. Cantabrian Mts., 76 N., 77 N. The Alps. e 79 N., 67 S. & S. Pyr'enees Mts. 78 M. &W.,77E. The Ap E., 68S. &S. E. Snowden Mt... 52 W. 67 S. W —in the Cheviot Hills,. 37 S. Mt. Blanc,.. ~ N. W. part of Grampian Hills,. 37 W. Sardinia. 20-in the S.part Vosges Mts., d 7 M. & N. Mt. Hecla. of Iceland. Jura Mts.... 67 M. & S.W. MOUNTAINS. AIR-From Greenland's Icy Mountains. The European mountains, The Apennines extending To harmonize we try; Through Italy, behold; May poesy her fountains Then see the Alps ascending, Of flowing verse supply; All comfortless and cold. At Dovrefielda she glances 4 In Norway's chill domain, Vesuvius, sometimes blazing, Then eastwardly advances With heaving pains is vex'd; To Scandinavia's chain. Mount Blanc, thy height amazing, 2 Shall claim our notice next. Now let our observation See Vosgesd and Jura standing To Ural Mountains change; With aspects grim and stern. Then be its destination Cevennes high peaks commanding, To Erzgebirgeb range. And Mountains of Auvergne. Bohemian Mountains murky, 5 The proud Carpathian chain, Lo Montserrat impending And Mounts Balkan' in Turkey, Above the grassy plain; Successively we gain. Nevadak see ascending, 3 The famous " snow-clad chain." The fanciful spectator And now, admired by many, To Etna now may go, Behold Mulahacen; And Strom'boli's red crater, Next onward to Morena, Forever in a glow. We urge our flight again. a Or Dofrafiel4. berts-geh-beer'geh. e Volcano. d vozh. e sa-venn'. fov-.ern g "Snow-clad Ridge." h mo-ray' -nah. i es-trel'-yah. j kas-teel' k The Sierra Nevada, so ar rah-nay-vah -dah Imoo-lah-ah-then't EtROPE. 79 6 7 Toledo Mountains Spanish Now in imagination, Some notice will invite, The Pyrenees we seek; And as the vapors vanish, And Snowden's elevation, Estrella is in sight. South Britain's tallest peak. Our course shall now be taken The Cheviot's summits taper, To Castile Mounts in Spain; The Gramplan's lost in mist, Nor shalt thou be forsaken, And Hecla, wrapp'd in vapor, Renown'd Canta'brian chain. Are last upon the list. Questions.-What is a mountain? Where are the Dovrefield Mts.? Ans. They are in the southern part of Norway. extending northeast and southwest.-The Scandinavian Range?* Ans. It is between Norway and Sweden, extending northeast and southwest, and is 7500 feet nigh. Ural Mts. Ans. They are an extensive chain between Russia and Siberia, extending north and south, and are 4000 feet high. Erzgebirge Mts.? Ans. They are between the northwestern part of Austria and the southeastern part of Saxony, extending northeast and southwest, and are about 100 miles long and 3900 feet high. Where are the Bohemian Mts.? Ans. They are between —, extending -, and are 4500 feet high.-Carpathian Mts.? Ans. They extend through the northern and northeastern part of Austria, form-the boundary between the southeastern part of Austria and a part of Turkey, and are from 6000 to 9000 feet high.-Balkan Mts.? Ans. They are a chain of mountains in Turkey, commencing near the Gulf of Venice and extending eastward to the Black Sea throwing off branches to the north and south, and are 700 miles long.- Mt. Etna I Ans. It is a volcanic mountain in the eastern part of the Island of Sicily, and is 10,870 feet high.-Strom'boli? Ans. It is a volcanic mountain on one of the Lipari Islands, nearly 3000 feet high. It has glowed incessantly for 2000 years, iA: flames are seen at night 100 miles distant, and it serves as a light-house to sailors in the-Mediterranean.. Where are the Apennines? Ans. They extend through the whole length of Italy from northwest to southeast, and are from 6000 to 10,000 feet high.-Mt. Vesuvius? Ans. It is a volcanic mountain in the Kingdom of Naples, 10 miles nearly E. of Naples, the capital, and is 3,890 feet high.-The Alps? Ans. They form part of the boundary between France and Sardinia, pass through the northwestern part of Sardinia, form part of the boundary between Sardinia and Switzerland, pass through the southern part of Switzerland, form part of the boundary between Switzerland, and Lombardy and Venice, and then divide into two ranges, one of which extends eastward into Austria, the other, forming most of the boundary between Lombardy and Venice, and Austria, terminates near the northern extremity of the Gulf of Venice They are one of the most extensive, and the highest mountain range in Europe. — Mount Blanc? Ans. It is in the northwestern part of Sardinia, and is 15,748 feet high, the highest peak of the Alps, and the most elevated mountain in Europe. Where are the Vosges Mts.? Ans. They are in -, and are 4,500 feet high.-Jura Mts.? Ans. They are -, and are 5,300 feet high.-Cevennes Mts.? Ans. They are in -, and'are 5,300 feet high.-Auvergne Mts.? Ans. They are in —, and are 6,470 feet high.-Montserrat? Ans. It is in -, and is 3,937 feet high.-Sierra Nevada? Ans. They are in - extending -—. Mt. Mulahacen? Ans. It is the highest peak of the Sierra Nevada, and is 11,658 feet high.-Sierra Morena? Ans. They are in —, extending -, and are 6,883 feet high.-Toledo Mts.? Ans. They are in -, extending —. Sierra Estrella? They are in —, extending -. and are 8,520 feet high.-Mts. of Castile? Ans. They are in -, extending -. Cantabrian Mts.? Ans. They are in -, extending, and are 11,200 feet high. Where are the Pyrenees Mts.? Ans. They form the boundary between —, extending from the Bay of Biscay to the Mediterranean, and are 11,318 feet high.-Snowden Mt.? Ans It is in —, and is 3,571 feet high -Cheviot HIills? Ans. They form part of the boundary between -, and are 2,658 feet high.-Grampian Hills? Mt. Hecla? See page 29. * Balbi applies the name "Scandinavian Chain" to the great mountain range which commences in the S. part of Norway and runs N. E., forming N.:of the 63d parallel, the boundary between Norway and Sweden. The Dovrefield mountains comprise the highest part of this chain in Nor. way, though the name is sometimes erroneously applied to the whole range. (See DOVREFIELD, in Baldwin's Gazeteer.) 6~0 EKEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. LAKES. Lake Miosen,, 25 S. W. LakePeipus,. 43 N. of M. Lake Wener,. 40 N. Platten-See,. e 69 M. l.ake Wetter. 40 N. E. 41 N.W. Lake Cela'no.6. 80 E. Lake Malar,.. 41 N. Lake Garda.. 68 S. W. Lake Silian,.. 25 S.. Lake Como,. 67 S. E. Lake Storsion.. 25 N.E. Lake Luga'no.f. next W. of Como Lake Enare,. 11 N. Lake Maggiore in order. Lake Imandra,b. 12 M. Lake Constance, 67 E. Lake Ulea... 28 N. 67, in the interior Lake Kal'la,, 28 M. Le L of Switzerland. Lake Pu'rus, 28 E. Lae Zurich. 67, next N. E. of Lake Top.. 29 N. E. r * L. Lucerne. Lake Onega,, 29 E. Lake Geneva,. 67 S. W. Lake Ladoga,, 29 S. W. LakeNeufatchel'.i 67, next N. of L. Lake Ilmen'.. 44 W. Weneva. LAKES. AIR-T-s MIrry Swiss Boy. 1I Now the lakes, yes the beautiful lakes we recite, All the lakes which in Europe are seen; And first Lake Miosen our eyes shall delight, Then Lake Wener most fair and serene. In Swedish ground Lake Wetter lies, And there Lake Malar charms our eyes; Lake Silian, Lake Storsion, open to sight, Then Enare, Imandra we meet. 2 Lake Ulea, Lake Kalla, Lake Purus, Lake Top, All of these and Onega we note; Then awhile at Ladoga perhaps we may stop, And a line to Lake Ilmen devote. Lake Peipusd is large in size,'Midst Russia's frozen fields it lies, Now a glance let the muse upon Platten See drop, On Cela'no in fancy we float. 3 Then a place for Lakes Garda and Como prepare, Next thy station, Lugano, we tell; Lake Maggiore, (" the large lake,") thy place we declare, As ancient Verba'nus known well; And now to Switzerland we tur-, See Constance, Zurich, and Lucerne; Lake Geneva our musical honors shall share And we finish with Lake Neufchatel.i Questions. —What is a lake? Where is Lake Miosen? Ans. It is in the southeastern part of Norway.-L. Wener? Ans. It is in the southwestern part of Sweden.-L. Wetter L. Malar? L. Silian? L. Storsion? L. Enare? L. Imandra? L. UIea? L. Kalla? L. Purus L. Top? L. Onega? L. Ladoga? L. Ilmen? L. Peipus? Platten See? L. Celano? L. Garda? L. Cmo? L. Lugano? L. Maggiore? L Constance? L Lucerne I L Zurich L. Geneva?. Neufchatel? t'meol-zen. b e-man'-dral, clad-o'.ga. dpa'-e-pooce o chay-lah'-no. floo-gah'-no g mad-jo'-ray. A or Leman. i nush-ah-lt'. EUROPE, 8J RIVERS. Miles Miles in L Location on the Map.t length. length. Glonmen R. 250 25W.,40 N.W. Khoper R., 325 61 S. Clara River, 250 40 N., 25 S. Voronezh'R. 175 60 E. Dahl River. 300 26 S., 25 S. E. DonetzR., 450 74 W., 73 N. LjusneaR., 200 25 E., 26 W. DnieperR., 1000 72 S. E. & N. In'dals R., 150 26M.,25N.E. DnieperR An'german 20 26 N W & Desna R. 400 59 E. & S.W. iver.. Pripets R.,, 425 58 M. U'meabR., 300 26N.E. Bog R.,., 425 72W.:,71N.E. Skelleftea 175 DniesterR. 500 71 E., 70 E. RiverW,83 N. W., 82 Lu'lea R. 200 9 E., 10 S. W.Danube R., 170083 N., Y M67 E kalixR.,.225 10 W.&S. PruthR., 400 71M. &S. Tor'nea R., 275 10 E. Ser'eth R., 250 71 S. W Kem'i R.. 17 11 W. 82N 70 S Ijoc River,. 200 11M.& S.W. Aluta. R, 2.0 Ulea R.,. 100 28 N. W. TheissjR.,. 450 70 W. &S.W. Onega R.. 325 30N.E. MaroskR., 300 70 S, D)wina R., 700 31 N.W. & E., March R.,, 150 69 N. ~5~ ^ ~32 W. )68 M,, flows N. VagadR., 250 31 M. I ser R.,., 150 &N.E. intothe Sookhona R. 375 31 S. E. Danube. 47 N.VW.32 S. 68 M.,flows E. Yoog R., W. Inn R.,300 N. & N.E. into Vitcheg'da 300 3 E., 33.. the Danube. River.,. iE,3SW ~'68S. of E., 69 Pine'ga R.. 350 31 N. E. S.E.&S.ofW., MezenefR., 425 32 N.E., 15 S. Drave R., 400 rises in 68 by' W. two branches, Vash'ka R., 200 32 M. & N.W. flows S. E. into Petcho'ra R. 625 34, 16. the Danube. Volga R.,.2100 75,62,46,44M. MuhrR69 W., 68.,.,47 S E. 4 48 S. S MuhrR * 200 flows E. & S.E. Kama R.,. 900 Ninto the Drave. ViatkaR.. 450 47 E. Save R.. 400 69 S. W. & S. Viatka R. 450 47 E. VetloogaR., 225 47 W. Morava R., 225 82 M. & N.W. Oka R.,,, 650 46 S., 60 N. Maritza R., 200 83 S. W. Moskwa R.. 250 45 S. Vadar'R.. 150 82 M. & S. Mcksha R. 150 61 N. 68 S. W., flows Soora R.,. 325 61 E.,62.N.W. Adige., 200 i S. W. & S. E. DonR...oo n 74M.& N.W., j into the Gulf of DenR.^. 100 i 60 S.E.&N.W. Venice. River, 300 61S. E. 67 S a laoos -nay. b a in Swedish sounds like the English o. e eyo. d vah-gah. e or Joug, fmez-aint. g ned-per, A neest'ter. ior Alouta. j tice. k or Marosch. l ee-zer m moor nad'-e-Je. 11 82 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Miles Miles in Location on the Map. in Location on the Map. length. length. Tiber R. 150 80 M. Rhine R 95 67 M. & N.,54 ______ine R, ~ u950 80,1ntheN.par S. & W., 53 E. Arno R.,. 150of Tuscany. Moselle R. 275 67 N. W., 54S 78 N. E., 67 67 N. E. in the Rhone R., 5 | S. W. flows' Neck'ar R., 150 W. part ofWir. through Lake temburg, & N. J Geneva. part of Baden. SaoneaR.. 200 67 W., 66 S.E. MaynR. 225 54 E., 67N. Ebro R., 400 78 S.W., 77 M. E., 68N.. Guadalaviar 125 8 E.77 Ems R.. 175 54 M. River, 89N.E.,7S.E. Weser R., 00 54 E. & S. E. Segura R.. 175 89 N. & N. E. Fulda R.,. 100 54 S. E. Guadalquivir 350 88 S. E., 89WV. Ebe R. 700 54N.E.,55 River,. _ &. S GuadianaR., 425 88 M., 89 N. SaalelR., 150 55 M. &S. Tagus R..57 88N. Mulde 25 55.,&nextE. Mulde R., 125 Mondego R., 125 76 S. & s. w of Saale R. Dourob R.,| 500 77W 76 S. of Moldau'R. 175 68N.E.,55S.E. our~., 00 M. SpreeoR.,. 275 55M.,E.,&S.E. MinhocR.. 200 76 M. Oder R, 475 55N.E. & E., including the 56 S. W. & S. Gironde R., 375 Garonne, 65 S. WartaP R..225 56 M. & W. E., 78 N. W. Vitula R., 550 56E., 57 W. & 77 N.E., 78 N. R, 5 S. W. Garonne R.. 325 W.,sourcenear BugqR.,. 250 57 M. & S. E. JM. Niemen R.. 400 42 S., 57 N. E DordogneR. 150 78 N. W.58N.W.,42 vilirR.,.1125 58 N.W.) 42 S. ) 78, and next S. E. Lot R. 225 Tarn R., 150 inE. of Dordogne Duna R., 450 43 S. rnR.,. 150 in order. 44 N. W., St. R 6 65 E.,66 M. & Neva R.. 35 Petersburg is LoiredR.. 675. S E., situated on it. VienneeR..1 200 66 5. W. VienneR.. 66 S. & W. Volkof'R.,. 125 44N. W. &N. 66 S. & W.1Masta'R., 200 44 E.&N.cCfIV. CherfR.,. 250 flows N. & W Masta'R., E.. into the Loire. 51, in the. 00l part of Ireland, gAl?ivr~ 25 66 S., flows N. Barrow R. 100 part of Ireland, AllierR i.. 225 nto the Loire. flows S. into the; Seine^R.,. 475 66 N. W. & E. J Atlantic. Marne R.,. 250 67 W., 66 E. Shannon R., 225 51 W. & NI. 53 S. E., in the 0 51, next N. of Scheldti R. 200 N. W. of Bel- Byne R.,. 1 Dubin.:67W.,66.E.,E Clyde R.. 75 N. W. into the M~ense R,, ~! 40 I gium.6rW6 N ~lye R 37 S. W., flows ^eu.,. 54 S. W. Firth of Clyde a sone. b or Duero. cmeent-yo. dlwar. ve-en'-na. f share. g al-le-ay. hsane orSchelde. j mine. k fool'-dah. sah'-le. n moolf-deh. nmol'-dow. ospray. po Wartha. q boog. r ve6-le-ah. EIJROPE. 83 Miles Miles I:.' Location on the Map. in 1 Location on the Map length.~ length.l )37 M., flows N. ) 37 S., flows E. Spey R.,. 100 E. & N. into Tweed R.. 00 into the North ) Moray Firth. Sea. ) 37 W., flows S. Humber R., 150 N. E, 53N. Tay R.,. 125 E. & E. into the 2 S. E.,3 ) North Sea. Thames R 225 5.53S. W. Severn R.. 2001 52 M. RIVERS. AIa-Bonny Doon. 1 9 Ye European Rivers fair, To Khoper, Voronezh advance, Our verse your varied charms extols, There Donetz, Dnieper, Desna, see; in northern climes commencing, where At Pripets, Bog, and Dniester glance, The swift Norwegian Glommen rolls. Then, Danube, let us turn to thee. 2 10 Clara and Dahl in Sweden rise, Pruth from the proud Carpathian Mounts There Ljusne* likewise has its source; Onward to meet the Danube glides; There Indals' flow the muse espies, Sereth, and then Aluta's founts And, Antgerman, thy rapid course. Pour forth their tributary tides. 3 11 Sweden, with rivers richly bless'd, The Theissll and Maros likewise go U'mea and Skellef'tea claims, TomeetwithDanube'sglist'ningwave; Delights in Lu'lea's sparkling crest, Thither the March and Iser flow, And Kalix, as a favorite, names. And thither speed the Inn and Drave. 4 12 To Tor'nea River next attend, To Turkish lands we now draw near, And Kem'i, watering Russian ground; The Rivers Muhr and Save pass by A glance on Ijot River bend, Then shall Morava's stream appear, Then to the banks of Uleat bound. And soon Maritza meets the eye. 5 13 Onega to the White Sea flows, Next Vardar, Adige~T are found, There Dwina's mouth we see expand; And then the famed Italian Po; Next Vaga swollen by Russian snows, See Tiber, (Roman stream renown'd,) And swift Sookhona shall be scann'd. And then to Tuscan Arno go. 6 14 Add Yoog, Vitchegda to the train Next we behold impetuous Rhone, Of Dwina's tributary streams;' Proceeding southward to the main, Then see Pinega and Mezene{ Eastward in France we find the Saole, Reflect the languid solar beams. But Ebro flows through fields of Spain. 7 15 Vashka, Petcho'ra next we reach, Lo Guadalaviar most pure, And Volga, Russian Rivers all; Segura, Guadalquivir, see; See Kama and Viatka,-each Trace Guadiana's source obscure, Is found in Volga's stream to fall. Then, Tagus, let us turn to thee. 8 16 Now to Vetlooga we pass on, Mondego claims a transient glance, To Oka, Moskwa, Mocksha haste; To Douro, Minho then pass on; Text languid Soora and the Don, Next on the western coast of France, And Medvieditsa may be traced. Gironde we reach, and fair Garonne * lo-oos'ne, to be pronounced in two syllables, almost like lyoos'nee. t ee'-yo. a in Swedish sounas like the English o. ~ mez-aln'. D tic. T air de-ie. * temZ. 84 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 17 21 Two tributaries to the last, Lo Rivers, Mulde, Moldau, Spree, The names Dordogne and Lot obtain; Then Oder's winding course behold; Tarn, Loire,Vienne, and Cher are pass'd, Warta and Vis'tula we see, To reach the Allier* and Seine. And Bug and Niemen's torrent bold. 18 - 22. Marne likewise runs thro' Gallic ground, Vilia and Duna are survey'd, But Scheldt to Belgium we assign; And Neva, swoll'n by Russian Thy name, oh Meuse, the muse shall snows; sound, Here icy Volkof is display'd, And celebrate the glorious Rhine. And there the languid Masta flows. 19 23 Rhine's tributary stream, Moselle, From these to verdant Erin leap, Pursues its course o'er Prussian plains; And reach the Barrow's grassy side; Of German Neckar next we tell, Shannon and Boyne shall Erin keep, And Mayn poetic note obtains. But Caledonia boasts her Clyde. 20 24 To North Sea, Ems and Weser run, The Spey and Tay to Scotland fall, And Fulda into Weser pours; On Scottish borders Tweed is traced; The German Elbe we must not shun, But Humber, Thames, and Severn, all Nor scorn to tread on Saale'st shores. In English limits are embraced. Questions.-What is a river? Where is Glommen River? Ans. It rises in the Dovrefield Mountains, flows first a southeasterly, then a southerly course into the Skager Rack, and is 250 miles long.-Clara R.? Dahl R.? Ljusne R. Indals R.? Angerman R.? Umea R.? Skelleftea R.? Lulea R. Kalix R. Tornea R. Kemi R. Ijo R.? UleaR.? OnegaR.I Dwina R.? Ans. It rises in the northeastern interior of Russia, flows a general northwesterly course into the White Sea, and is 700 miles long. Where is Vaga R.? Sookhona R.? YoogR.? Vitchegda R.? Pinega R.? Mezene R.? Vashka R? Petchora R.? Volga R.? Ans. It rises in the western interior of Russia, flows first a south easterly, then a northeasterly, then a southeasterly, then a southwesterly, and lastly a south. easterly course into the Caspian Sea, and is 2100 miles long.-Kama R.? Viatka R.? Vet. looga R.? Oka R.? Moskwa R.? Mocksha R.? Soora R.? Don R.? Medvieditsa R.? Khoper R.? Voronezh R.? Donetz R.? Dnieper R. Desna R.? Pripets R.? Bog R? Dniester R.? Where is the Danube R.? Ans. It rises in Baden, flows first a northeastly, then a southeasterly, then an easterly, then a southerly, then a southeasterly, then an easterly, then a northeasterly, and lastly an easterly course into the Black Sea, passing through Wurtemburg, Bavaria, Austria, and Turkey, forming part of the boundary between Austria and Turkey, Turkey and Russia. and is 1700 miles long.-Pruth R.? Sereth R.? Aluta R.? Where is Theiss R.? Maros R.? March R.? Iser R.? Inn R.? Drave R. Muhr R.? Save R.? Morava R.? Maritza R.? Vardar R.? Adige R.? Po R.? Tiber R.? Arno R? Rhone R.? Saone R.? Ebro R.? Guadalaviar R.? Segura R.? Guadalquivil R.1 Guadiana R.? TagusR.? Mondego R.? Douro R.? Minho R.? GirondeR.? Garonne R.? Dardogne R.? Lot R.? Tarn R.? Loire R.? Vienne R. Cher R.? Allier R. Seine R.? Marne RU Scheldt R.? Meuse R.? Rhine R.? Moselle R.? Neckar R.? Mayn R.? Where is Ems R.? Weser R.? Fulda R.? Elbe R.? Saale R.? Mulde R.? Moldau Rt? Spree R.? Oder R.? Warta R.? Vistula R.? Bug R.? Niemen R.? Vilia R.? Duna RI Neva R.? Volkof R.? Masta R. Barrow R.? Shannon R. Boyne R.? Clyde R.? Spey RI? Fay R.? Tweed R.? Humber R. Thames R. Severn RI * al-e-ay. sah'leh. ASIA. Square miles, 16,000,000.-Population, 450,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 28. 1. ASIA is the largest and most populous grand division of the globe. 2. It was the seat of some' of the most powerful empires of antiquity and the cradle of civilization, learning, and the arts. 3. Asia was the theatre of nearly all the great and interesting events recorded in the Bible. Here our first parents were created; here lived the patriarchs and prophets; here the ark rested after the flood; and here our Saviour was born, lived, and died. 4. The Asiatics are noted for transmitting their customs, manners, and institutions, unaltered, from age to age; and for centuries they have ap. parently made little advancement in the arts and sciences. 5. Asia is distinguished for the variety and value of its products. It supplies other countries with tea, produces the most fragrant plants, the most delicious fruits, many of the most valuable drugs, and the finest gums, spices, and perfumes. In the quantity, variety, and beauty of its gems, and in the richness of its metals, it excels all other parts of the earth. The southern part conceals in its bosom the most beautiful diamonds, while its waves flow over the purest pearls and corals. Questions.-1. What is the comparative size and population of Asia? 2. What was it formerly? 3. What events occurred there? 4. For what are the Asiatics noted? 5. For what is Asia distinguished? With what does it supply other countries? In what does it excel all other parts of the earth? What ocean on the N.? On the E.? on the S.? What grand division of the earth on the W. & N. W.? What mountains divide Asia from Europe on the N. W.? Ans. The Ural or Oural* Mts. What grand division on the S. W.? Ans Africa. What sea separates Asia from Africa? Ans. The Red Sea. What isthmus connects Asia with Africa? Ans. The Isthmus of Suez, (63 S. W.) AIR —.uld Lang Syne. Land of the East what great events upon thy records shine Stupendous works of Providence and gifts of grace divine In Asia, on the holy mount, Heaven's mandates were reveal'd, In Asia too, on Calvary, was our redemption seal'd.. ~~~~ 2 There Eden smiled, where misery now extends a horrid shade, There most degraded men abide where man was perfect made; The land which gave religion birth, idolatry maintains, And where the sun of science rose, the night of ignorance reigns. * It should t* observed that a large number of the names of Asia and Africa (as well as many in Russia) are often written variously, even by the best geographers. We would particilarly re' fer those teachers who may be desirous of understanding this important but somewhat perplexing subject, to the': TABLE OF DIFFERENT SPELLINGS," at the end of the Introduction, in Baldwin's Pro. nouncing Gazetteer; and also to the remarks on pp. 28 and 29 of the same wwk. 85 86 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. POLITICAL DIVISIONS. Siberia,* the capital is 20 28 Aghaistan the cap. 66 M. & Omsk..,. 2'' ital is Cabool.** 6. Chinese Empire, corn- 54, 58, 68, IndependentTartarytt prises four divisions. 83. inhabited by hordes. 51, 52. 1. China, the capital 70, 71, 82, of Tartars.. is Pekin'..... 83. Khi'va,the capital is 51 E. & S. 2. Thibet,t the capi-. 69 S., 68 S., Khiva... E. talis Lassa... 67 E. Khokand',f thecapital 52 E. & S. 3. Chinese Tartary,) is Khokand.t E inhabited by roving 54, 56, 58. Bokha'rattthecapital, 66 N. W., Tartars... ) Bokha'ra... 52 S 4. Core'a, the capital, 1 72 N. & N. Persia, the capital is 65 64 E Kingkita'o.. E. Tehran'... Empire of Japan',4 the 73, 74 N. Arabia,]] inhabited by 75 N.E., 76, capital is Yeddo.~. W., 60. tribes of Ar'abs.. 77, 87. Anam, the capital is 93 M., N., &.He c. 75 N. & E. Hue. @..... S.. Hedjaz,~~the capi. 76 W. & Hue. _' tal is Mecca... Siam, the capital is 93 W., 92 is MecS.W. Bangkok'.... E. 2. Yem'en,~~ thecapi. 87 M. Malac'ca, the capital, 103 W. & tal is Sanaa'.. Malacca.,.. S. 2. Oman',~~ the capi- 77 M. & S Birma, the capital,? 81 M. & S., tal is Muscat'. E. Monchoboo'... 92 N. 4. Nedj'ed,~~ the capi- 76 M. & S Hindostan' the capital, 9, 80, 90 tal, Derreyeh.l.N. CFalcutta.1T. ^~63 M. & N., _alc t Calcutta.~f.. Turkey, the, capital, 63 M. & N, Beloochistan'^ the cap. 78 XN. Constantinople..' 5w. ital is Kelat'..... POLITICAL DIVISIONS. AIa —.uld Lang Syne. 1 2 Now to the Asiatic clime Beginning at the north extreme Our labors are address'd; Fast by the Arctic Sea, its chief divisions all shall be Siberia, ruled by martial Omsk, Melodiously express'd. Shall here recorded be. * Or Russia in Asia.-The territory which lies between the Caspian Sea (50 E.) and the Blaek Sea (49 MI.) is called Caucassian Russia. The country lying along the northern side of the Caun cassus Mountains is called Circassia; that along the southern side, Georgia. t The western part of this division is called Little Tlibet. * The Empire of Japan consists of several large and a great number of small islands. ~ Or Jeddo. II Malacca, in the southwest part on the coast. 1] Calcutta, on an arm of the Ganges. (80 S. E.) ~ Cabool, in the E. part. (66 E.) it Independent Tartary is divided into a number of independent states or khanats, which vary greatly in extent and population. and are governed by chiefs or khans. The principal khanats are Khivah, (kee-vah) Khokand, and Bokhara. it or Khokan. i~ Arabia, from the earliest ages, has been divided into numerous independent tribes and states. Each tribe is under the government of its own chief or sheik, who exercises patriarchal authority The principal states are Hedjaz, Yemen, Oman. and Nedjed. 11l Or Deraye. *** hoo-ay'. a beloo-chis-tau' USIA. 87 -~s8:~~ 9 The Chinese Empire farther sotam Afghanistan is now behela, In four divisions lies; Its capital Cabool; China the first, and there Pekin See Independent Tartary, A capital supplies. Where roving Tartars rule. 4 10 Thibet, with Lassa its chief town, Three Tartar states invite our song; Is stationed farther west; Khiva, with namesake town, [wears Then Chinese Tartary appears, And Khokand next, where KhoKand By roving tribes possess'd. The governmental crown. 5 11 Corea, by Kingkitao ruled, Bokhara third; Bokhara there The fourth division makes; As capital we scan; Then comes the Empire of Japan, Then Persia claims attention next, The rule there Yeddo takes. Its capital Tehran'. 6 12 Anam, or Cochin China see, Arabia next, and its chief states, Where Huea takes command; In number four, we greet; Siam, by Bangkok ruled, shall then Hedjaz is first and Mecca is More southwardly be scann'd. Its governmental seat. 7 13 Malacca next we reach, and find Then Yemen takes the second place, Malacca there holds sway; Sanaa' there holds the sway; Then Birma and its capital, And Oman, governed by Muscat, Call'd Monchoboo, survey. Is third in this array. 8 14 Behold the land of Hindostan, Nedjed, by Derreyeh:controll'd, Calcutta rules o'er that; The fourth division makes; Beloochistan will then appear, Last Turkey comes, and there the rule Its capital Kelat. Constantinople takes. Questions. -What are the political divisions of Asia? Name and point out each division with its capital. In what latitude is Asia? In what zone is the greater part of it? In what zone is the southern part? The northern part? What divisions are crossed by the parallel of 10" N. latitude? By the parallel of 200 N4 latitude? By the parallel of 30" N. latitude? By the parallel of 40Q N. latitude? By the parallel of 50~ N. latitude? By the parallel of 60~ N. latitude? What divisions are crossed by the meridian of 40" E. longitude? By the meridian of 50~ E. longitude? By the meridian of 60~ E. longitude? By the meridian of 80~ E. longitude? By the meridian of 100~ E. longitude? By the meridian of 110~ E. longitude? OCEANS, SEAS, GULFS, BAYS, STRAITS, AND CHANNELS. Pacific Ocean, 11000 E of Asia. Sea of Kamtchat'ka,e 47, 31. m. 1. & 7000 w.. Gulf of Anadeer',. 30 M. & E. Indian Ocean, 5000. A. GulfofPenjensy.. 29 M. m. 1. & 4000 w.. Sea of Okhotsk', 1200 44, 45, 60 Arctic Ocean,... N. of Asia. m 1. & 700 w... N. Sea of Kara,c... 19 N. W. PerousefStrait,..60 W. Gulf of O'bi.. 20 N., 5 S. a o 73 N., 59 S. ~ ~-Sea of Japan ) ~. >s YenisedGulf,.. 6 S.'' J &E. Gulf of the Le'na, 11 S. & M. Channel of Tartary. 4 S. W., 60 Behring's Strait.. 32 N. - N.W. a koo-ay'. b der-ay.eh. c kah-.rah. d yen-e-sayr-e. a or Kamtsahatka. fpe-rooz' 88:JKEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Strait of Matsmay,a. 60 S. W. Gulf of Ak'aba,c.. 75 N. Yeddo Bay,.. 73E. Dead Sea.... 63 S. Strait of Core'a... 72 E., 73W. Mediterranean Sea,. 62 E., 63W Yellow Sea,.. 72 M. & N. 63,theN.E. 7 7IeN.E El, 72 part of the Petchelee' Gulf, 71N E 72 Gulf of Scanderoon', tedite N.W.' Mediterra. Eastern Sea...84 N.,72 S. J nean Sea. Strait of Formo'sa,. 83 E.,84W. Archipelago.d.. 62 N. Channel of the Junks, 83S. W. 94 Strait of the DardaI N. W. nelles, from 2 to 10 48 S., 62 N. Gulf of Tonkin'.b. 93 N.E. m. in w... China Sea, 1500 m. 1. Sea of Marmora, 15048 E. &700 w.... in... Gulf of Siam,.. 93 S. W., 48S.E.,con103 N.W. nects the Strait of Malac'ca,.103 S. W. Strait of Bos'porus,e Sea of MarGulf of Martaban'.. 92 M. 1i m.in w. mora with Bay of Bengal', 1350? the Black m.w. 9192. Sea. Gulf of Manaar...100 IN. E. lack Sea, 760 m. 49 M., W. Arabian Sea,.. 8978. * E. Gulf of Cambay'. 79 S. W. 49 M., conGulf of Cutch,. 78 S. E. nects the 7Strait of Yenica'lef2B Gulf of Or'mus,. Black Sea I 77 E. m. in w..... Strait of Ormus.. 77 N with. te Persian Gulf,. 76 ________ SeafAzo..riN.E. Sea of Azof, 200 m. 4 Gulf of A'den, 87 S. E. in 1. StraitofBab-el mandeb 87 S. Caspian Sea, 800 m. 50 E., 51 W. Red Sea, 1400 m. in. 87 W., 75. in..... and S. W. Gu lf Sz...*75 N. W. Sea of Aral, 290 m. 61 order. Sandwich — Concord- ) rBarnstable — Charlestown — Rochester-' ChaLynes- next N. E. of Cambridgein ew Bedford- next S of Barnstable in Salem — Dartmouth- SIpswich- next N. of Salem Falmouth-next E. of Dartmouth. Newburyport- $n Yarmouth-) Marblehead-nearly S. of Salem. Chatham- next N.E. of Falmouth in order Gloucester-nearly N. E. of Marblehead. Orleans- ) Andover-next N. W. of Charlestown. Wellfleet- n N f r Haverhill-next N. of Andover. Truro- et. W. of r Weymouth-nearly S. of Boston. Provincetown-r. Hingham-E. N. E. of Weymouth. Nantucket-on Nantucket Island. Cohasset-nearly E. of Weymouth Edgarton — on Martha's Vineyard from E. to Tisbury- 5 W. in order. Roxbury-next S. W. of Boston. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 125 Stoughton- ) Amherst-nearly IV. of Barre. Taunton- next S. of Roxbury in order. Ware- Fall River- ^) Sturbridge —- next S. E. of Amherst in order. Pawtucket-near S. W. of Taunton. Warren- ) Mansfield- next N. W. of Taunton in Springfield-on the E. bank of Conn. R. Medway- order. Westfeld-next W. of Springfield. Dedham-next N. E. of Medway. West Springfield-) on the W. bank of Connr Worces ter*. on the Rail Road next W. of Northampton- River, above Spring. - Boston. Greenfield- field in order. Mendon —next S. E. of Worcester. Adams- next W. of Greenfield in Sutton-nearly S. of Worcester. Williamstown — order. Oxford- next S. W. of Worcester in Pittsfield- next S. of Williamstown in Southbridge- s order. Lee- 5 order. Framingham- next N. E. of Worcester in West Stockbridge-S. W. of Pittsfield. Lowell- order. Stockbridge — Fitchburg-next N. of Worcester. Great Barrington — rinext S o r ck Barre-next N. W. of Worcester. Sheffield-n or RHODE ISLAND. Sqnare miles, 1250. —Population, 147,549 —Pop. to sq. m., 118. Rhode Island, which of all the States is found to be the least, Has Massachusetts on its north, and likewise on its east; Upon its south the sea appears, and Narraganset Bay, And lastly on its western side Connecticut survey. 1. Rhode Island is the smallest state in the Union, and derives its name fron the beautiful island of Rhode Island in Narraganset Bay. 2. It is extensively engaged in manufactures, and, except the northern part, is a good grazing country. PROVIDENCE, one of the capitals, on Providence River, at the head of Narra. ganset Bay, is the largest town in the State, and the seat of Brown University. NEWPORT, the other capital, in the S. W. part of the beautiful and highly cultivated, island of Rhode Island, is about 5 miles from the sea, and has one of the best harbors in the world. The beauty of its situation and the salubrity of its climate have rendered it a favorite summer resort for persons from warmer climates. Questions.-1. What is the comparative size of Rhode Island, and from what does it derive its name? 2. In what is it extensively engaged, and what is the general character of the soil? What is said of Providence? Newport? CITIES AND TOWNS. capitals. Providence, on Pro- East Greenwich — S. of Providence in PROVIDENCE- vidence River, at the head South Kingston- t order. PROVXD^~N E-.of Narraganset Bay. New- Coventry- on W. side of the State NEWPORT — port, on the island of Rhode North Kingston — from N. to S. in order. J Island. Tiverton-N. E. of Newport. Smithfield-N. W. of Providence. Bristol — N.of Newport in rder. CONNECTICUT. Square miles, 4674.-Population, 370,913.Pop. to sq. m., 79k. Connecticut is on the north to Massachusetts joined, And by Rhode Island on the east, its limits are defined; Along its southern boundary, extends Long Island Sound, And on its west extremity, may New York State be found. 1. Connecticut is celebrated for her common schools, and for the intelligence, morality, and industry of her citizens. 2. The fund appropriated for the support of common schools, exceeds $2,000B *woo I -ter, 126 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS, 000, and, in propoition to the population, is larger than the school fund of any other State. 3. No New England State has sent so many of her children, or so large a share of intellectual wealth, to the Western States, as Connecticut. 4. The people depend for subsistence chiefly on agriculture and manufactures. HARTFORD, one of the capitals of the State, is situated on the W. bank of Connecticut River, at the head of sloop navigation, and is the seat of Washington cllege. NEW HAVEN, the other capital, is beautifully situated at the head of a small bay opening into Long Island Sound. It is even elegant in appearance, and is noted as the seat of Yale College, which, for many years, has had more students than any other in the United States. Questions.-1. For what is Connecticut celebrated? 2. What is said of the school fund? 3 Of emigration to the Western States? 4. Upon what do the people chiefly depend for subsistence What is said of Hartford? New Haven? CITIES AND TOWNS. capitals. Hartford, on the Mansfield — W HA R citl W. bank of Connecticut R. Ashford — next nearly N. W. of Wind HARTFORD — Ham in order. NEW HAVEN- New Haven, at the head Stratford- n of a bay of Long Island Thompson- near the E. line of the State Sound. Killingly — N. to S. in order. Wallingford-next N. E. of New Haven. Stonington- t Simsbury- next N. W. of Hartford in Pomfret-next'S. W. of Thompson. Granby- order. Guilford-next S. E. of New Haven.,Suffd- on W. bank of Conn. R. above Milford-next S. W. of New Haven. Hartford. Derby-next N. W. of Milford. Wethersfield- on and near the W. bank of Watebury- next N. of Milford in order. ddletown- Conn. R., below Harwintor -t aam in order. Watertown- next S. W. of Harwinton Saybrook- j Woodbury- in order. on the E. bank of Conn. R. near its New Milford- ) n Lyme — mouth. Litchfield —)on the E. side of Housatonic East Haddam — Cornwall-> R., N. of New Milford in Chatham — i....Canaan — ) order. Glastenbury- t on Rt e E. ank of Connec- Sharon- on the W. side of H-c R.. N. of East Hartford-'cut Rver, above Lyne Salisbury- New Milford in order. East Windsor — o Greenwich-in S. W. corner of the State. Enfield- J Stanford- New London~- next near N Lyme Norwalk- next N. E. of Greenwich in Norwich- next nearly N. E. of LymFairfield- order. W.indham- ) in order. Bridgeport — J Danbury- next N. W. of Bridgeport in Newton- ) order. MIDDLE STATES. NEW YORK. Square miles, 48,500.-Population, 3,098,818.-Pop. to sq. m., 631. North of New York is Canada and bright Ontario Lake; Vermont, Bay State, Connecticut, its eastern boundary make; New Jersey, Pennsylvania both, compose the southern bound, And on the west both Canada and Erie Lake are found. 1. New York is the first State in the Union in population, wealth, political importance, and public improvements. 2. Her canals and railroads are on an extensive scale, and of more value than those of any other state. 3. The Hudson River and Erie Canal open a water communication through the interior of the State between the Atlantic Ocean and the great lakes. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 12' 4. The eastern part of the state is hilly and mountainous, and best adapted to grazing; the western part, except near the southern boundary, where it is hilly, is either level or undulating, and finely adapted to the growth of wheat, the staple production of the state. 5. Salt springs are numerous, and supply a large part of the state and the Western States with salt. The most noted are at Salina and Syracuse. 6. The mineral springs at Saratoga and Ballston are the resort in summer of the sick, the gay, and the fashionable, from all parts of the U. States, and the waters are extensively exported to other countries. 7. The delightful and picturesque mountain and river scenery of New York, and the beautiful sheets of water presented by the surface of her numerous lakes, attract the attention, and delight the eye of every traveller. 8. The entire waters of Niagara River, which form the outlet of Lake Erie, and constitute the great outlet of the upper lakes, are precipitated over a precipice 160 feet high, with a solemn and tremendous roar, forming the Niagara Falls -the grandest and most stupendous cataract on the globe. A great number of admiring and delighted visiters, the fashionable, the opulent, and the learned, here assemble, in the summer season, from all parts of the civilized world, to gaze upon one of the most fearfully beautiful and sublime exhibitions in nature. An American poetess has well said of Niagara"Flow on for ever, in thy glorious robe Of terror and of beauty! God hath set His rainbow on thy forehead, and the cloud Mantles around thy feet. And he doth give The voice of thunder power to speak of Him Eternally-bidding the lip of man Keep silence, and upon the rocky altar pour Incense of awe-stricken praise." ALBANY, the capital, is situated on the W. bank of the Hudson, and is the terminating point of the Erie and Champlain canals, and of several railroads. New York is situated at the mouth of Hudson River, on a spacious bay, which forms one of the finest harbors in the world. In population, wealth, and commerce, it is the largest city in America, and the second commercial city on the globe. Questions.-1. In what respects is N. York the first state in the Union? 2. What is said of her canals and railroads? 3. The Hudson River and Erie Canal? 4. The surface? 5. Salt springs? 6. The mineral springs? 7. The scenery? 8. Of Niagara River? What is said of Albany? New York? CITIES AND TOWNS. ALBANY-the capital, on Hudson R. Cazenovia-next S. E. of Syracuse. Catskill- IthacaSaugerties- Ovidth- next N. W. of Owego in order KiNewbur- next S. of Albany in order. Auburn-next N. E. of Ovid. Newburg- Waterloo-next N. of Ovid. West Point- Penn Yan-next W. of Ovid. Piermont- J Bath-next S. W. of Ovid. Goshen- ) Elmira-next S. of Ovid. Monticello — next N.W. of Piermont in order. Buffalo-at the E. end of Lake Erie. Liberty- ) Black Rock-nearly N. of Buffalo. Middleburg~ ) Dunkirk~ \ Harpersfield — next S.W. of Albany in order. Mayville -- order. Delhi- Jamestown-nearly S. of Buffalo. Schoharie- next E. of Jamestown in order. Cooperstown- } Y ~lueban= next E. of Jamestown in order. Cooperstown- uba- Cherry Valley-next N. E. of Cooperstown. Ellicottville-nearly S. E. of Buffalo. Binghampton-next S. W. of Cooperstown. Angelica-? next E. of Ellicottville in Owego-next WV. of Binghampton. Hornellsville- 5 order. Oxford- Attica-next E. of Buffalo. Norwich — next N E. of Owego in order. Warsaw-next S. E. of Attica. Truxton —next N. W. of Norwich. Le Roy-next N. E. of Attica. Cortland- ] EBatavia- next N. of Attica in order Syracuse — next N. of Owego orde Rochester-on the Genesee R., near its mouth. Salina — J Geneseo-on the Genesee R. a-ove Rochester 128 KEY TO I.ALTON S OUTLINE MAPS. Albion- ) Louisville-next N. E. of Ogdensburg. Lockport-t next W. of Rochester in order. Canton- Lewiston-) Potsdam- t nearly N. E. of Gouvernem Canadaigua- next nearly S. E. of Roches- Malone- r in order. Geneva- 5 ter in order. Champlain- J Schenectady- Plattsburg-nearly S. of Champlain. Canajoharie — Westport~' _Canajoharie- jWestport- on Lake Champlain, S. of Herkimer- on the Mohawk River west- Crown Point- Plattsburg m i orde Utica- r ward from its mouth in order. Ticonderoga- Plattsburg i order, Whitesboro- Elizabethtown-S. W. of Westport. Rome- J_ )on the E. bank of Hudson Clinton-next S. W. of Utica. roy — R., next above Albany in Ballston-? nearly N. of Schenectady in Lansigburg — order. Saratoga- order. KinderhookJohnstown-next W. of Saratoga. Hudson- on and near the E. bank o Wells-next N. W. of Saratoga. Rhinebeck- Hudson R., next below Caldwell-N. of Saratoga. Poughkeepsie- Albany in order. Sandy Hill- next N. E. of Saratoga in FishkillWhite Hall- 5 order. New York-at the mouth of Hudson R. Salem-nearly E. of Saratoga. White Plains — nearly N.E. of New York in Trenton- ) Bedford- order. Leyden- nearly N. W. of Herkimer in Carmel-next N. of Bedford. Turin — order. Brooklyn-opposite NewYork on Long Island. Martinsburg — Jamaica-' Watertown- N. W. of Martinsburg in N.Hempstead- Brownsville- order. Hicksville — on Long Island, nearly E. Sackett's Harbor-nearly S.W.of Brownsville. River Head- of Brooklyn in order. Pulaski-. Sagg Harbor Oswego- next S. W. of Martinsburg in East Hampton-J Wolcott- r order. Islip-on the S. coast of Long I. Lyons- J yster Bay- o Gouverneur- nearly N. of Martinsburg in Huntington — on the N. coast of Long IordesNEWOgde u order. reenportNEW JERSEY. Square miles, 7950.-Population, 489,868 -Pop. to sq. m., 61. New Jersey's bounded by New York upon its northern side, Upon its east New York is seen, and the Atlantic tide; Southward the Bay of Delaware upon its border sweeps, Its west the River Delaware from Pennsylvania keeps. 1. The southern part of New Jersey is low and level, and chiefly a sandy pine. Darren; the central part has an undulating surface and fertile soil; the northern part is hilly and mountainous, but a fine grazing country. 2. The mountainous regions abound in iron ore, from which large quantities of iron are made. 3. Farming is the chief occupation of the inhabitants. Garden vegetables, peaches, apples, pears, and other fine fruits, are raised in abundance for Philadelphia and New York markets. TRENTON, the capital, is situated on the Delaware at the head of tide-water. Questions.-1. What is said of New Jersey? 2. In what do the mountainous regions abound? 3. What is the chief occupation of the inhabitants? What is the capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. TRENTON-the capital, on Delaware R. Amboy-S. of Newark. Flemington-nearly N. of Trenton. Middletown-E. of Trenton. Belvidere-on Delaware River above Trenton. Freehold-S. of Middletown. Newton-N. E. of Belvidere. Bordentown- )on the E. bank of Delaware Princeton- 1 next N. E. of Trenton in Burlington — River, below Trenton in New Brunswick- $ order. Camden- ) order. Somerville-N. W. of New Brunswick. Mount Holly-N. E. of Camden Morristown-N. of New Brunswick. Woodbury-nearly S. of Camden. Elizabethtown — next N. E. of New Bruns- Tuckerton-E. of Woodbury. Newark- ~ wick in order.. May's Landing-S. E. of Woodbury. Patterson-N. of Newark. Cape May-next S. of May's Landing. Jackensack-N E. of Newark. Bridgeton- N.W. of Cape May in order,ersey City-E. of Newark. Salem DES'RIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY, 1 0, PENNSYLVANIA. Square miles, 46,250.-Population, 2,341,204.-Pop. to sq. m., Sf. Northward of Pennsylvania, New York, Lake Erie lie, New York, New Jersey on the east, a boundary line supply; Southward, Virginia, Maryland, and Delaware, are found, Ohio and Virginia both compose the western bound. 1. Pennsylvania was first settled by English Quakers, under the guidance of William Penn, whose just and pacific policy towards the Indians secured, for many years, the peace and prosperity of the colony. 2. It is one of the largest and wealthiest states in the Union, and the second in population. 3. The most striking natural feature is the Alleghany Mountains, which cross the state from S. W. to N. E. in several ranges. 4. It has a good soil, well adapted to the growth of wheat, the staple agricultural production of the state. 5. It contains inexhaustible mines of coal and iron, sources of great wealth to the state..6. It is distinguished for its manufactures, especially those of iron. HARRISBURG, the capital, is situated on the E. bank of the Susquehanna. Philadelphia, situated between the Delaware and Schuylkill, six miles above their cbnfluence, is the largest city in the state, and the second in the Union in population and importance. It is noted for the regularity and neatness of its streets, the variety and extentof its manufactures, and for the number and excellence of its literary and benevolent institutions. Questions.-1. By whom was Pennsylvania first settled? 2. What is said of its sizem wealth, and population? 3. The most striking natural feature? 4. What is said of the soil? 5. Minerals? 6. For what is it distinguished? What is the capital, and how situated? How is Philadelphia situated, and for what noted CITIES AND TOWNS. HARRISBUR —the capital, on Susquehanna R. Carbondale-next S. W. of Honesdale. Middletown- next S. E. of Harrisburg in Damascus-next N. of Bethany. Columbia- $ order. Montrose-next W. of Dasmascus. Lancaster-next E. of Columbia. Friendsville-next N. W. of Montrose. Litiz-next N. of Lancaster. Carlisle- next S. W. of Harrisburg in Lebanon-next N. W. of Litiz. Chambersburg- order. York- next S. W. of Columbia in McConnellstown —1 Gettysburg-; order. Bedford — Strasburg-next E. of Gettysburg. Somerset- nt. of hamb ) between the Delaware and Union- burg in order. Philadelphia- ~ Schuylkill, near their junc- Waynesburg- ) tion. Bloomfield-next N. of Carlisle. Norristown- 1 Mifflin-' Reading- on Schuylkill River, N. W. Lewistown- on Juniata River from its Pottsville — of Philadelphia in order. Huntingdon — mouth in order. Port Carbon- J Hollidaysburg-J Orwigsburg-next S. E. of Port Carbon. Johnstown-next S. W. of Hollidaysburg. Chester-next S. W. of Philadelphia. Clearfield-next N. of Hollidaysburg. West Chester-next W. of Philadelphia. Sunbury-? next N. of Harrisburg in Germantown-next N. of Philadelphia. Northumberland- order. Bristol-next N. E. of Philadelphia. Danville- 1 Doylestown-next N. W. of Bristol. Wilkesbarre- I on the N. branch of SusAllentown — )on the S. W. bank of Le Tunkhannock — quehanna R., above NorP Atauch Chunk- high River, N. W. of Towanda- thumberland in order. White Haven- ) Doylestown in order. Athens- J Bethlehem — next N. E. of Allentown in New Berlin — next W. of Northumberland Easton- order. Bellefonte- $ in order. Nazareth- next N. of Bethlehem in Lock Haven-?next N. of Bellefonte i Stroudsburg — order. Farrandsville- 5 order. Milford-next N. E. of S roudsburg. Jersey Shore- I next N. E. of Farrandsville ia Honesdale- next N. W, of Milford in Williamsport- order. Bethany- order. Blossburg-next N. of Williamsport; 17 130 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Wellsboro —'Birmingham elboofBibham — )next S. W. of Pittsburg iii Coudersport — next W. of Blossburg inCaBonsburg order. Sme-hport — cder. Washington- orer. Warren- J Alleghany- next N. W. of Pittsburg in Erie-on Lake Erie. Beaver- J order. Meadville-next S. of Erie. Kittaning-next N. E. of Pittsburg Franklin — next S. E of Meadille in order. Butler-next N of Pittsburg. Clarion- next S. E. Meadville i order. Mercer-next N. W. of Butler. Pittsburg — at the junction of Alleghany and Monongahela Rivers. DELAWARE. Square miles, 2100.-Population, 92,609.-Pop. to sq. m., 441. Of Delaware the northern bound, let Pennsylvania be, Its eastern bounds, its namesake bay, New Jersey, and the Sea Upon its southern limits then may Maryland be found, And that same State upon the west is a sufficient bound. 1. Delaware is the smallest state in the Union except Rhode Island, and is distinguished for its manufactures. 2. Its surface is generally low and level, or undulating, and the soil is well adapted to the growth of wheat and Indian corn, the staple productions. DOVER, on Jones's Creek, is the capital of the state. Wilnington, the largest and most important town, is situated in the northern part of the state, between Christiana and Brandywine creeks, just above their confluence. It is accessible to large ships, and in its vicinity are valuable flourmills and manufactories. Questions.-1. What is said of Delaware? 2. Its surface and soil? Capital? Describe Wilmington. CITIES AND TOWNS. DOVER-the capital. Smyrna-next N. of Dover. Milford- n E of Dover orderWilmington-in the N. E part of the state Lewistown- ext S. E. of Dover or. Newcastle-next S. of Wilmington. Georgetown- next S. W. of Lewistown in Newark-W. S. W. of Wilmington. Laureltown- order. SOUTHERN STATES. MARYLAND. Square miles, 10,750. —Population, 583,016.-Pop. to sq. m., 544. Upon the north of Maryland is Pennsylvania found, Its east the State of Delaware and broad Atlantic bound; Upon its southwest boundary, Virginia takes its place, And here Potomac River comes, the boundary line to trace. 1. Maryland is divided into two parts by the Chesapeake Bay, called the East ern and Western Shores. 2. The surface in the eastern part of the state is low and level; in the western part, mountainous. 3. Wheat, corn, and tobacco, are the staple productions. 4. The chief minerals are coal and iron. ANNAPOLIS, the capital, is on the S. bank of Severn River. :DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 131 Baltimui e, the largest city in the state, is situated on a bay which sets up from the N. side of Patapsco River, foiming a secure and spacious harbor, 14 miles from Chesapeake Bay. It has an extensive commerce, and is one of the greatest flour markets in the world. Questions. —1. What is said of Maryland? 2. The surface? 3. Staple productions? 4. Chief minerals? Capital? Describe Baltimore? CITIES AND TOWNS. ANNAPOLIS-the capital, on Severn R. BelairPrince Frederictown- next S. of Annapolis Westminster — Leonardtown- in order. Emmittsburg- ext of Havre de Gr ace Upper Marlboro — next S. W. of Annapolis Hagerstown- Port Tobacco- in order. CumberlandRockville — next N. W. of Washington in ChestertownFrederick- order. Centreville- f Baltimore-next N. of Annapolis. EastonHavre de Grace- next N. E. of Baltimore in Cambridge- J Elkton — order. Denton-next N. E. of Cambridge. Princess Anne — next S. E. of Cambridge in Snow Hill — order. DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. Hail District of Columbia! the favored spot assigned To more than sceptred royalty-the majesty of MIND; Within thy consecrated bounds our legislators meet, The Wisdom of Columbia there erects her proudest seat. 1. This district, lying on the E. bank of the Potomac, is the seat of the general government of the U. States, and under the immediate jurisdiction of Congress. WASHINGTON, the capital of the U. States, is situated on the E. bank of tne Potomac, which is navigable to this point for ships of the line. Georgetown-on the Potomac, N. W. of Washington. Questions.-1. What is said of the District of Columbia? Washington? Georgetown? VIRGINIA. Square miles, 70,000.-Population, 1,400,000-Pop. to sq. m., 20. Virginia's north to Maryland and Pennsylvania joins, Its eastern side on Maryland and Ocean's breast reclines; North Carolina on the south and Tennessee are found, Ohio and Kentucky both, its western limits bound. 1. Virginia, the birth place of Washington, is one of the largest and'most populous states in the Union, and is distinguished for the number of her able and eminent men, who have participated in the national councils. 2. The eastern part is low and level; the interior is crossed by the Blue Ridge, and the western part by the Alleghanies. 3. The staple agricultural productions are wheat, tobacco, and corn. 4. Virginia is rich in mines of coal, iron, gold, and salt, and among the moun. tains are celebrated mineral springs. RICHMOND, the capital and largest city, is pleasantly situated on James River. Norfolk, in the S. E. part of the state, has a deep, spacious, and convenient harbor, and is the chief commercial depot. Questons.-1. What is the comparative size and population of Virginia, and for what is it distinguished? 2. Describe the surface? 3. What are the staple agricultural productionsa 4. What is said of mines and mineral springs? The capital? Norfolk 132 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MMAS. CITIES AND TOWNS. rcnHMoND-the capital, on Jatnes R. Heathsville-next N. E. of Urbana. Williamsburg- Alexandia N. E. of Fredericksburg on Yorktown- next S. E. of Richmoi.d in Alexandra- Potomac R. Hampton- order. Palmyra- I next N. W. of Richmond Norfolk- J Charlottesville- in order. I ortsmouth-next S. W. of Norfolk. Lexington-next S. W. of Charlottesville. Petersburg- next S. of Richmond in orer.Madison — JeHicksford-t }. of $ Richond in orer. F d arf enx on jnext N. E. of Charlottesville Jerusalem- Warrenton- in order. Suffolk- next E. ofHicksford in order. B eti - d:r Lawrenceville-next N. W. of Hicksford. Fairfax- J Lewisville- + Leesburg-N. W. of Fairfax. 3oydton- ext W. of Hicksford in order. Woodstock-next N. of Charlottesville. Lewistown-next N. of Boydton. Winchester- Hendersonville-next W. of Petersburg. Charleston- inet Norr.Wo Scottsville- Harper's Ferry- S Cumberland- next W. of Richmond in Martinsburg- next N.W. of Harper's Ferry Maysville- orer. Bath — in order. Lynch on Jam.Harrisonburg- on Jam next W. ofHarrisonbur. W. of Charlottesville Maysville. Staunton- next W. of Charlottesville Liberty —' Warm Springs- in order. Salem- next westward of Lynch- Lewisburg-next S. W. of Warm Springs. Parisburg- burg in order. Huntersville-next N. W. of Warm Springs. Jeffersonville — J Summersville — next westward of Hunters Taylorsville-next S. W. of Lynchburg. Charletn eston-d of H e Greensville- Barboursville- ve in Abingdon- next W. of Taylorsville in Beverly-next N. N. E. of Huntersville. Estillville- f order. Weston-next N. W. of Beverly. Jonesville- J Clarksburg- next N. N. E. of Weston in redericksbur- } N. of Richmond on Rap- Morgantown- 5 order. Frederksrg — pahannock R. Middlebourn- next W. S. W. of MorganBowling Green- next S E of Frederick Parkersburg- 5 town in order. Tappahannock- br "' oder Elizabethtown — next N. of Middlebourn in Urbanna- burg in order Wheeling — order. NORTH CAROLINA. Square miles, 50,000.-Population, 863,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 171. See on North Carolina's north, Virginia takes its place, East and southeast the Ocean comes, a boundary line to trace; South Carolina, Georgia join to make the southern bound, And lastly on the western side may Tennessee be found. 1. North Carolina is chiefly noted for its mines of gold. 2. The coast is lined with long, narrow, sandy islands, and seaward of these are extensive shoals and shifting sand banks. 3. The country, from 60 to 80 miles inland, is a low, sandy plain, interspersed with swamps and marshes, and covered with extensive pine forests, which yield abundantly pitch. tar, turpentine and lumber. 4. Farther inland is an undulating country, producing tobacco, wheat, corn, and other grains. The western part of the state is an elevated table land, and in some places rises into elevated mountains. RALEIGH is the capital, near the W. bank of Neuse River. Questions.-1. For what is North Carolina noted? 2. What is said of the coast? 3. The country from 60 to 80 miles inland? 4. Farther inland? Raleigh? CITIES AND TOWNS. RALEIGH-the capital. Hallsville- nearly north of Wilmington Smithfield- 1 Kenansville — in order. Waynesboro- on the Neuse River, nearly Elizabeth-? nearly Northwest of Wil. Kingston- S.E. of Raleigh in order. Fayettesville- 5 mington in order. Newbern- J Whitesville-W. of Wilmington. Beaufort-next S. E. of Newbern. Lumberton-N W. of Whitesville. Onslow — ) Oxt S. of w, n.ixford- next north of Raleigh im Wilmington — >onext r.. eern. L1Brownsville — order. Smithville- order. Louisburg-next N. E. of Raleigh, DESCRIPTIVE GEOGR &PH~Y. 1;3 Warrenton-next N. of Luisburg. Waynesville-next N. E. of Franklin. Gaston-next N. E. of Warrenton. Ashville- ) Tarboro- Rutherfordton — nearly Eof Waynesvile in Williamston- next E. of Raleigh in Lincolnton- ) Plymouth- order. Jefferson-next. of Lincolnton. Columbia- J RockfordGreenville- I on Tar River, nearly S. E. of Germantown- next nearly E. of Jefferson Washington — 5 Tarboro in order. Yanceyville- in order. Halifjax'- next N. of Tabr i RoxboroWelden- textN. ofTarboro in order. Wilkesboro — J e n Windsor — next N. W. of Plymouth in Statesville- ord er Blakely- order. Concord- Edenton- Lexington- next N. E. of Concord in next N. E. of Plymouth in Greensbor order. New Lebanon- orer. Ashboro- f Elizabeth-next S. E. of New Lebanon. Montgomery- onext nearly So Green Gatesville-nearly W. of New Lebanon. Wadesboro- Franklin-in the S. W. part of the state. Carthage-nearly S. E. of Greensboro. Hendersonville-nearly E. of Franklin. SOUTH CAROLINA. Square miles, 32,000.-Population, 630,000. Pop. to sq. m., 19-. Upon South Carolina's north, North Carolina lies, Which also for the northeast side a boundary line supplies; Upon its southeast limit, lo! th' Atlantic Ocean beats, And Georgia on the southwest side its boundaries completes. 1. South Carolina presents a great variety of soil and surface, and is divided into the lower and upper country. 2. The coast is bordered with islands, which produce the finest kind of cotton, called sea-island cotton. 3. The country, 80 or 100 miles inland, is covered with pine forests, interspelsed with swamps and marshes of a rich soil, which is finely adapted to the growth of rice. 4. The upper country is a fine, healthy region of hills and dales, terminating in the N. W. in the Blue Ridge, and producing upland cotton, the staple production, also grains and fine fruits. COLUMBIA., the capital, is situated on the Congaree, just below the junction of WJe Broad and Saluda Rivers. Charleston, the commercial emporium of the state, and the largest city on the Atlantic coast S. of Baltimore, is situated on a tongue of land between Ashley and Cooper Rivers, which unite immediately below the town, and form a spacious harbor. Questions.-1. What is said of South Carolina? 2. The coast? 3. The country 80 or 100 mniles inland? 4. Theuppercountry? Columbia Charleston? CITIES AND TOWNS. COLUMBIA-the capital, on Congaree R. Darlington-nearly S. of Cheraw. Orangeburg — nearly S. of Columbia in Marlborough-nearly E. of Cheraw. Waterboro- order. Marion- next S. E. of Marlborough Coosawhatchie-next S.W. of Waterboro. Conwayboro- in order. Beaufort-nearly S. of Waterboro. Winnsboro- N. N. W. of Columbia in Charleston-N. E. of Beaufort. Yorkville — order. Monks Corner-next N. of Charleston. Hamburg-nearly S. W. of Columbia. Sumterville- nearly S. E. of Columbia in Edgefield- nearly N. of Hamburg in Kingstree- orr. Newberry- order. Georgetown- ) Laurensville- nearly N. W. of Newberry ia Camden- ~,next N. E. of Columbia in order. Cheraw- Abbeville-S. W. of Laurensville. 134 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE IAPS. GEORGIA. Square miles, 61,700.-Population, 920,000. —Pop. to sq. m., 14j. On Georgia's north see Tennessee, North Carolina placed; Eastward South Carolina lies and Ocean's watery waste; To Florida upon the south its border it directs, And Alabama on the west its whole extent protects. 1. Georgia resembles South Carolina in surface, soil, and productions. 2. Cotton is the most valuable product, some of which is of a superior quality' ice is also extensively cultivated. 3. Gold is found in the northern part of the state. MILLEDGEVILLE, the capital, is on Oconee River. Savannah, the largest and most commercial town in the state, is situated on Savannah River, 17 miles from the sea. Questions.-1 In what respects does Georgia resemble South Carolina? 2..The most valuable product? 3. Where is gold found? What and where is Milledgeville? Savannah CITIES AND TOWNS. MILLEDGEVILLE-the capital, on Oconee R. Jacksonboro-next N. of Statesboro. Monticello- next N. W. of Milledgeville in Reidsville-next S. W. of Statesboro. Covngton — order. Mt. Vernon-next W. of Reidsville. Jackson- nex x" of Covington n order Dublin-next N. W. of Mt. Vernon. jForsyth- } next S. of Covington in or Sandersville-next E. S. E. of Milledgeville. Greenville —-. )Louisville — next E. N. E. of Sandersville La Grange — next W. of Forsyth in order. in order. Thomaston-next S. W. of Forsyth. Augusta-nearly N. of Waynesboro. Macon- next S. E. fForsyt atontonrion next S. E. of Forsyth in order. M on next N. N. W. of Milledgeville Hawkinsville-next S. of Marion. Monroe- S order. Vienna-next S. W. of Hawkinsville. Sparta-next N. E. of Milledgeville. Hamburg- J next W. N. W. of Vienna in Greensboro-next N. W. of Sparta. Columbus- order. Crawfordsville- xtar arta Americus —- ~ WashingtonLumpskin- } next W. of Vienna in order. order. Lumpkin- SIberton- ) Newton- LexingtonBlakeley — next S. W. of Vienna in order. Lengton — next nearly N. W. of Craw. Blakeley- Athens- ordsville in order. Bainbridge-next S. E. of Blakeley. Gainesville- - Irwinville-next S. E. of Vienna. Lawrenceville next S. W. of Gainesville in Troupsville-next S. of Irwinville. Decatur- 5 order. Jacksonville-next N. E. of Irwinville. Marietta-next N. W. of Decatur. Waresboro- Carrollton~- next S. W. of Marietta in Jeffersonton- next S.E. of Irwinville in Carrklin- S order. order. St. Mary's- Dahlonega-nearly N. W. of Gainesville. Brunswick — Canton"Darien- \ next N. ofSt. Mary's in order. Cassville- next nearly W. of Gainesville in Darien —i\~, o rrr Waynesville — next N. W of Brunswick in Rome ore. Holmesville-S order. Clayton-next N. E. of Gainesville. Sunbury- nearly N. E. of Darien in lairsvilleSavannah- 5 order. Spring Plce- next W. of Clayton in Springfield- next N. W. of Savannah in La Fayette~- order. Statesboro- 5 order entonFLORIDA. Square miles, 56,500.-Population, 67,000.-Pop to sq. m., 16. Of Florida, the northern bound let Alabama be, And Georgia too; —but on its east appears the foaming sea; Then by the Gulf of Mexico a boundary is supplied, Enclosing all its southern shore, and all its southwest side. 1. Florida is noted for its luxuriant vegetation, and the brilliant colors of ikts lowering shrubs. 2. It was a Spanish province until 1819, when it was ceded to the IT. States. n 1845 it was admitted into the Union as a state. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 135 3. The coast, indented with bays and lagoons, extends iearly 1200 miles, but ihe shallowness of the water renders it accessible only at a ftw points. 4. The surface of the country is generally level, and but little elevated above the ocean. The southern half is covered with immense swamps, called everglades; the northern half, with extensive pine forests, interspersed with hommocs, low prairies, ponds, and swamps. 5. The warmth and moisture of the climate are favorable to a luxuriant vegetation; and the richness of the soil in many parts is well adapted to the growth of the cotton-plant, the sugar-cane, rice, oranges, lemons, figs, and other rich fruits. TALLAHASSME, the capital, is noted for its healthy situation. Pensacola, on Pensacola Bay, is noted for its fine harbor, and is the chief naval station sf the U. States in the Gulf of Mexico. Questions.-1. For what is Florida noted? 2. What was it formerly, and when admitted into the Union as a state? 3. What is said of the coast? 4. The surface? 5. The climate and soil? For what is Tallahassee noted? Pensacola? CITIES AND TOWNS. TALLAHASSEE-the capital. Newnansville-S. E. of Jasper. St. Marks-S. of Tallahassee. Jacksonville- next N. E. of Newnansville Apalachicola-next S. W. of Tallahassee. Fernandina- in order. St. Joseph-nearly W. of Apalachicola. Picolata-next E. of Newnansville. Quincy — ) St. Augustine-nearly N. E. of Picolata. Mlarianna — next westward ofallahasseeNew Buenavista- nearly S. of Picolata in Alaqua — i n order. o Volusia — order. inilt~ order.imoka- Milton -- In or.Timoka- nearly S. E. of St. Augus. Pensacola- J New Smyrna- ~ tine in order. Monticello —nearly E. of Tallahassee in Jasper- order. ALABAMA. Square miles, 54,000.-Population, 770,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 144. On Alabama's northern side will Tennessee appear, And Georgia eastward takes its place to bound the whole frontier; Its south the Gulf of Mexico and Florida define, And Mississippi for the west supplies a boundary line. 1. Alabama has a deep, rich, productive soil, and is rapidly increasing in popu lation. 2. Cotton is the chief production of the state, and is raised in large quantities, MONTGOMERY, the capital, is on Alabama River. Mobile, the largest town and a great commercial depot, has a good harbor, and is finely situated for trade at the mouth of Mobile River. Questions.-1. What is said of Alabama? 2. Chief production? What and where is the capital? Mobile? CITIES AND TOWNS. MONTGOMERY-the capital, on Alabama R. Cahawba-W. of Montgomery. Monticello- next S. E of Montgomery in Marion-nearly N. of Cahawba. Abbeville- order. Haynesville-S. E. of Cahawba. Woodville- Greenville- S.S.E. of Haynesville m Tuskegee-E. of Montgomery. Montezuma — order. Lafayette-N. E. of Montgomery. Sparta-S. of Cahawba. Wedowee- Monroeville-next N. W. of Sparta. Jacksonville — next N of Lafayette in order. Mobile- on the W. side of Mobile R., ne Jefferson- )itsmouth. Wetumpka -- St. Stephens-) Talladega- next N. of Montgomery in Barryton- of M i Asheville- order. LivingstonMarshall- Gainesville — Blountv.ille-next S. W. of Marshal!. Blakely-E. of Mobile. ienstevole- {next N.. of- Montgomery LindennextNW. of Montgomer y Linden- next N. of Blakely in order Tuscaloosa — Erie- ) 136 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Florence — on N. bank of Tennessee R., in Tuscambia- the N. W. part of the state. Russellville- Hathens- ) Pikeville- nextS. of Florence in order. Huntsville- next E. of Florence in order. Fayetteville-J Bellefonte- ) Jasper- next N. E. of Fayetteville in Summerville- order. Decatur-nearly W. of Summerville. MISSISSIPPI. Square miles, 48,000.-Population, 611,577.-Pop. to sq. m., 121 On Mississippi's northern edge is Tennessee survey'd, By Alabama on the east the boundary line is made; On Louisiana and the Gulf its southern limits rest, Arkansas, Louisiana both, are found upon its west. 1. Mississippi, like Alabama, is a fertile, cotton-growing state, and is rapidly increasing in population. 2. It is watered by numerous streams, the soil of the chief part of the state is rich, and the crops of cotton abundant. JACKSON, the capital, is on Pearl River. Natchez, on the Mississippi, is the largest town, and a place of extensive trade. It is built chiefly on a bluff 300 feet above the river, but partly along the river below, and is one of the most beautiful places in the valley of the Mississippi. Questions.-1. What is said of Mississippi? 2. The soil and crops? The capital? Natchez? CITIES AND TOWNS. JACKSON-the capital, on Pearl R. Meadville- ) Brandon-) Monticello- > next E. of Natchez in order Decatur — nextnearly E. ofJackson in order. Williamsburg- ) Marion- - Raymond-next S. W. of Jackson. Raleigh-next S. E. of Brandon. Vicksburg-W. of Jackson. De Kalb — Greenville- Coumbus- next N. of Marion in order. Peyton- burg in order. Athens- J Hernando- nearly E. of Peyton in Aberdeen-nearly W. of Athens. Holly Springs- i order. Quitmanch- next. of Marion in order. next S. of Holly Springs in crder Leakesville- Panola-next W. of Oxford. Mississippi City-S. S. W. of Leakesville. Tillatoba-next S. W. of Panola. Shieldsboro —S W. of Mississippi City. Bridgeport-nearly N. W. of Jackson. A ugusta- ~ Cantonu a- nt W. of Leakevlle in C nearly N. E. of Bridgeport in Columbia- next W. ofLeakesvile Cartha eHolmesville — order. Louisville — order. Woodville- J Greensboro- next N. W. of Louisville iv Natchez-next N. of Woodville. Coffeeville- order. Fayette- ) Grenada- Port Gibson — next N.E. of Natchez in order. Carrollton- next S. W. of Coffeeville in Grand Gulf-) Lexington- f order. Manchester-J LOUISIANA. Square miles, 49,000.-Population, 450,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 91 On Louisiana's northern side Arkansas is display'd; By Mississippi and "the Gulf" the eastern bound is made; The Gulf of Mexico extends along the southern coast, And lastly on the western side will Texas take its post. 1. Louisiana is a great sugar and cotton growing state, with immerse coir mercial and agricultural advantages. 2. The surface is generally level, and so low, that a fourth part or the state Ia inundated by the annual floods of the Mississippi, and the high tides in the Gulf'f Mexico. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 137 3. To protect the country, bordering on the Mississippi, from inundation, levees or embankments are raised along its shores, usually from 5 to 12 feet high, ex. tending nearly 200 miles. 4. In the northern part of the state, the staple production is cotton; in the southern Dart, sugar; while the prairies in the S. W. furnish rich pasturage. BATON ROUGE, the capital, is situated on the left bank of the Mississippi. New Orleans, the largest city, is finely situated for trade on the left bank of the Mississippi, 105 miles from its mouth, and is one of the greatest commercial depots in the world. Questions.-1. What is said of Louisiana? 2. The surface? 3. How is the country, bori dering on the Mississippi, prevented from inundation? 4. What is the staple production in the N. part of the state? In the S. part? What is said of prairies? Baton Rouge? New Orleans? CITIES AND TOWNS. BATON ROUGE-the capital, on Mississippi R. St. Martinsville- next N. E. of La Fayette ) on the N. bank of the Mis- Point Coupee- in order. New Orleans- sissippi R. below Baton St. Francisville- Rouge. Clinton-nearly E. of St. Francisville. Covington- nearly N. of New Orleans in Opelousas- next N. W. of St. Martins. Franklinton- $ order. Bayou Chicot — ville in order. Van Buren-next N. W. of New Orleans. Lisbon-next S. W. of Bayou Chicot. Donaldsonville-next W. of New Orleans. Alexandria-nearly N. of Bayou Chicot. Iberville-next N. W. of Donaldsonville. Natchitoches- nearly N. W. of Alexandria Napoleonville-nearly S.W. of Donaldsonville. Mansfield- in order. T hibadeauxvill e- next S. E. of Donaldson- Harrisonburg- nearly N. E. of Alexandria -....... ville. Providence — in order. Williamsburg-next S. of Thibadeauxville. Concordia-nearly E. of Harrisonburg. Franklin- W. N. W. of Williamsburg Monroe- N. N. W. of Harrisonburg La Fayette- in order. IFarmersville- in order. Overton|Shreveport- I nearly W. of Farmersville. TEXAS. Square miles, 260,000.-Population, 170,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 4. See Indian Territory north and east of Texas lie, Arkansas, Louisiana too, upon the east we spy; Southeast the Gulf of Mexico will constitute a bound, West and southwest New Mexico and Mexico are found. 1. Texas was a State of Mexico until 1835, when it declared itself an independent Republic. 2. In 1845 it was annexed to the United States, and admitted into the Union as an independent state. 3. The surface, from 50 to 100 miles inland, is level, and free from swamp oi marsh; from 150 to 200 miles farther inland, comes a fine undulating prairie country, and then a broken mountainous, and comparatively barren region. 4. Vast herds of cattle, wild horses, and buffaloes, roam over the prairies. 5. The cotton-plant and sugar-cane flourish near the coast, and most kinds of grain and fruit grow luxuriantly in the interior. AUSTIN, the capital, is on the left bank of Colorado River. Questions.-1. What was Texas formerly, and when did it declare itself independent 1 2 When was it annexed to the United States, and admitted into the Union? 3. What is said of the surface? 4. Animals? 5. Productions? The capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. AusTIN-the capital, on Colorado R. Calhoun-S. E. of Victoria. Bastrop- Goliad-next S. W of Victoria. La Grange- on the Colorado, S. E. of San Antonio de Bexar-N. W. of Goliad. Columbus- Austin in order. Refugio- - next S. of Goliad in order Matagorda- J Corpus Christi n o Gonzales — n San Patricio —N. W. of Corpus Christi. next S. of Austin in order. ^Victoria- Laredo —W. of Corpus Christi. Texanna-next E. of Victoria. Dolores-N W. of Laledo. 18 38i ~ tKE- TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Old Presidio-nearly W. of Austin. Sabine-N. E. of Galveston. Brazoria-next N. E. of Matagorda. Beaumont- on Neches R., N. of Sabine in Richmond- ] Teran- 5 order. San Felipe- on Brazos River above Braz- Jasper-nearly E. of Teren. Washington — oria-in order. Sabine Town-N. E. of Jasper. Nashville- J St. Augustine- Houston-next N. E. of Brazoria. Shelbyvifle- nearly N. of Jasper in order Montgomery — next N. W. of Houston in Nacogdoches-N. W. of Jasper. Franklin- - order. HendersonGalveston-S. E. of Houston. Marshall-, Liberty-next N. of Galveston. Dangerfield- early ofNacogdoche Swartwout- Boston- in order. Cniawoti- on Trinity River, next above B~De Kl- J Alabamat- Liberty in order. Clarksville- nearly W. of De Kalb i Crockett-next E. of Alabama. Paris- order. Fenton — on Trinity River above Alabama Jonesboro- on Red River above De Kalb Dallas — in order Warrenton — in order. WESTERN STATES. ARKANSAS. Square miles, 55,000. —Population, 195,000-Pop. to sq. m., 3,6. Arkansas has upon its north Missouri's fruitful land, And Mississippi, Tennessee, upon its east expand; By Louisiana on the south, its border is possess'd, And Indian Territory lies with Texas on the west. 1. Arkansas is one of the largest of the United States, but one of the most thinly settled. 2. It is an agricultural state, and contains some extensive prairies, well adapted to grazing. 3. Cotton and corn are the staple productions. 4. It contains mines of iron, lead, coal, and salt. 5. The Hot Springs, 50 miles nearly S. W. of Little Rock, have long been the resort of invalids. The temperature of the waters sometimes rises to the boiling point. LITTLE ROCK, on Arkansas River, is the capital and largest town. Questions.-1. What is said of Arkansas? 2. To what is it adapted, and what does it contain? 3. Staple productions 1 4. What mines does it contain? 5. What is said of the Hot Springs? Little Rock? CITIES AND TOWNS. LITTLE ROC —the capital, on Arkansas R. Ecore a Faber- S. W. of Warren in order. Lewisburg- La Grange- o Dardanelle- on the Arkansas River, above Pine Blus- Aran Riv below Ozark- Little Rock in order. Arkansas-_ er Van Buren- JNplo- Little Rock in order. Van uren-^ ^Na oleon Boonville-S. E. of Van Buren. Columbia-next S. of Napoleon. Benton- Clinton- Greenville- next S. W. of Little Rock in Lebanon- next N. of Little Rock in orde Washington — order. Yellville-next N. W. of Lebanon. Fulton- JCarrolltonHot Springs- Huntsville- next westward of Yellville Zebulon- W. S. W. of Little Rock in Fayettesville- in order. Paraclifta- order. Bentonville — Ultima Thule- J Athens-nearly N. E. of Lebanon. Warren-S. of Little Rock. DILCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPH. 139 Blatesvle } next S. E. of Athens in order. BOsolva — nearly E. of Elizabeth in order Elizabeth- sceo aColumbia-nearly N. cf Elizabeth. Marion-E. S. E. of Elizabeth. Gainesville-next N. E. of Elizabeth. Mount Vernon-S. E. of Elizabeth. Lawrenceville-S. of Elizabeth. TENNESSEE. Square miles, 45,000.-Population, 1,050:000-Pop. to sq. m 23~. Northward of Tennessee we find Kentucky takes its place, Virginia too; but on the east, North Carolina trace; Georgia and Alabama south with Mississippi lie; Arkansas and Missouri west a boundary will supply. 1. Tennessee was formerly a part of North Carolina. 2. Agriculture is the chief employment of the inhabitants. 3. The soil of Middle and West Tennessee produces abundantly corn, tobacco and cotton, the great staples of the State; East Tennessee is best adapted tc grazing. NASHVILLE, the capital and largest town, is situated in a beautiful country on the S. bank of Cumberland River. Questzons.-1. Of what was Tennessee formerly a part? 2. The chief employment of the inhabitants? 3 Soil and productions? What is said of Nashville? CITIES AND TOWNS. NASHVILLE-the capital, on Cumberland R. Dover-next W. of Clarksville. Gallatin-next N. E. of Nashville. Reynoldsburg-next S. W. of Dover. Carthage- ) Charlotte-next S. E. of Dover. Gainesboro- next E. of Gallatin in order. Franklin-next S. W. of Nashville. Jamestown- Murfreesboro-nearly S. E. of Franklin. Lebanon-next E. of Nashville. Fayetteville-next S. of Franklin. Sparta-nearly S. E. of Lebanon. Shelbyville-next N. E. of Fayetteville. Pikeville- nearly S. of Spartainorder. Winchester-nearly E. of Fayetteville. Dallas- Columbia- nearly N. W. of Fayetteville Cleveland- next E. of Dallas in order. entreville- in order. Benton- PulaskiAthens-next N. of Benton. Lawrenceburg- next nearly W. of FayetteMadisonville- ly N. E. of Athen Waynesboro- ville in order. Maryville — Savannah — J Washington- next nearly N. E of Dallas Perrysburg-nearly N. E. of Savannah. Kingston- in order. Camden-next N. of Perrysburg. Clinton- ) Paris-N. W. of Camden. Knoxville-next S. E. of Clinton. Troy-nearly W. of Paris. Dandridge-next E. of Knoxville. Huntingdon- o P i e Newport-next S. E. of Dandridge. Lexington — Jonesboro-t Jackson- next W. of Lexington in Elizabethtown {nearly N. E. of Newport in Brownsville- order. Taylorsville — orBolivar-next S. E. of Brownsville. Blountville nearly W of Taylorville in LaGrange —nearly S. of Bolivar. ogersvlle- order. mmerville- next W. of Bolivar in order Tazewell- Raleigh) Clarksville-N. W. of Nashville. Memphis-nearly S. W. of Raleigh. KENTUCKY. Square miles 40,000 —Population, 993,000.-Pop. to rq. m., 244. Upon Kentucky's northern side may Illinois be found, Ohio, Indiana then, complete its northern bound; Virginia forms its eastern bound, its southern, Tennessee, The right to guard its western side, Missouri, comes to thee 1. Kentucky rests chiefly on an immense bed of limestone usually about eight fet below the surface, and abounds in extensive caves. 2. Mammoth Cave, near Green River, S. W. of Frankfort, is one of the most wonderful in the world, extending several miles, and containing numilerous pas L40 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. sages and extensive apartments, one of which covers a surface of several acres without a pillar to support the lofty and stupendous arch. 3. The surface along the Ohio is hilly; in the western part, level; in the interior, undulating; in the S. E., rugged and mountainous. 4. The staples are corn, tobacco, hemp, and wheat. 5. Hemp is extensively manufactured into cotton-bagging and cordage. FRANKFORT, the capital, is on Kentucky River, about 60 miles' from its mouth. Louisville, on the Ohio, is the largest, wealthiest, and most commercial town in the State. Questions. —. On what does Kentucky chiefly rest, and in what abound? 2. What is said of Mammoth Cave? 3. The surface? 4. The staples? 5. Hemp? Frankfort? Louisville? CITIES AND TOWNS. FRANKFORT-the capital, on Ky. R. i Bardstown-S. W. of Frankfort. Carrollton-at the mouth of Ky. R. Louisville-on the Ohio,W. N. W. of Frankfort C * _ ) N. of Frankfort, at the mouth Elizabethtown-next S. of Louisville. Covington- of Licking R. from W. to E. Hardinsburg-nextS. W. of Louisville. Newport- in order. Hawesville- on the Ohio R. next below Falmouth- nearly N. E. of Frankfort in Owenborough — Louisville in order. Augusta- ~ order. Hartford- next S. E. of Owenborouh Maysvillebur nearly E of Augusta in Morgantown- in order. Clarksburg — Brownsville- I next E. of Morgantown in Greenupsburg- od r Greensburg- order. Louisa-, nearly S. of Greenupsburg in Russellville- southward of Morgantown in Prestonburg- $ order. Franklin- orde'. Georgetown- nearly E. of Frankfort in Bowling Green-. o Mrn Paris- order. Scottsville- nextS. E. f MorganCynthianna-nearly N. of Paris. Tompkinsville- town n order. Carlisle-nearly E. of Cynthianna. Burkesville — next N. E. of Tompkinsville Lexington- t S E o t i Jamestown- in order. Proctor-. F t i Henderson-W. of Owenborough. Manchester — orer.Madisonville- next S. of Henderson in Shelbyville-next W. of Frankfort. Hopkinsville- order. New Castle — next N. W. of Frankfort in Smthld on the Ohio, at the mouth of Westport- 5 order. Cumberland River Versailles — o Fnkr i rrPaducah-W. of Smithland. Harrodsburg- next S. f Franfort i order. Mayfield- S. W. of Smithland in order. Mt. Vernon- next S. E. of Harrodsburg Clinton- Smthland in order. Barboursville- in order.. Wadesborough-S. of Smithland. Monticello-S. of Harrodsburg. Cadiz-S. E. of Smithland. Lawrenceburg- next N. W of Harrods- Princeton-next E. of Smithland. Taylorsville- burg in order. Salem-nearly N. of Smithland. OHIO. Square miles, 44,000.-Population, 1,981,940.-Pop. to sq. m., 452. North of Ohio, Michigan and Erie Lake are found, Virginia, Pennsylvania come to form its eastern bound; Kentucky and Virginia south compose the boundary line, And Indiana on the west its border will define. 1. Ohio is one of the most populous, wealthy, and flourishing States in tne Union. 2. The E. and S. E. part is hilly and broken; but the State is mostly an elevated table-land, rising from 600 to 1000 feet above the level of the sea. In the interior and N. W. are extensive prairies. 3. The soil is eminently fertile, and nine-tenths of the whole are susceptible of cultivation. 4. Wheat, corn, and pork, are the chief productions; but all the grains and fruits of the Middle States grow luxuriantly. 5. Coal and iron abound in the S. E. part of the State, and in many places salt springs are found. COLUMBUS, the capital, is on Scioto River, near the centre of the State. Cincinnati, on the Ohio, in the S. W. part of the State, is the largest and wealthiest city in the West. It is the centre of trade for a large extent of country, and is the greatest pork market in the world. Questions.-1. What is said of Ohio? 2. Tha surface? 3. Soil? 4. Productions? 5. Minerals? Columbus Cincinnati? DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 141 CITIES AND TOWNS. COLUMBUS-the capital, on Scioto R. Findley-next S. E. of Defiance. Lancaster — Delaware- Athens- next S. E. of Columbus in order. Bucyrus- next N. of Columbus in Chester- Tiffin- order. Marietta-next N. E. of Chester. Lower Sandusky-J Circleville- o Steubenville on Ohio R. in the E. part of Chilicothe State. Cilicthne- next S of Columbus in order. the State. Piketonorder. St. Clairsville-S. S. W. of Steubenville. P ortsm outh — J Cambridge — )next W. of St. Clairsville in Gallipolis-E. of Portsmouth. Zanesville — o Burlington-S. E. of Portsmouth. Newark- or West Union- of Portsmouth in order. Cadiz-W. S. W. of Steubenville. Georgetown —' New Lisbon —)next N. of Steubenille in Wilmington- next S. W. of Columbus Warren e er —. Batavia- in order. Jefferson- order. Cincinnati- on Ohio River in the S. W. New Philadelphia- next N. W. of Steubenpart of the State. Bolivar- ville in order. Hamilton- Wooster-next N. W. of Bolivar. Eaton- Canton- ) Greenville —. next N. of Cincinnatti in order. Akron- next N. of Bolivar in order Celina- Cleveland-) Willshire-, Painsville-next N. E. of Cleveland. Dayton-on Miami R., N. E. of Hamilton. Chardon-next E. of Cleveland. Lebanon-S. of Dayton. Ravenna-next S. E. of Cleveland. Xenia-nearly S. E. of Dayton. hio City- LakeErie, Cleve. Springfield — O~o~ City —- ~) on Lake Erie, W. of Cleve. Springfield- nextN. fHuron- land in order. Urbanna — next N. E. of Dayton in order. Sandkny City Sidney-next N. of Dayton. Elyria-next S. E. of Huron. Toledo- Norwalk- ) n' Perrysburg — on Maumee River, from Its Mansfield-nearly S.of Huron Napoleon- J mouth in order. Mt Vernon order. Defiance- J MICHIGAN. Square miles, 60,000.-Population, 397,576.-Pop. to sq. m., 63. Upon the north of Michigan is Lake Superior found, Then Huron Lake and Canada compose the eastern bound; Ohio, Indiana join, the southern bound to make, While on the west Wisconsin lies, and, Michigan, thy lake. 1. Michigan is unsurpassed for commercial advantages by any inland State in the Union. 2. It consists of two large peninsulas lying among the great lakes. The southern peninsula is level or gently undulating; the northern is a wild, rugged country, and abounds in valuable mines of copper. 3. The soil is rich, and produces wheat, corn, and other grains, in abundance. LANSING, the capital, is a new and growing town. Detroit, on Detroit River, is the largest town, and a place of extensive corn merce. Questions.-1. For what is Michigan unsurpassed? 2. Of what does it consist? What is said of the surface? 3. Soil and productions? The capital Detroit CITIES AND TOWNS. LANSING — the capital. Kalamazoo- next W. of Marshall in Bellevue-next W. of Michigan. South Haven- order. Corunna-next N. E. of Michigan. New Buffalo-in the S. W. part, on L. Mich. Saginaw-next N. of Corunna. Berrien-next N. E. of New Buffalo. next E. of Corunna in order. Lapeer- next.ofCorunna inorder. anch- - next E. of N. Buffalo in order Detroit —on Detroit River. Jonesville- Pontiac-next N. W. of Detroit. Adrian-next E. of Jonesville. Howell-next W. of Pontiac. Tecumseh — t f Arin n r Mt. Clemens-next E. of Pontiac. Saline- n N Palmer-next N. E. of Mt. Clemens. Monroe-next E. of Adrian. Ann Arbor- Grand Haven- o fJackson — on the railroad, next W. of n Grand Haven-ver om t Marshal- Detroit in order. n- mouth in order. Mastrshall- Ionia — A42 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE IMAPS. INDIANA. Square miles, 36,000.-Population, 990 258.-Pop. to sq. m., 27L. Of Indiana's northern side is Michigan the bound, Likewise the Lake of Michigan may on that side be folnd; Ohio is upon the east, Kentucky southward lies, And Illinois upon the west a boundary line supplies. 1. Indiana is the smallest of the Western States, and resembles Ohio in sur face, soil, and productions. 2. Its extensive prairies are interspersed with "those beautiful islands of tim. bered land," which form a striking feature in the prairies of the west. INDIANAPOLIS, the capital, is situated on the West Fork of White River, near the centre of the state. Questions-1. What is the comparative size of Indiana, and in what point does it resemble Ohio? 2. What is-said of itsprairies - Of Indianapolis? CITIES AND TOWNS. INDIANAPOLIS-the capital, on the W. Fork. Petersburg-nearly S. W. of Mt. Pleasant. Greenfield- ) Vincenne — Newcastle — next E. of Indianapolis in order.Terre Haute — the Wabash R. nearly N enureville- Newport- to of Petersburg in order. Rushville — Covinaton - Shelbyville- next nearly S. W. of Centre- Williamsport- J Columbus- ville in order. Lafayette- nearly E. of Williamsport in Brownstown- Frankfort- $ order. Brookville- next S. of Centreville in Crawfordsville-next S. of Lafayette. Lawrenceburg $ order. Delphi- next N. E. of Lafayette in Versailles — next S. W. of Brookville in Logansport — order. Vernon- order. Peru- Vevay —' Wabash- next nearly E. of Logansport Madison-. Huntington- r in order. Jeffersonville- and N. W. bank Fort Wayne — New Albany- elow Marion-next S. W. of Fort Wayne. Rme'dnia- Lawrenceburg in order. Winchester-of Fort e Romen order. Evansville- J Augusta-next N. W. of Fort Wayne. Mt. Vernon- Plymouth-next W. of Augusta. Martinsville-) on the West Fork of White La Port- next N. W. of Plymouth in Spencer- - R. next S. W. of Indian- Michigan City- S order. Bloomfield- V apolis in order. South Bend — E of Michigan City in order Bloomington-next N. E. of Bloomfield. Lima — Mt. Pleasant-next S. of Bloomfield. Valparaiso-next S. W. of Michigan City. Paoli-nearly S. E. of Mt. Pleasant. ILLINOIS. Square miles, 56,500. —Population. 850,000 —Pop. to sq. m., 15. For Illinois, Wisconsin State a northern bound will make; See Indiana on its east, and, Michigan, thy Lake; Upon its southern limit then, Kentucky may be found, Then Iowa, Missouri join to form the western bound. 1. Illinois is noted for the rich prairies which cover two-thirds of its surface. 2. The staple productions are corn and wheat. The prairies furnish rich pasturage; and cattle, horses, and swine, are raised in great numbers. 3. Its lead mines, near Galena, are among the richest in the world; coal abounds, and iron is found in various parts of the state. SPRINGFIELD, the capital, is on the border of a beautiful prairie near the centre of the state. Chicago, on Lake Michigan, is the most populous and commercial town in the state. Questions. —1. For what is Illinois noted? 2. Staple productions? Prairies? Animals I Minerals? What and where is the capital? Chicago? DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 143 CITIES AND TOWNS. SPRINGFIELD —the capital. Lexington-next S. W. of Juliet. Petersburg-next N. W. of Springfield. Montgomery- Jacksonville-nearly W. of Springfield. Danville — Alo- on the Mississippi R., S. S. W. of Paris- next S. of Chicago in.ton- Springfield. Marshall- order Edwardsville-next S. E. of Alton, LawrencevilleWaterloo-next S. of Alton. Mt. Carmel — Quincy — ShawneetownWarsaw- on the E. bank of the Mis- Elizabethtown — on the Ohio River, below Nauvoo — sissippi River, above Alton Golconda-, the mouth of the WaStephenson- in order. Caledonia- bash in order. Savannah-, Cairo- J Galena in the N. W. part of the state. Decatur- on the Sangamon R., E. N F eoriant next N. of Springfield in order. Moncello- of Spr ing order. Beardstown — on the Illinois R. below Peoria Shelbyville- next nearly S. E. of SpringMeridosia — in order. Ewington- field in order. Versailles-next E. of Peoria. Newtof- J Lacon — ) Ill R Lewisville-next S. W. of Newton. Hennepin- on lnosR a ove Peora McLeansboro-next S. of Lewisville. Peru — orer. Mt. Vernon- next S. W. of Lewisville in Knoxville-next W. N. W. of Peoria. Pinckneyville- ~ order. Chicago-on Lake Michigan. Salem —nearly W. of Louisville. McHenry-next N. W. of Chicago. Nashville-next S. W. of Salem. Geneva- nearly W. of Chicago in KaslkaskiaOregon City- 5 order. Carlisle- ts Juliet-next S. W. of Chicago. Vandalia- mout in orer. Yorkville-next N. W. of Juliet. Hillsboro-next N. W. of Vandalia. Ottawa-next W. of Juliet. MISSOURI. Square miles, 68,500.-Population, 681,547-Pop. to sq. m., 10 Upon Missouri's northern bound is Iowa survey'd; Kentucky is upon its east with Illinois array'd; Arkansas for its southern edge a boundary has supplied, And Indian Territory spreads upon its western side. 1. Missouri is one of the largest states in the Union, and combines rich agricultural and mineral resources. 2. Its chief agricultural productions are corn, hemp, and tobacco; and its prairies feed large herds of cattle, swine, and horses. 3. The mines of lead, iron, and coal, are rich in quality, and inexhaustible in quantity. Other minerals also abound. 4. Iron Mountain and Pilot Knob are immense masses of nearly pure iron, surpassing, in extent and richness of ore, any thing of the kind in the known world. JEFFERSON CITY, the capital, is on Missouri River, near the centre of the state. St. Louis, the largest and most commercial town, is situated on the Mississippi, 18 miles below the mouth of the Missouri, and promises to become one of the greatest inland cities in the United States. Questions.-1. What is said of Missouri? 2. Its productions and prairies? 3. Its mines 4. Iron Mountain and Pilot Knob? Jefferson City? St. Louis? CITIES AND TOWNS. JEFFERSON CITY-the capital, on Missouri R. Troy — Marion-next N. W. of Jefferson City. Warrenton — earl Nashville —next N. of Marion. Danville- orer Booneville-nearly W. of Marion. Alexandria- net f nv Franklin- order. Waynesville- next S. W of Danvll in Keytesville- nextN. of Booneville in order. HartvilleKeytesville Hartville — Huntsville- next N. E. of St. Louis-next S. E. of St. Charles. Shelbyville- oe. eytesvilin Herman-next E. of Jefferson City. Monticello- Union- ) Marion City-next S. E. of Monticello. Hillsboro — next S. E. of Herman in order. Palmvra- \next S. of Monticello in Genevieve — New London — order. Potosi- I Bowling Green- next S. E. of New Londonteelville- xt W of Geneve order St. Charles- in order. 144 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Farmington — next S. W. of Genevieve in Carthage-next S. of Batesville. Nimrod- $ order. Greenfield- next N. E. of Carthage in Van Buren-next S. E. of Nimrod. Bolivar- order. Greenville — Mt. Vernon-next E. of Carthage. Fredrictown- nearly N. E. of Van Buren in WarsawPerrysville- order. Clinton- nearly N. W. of Erie in Jackson~- /next. Harrisonville — " order. Benton.- orderv. inGeorgetown — next westward of Jefferson New Mladrid — W arrensburg — -.. Tuscumbia-nearly S. of Jefferson City. Independence- Cty i oer. Versailles-next S. W. of Jefferson City. Liberty- - next N. W. of Independence Erie-nearly S. E. of Versailles. Platte City- 5 in order. Buffalo- of Erie in order. Plattsburg- Springfield- } S W' Gallatin- next N.E. of Platte City in order Osceola-.T Batesville —-! Batesvill~e-} next W. of Erie in order. renton IOWA. Square miles, 60,000.-Population, 192,000.-Pop. tosq. m., 3-. Upon Iowa's northern side is Minnesota found, Wisconsin State and Illinois compose the eastern bound; Upon its south Missouri spreads; two territories rude, Missouri and the Indian, its western bounds include. 1. Iowa was admitted into the Union in 1845, and is noted for its rich and extensive prairies. 2. It produces luxuriant crops of corn, wheat, and oats. 3. Lead is the chief mineral, and the richest mines are found in the vicinity of Dubuque. IOWA CITY, the capital, is on Iowa River. Questions.-1. For what is Iowa noted? 2. What does it produce? 3. Chief mineral? What and where is the capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. IOWA CITY-the capital, on Iowa R. Burlington-? next S. of Bloomington in Marion-next N. of Iowa City. Madison- order Washington-next S. of Iowa City. Davenport — Bloomington-next S. E. of Iowa City. Camanche — on the Mississippi River, next Wapello nearly S. W. of Blooming. Bellevue — above Bloomington in order Mt. Pleasant — t n er. Dubuque-. ton in order. Keosauque — WISCONSIN. Square miles, 54,000.-Population, 305,596.-Pop. tosq. m., 5f. North of Wisconsin, Michigan and Lake Superior lie, Upon its eastern boundary Lake Michigan we spy; See Illinois upon the south;-the territorial ground Of Minnesota, on the west, and Iowa are found. 1. Wisconsin was admitted into the Union in 1846, and is rich in mineral products. 2. The lead mines in the S. W. are exceedingly productive, and extensively wrought. Copper is found in abundance, and iron ore also exists. 3. The soil is fertile in corn, wheat, and other grains, and the prairies furnish rich pasturage. MADISON, the capital, is situated between the third and fourth of the Four Lakes. Questions.-1. What is said of Wisconsin? 2. The lead mines? Copper and iron? 3. The soil? Madison? CITIES AND TOWNS. MADISON CITY-the capital. Racine — Buchanan- ] nearly W. of Madison Milwaukie-. Prairie du Chien- City in order. Washington- S Lake Michgan, from New Mexico-next S. of Madison City. Sheboygan- S. t N n Manitoowoc- J Fond du Lac-at the S. end of Winnebago L Green Bay-at the S. end of Green Bay. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 145 CALIFORNIA. Square mites, 162,000.-Population, 200,000. Pop. to sq. m. 1,. On California's northern side, vast Oregon is placed, Both Utah and New Mexico upon the east are traced; Upon its southern borders next may Mexico be found, And broad Pacific's sparkling waves compose its western bound. 1. CALIFORNIA was admitted into the Union in 1850, and is noted for its rich mines of Gold and Quicksilver. Gold has recently been found in great abundance, and thousands of individuals are employed in collecting it. 2 San Francisco Bay, the chief port of California, is one of the best harbors in the world, and sufficiently spacious to contain the ships of all nations. SAN JoSE is the capital. CITIES AND TOWNS. SaN JOSE —the capital. Santa Cruz- nearly S. of San Jose in San Francisco- S. of the entrance to San Monterey- $ order. Fancisco Bay. San Luis Obispo-' Sonoma — N. of San Francisco. Sonoma San Barbara- on and near the Benecia- the W. town. Pueblo de los Angelos- coast S. E. Sacramento City-N. E; of Benecia. San Juan- of Monterey Stockton-nearly E. of Benecia. San Luis Rey- in order. San Diego- J TERRITOR IES. 1. The Territories, belonging to the United States, are Minesota, Nebraska. Kanzas, Indian, Oregon, TJtah and New Mexico. 2. MINESOTA is a new territory, formed out of portions of Wisconsin and Iowa. 3. It contains numerous lakes, mostly of a small size. They abound in wild rice, which the Indian women harvest in their canoes. 4. NEBRASKA TERRITORY consists almost entirely of prairies, on which are found large numbers of buffaloes, wild horses, and other animals, and over which roam tribes of Indians in pursuit of game. 5. KANZAS formed part of Indian Territory, and was organized in 1854. The climate is mild, and soil fertile and well watered. 6. The INDIAN TERRITORY has been given to the Indians by the government of the United States for their future residence, with the pledge that they shall not again be compelled to move. Many thousands have emigrated thither from the States east of the Mississippi, and several tribes have acquired some knowledge of books and Christianity, and the arts of civilization. 7. OREGON TERRITORY has a well watered, fertile soil, and is well suited for agriculture. The climate is milder than the same latitude on the Atlantio coast. Many thriving settlements have been made, and the population is increasing. SALEM is the capital. 8. WASHINGTON TERRITORY, formed out of Oregon, is thinly settled, but gradually improving. OLYMPIA is the capital. 9. UTAH formed a part of California until 1850, when it was organized as a territory. The City of the Great Salt Lake is the capital, and principal settlement. 10. NEW MEXICO was organized as a territory in 1850. Wheat and Indian corn are the principal grains. Mules, sheep, and goats are the principal domestic animals; and gold to the amount of about $100,000 is collected annually. SANTE FE, the capital, is situated about 12 miles east of the Rio Grande. Taos, N. of Santa Fe. Albuquerque, Socorro, San Diego, on the Rio Grande below Santa Fe in ordex. 19 SOUTH AMERICA. NEW GRENADA. Square miles, 450,000.-Population, 1,800,000.-Pop. to sq. m. 4. 1. New Grenada is traversed by ranges of the Andes, and noted for its elevated valleys and table lands, and for its rich plains along the rivers. 2. The soil in the valleys is very fertile, producing cotton, grain, coffee, cocoa, tobacco, and indigo. 3. Gold mines abound, and there are also mines of silver, platina, emeralds, copper, lead, and salt. BOGOTA, the capital, is on a beautiful, fertile plain, near the small river Bogota, 8640 feet above the level of the Sea. Questions.-1. What is said of New Grenada? 2. The soil 3. Minerals? State of society Government I Religion? Describe Bogota? CITIES AND TOWNS. BosOTAa-the capital. Mompox,-. Honda-next N. W. of Bogota. Carthagena- next N. of O aia ode Popayan- nextS W. f Honda inorr. Santa Martha — on the coast eastward of Pasto- nextS.W.Hondaorr. Rio Hachad I Carthagena in-order. Tunja - ) Panama —on the N. W. coast of Panama Bay. Socorro- next northward of Bogota in order. Portobello-nearly N. of Panama. Ocaina- ) ChagresS-next N. W. of Panama. Santiago-nearly W. of Panama. VENEZUELA. Square miles, 420,000.-Population, 1,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 21. 1. Venezuela is crossed in the north part by a range of the Andes, but it con. sists mostly of an immense plain, covered with luxuriant grass, on which graze vast herds of cattle, horses, and mules. 2. Its soil is rich, and its staple productions resemble those of the West Indies. CARACCAS, the capital, finely situated on a table land 3,000 feet above the level of the sea, was almost destroyed in 1812 by an earthquake, which buried in a moment 10,000 of its inhabitants. Questions-1. Of what does Venezuela mostly consist? 2. Soil and productions? State of society? Government? Religion Describe Caraccas. CITIES AND TOWNS. Carraccas-the capital. Varinasj-next E. of Merida. La Guayrag-N. of Caraccas. Cumnana k-next E. of Caraccas. Coro-next N. W. of Caraccas. Angostura'-next S. E. of Caraccas. Maracaybo h —at the outlet of L Maracaybo. Guiana — next E. of Angostura. Valencia-next W. of Caraccas. Esmeralda- next S. W. of Angostura in Truxilloi- next S. W. of Valencia in San Car los- i order. Merida- order. abo-go-tah. b toong'-hah. c okan'.yah. d ree'.e.hah'.chah. echah'gres. fsan-te.ahvgo g Iah.gwy'-ra At mah-rah-ky'-bo, i troo.heel'.o. j vah-ree'nas A koomah-nah fIhe.fa^bS DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 147 GUIANA. Square miles, 160,000.-Population. 230,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 14. 1. Guiana, belonging to the English, Dutch, and French. has mostly a low level surface, and a hot, unhealthy climate. 2. The southern part rises into a densely wooded chain of mountains, overspread with the most luxuriant foliage. 3. The soil is rich, producing cotton, sugar, coffee, maize, cocoa, indigo, cayenne pepper, and tropical fruits. The orange and lemon trees bloom all the year, and the rich blossoms and golden fruit hang side by side on the same bough. GEORGETOWN, the capital of English Guiana, is on Demarara River, near its mouth. New Amsterdam is on Berbice River, S. E. of Georgetown. PARAMARIBO, the capital of Dutch Guiana, is situated on the Surinam, about 20 miles from its mouth. CAYENNE,Uthe capital of French Guiana, is on Cayenne Island. Questions.-1. What is said of Guiana? 2. The southern part? 3. The soil? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of Georgetown? New Amsterdam? Paramaribo? Cayenne BRAZIL. Square miles, 3,350,000.-Population, 5,225,000. —Pop. to sq. m., 1I. 1. Brazil is one of the largest and finest countries in the world, and also one of the richest in vegetable and mineral productions. 2. It has a mild, genial climate, a rich soil, and a surface of mountains, valleys, hills, and plains. 3. It produces cotton, sugar, coffee, grain, tropical fruits, and medicinal plants; also, beautiful and useful woods, valuable for ship building, cabinet work, and dyeing. 4. Its forests are filled with aromatic plants and flowering shrubs, swarm with birds of the most brilliant plumage, and teem with insects, huge serpents, and ferocious beasts. 5. Brazil is rich in gold and diamonds; silver, emeralds, and crystals, are also bound. 6. Immense herds of cattle and wild horses roam over the grassy plains of the interior. It may be more truly said of Brazil, perhaps, than of any other country"Stern winter smiles on this auspicious clime, The fields are florid in eternal prime; From the bleak pole no winds inclement blow, Mould the round hail, or flake the fleecy snow; But from the breezy deep the groves inhale The fragrant murmur of the eastern gale." Rio JANEIRO, the capital, is the largest and most commercial city in S. America, situated on a bay of the Atlantic, which forms one of the best harbors in the world. Bahia,bor San Salvador, on the strait leading to the Bay of All Saints, is the rival of Rio Janeiro in commerce, and has one of the finest harbors in America. Questions.-1. What is said of Brazil? 2. Of its climate, soil, and surface? 3. Produe tions? 4. Its forests? 5. Minerals? 6. Animals? State of society? Government? Reli gion? What is said of Rio Janeiro? Bahia, or San Salvador? CITIES AND TOWNS. Rio Janeiro-the capital. San Joa' o del Rey- next N. WV. of Rio Santos- Villa Boa f- Janeirl. in order. St. Catharina- t on the coast S. W. of Rio Boavista g- next W. of Villa Boa Laguna c- Janeiroan Pedro del Rey- in order. Rio Grande d J Cuyaba — N. E. of San Pedro del Rey. Portalegre e-on N. coast of L. de los Patos. Villa Bella- rnearlv N. W. of San Pedre San Paul —next N. W. of Santos. Lamego i- del -sty in order. a ki-enn'. bah.eef ah. clah-goo'-nah. d ree-o-gran'-day. n.irt-ah-lay' gray. fveel.lah-bo'ah, r' bo'ah-vees-tah, A koo.- ah'-bh.: lahh.my'go. 149 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Balsamao-N. of Lamego. Portalegre- Cratto — on Madeira R., next N. E. of Bal- Porto Seguro- next N of Espiritu Borba- samao in order. Belmonte- Santo i ord Coary — Old Porto Seguro- anto order. Teffe- next W. of Borba on the Ama- Ilheose - Olivencaa- zon R. in order. Bahia-next N. E. of llheos. Tabatingab^- Cachoeiraf-~ Villa d Pic nextN. of Rio Janeiro in.acnobin- next N. W. of Bahia in order. eucila. dPnce — -, aorder. - Tejuco- o er.Pernaguag- J Romao-N. W. of Tejuco. Sergippe del Rey^-N. of Bahia. Porto Salgado-N. E. of Romao. Pambu-N. W. of Sergippe del Rey. Urubu-N. of Porto Salgado. Penedo- next N. E. of Sergippe del Rey St. Felix-W. of Urubu. Maceyoi- ) in order. Pilar-nearly S. of St. Felix. Alagoas-N. W. of Maceyo. Pontal-nearly N. of St. Felix. Pernambuco — San Joas das duas Barras- on theTocantins Goyanna - N rr Funil- next N. of Pon- Paraibah -n o Bayao- ) tal in order. Natal- J Paru.-'' nearly N. E. of Bayao in order. -Pceza — intra- earlyN. E.ofBayao in order. co- next W. S. W. of Natal in order. Macapa- - Oeirastr- Mazagao- on the N. bank of the Amazon, Aracatin- ) n. i Obidos- - W. from its mouth in order. Seara- next N. W. of Natal in order. Silves- J Valencia-S. W. of Seara. Santarem-on the Amazon S. E. of Obidos. Parnaiba - Z on the coast next W. N. W. of Barra- 1 Maranham- Seara in order. Moura- on the Rio Negro, westward Itapicuru~-next S. E. of Maranham. Barcellos — from its mouth in order. HycatuP- n of Ita u San Gabriel- Caxias- next nearly S of Itapcu Macahed E. of Rio Janeiro. Jerumenha- order. Benevente- t next N. E. of Macahe in Espiritu Santo — order. PARAGUAY. Square miles, 86,000.-Population, 225,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 21. 1. Paraguay has a level surface, fertile soil, and a healthy climate. 2. Vast herds of cattle and horses feed on its rich plains. 3. The most noted production is mat'te, sometimes called Paraguay tea. It is used in various parts of S. America and much prized. ASSUMPTION, the capital, is on the E. bank of the Paraguay. Questions.-1. What is said of Paraguay? 2. Animals? 3. The. most noted production? State of society? Government? Religion Capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. ASSUMPTION-the capital. Villa Rica-E. of Assumption. Conception-N. of Assumption. Itapurat -S. E. of Assumption. Curuguatys-N. E. of Assumption. Neembucu-tS. of Assumption. URUGUAY. Square miles; 90,000.-Population, 100,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 1. 1. Uruguay has a fertile soil, a proverbially healthy climate, and a favorable situation for commerce. MONTEVIDEO, the capital, is situated on the left bank of the Rio-de la Plata. Questions.-1. What is said of Uruguay State of society? Government? Religion? Capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. MONTEVIDEo-the capital. lMaldonado-E. of Montevideo. ol.i-ven'-za. b tah-bah-ting'gah. c veel'-yah.ree-kah. dmah-kah-ay'. eeel-yay'-oce fkah.sho-ay'.e-rah. g per-iah-gwah. h ser.zhe6.pay-del.ray. i mah.sayt-yo. j go.yau'. nah. pah.rah.e6-bah. le6-ko. m o.ay'.e.ras. nah.rah-kah.tee. oe-tah-pe-koo-roo' p he.kah-too'. qkah-shee-as. r zhay.roo-men'.yah. 8 koo.roo-gwah.tee', t ee.tah.poo'-rah nay-em.boo-koo'. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 149 BUENOS AYRES. Square miles, 750,000.-Population 1,250,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 1. Buenos Ayres is noted for its immense plains, called pampas, on wl ich vast herds of cattle and wild horses graze and range, and are often hunted for their skins only. 2. The inhabitants out of the cities and villages are chiefly herdsmen, and the doil is but little cultivated. 3. Hides, horns, and tallow, are largely exported. 4. Rich mines of gold and silver are found in the mountains, and salt abounds in the N. W. part and on the eastern plains. BUENOS AYRes, the capital, situated on the S. bank of the Rio de la Plata, is the largest city, and one of the most important commercial towns in S. America. Questions.-1. For what is Buenos Ayres noted? 2. Occupation of the inhabitants? 3. Exports? 4. Minerals? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of Buenos Ayres? CITIES AND TOWNS. BUENOS AYRES-the capital. Catamarca- next S. W. of Tucuman mi Santa Fe- on Parana R. next N. of Buenos Rioiacr- order. Corrientes- Ayres in order. San Juan- ne S. o Cordova- next N. W. of Buenos Ayres Mendoza- n o Santiago - in order. San Luis-next E. of Mendoza. Tucuman- ) o Doquelees-next S. W. of Buenos Ayres. Salta-next N. of Tucuman. Ft. Del Carmen-next S. E. of Doqueleesa Jujuyb-next N. W. of Salta. PATAGONIA. Square miles, 370,000.-Population, 30,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 1 in 121. 1. Patagonia is a cold, barren, dreary country, thinly inhabited by Indians, some of whom are remarkable for their gigantic stature. Questions. —1. What is said of Patagonia? State of society? Government? Religion? CHILI. Square miles, 170,000.-Population, 1,500,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 9. 1. Chili has a fine, healthy climate, and a rich soil, and is one of the most deLightful countries on the globe. 2. It is the most thickly settled country in S. America, has rich mines of gold, silver, and copper, and produces abundantly the vine, the olive, English grains, and various kinds of fruit. 3. Many of the lofty peaks of the Andes are volcanoes, and earthquakes are frequent. 4. In the N. part no rain ever falls, but the want of it is occasionally supplied by heavy dews. 5. Juan Fernandez Islands, noted as the residence of Alexander Selkirk, a Scotch sailor, whose adventures gave rise to the well known, story of Robinson Crusoe, belong to Chili. SANTIAGO, the capital, is situated on an extensive plain, about 90 miles fiomr Valparai'so, the most noted port in Chili. Questions.-1. What is said of Chili? 2. Population, minerals, and vegetable productions? 3. The Andes? 4. What is said of the N. part.? 5. Juan Fernandez Islands? State of so liety? Government Religion Describe Santiago. CITIES AND TOWNS. Santilgo-the capital. Quillota g-next N. W. of Santiago. Vaiparaiso d-next W. of Santiago. San Felipe hLa Palma- ) Santa Rosa — Concepcion- next nearly. Valpa- Coquimbo i — [ next nearly N. of Santiago Valdivia r-nouascoj- in order. St. Carlosf- raiso in order. Copiapo Castro- Juncal ka san ti-ah -go. b hoo-hwee'. c ree-o' hah. d val pah-rit.so. e val.deel've-ah. f t, kar.loo~. gkeel-yo'-tah. Asan-faylee'.-ay. iko-keem'-bo. jhwas' ko. k hoong-kalt. 15l0 KEY T) PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. BOLIVIA. Square miles, 450,000.-Population, 1,500,000.-Pop. to sq. in., 31. 1. Bolivia, once a part of Peru, which it resembles in climate and soil, is noted fcr its rich min s of silver. Potosi, celebrated for its silver mine, yielded in 300 years more than a thousand million dollars. 2. The western part is traversed by ranges of the Andes, which rise into the loftiest summits on the American continent, while the eastern part stretches out into immense plains. 3. The Desert of Atacama occupies the part between the Andes and Pacific, and is 250 miles long, and from 30 to 60 broad. CHUQUISA'CA, the capital, is situated on a plain, 9300 feet above the level of the sea. Questions. —1. For what is Bolivia noted? 2. What is said of the surface? 3. The Desert of Atacama? State of society? Government? Religion? The capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. CHUQtUISACA -the capital. Oruro-. f tiinrr Tarijab-S. E. of Chuquisaca. La Paz- of Potos n order. Cotagayta -S. of Chuquisaca. Cochabamba- of La Pa in order. ~Polt~osi-~ }W onrdr Santa Cru- E. of La Paz n order. Uijd S. W. of Chuquisaca in order. WoCobijas- SWofCicanod. New Coimbra'- on Paraguay R. in the S. E. part. PERU. Square miles, 480,000.-Population, 1,550,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 31. 1. Peru is noted for the variety of its climate, the number and dissimilarity of its vegetable productions, and its mines of precious metals. 2. The summits of the Andes are covered with perpetual snow; on the table lands, the climate is mild, and on the plains along the coast, the heat is constant. " a drop of rain never falls," and thunder and lightning are unknown. 3. The most noted productions are gold, silver, quicksilver, and the cinchona the tree or shrub which yields the Peruvian bark. LIMA, the capital, is situated on the Rimac, in a delightful valley, 7 miles from its port Callao on the Pacific. Questions.-1. For what is Peru noted? 2. Surface and climate? 3. Most noted proauc tions? State of society? Government? Religion? Capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. LiMAf-the capital. Tarma-next E. of Lima. Callaog W. of Lima. Guancavelica~ -next S. of Thrma. Pisco~- Guamanga-next S. E. of Tarma. Atico- on the coast nearly S E. of Lima SarayacuP-next N. E. of Lima. Aticot - on the coast nearly S. E.of LimaCaxatamboq-next N. of Lima. Oconai - order.Guarmey-next W. of Caxatambo. Quilcak- Huaurar-next N. E. of Guarmey. Arequipal-pext E. of Quilca. Ferrol- narl f rm Tambobamba- next nearly N. of Arequipa Truxillo'- er Guarmey Cuzcorn- $in order. Caxamarca- or acPun- nearly S. E. of Arequipa in order. -next N. W. of Truxllo in Arica- ) Piura- order. Ciicsa — next S. of Tacna in order. Payta- J lquique" ) Tumbez-next N. E. of Payta. ECUADOR. Square miles, 280,000.-Population, 650,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 21. 1. Ecuador resembles New Granada in climate, soil, and productions. 2. It contains the most celebrated summits of the Andes, and is noted for its elevated plains, which have a climate of perpetual spring. 3. Chimborazo, 21,430 feet high, was ascended by Humboldt in 1797, to the height of 19,400 feet, an elevation never before attained by man. a choo.ke-sah-kah. b tah-reg-hah. c ko-tah-ghy'-tah. dko.bee.hah. e co-eemt-'trah. f ieenah. g kal-lah'o. h e-sah. iah-tee-ko. jo-kone-yah. k keel-k-h. l aw.ray.kee-pah v koov' ko. n e.kee-kay. o gwang-kah.va)y.lee-ka. p sah-ry-ah-kou'. q kah-hah-tam'-bo rwow'-rah s troo-heei -yo. t laln by-ay'-kay. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 151 4. Pichincha, the volcanic mountain on the E. side of which Quito is built, ias been ascended to its top, an elevation of 15,936 feet. 5. Cotopaxi, 18,880 feet high, is the most dreadful and tremendous volcano in the world, and the flame sometimes rises 3000 feet above the top. In 1744 its roar was heard at Honda, a distance of 600 miles. QUITO, the capital, situated under the equator, on the E. side of Mount Pichin. cha, 9,500 feet above the sea, enjoys perpetual spring, and is within sight of 11 summits of the Andes, covered with perpetual snow. Questions.-1. In what respects does Ecuador resemble New Grenada 2. What does it contain, and for what noted? 3. What is said of Chimborazo? 4. Pichincha t 5. Cotopaxi? State of society? Government? Religion? Describe Quito. CITIES AND TOWNS. Quito-the capital. LatacungaOtaba'lo- next N. E. of Quito in order. amba xt nearly S W. of Quito in Ibar, ra — Cuenca - order......gu { next S. E. of Quito, on the Loxat- or...'. gus- Amazon River. Jaen J Guayaquil-nearly S. W. of Quito. *kweng-kah. t lo.hah $ hah.cn. EUR OPE. NORWAY Square miles, 120,000.-Population, 1,150,000.-Pop. to sq. nt, 91. 1. Norway is a cold, barren, and thinly settled country, consisting chiefly ol mountainous ridges, intersected by chasms and deep valleys. 2. It was once independent, but in 1387 it was annexed to Denmark, who ceded it in 1814 to Sweden; but it still retains its own constitution, diet, army, and laws. 3. The chief sources of wealth are the fisheries, forests of pine, fir, oak, and elm, and mines of iron, copper, and silver. 4. Near the western coast is the Maelstrom, a terrific whirlpool, a mile and a half in diameter, which sometimes draws ships, whales, and other animals within its vortex, and dashes them on the rocks beneath. CHRISTAIAIA at the head of a long, narrow bay, is the capital and chief city. Questions.-1. What is said of Norway? 2. To what country is it subject? 3. Chief sources of wealth? 4. What is said of the Maelstrom? State of society? Government? Religion Capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. CHRISTIANIA- the capital. Bergen-next N. W. of Christiansand. Drammen-next S. W. of Cliristiania. Drontheim*~- next N. E. of Bergen in Kongsberg-nearly N. W. of Drammen; Alstahong- order. Christiansand-next S. W. of Kongsberg. Hammerfest-on an island in the N. part. SWEDEN. Square miles, 170,000.-Population, 3,100,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 18-. 1. Sweden is mostly a level, barren country, abounding in lakes and rivers. 2. The soil is generally.thin and unproductive; but some parts are fertile and well cultivated. Nearly two-thirds of the surface is covered with forests. 3. The great wealth of Sweden consists in its mines of iron and copper, and in its extensive forests. Lumber, fish, iron, and copper, are the chief exports. 4. Elementary schools are generally established in both this country and Norway, and nearly every person is able to read. 5. Lapland, comprising the northern part of Norway, Sweden, and Russia, is a cold, dreary, and barren region, thinly inhabited by an ignorant, superstitious, and dwarfish people. STOCKHOLM, the capital, is situated partly on the main land, and partly on several islands in the strait between Lake Malar and the Baltic. Questions.-1. What is said of Sweden? 2. The soil? 3. Wealth? 4. Schools? 5. Lap. land? State of society? Government? Religion? What is the capital and how situated? CITIES AND TOWNS. STOCKHOLM-the capital. Umeai-) Upsal- nearly N. of Stockolm in order. Pitea — nearly N. E. of Sundswall in order ^^ llnearly N. of Stockolm in order. ^^ i Gefle- SLule —) Fahlun-next W. of Gefle. Calmar- on the coast of the Baltic, nearly Sundswall-nearly N. of Gefle. Carlscrona- S. W. of Stockholm in order Lund-W. S. W. of Carlscrona. Gottenburg-next N. W. of Carlscrona. 152 * drontt. -i t oo'-me-o. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 153 RUSSIA. Square miles, 2,000,000.-Population, 52,500,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 26~. 1. The Russian Empire is the most extensive on the globe, embracing more than half of Europe, all the north of Asia, and the north-western part of North America. 2. European Russia has mostly a level surface, and is noted for its vast plains and extensive forests. 3. The northern part is barren, and covered with forests, marshes, and mossy plains; the southern part is a fertile and well watered country, consisting of forests, rich pastures, and cultivated fields. 4. The Russians are divided into two classes, the nobles, who own most of the land, and the serfs, or slaves, who are bought and sold with the land they cultivate. 5. The chief productions are rye, oats, wheat, barley, hemp, and flax. 6. The principal exports are tallow, grain, leather, furs, hemp, flax, timbers and iron. ST. PETERSBUG, the capital, founded in 1703 by Peter the Great, is situated on the Neva at its entrace into the Gulf of Finland, and is the most regularly built, and magnificent city in the world. Moscow, on the Moskwa, was the ancient capital of Russia, and is still the residence of many of her nobles. It is noted for its conflagration in 1812, on the approach of Napoleon, and for its great bell, now broken, 67 feet round, 19 high, and weighing 200 tons. Warsaw, on the Vistula, was the capital of Poland, formerly the largest kingdom in Europe, but now extinct, having been divided since 1773 between Russia, Austria, and Prussia. Questions.-. What is said of the Russian Empire? 2. Of European Russia 3. Of the northern part? The southern part? 4. He,:re the Russians divided t 5. Productions? 6. Exports? State of society? Government Religion? What is said of St. Petersburg? Moscow? Warsaw? CITIES AND TOWNS. ST. PETERSBURa-the capital, on the Neva. Smolensk-next S. E. of Witepsk. Wyborg-next N. W. of St. Petersburg. Moheelefd- next nearly S. of Witepsk in Helsingfors — on the coast nearly W. of Wy- Kief- order. Abo- $ borg in order. Tchernigofe-nearly N. E. of Kief. Biorneborg- on the coast nearly N. of Abo Poltavaf-next S. E. of Tchernigof Wasa — in order. Zytomirg-next W. of Kief. Uleaborg-nearly N. E. of Wasa. Ismailh-next S. of Zytomir. Torne —N. W. of Uleaborg. Odessa-next N. E. of Ismail. Kajanaa-next S. E. of Uleaborg. Sevastopol-next S. E. of Odessa. Ekrostrof-next N. E. of Uleaborg. Cherson-next E. of Odessa. Kola-next N. of Ekrostrof Nikolaief'- next N. E. of Odessa in Olonetz- Ekatarinoslaf- 1 order. Onega — next N. E. of St. Petersburg in Taganrog —next S. E. of Ekatarinoslaf. Archangel- order. Tcherkask-next E. of Taganrog. Mezeneb- JVoronezh-next N. of Tcherkask. Oosac-on Petchora R. (17 S.) TzaritzinJ -next S. E. of Voronezh. Yarensk-next S..W. of Oosa. Penza-next N. of Tzaritzin. Cronstadt-next W. of St. Petersburg. Tambof —next W. of Penza. Narva Saratof-next S. E. of Penza. Dorpat — next S. W. of Cronstadt in order. Saratof —next S. E. of Penza. Simbirsk —next N. E. of Penza. Revel-next N. W. of Dorpat. Kharkof-next S. W. of Voronezh. Mittau- next S. W. of Dorpat in order. oorsk- nearly N. of Kharkof in order. Pskof-next S. E. of Dorpat. Toola-next N. E. of Orel. Novgorod-next N. E. of Pskof Kalooga-next N. W. of Toola. Dunaburg- - Moscow-next N. E. of Kalooga. (45 S.) Wilna- l Tver-next N. W. of Moscow. Grodno- next S. W. of P f In or Vladimeer - next N. N. E. of Moscow in Lublin- J Yaroslaf — order. Warsaw-next N. W of Lublin. Vologda-next N. of Yaroslaf. Witepsk-next S. E. of Pskof. Kostroma-nearly E. of Yaroslaf. Minsk-next S. W. of Witepsk. kah-yah'-na. b mez-ain'. c or Ousa. d or Moghley. e cher-ne-gof. f pole.tah.'vah. g or Zhiloneer. h is-mah-eel'. i ne-ko-ly'-ef. tsah-rit-seen'. or Vladimir. 20 1 t4 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. Nizhnee Novgorod — next E. of Moscow in Viatka-nearly N. cf Kazan. Kazan- order. Perm —next E. of Viatka. Oorznooma -next NW. of Kazan. AUSTRIA. Square miles, 255,000.-Population, 30,600,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 120. 1. Austriab is one of the largest, most populous, and powerful countries in Europe. 2. It is composed of several nations in almost every degree of civilization, differing in appearance, dress, language, religion, and forms of government. 3. The power of the emperor in some provinces is absolute, in others limited. 4. Austria exhibits every variety of surface and soil, and its forests are of vast extent. 5. The productions are grain of various kinds, olives, wine, flax, hemp, tobacco, and a great variety of fruits. 6. Mines of iron, copper, gold, silver, lead, and quicksilver, abound, but they are very little wrought. Its salt mines yield abundantly, and its mineral springs are more numerous than those of any other country. VIENNA, on the right bank of the Danube, is the capital and largest city. Questions.-1. What is said of Austria? 2. Of what is it composed? 3. What is said of the power of the emperor? 4. Surface, soil, and torests? 5. Productions? 6. Mines? State of society? Government? Religion? Capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. VIENNA-the capital, on the Danube. Szegeding- next S. W. of Debreczin in Iglau-next N. W. of Vienna, (69 N. W.) Eszek- order. Budweis-next S. W. of Iglau. Temesvar — Tabnord- ner. Hermansta^dt- next E. of Eszek in order. Klattau — next W. of Iglau in order. Cronstadt — ) Pilsen-N. of Klattau. NeustadtPragu- next N. W. of gau in orderofVienna in Tceplitz- next N. W. of Iglau in order. Klagenfurth- order. Reichenberg-next N. of Iglau. Gortz- Brunn —next E. of Iglau. Trieste-next S. E. of Gortz. Austerlitz-next S. E. of. Brunn. Laybach- ) Olmutz- ) Cilly- next N. E. of Trieste in order Sternberg- nearly N. E. of Brunn in order Marburg- ) Troppau- ) Agram'-nearly S. of Marburg. WieliczkaC-next E. of Troppau. ie ext S. W. of Aam in order Cracow-next N. W. of Wieliczka. RovignoJ- next S.W.of Agraminorder Bochnia- ) araLemberg- next E. of Wieliczka in order. Ragusa- next S. E. of Rovigno in order. Brody- ) Lintz-next W. of Vienna. Presburg-next E. of Vienna. Steyer-next S. E. of Lintz. Schemnitz-next E. of Presburg. Hallein-next S. W. of Steyer. Kremnitz-next N. W. of;Schemnitz. Salzburg- x.. in ) Neusohl-nearly N. of Schenmnitz. Braunau- next N. Halle order. Miskolcz~- alle I To^kay- next E. of Schemnitz in order. nnspruck- nearly W. of Hallein in order. Raab-next S. E. of Vienna. Brixen-next S. E. of Innspruck. Buda- Botzen- Pesthe -. next E. of Raab in order. Trent- next S. of Innspruck in order. Debreczinf- ) Roveredo- a Or Ourjoum. b The Austrian Empire is composed of parts of Italy, Germany, ancient Polano, and the whole of the Hungarian states. Austrian Italy embraces Lombardy and Venice, called the LombardoVenitian kingdom. Austrian Germany, comprising the western part of Austria, embraces Bohemia, Moravia, Austrian Silesia, Austria proper, Styria, Illyria, and the Tyrol. Austrian Poland. called the kingdom ot Gallacia, constitutes the northeastern part of Austria; and the Hungarial States, comprising Hungary, Transvlvania, Sclavoica, Croatia, and Dalmatia, constitute the cen tral, southeastern, and southern parts, c we-litcll -ka. d mish-kolts'. epest. f day-bret'.sin. g seg-ed een. A tre-st. i ah'-gram. j ro.veent-yo. kbrbv.now. lhal'.leh. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 15 TURKEY. Square miles, 190,600.-Population, 10,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m. 52~ 1. Turkey, or the Ottoman Empire, comprises two great divisions, Turkey in Europe, and Turkey in Asia. 2. It is governed by an absolute despot, styled Sultan or Grand Seignior. The prime minister is called the Grand Vizier, and the court of the Sultan, the Porte, or Sublime Porte. The Mufti, or head of the ecclesiastical order, is the chief interpreter of the law, and ranks next in dignity to the Sultan. Governors of provinces are called Pashaws, or Bashaws. 3. The Turks are grave and sedate, but indolent, ignorant, and bigoted. 4. The surface is varied, consisting of rich plains, and extensive mountain ranges, interspersed with numerous valleys. 5. The climate is delightful, and the soil fertile, but agriculture, manufactures, and commerce, languish under the oppressive exactions of the despotic government. 6. The chief productions are maize, wheat, rye, barley, oats, cotton, silk, tobacco, wine, oils, and various kinds of fruits. Crapes, gauzes, and fine carpets, are manufactured. 7. Candia, or Crete, a large island in the Mediterranean, is hilly and' mountainous, and belongs to Egypt, which is nominally subject to Turkey, but really independent. Candia, on the northern coast, is the residence of the Pashaw. Canea, on the coast west of Candia, is the chief commercial town of the island. Cyprus also belongs to Egypt. CONSTANTINOPLE, the capital, on the Bosporus, is built on seven hills, and has a safe, capacious, and beautiful harbor. The gilded domes and elegant minarets of its 300 mosques, rising from the bosom of the beautiful groves, give it a magnificent appearance at a distance, but on entering it, you find the streets narrow, crooked, ill-paved, and dirty, and the houses low and gloomy. Questions.-1. What does Turkey comprise? 2. How governed? What is the prime minister called? The court of the Sultan? What is said of the Mufti? What are the governors of provinces called 3. What is said of the Turks? 4. The surface? 5. The climate and soil? 6. Chief productions? 7. Candia? State of society Government? Prevailing religion? Describe the capital. CITIES AND TOWNS. CONSTANTINOPLE-the capital,on the Bosporus. Adrianople-next W. of Kirkliseh. Gallipolia-on the Dardanelles, (83 S.) Eskisara-nearly N. W. of Adrianople. Silistria- ) Philippolis —nearly W. of Adrianople. Roostchookb-. on the S. bank of the Danube, Salonica —on the Gulf of Salonica, (82 S) Nicopol-. from E. to W in order. Seres-next N. E. of Salonica. Widin- r Sophia-next N. of Seres. Belgrade- J Larissa-next S. S. W. of Salonica. Brahilofc~ ~ -. ~ ~ Joannina-next W. of Lartssa. Jassy-f- next N of Silistria in order. oannina-next. of Jo annina. Bucharest-nearly N. W. of Silistria. Avlona-on G. of Venice, (81 S. E.) Giurgevod-nearly W. of Silistria. Scutarif-next N. of Avlona. Shoomla-next S. W. of Silistria. Mostar-next N. W. of Scutari. Varna-next S. E. of Shoomla. Bosna Seraig-next N. E. of Mostar. Boorgase- 1 Kirkliseh- nearly S. of Varna in order. GREECE. Square miles, 20,000.-Population, 675,000. —Pop. to sq. m., 33. 1. Greece was the most celebrated country of antiquity, and, two thousand years ago, excelled all other nations in civilization, science, literature. and the fine arts. 2. Modern Greece comprises the territories of all the most celebrated and ia Leresting cf the ancient Grecian States. a gal-lip'-o-le. h TWri m also Rustschuk, and Rutschuk. c or Ibrail. djoor.jayt.vo e or Bourgas. f skoo' tah-re. g bos'nah-ser-i' 156 KEY TO PELTON' OUTLINE MAPS. 3. After having been nearly four centuries in the lowest state of degradation under the Turks, Greece revolted in 1821, and is again independent. 4. The government is a constitutional monarchy, nearly absolute, and heredi. tary in the line of Prince Otho, of Bavaria, who is the reigning King. The prevailing religion is that of the Greek Church. 5. The surface is uneven and rugged, and diversified with fertile valleys. The soil is better adapted to pasturage than agriculture, and the raising of sheep is an important branch of industry. Goats are also very abundant. 6. The chief productions are grains, wines, figs, olives, dates, oranges, citrons, pomegranates, and other fruits. 7. The finest views every where meet the eye of the traveller in Greece, and its natural beauties are not less interesting than its classical associations, and the ruins of ancient art and splendor scattered over it. "Yet are thy skies as blue, thy crags as wild " Where'er we tread'tis haunted, holy ground; Sweet are thy groves, and verdant are thy fields, No earth of thine is lost in vulgar mould, Thine olive ripe as when Minerva smiled, But one vast realm of wonder spreads around, And still his honeyed wealth Hymettus* yields; And all the Muse's tales seem truly told, There the blithe bee, his fragrant fortress builds, Till the sense aches with gazing to behold The free born wanderer of thy mountain air; The scenes our earliest dreams have dwelt upon, Apollo still thy long, long summer gilds, Each hill and dale, each deepening glen and wold, Still in his beam Mendili's marbles glare; Defies the power which crush'd thy temples gone: Art, Glory, Freedom fail, but Nature still is fair. Age shakes Athena's tower, but spares gray Ma. rathon. ATHENS, the capital, near the Gulf of Egina, was the most renowned city of antiquity for eloquence, poetry, philosophy, and the fine arts. Questions.-1. What is said of Greece? 2. What does modern Greece comprise? 3. What recent political change? 4. What is the government? Prevailing religion? 5. The surface? Soil? 6. Chief productions? 7. Scenery? The capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. ATHEN —the capital. Corinth-nearly N. of Napoli. Negropont-next N. of Athens. Argos —next N. W. of Napoli. Thebes-next N. W..of Athens. Napoli de Malvasia-next S. of Napoli. Livadia- ) Sparta- next N. W. of Napoli de Ma Lepanto- next W. of Thebes in order. Tripolizza- $ vasia in order. Missolonghi-) Navarino-W. of Napoli de Malvasia. Patras-next S. of Lepanto. Arcadia-next N. of Navarino. Napolit next S. W. of Athens, on the G. of aNapoliT- a IONIAN ISLANDS. 1. The Ionian Islands, viz., Cerigo, Zante, Cephalonia, Ithaca, Santa Maura, Paxo, and Corfu, form the Ionian Republic, or the Republic of Seven Islands, under the protection of Great Britain. Corfu, on the island of the same name, is the seat of government. 2. The inhabitants are chiefly Greeks and Italians. They are enterprising and trade in wine, olive-oil, and currants, the chief productions. CITIES AND TOWNS. CORFU-on Corfu Island. Argostoli-on Cephalonia Island. Amaxichi-on Santa Matura Island. Zante-on Zante Island. Ithaca-on Ithaca Island. Kapseli-on Cerigo Island. ITALY. Square miles, 120,022.-Population, 22,577,859.-Pop. to sq. m., 188. 1. Italy is the seat of the ancient Roman Empire, and one of the most interesting countries in the world. 2. It comprises the kingdom of Naples or the Two Sicilies, the Popedom or States of the Church, the Republic of San Marino. the Grand Duchy of Tuscany and Lucca, the Duchies of Modena, and Parma, the kingdom of Lombardy and Venice under the government of Austria, the kingdom of Sardinia, and the principality of Monaco. * The honey of Mt. Hymettus is now, as of old, the best in Europe, and is an important product t nah'pol-le. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 157 TABULAR VIEW OF THE ITALIAN STATES. STATES. CAPITALS. RANK.. M. POP. RELIGION. Naples, or the Two Sicilies, Naples, Kingdom, 42,131 7,956,925 Catholic. States of the Church, Rome, Popedom, 17,210 2,732,436 do. Sanan Marinon Marino, Republic, 22 7.600 do. Tuscany and Lucca,* Florence, Grand Duchy, 8,800 1,646,827 do. Modena, Modena, Duchy, 2,092 403,000 do. Parma, Parma, Duchy, 2,280 465,673 do. IJLombardy and Venice, Milan, Kingdom, 18,250 4,707,630 do. Sardinia, Turin, Kingdom, 29,190 4,650,768 do. I onaco, Monaco, Principality, 50 7,000 do. 3. Italy has the loftiest mountains, the most beautiful plains, the richest soil. and the finest climate in Europe, and is unrivalled for the beauty and diversity of its scenery. 4.. In music, painting, sculpture, and architecture, the Italians excel all other nations. 5. The fertility of the soil and the beauty of the climate are highly favorable to agriculture, but it languishes under the laws and customs to which the people are subjected. "How has kind Heav'n adorn'd the happy land, With all the gifts that heav'n and earth impart, And scattered blessings with a wasteful hand! The smiles of nature and the charms of art, But what avail her unexhausted stores, While proud Oppression in her valleys reigns, Her blooming mountains and her sunny shores And Tyranny usurps her happy plains." 6. The staple productions ere silk, olive-oil, and wine; wheat, corn, and rice, are cultivated, and oranges, figs, dates, almonds, and a great abundance of the finest fruits, are also produced. 7. Sicily, anciently the granary of Rome, is the largest, finest, and most beautiful island in the Mediterranean. 8. Malta, a celebrated island in the Mediterranean, south of Sicily,,l elongs to Great Britain, and is noted for its fine harbor and strong fortifications. Here St. Paul was shipwrecked on his voyage from Palestine to Rome. Valetta, the capital and port, is strongly fortified, and has an excellent harbor. 9. Elba, an island in the Mediterranean, near the coast of Tuscany, to which it belongs, is remarkable for having been the residence of Napoleon, after his first overthrow, from May, 1814, to February, 1815. NAPLES, the capital of the kingdom of the same name, and the largest city in Italy, is noted for its beautiful bay, its swarms of beggars, its delicious climate, and the beauty of the surrounding country. ROME, on the Tiber, anciently the capital of the Roman Empire, and now the capital of the Papal States, is noted for its temples, columns, arches, palaces, and monuments of splendid architecture, and abounds in magnificent remains of antiquity. The Colise'um, (or Colosseum,) the wonder of ancient Rome, and now the most august and imposing ruin in the world, was constructed for the combats of gladiators and wild beasts, and had seats for more than 80,000 spectators, and standing room for 20,000 more. The celebrated Cathedral of St. Peter is the largest and most beautiful church that has ever been erected, and is the noblest specimen of architecture in the world. It covers an area of nearly five acres, and the height from the floor to the cross is about 460 feet. FLORENCE, on the Arno, the capital of Tuscany, and one of the finest cities in Europe, is noted for its gallery of paintings and sculptor. Leghorn, on the Mediterranean, is the first commercial city in Italy. MILAN, the capital of Lombardy and Venice, contains an academy of fine arts, one of the most extensive in Europe, and a picture gallery, rich in the choicest productions of the ancient Italian masters. Venice, at the N. W. extremity of the Gulf of Venice, once the greatest corn * Lucca has been transferred to Tuscany, and the Grand Duke of T'secany is now Grand Duke o( Tuscanv and Lucca. 158 KEY TO PELTON S OUTLINE MAPS. rtercial city in the world, and the capital of the ancient republic of the same name, is built on a cluster of small islands, and at a distance seems to float en the sea"From out the wave her structures rise, As from the stroke of the enchanter's wand." Canals, crossed by numerous bridges, and intersecting every part of the city, form the " water streets" of Venice, and boats or gondolas are used for carriages. " In Venice. Tasso's echoes are no more, And silent rows the songless gondolier; Her palaces are crumbling to the shore, And music meets not always now the ear; Those days are gone-but Beauty still is here." TURIN, the capital of Sardinia, on the Po, is one of the most regularly built towns in Europe, and its literary and scientific institutions rank among the very first in Italy. Genoa, at the head of the Gulf of Genoa, once the capital of a republic of the same name, now the chief seaport of Sardinia, is built in a semi-circular form, and rises like an amphitheatre from the water's edge to the height of 500 or 600 feet, presenting a grand and imposing aspect from the sea. Questions.-1. What is said of Italy? 2. What does it comprise? 3. Natural features? 4. In what do the Italians excel? 5. Soil and climate? 6. The staple productions? 7. What is said of Sicily? 8. Malta? Its capital? 9. Elba? Naples? Rome? The Coliseum? The Cathedral of St. Peter? Florence? Leghorn? Milan? Venice? Turin? Genoa? CITIES AND TOWNS' NAPLES- -the capital of Naples. LuccA-next N. of Pisa. Capua-next N. of Naples. Gaetaa-next W. of Capua. MODENA-the capital of Modena. Campobasso-next N. E. of Capua. Carrara-next S. W. of Modena. Foggiab next N. E. of Naples. Bari-on the coast E. of Naples. PARMA-the capital of Parma. Le nearly S.E. of Ba in order. PiacenzaJ-nearly N W. of Parma. Otranto- nearly S. E. of Bari in order. Taranto-next S. S E. of Bari MILAN-the capital of Lombardy and Venice Cava-next S. E. of Naples. Como-next N. of Milan. Salerno-next S. of Cava. Bergamo-N. E. of Milan. Policastro- rescia- next E. of Bergamo in order. Cosenza- next S. E. of Cava in order. VeronaCatanzaro- Lodi-next E. of Milan. Messina — in N. E. part of Sicily on the Pavia —next S. of Milan. ^e S Strait of Messina. Cremona- Reggiod-next E. of Messina. Mantua — next E. of Pavia in order. Catania- next nearly S. of Messina in Chioggia- Syracuse- ~ order. Venice-next N. of Chioggia. Palermo-on the N. coast of Sicily. Padua-next W. of Venice. Trapani-nearly W. of Palermo. Vicenza-nearly N. W. of Venice. Marsala-nearly S. W. of Palermo. Treviso-,net N. of Ven in order Girgenti-nearly S. E. of Palermo. Belluno- next N of Vence n order Udinel-next N. E. of Venice. RoME-the capital of the Popedom. Tivoli-next N E. of Rome. TURIN-the capital of Sardinia. Civita Vecchiae -N. W. of Rome. Chamberyv-nearly N. W of Turin. Perugiaf-next N. of Rome. - Novara-next N. E. of Turin. Macerata- nearly. of Perugia in order. Ast-S E. of Turin on a branch of Po R. Fermo — Saviglione-) Lorretto-next N. of Fermo. Coni — next S. S. W. of Asti in order Ancona-next N. W. of Lorretto. Nice- - Rimini-on the coast N. of Perugia. Mondovi- Ravenna-next N W. of Rimini.; Oneglia- next S. of Ast n oder. Bologna^-nearly W. of Ravenna. Alessandria-) Ferrara-nearly N. of Bologna. Novi- nearly S. E. of Asti in order, Genoa- ) SAN MARINo-the capital of San Marino. Sassari-in the N. WV. of Sardinia I. Oristano- I FLORENcE-the capital of Tuscany. Cagliari nearly S. of Sassari in order. Sienna-nearly S. of Florence. Leghorn-nearly S. W. of Florence. MoNAco-the capital of Monaco. Pisai -nearly W. of Florence. Mentoneq-next N. E. of Monaco a gah.avl-tah. b fod'-jah. clet'.chay. dred'-jo. che6-v6-tah-vekl-ke-ah. fpay-roo'-jah g nmahl.chy rah' -tah. h bo-lone-yah. i pee'-zah. j pe-ah-chent-zah. k pah-vee' ah I ke-od'-jah. n oo -de-nay. cham-bay-re'. o o.nel-yah. p kal'-yah-re. q men.to'.pay. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 15( SWITZERLAND. Square miles, 15,000.-Population 2,200,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 146~. I. Switzerland is noted for the grandeur of its natural scenery, and the free. dom of its political institutions. 2. It is a republic, consisting of 22 independent states, called cantons, united in a confederacy. fr,ftual defence, and governed by a diet composed of deputies from all the cantons. 3. The most striking natural features of Switzerland are its lofty mountains, extensive glaciers, beautiful lakes, and fine waterfalls. It is also remarkable for its terrific avalanches. 4. Glaciers are immense fields of glittering ice, which form on the sides of the mountains, and often extend 15 or 20 miles in length. 5. Avalanches are vast masses of ice and snow, which slide down the declivities of the mountains with a tremendous roar, sometimes overwhelming travellers, buildings, and even the villages below. 6. The agricultural productions are grain, wine, and various kinds of fruit; but the raising of cattle is the chief occupation of the Swiss farmer, who is occupied at his loom in winter, and when his land does not require his attention. BERNE, are alternately the capitals of the Swiss confederation. Berne, on the LUCERNE, Aar, Lucerne, on both sides of the Reuss, at the W. extremity of ZURICH, Lake Lucerne, and Zurich, on the Limmat at its egress from LakeZurich, are noted for the beauty of their situation. Questions.-1. For what is Switzerland noted? 2. Of what does it consist, and how go verned? 3. The most striking natural features? 4. What are glaciers? 5. Avalanches? 6. The productions? Chief occupation of the Swiss farmer? State of society? Government? Religion? Capitals? CITIES AND TOWNS. BERNE- ) Neufchatel-next W. of Berne. LUCERNE- capitals of Switzerland. Soleurel next N. of Berne in order. ZURICh — Basel - e Sion-next S. of Berne. St. Gall-next E. of Zurich. Freiburg- Schaffhausen —next N. E. of Zurich. Lausanne*- next S. W. of Berne in order. Geneva- ) FRANCE. Square miles, 202,500.-Population, 34,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 1681. 1. France is one of the largest, richest, and most powerful countries in Europe. 2. Her large population, the active spirit of her people, and her favorable geographical position, have given her for centuries a commanding influence among the nations of the world. 3. In 1848, the people deposed the king and established a republican government. 4. The French language is one of the most refined in Europe, and is more generally used in European courts and polite society than any other. 5. In literature, science, and the arts, the French have long ranked among the most civilized and enlightened nations; but education till recently has been chiefly confined to the higher classes, and a large part of the population even now can neither read nor write. 6. The surface is generally level, except in the eastern part, which is diversified with mountains, table lands, and fruitful valleys. 7. The climate is one of the finest in the world, and the soil is rich, producing wheat, rye, maize, the wine, the mulocrry, the olive, and rich fruits in abundance. 8. The French excel in the beauty of their manufactures, and export silks, linens, woollens, wines, and brandy. 9. The most important minerals are iron and coal. *lo-zann t so-lur'. t bahb-zel. I shaff-howl-zean t60 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 10. The Island of Corsica, in the Mediterranean, belongs to France. Its sur face is mountainous, and its soil poorly cultivated. Ajaccio, on the coast, in the southwest part, is noted as the birthplace of Napoleon. PARIS, on the Seine, is the gayest city in Europe, and a distinguished seat of civilization, learning, and the arts. Questions. —1. What is said of France? 2. Her population and position? 3. Government? 4. Language? 5. Literature, science, and the arts? 6. Surface? 7. Climate, soil, and productions? 8. Manufactures and exports? 9. Minerals? 10. What is said of Corsica State of society Government? Religion The capital CITIES AND TOWNS. PARIs-the capital, on the Seine. Aix-next S. E. of Avignon. Rouen- )next N.W. of Parisin order. Marseilles-nearly S. W. of Aix. Dieppe- net N. W. of Parisinorder. Toulon-next S E. of Aix. ~~~~~~Havre-. ~ Grenoble-next N. of Aix. Caen- next S. W. of Dieppe in order. Lyons-next N. W. of Grenoble. Cherbourg-next N. W. of Caen. St. Etienne-next S. W. of Lyons. Rennes-. W of C ae n ) ordr Moulins —next N. W. of Lyons. L'Orient- nearly S. W. of Caen in order. Nevers-next N. of Moulins. Brest-next N. W. of L'Orient. Bourges-next W. of Nevers. Alencon- x S E. f Caen in order. Fontainebleau-next S. of Paris. Le Mans next o aen n order. Troyes — nearly E. of Fontainebleau in Versailles- Chaumont- ) order. Orleans- next S. W. of Paris in order. Dijon-next S. of Chaumont. Tours- Besancon-next S. E. of Chaumont. Angers —net W. of Tours in order. Nancy-next N. E. of Chaumont. Nante~~\"- ~ ^' Metz-next N. of Nancy. Rochefort — ext nearly S. of Nantes iCn halons-nearly E. of Paris. Bordeaux- order. Rheims-next N. E. of Paris. Bayonne-nearly S. W. of Bordeaux. Amiens-next N. of Paris. Angouleme- next N. E. of Bordeaux in Arras — nextN. E. of Amiens in order. Limoges — order. Lille — Poitiers-next N. W. of Limoges. Valenciennes-next S. E. of Lille. Aurillac-next S. E. of Limoges. Dunkirk-next N, W. of Lille. Clermont-next N. E. of Aurillac. Calais-next nearly S. W. of Dunkirk. Cahors- nearly S. W. of Aurillac in Bastia in the N. E. of the Island of CorMontauban- 5 order.' sica. Toulouse-next S. of Montauban. Calvi-nearly W. of Bastia. Narbonne-nearly E. of Toulouse. Ajaccio-nearly S. W. of Bastia MontpellierNi -mselier- nearly N. E. of Narbonne in Avignon- order. SPAIN. Square miles, 176,500.-Population, 12,000,000.-Pop. to sq. tn., 68 1. Spain, once the most powerful kingdom in Europe, is now one of the feeblest. 2. It is chiefly a country of mountains and table-lands, and abounds in wild and sublime scenery. 3. The surface of the table-lands ~s varied, mostly destitute of toiests, and chiefly used for pasturage, on which feed in summer, immense flocks of merino sheep. In winter they are driven to the low plains. 4. The soil, in the north and in the interior, is light in many places, but in the provinces along the Mediterranean it is very fertile, producing the wine, the olive, grain, oranges, lemons, figs, and other rich fruits in abundance. 5. Agriculture, manufactures, and commerce, languish under the oppressive exactions of the government. 6. The mountains of Spain abound in valuable mines, which are but little wrought. 7. Andorra, situated irt a valley on the southern declivity of the Pyrenees, is a little republic, containing 192 square miles, and 15,000 inhabitants, under the protection of France. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 161 8. Gibraltar, on a spacious bay at the southern extremity of Spain, near the entrance to the Mediterranean, belongs to Great Britain, and is the strongest and most remarkable fortress in the world. MADRID, the capital, on the Manzanares, is situated on a sterile table-land, 2000 feet above the sea, and is enclosed by a brick wall 20 feet high, with 15 gates. It is a dull but superb city, and the royal palace is one of the finest in Europe, occupying with its gardens a space of nearly 80 acres. Qtestions.-1. What is said of Spain? 2. The surface? 3. The table-lands? 4. Soil and productions? 5. Agriculture, manufactures, and commerce? 6. Minerals? 7. Andorrt.. Gibraltar I State of society? Government? Religion? The capital t CITIES AND TOWNS. MADRID-the capital. Barcelona-nearly E. of Cervera. Almaolden- next S. W. of Madrid in order. Hndorra-_nearly N. of Cervera. Almaden- \ Il ~^^^^'Huescae -nearly N. W. of Cerv'ra. Cordova- Soria-nearly N. E. of Madria. Malaga- next S. of Almaden in order. oria-n early E. of Madria. Malaga- Saragossa —nearly E. of Soria. Seville-next N. W. of Malaga. Pampeluna-next N. E. of Soria. Gibraltar-next S. W. of Malaga. Vittoria- eN of Soia in order. Cadiz-next W. of Gibraltar. Bilboa- n of Sa PXeros- next N. W. of Gibraltar in order. Burgos-next N. W. of Soria. Xere~aLPalos- 5 Santander-next N. of Burgos. Badajosb -next N. of Palos. Segovia — Granada- next N. E of Malaga in order. Leldolid- next nearly N. W. of Madrid next N.E. of Malaga in orderaod Jaen Leon- -- order. Almeriac-next E. of Malaga. viedo Carthagena-next N. E. of Almeria. Astorga — Murcia-nearly N. W. of Carthagena. Salamanca- n. of Ovedo i Orihuela - next N. N. E. of Carthagena in Ciudad Rodrigo- o rder. Alicant- order. Ferrol-next W. of Oviedo. Valencia-next N. of Alicant. Corunna-next S. W. of Ferrol. Tortosa — ) Santiago de Compostela-nearly S. of FerroL Reus- >next N. E. of Valencia in order. Palma-on the Island of Majorca. Cervera — Port Mahonf-on the Island of Minorca. PORTUGAL Square miles, 36,500.-Population, 3,500,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 96. 1. Portugal, once noted for its maritime discoveries, and for a time the first commercial kingdom in Europe, is now one of the weakest and least important. 2. In surface, soil, and productions, it resembles Spain. 3. Agriculture, manufactures, and the arts, are neglected; and education and improvements of every kind are in a backward state. LISBON, the capital, on the Tagus, about 9 miles from the sea, is finely situated for trade, and has a safe and magnificent harbor, capable of containing all the fleets of Europe. Questions.-1. What is said of Portugal? 2. Surface, soil, and productions? 3. Agricu4 ture, manufactures, and the arts? Education and improvements? State of society? Govern nent? Religion The capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. 1,SrBON-the capital, on the Tagus. jOporto-on Douro R. near its mouth. St. Ube —next S. E. of Lisbon. Coimbrag-nearly S. of Oporto. Evora —next E. of Lisbon. Braga-nearly N. of Oporto Elvaa —next N. E. of Evora. GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND. Square miles, 118,700.-Population, 26.908,900.-Pop. to sq. m., 2261. 1. The British Empire is the most powerful on the globe. 2. It embraces colonies, provinces, and possessions, in every quarter of the ahayS-res. bbad-a-hoce. c al-rpay-ree'-ah. do-re-way'.lah. I wastkah. /mah-honote g co.eem-brah. 21 62 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. world, and excels all other empires in manufactures, commerce, and in the ex. tent and power of its navy. 3. Great Britain, embracing England, Wales, and Scotland, is the largest of del European Islands, and with Ireland constitutes "the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland," the centre of the wealth and power of the. empire. 4. The government is a limited, hereditary monarchy, and the supreme power:. is vested in a King, or Queen, and Parliament. 5. The Parliament consists of two houses, viz., a House of Lords, and a House of Commons. The House of Lords is composed of bishops, and hereditary peers of five different ranks, viz., dukes, marquises, earls, viscounts, and barons. The House of Commons is composed of representatives elected by the people. Questions.-1. What is said of the British Empire? 2. What does it embrace? 3. What i said of Great Britain? 4. The government? 5. Of what does the parliament consist? Of wnom is the House of Lords composed t The House of Commons? ENGLAND AND WALES. Square miles, 57,000.-Population, 16,030,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 2813 1. England, comprises the largest, most fertile, and best cultivated part of the Island of Great Britain, and constitutes the most populous, wealthy, and important portion of the United Kingdom. 2. The general aspect of England is varied and delightful, and the surface is beautifully diversified with hills, valleys, and plains. 3. The proprietors of the soil are chiefly noblemen, and persons of rank and fortune, and the magnificence of their mansions and country seats, surrounded with fine woods and grounds, contrasts strongly with the cottages of the poorer classes. 4. The climate, moistened and tempered by the surrounding seas, imparts a soft, luxuriant verdure to the rich and highly cultivated fields. 5. Agriculture is conducted witn unrivalled skill. "Thousands of millions have been expended in making England what she now is," and in no nation has the combination of beauty with utility been so much regarded. Plains clothed in the richest verdure and watered by copious streams-gently rising hills and bending vales, fertile in grain, waving with woods, and interspersed with flowery meadows, present the most delightful landscapes of rural opulence and beauty. 6. The chief agricultural productions are wheat, barley, oats, rye, hops, beans, and peas. 7. In the extent and variety of its manufactures, England surpasses every other country in the world. 8. England is rich in mines of iron, copper, tin, lead, coal, and salt, which are extensively wrought. 9. The Universities of Oxford and Cambridge are the best endowed in the world, and the children of the higher classes enjoy the advantages of a superior education. 10. No system of common schools has been established, and the education of the lower classes has been greatly neglected; but much has recently been done for their improvement by Sunday and other schools. 11. The number, size, and splendor of the cities and towns of England, coin. municating with each other by means of numerous canals and railroads of the most costly and perfect construction, justly excite the admiration of travellers. Many of them are the chosen seats of opulence, art, literature, and science. 12. Wales is a rugged, mountainous region, resembling England in climate, soil, and productions. It abounds in iron, lead, copper, and coal, and exports large quantities of iron, chiefly for railroads, to the United States. The oldest son of the sovereign of England is styled Prince of Wales. LONDON, on the Thames, 45 miles from the sea, is the capital of the British DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 163 \ Em pire, and the g';eatest city in Europe. In wealth, commerce, literature, science, arts, and ciaritable institutions, it excels every other city in the world. Liverpool, on the Mersey, near its mouth, is, next to Lon, rn, the greatest commercial emporium in the British Empire, and the principal depot of trade with America. Questions.-. What do England and Wales comprise and constitute? 2. What is the general aspect of England? 3. Who are the proprietors of the soil? 4. What is said of the climate? 5. Agriculture? 6. What are the chief agricultural productions? 7. In what does England surpass every other country? 8. In what is England rich? 9. What is said of Oxford and Cambridge? 10. Of education? 11. Of cities and towns? 12. Of Wales? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of London? Liverpool 1 CITIES AND TOWNS. LoNDON —the capital, on the Thames. Chelmsford-) Woolwich — on the S. bank of the Thames, Colchester-. next N. E. of London in order. Chathamn- nearly E. of London in order. Ipswich — Maidstone- next S. W. of Chathar. in Harwich-next S. E. of Ipswich. Tunbridge- order. Norwich- nearly A. E. of Ipswich in Lewes-nearly S. of Tunbridge. Yarmouth- order. Hastings-next S. E. of Tunbridge. Lynn Regis-nearly N. of Ipswich. Dover- next E. of Tunbridge. Newmarket- next N. W. of Ipswich in Canterbury- next E. N. E. of Tunbridge in Ely- order. Margate- 5 order. Cambridge-next S. of Ely. Greenwich- t S. of London in order. Peterborough } next N. W. of Cambridge in Brighton- net. Leicester- order. Newport-on the Isle of Wight. Nottingham-next N. of Leicester. Portsmouth-next N. E. of Newport. Boston-next E. of Nottingham. Southamptonr- next N. of Newport in Newark- next N. E. of Nottingham in Winchester- order. Lincoln- order. Salisbury-next W. N. W. of Southampton. Derby-nearly N. W. of Nottingham. Windsor- on the S. bank of the Thames, Gainesborough net N. E. of Derby in order Reading — nearly W. of London in order. Barton — Oxford-next W. N. W. of London. Sheffield- next N of Cheltenham- next nearly W. of Oxford in Leeds- of e e Gloucester- - order. Manchester-next S. W. of Leeds. Bristol-next S. W. of Gloucester. Bolton- nearly N. W. of Manchester in Bath-next S. E. of Bristol. Blackburn- order. Taunton- - YorkExeter- next S. W. of Bristol in order. Scarborough nearly N. E. of Leeds in order. Dartmouth-nearly S. of Exeter. Beverley — nearly S. E. of Scarboro in Plymouth- next nearly W. of Dartmouth in Hull- order. Truro- order. Whitby- on the coast nearly N. W. of Falmouth-nearly S. of Truro. Sunderland- g Scarboro in order. Barnet-next N. of London. Stockton-next S. of Sunderland. Bedford-next N. N. W. of Barnet. Durham-nearly W. of Sunderland. Northampton- next N. W. of Bedford in Newcastle-next S. W. of Sunderland. Coventry- ordertN., BdodiAlnwick-next N. of Newcastle. order. Birmingham Cardiff- in the S. E. part of Wales, near the Kidderminster- next nearly S. of Birming- Severn. Worcester- ham in order. Brecon- ) Shrewsbury-next W. N. W. of Birmingham. New Radnor- next N. of Cardiff in order. Chester- Holywell-. ) next nearly N. of Shrewsbury Merthyr Tydvil-next W. of Cardiff. Preston- S or er.Swansea-next W. of Cardiff. lancaster-next N. W. of Preston. Caermarthen- next N. W. of Swansea in Kendall-next N. of Lancaster. Cardignan- order. Whitehaven-next N. W. of Kendall. Pembroke-next W. of Swansea. Carlisle — next N. E. of Whitehaven in Berwick- $ order. SCOTLAND. Square miles, 29,700.-Population, 2,628,900.-Pop. to sq. m., 881. 1. Scotland is divided by the Grampian Hills into two parts, the Highlands in the north, and the Lowlands in the south. 2. The Highlands are cold and rugged, and the soil is generally poor, and best adapted to grazing. The Lowlands are mostly fertile, and in some parts highly cultivated, producing oats, barley, wheat, rye, flax, and potatoes. 164 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 3. Scotland is famous for its numerous lakes, or "lochs," which are oated foi:heir picturesque scenery. 4. Coal and iron are the most valuable minerals; lead and copper are also bound. 5. The principal manufactures are fine cotton goods, woollen goods, and coarse linens. 6. The Scotch are an enterprising, well-educated, and a remarkably moral people. Schools are established in every parish. 7. The Hebrides, Orkney, and Shetland Islands, are generally rocky and barren, and the inhabitants live chiefly by fishing, fowling, and the pasturage of a few sheep and cattle. EDINBURGH, the capital, is the chief seat of the law courts of Scotland, and hag long been noted for its learned societies, and its celebrated university, one of the first in Europe. Questions.-1. How is Scotland divided? 2. What is said of the Highlands? The Low lands? 3. For what is Scotland famous? 4. What are the most valuable minerals? 5. The principal manufactures? 6. What is said of the Scotch? 7. The Hebrides, Orkney, and Shetland Islands? State of society? Government? Religion? The capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. EDINBURGH-the capital. Perth-nearly S. W. of Dundee. Dunbar-next E. of Edinburgh. Montrose-nearly N. E. of Dundee. Dumfries-nearly S. of Edinburgh. Stonehaven-) Falkirk-next W. of Edinburgh. Aberdeen- nearly N. of Montrose in order Stirling-next N. W. of Falkirk. Peterhead- ) Glasgow- Banff-next N. W. of Peterhead. Paisley- } next S. W. of Falkirk in order. Elgin-' Kilmarnock-) Inveness- nearly W. of Banff in order. Greenock-nearly N. of Kilmarnock. Dunbeath- next N. E. of Inverness in Ayr-nearly S. of Kilmarnock. Wick- order. Campbelltown-nearly W. of Ayr. Thurso-nearly N. W. of Wick. Leith- nKirkwall-on Orkney Is. next N. N. E. of Edinburgh Lerwick —on Shetland is. St. Andrews- n od Lerwck-on Shetland Is. Dundee- Stornaway-on Lewis Island. IRELAND. Square miles, 32,000.-Population, 8,250,000.-Pop. to sq. m. 258. 1. Ireland has generally a level surface, but in some parts it is diversified with hills and mountains. It contains numerous bogs, which supply an abundance of peat for fuel. 2. It has a moist, mild climate, and the brilliant verdure of its vegetation has acquired for it the name of the "Emerald Isle." 3. The soil is rich, and better adapted to grazing than agriculture. 4. Oats and potatoes furnish the chief food of the inhabitants; but beef, but. ter, pork, mutton, and other provisions, are produced in great quantities for the English markets. The principal manufacture is linen. 5. The people of Ireland are brave, generous, witty, warm-hearted, and hospitable; but the peasantry are extremely degraded, and their food is poor and scanty. 6. The proprietors of the soil are chiefly absentees, spending abroad the money obtained from their poor and wretched tenants. DUBLIN, the capital and largest city, at the head of a beautiful bay, is the seat 3f the only university of Ireland, and one of the finest cities in the United Kingdom. Cork, in the south of Ireland, is the second city in population, and has a good harbor. Questions.-1. What is said of the surface of Ireland? 2. The climate? 3. The soil 4 Productions? 5. Thepeople? 6. Theproprietors? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of Dublin? Cork? DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 165 CITIES AND TOWNS. DUBLIN-the capital Aghrim-next S. W. cf Athlone. Arklow-next S. of Dublin. Galway-next W. of Aghrim. Ca;rlow )nxWo Akoird.Tuarnm — next N. XVW. of Aghrim is ilkenny- ext W. of Aklow in order.Castl _ Wexford- ) Sligoaterford-_ next S. W. ofArklow m order. Dongal- nearly N. of Aghrim in order. Clonmell- nearly W. of Waterford in Drogheda -) Limerickt- order. Newry- next N. of Dublin in order. Youghall-next S. E. of Limerick. Armaghorkinsal next S. of L i Londonderry-nearly N. W. of Armagh. -next' of Limerick in order. Belfast-nearly E. of Armagh. Bandon-next W. of Kinsale. Downpatrick-nearly S. of Belfast. Kiilarney — Antrim5Tralee next N. W. of Bandon in order. Colrane_ nearly N. of Belfast in order. Maynooth — Mullingar — nearly W. of Dublin in order. Athlone- BELGIUM. Square miles, 12,600.-Population 4,225,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 335i. 1. Belgium is the most thickly settled country in Europe. 2. The surface is mostly level, and the soil is rich and highly cultivated, producing abundantly various kinds of grain, flax, hemp, maddei, and tobacco. 3. The Belgians are industrious, and noted for their skill in manufactures and agriculture. They excel in the arts, and have given rise to the school of painting called the Flemish. 4. The universities of Ghent, Liege, Louvain, and Brussels, are well attended, and schools are generally established. BRUSSELS, the capital, on the River Senne, a branch of the Scheldt, is one of the finest cities in Europe, and is noted for its manufactures cf lace and carpets. Ghent, at the confluence of the Lys and Scheldt, is noted as the place where the treaty of peace between the United States and Great Britain, was signed Dec. 24th, 1814. Questions.-1. What is said of Belgium? 2. Surface, soil, and productions? 3. For what are the Belgians noted? In what do they excel? 4. What is said of universities and schools? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of Brussels? Ghent? CITIES AND TOWNS. BRUSSELs-the capital. Tournay-next S. W. of Brussels. Ghent- ) Mechlin-next N. E. of Brussels. Bruges- next N. W. of Brussels in order. Antwerp-next N. W. of Mechlin. Ostend- ) Louvain — next S E. of Mechlin in order Waterloo —next S. of Brussels. Liege- extE.Mechlin order Namur-next S. E. of Waterloo. Huyt-next S. W. of Liege. HOLLAND. Square miles, 11,450.-Population, 2,550,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 222*. 1. Holland is a low and level country, and is prevented from being overflowed by dikes or embankments. 2. Canals in Holland are almost as frequent as roads in other countries, and serve the same purpose. 3. The soil is highly cultivated, the meadows and pastures are rich and productive, and the best of butter and cheese is made. 4. The Dutch are well taught, and noted for industry, perseverance, frugality and neatness. Their commerce is extensive and valuable. THE HAGUE, the capital, near the coast, is a well built city, and communicates by means of canals, with all the principal places of the kingdom. droh'.he.da. t hoy. 166 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Ams'erdam, the largest, richest, and most populous city, and. formerly the first commercial city in Europe, is situated on a river between Harlem Lake and Zuyder Zee, and noted for vast ship-yards, a Stadt House built on 13,659 piles, and for canals which divide it into 90 islands. Questions.-1. What is said of Holland? 2. Canals? 3. Soil and productions? 4. For what are the Dutch noted? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of the capital? Amsterdam? CITIES AND TOWNS. THE HAGUE-the capital. Rotterdam-nearly S. E. of the Hague. Leyden-nearly N. of the Hague. Utrecht- ) Haerlem-N. E. of Leyden. Arnhem early E. of Rotterdam n orde Helder-nearly N. of Haerlem. Nimwegen-nextS. of Arnhem. Amsterdam-next N. E. of the Hague. Breda-nearly S. E. of Rotterdam. Zutphen-next E. of Amsterdam. Berg op-Zoom-next S. of the Hague. Groningen-nearly N. of Zutphen. Middleburg-next S. W. of the Hagu. Leeuwarden-next W. of Groningen. DENMARK. Square miles, 21,600.-Population. 2,150,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 99i. 1. Denmark consists chiefly of the Peninsula of Jutland, the islands of Zealand and Funen, and the duchies of Holstein and Lauenburg. 2. The surface is low and flat, and the soil, especially on the islands, and in Holstein, is well cultivated, and fertile in grain and pasturage. 3. There are universities at Copenhagen and Kiel, and common schools are established in every part of the kingdom. 4. The king of Denmark, as sovereign of Holstein and Lauenburg, is a member of the Germanic Confederation. 5. Iceland and the Faroe Isles are rugged, dreary islands, belonging to Denmark. Iceland contains Mt. Hecla, a celebrated volcano, and the Geysers, or Hot Springs, which throw up large columns of boiling water to the height of 100 feet. 6. The Icelanders are a simple, industrious people, and noted for love of learning and liberty, and for rigid morality and piety. COPENHAGEN, the capital, on the island of Zealand, is a well built city, and has an excellent harbor, capable of containing 500 ships. Elsinore, situated on the Sound, is the place where all vessels, entering or leaving the Baltic, pay toll to Denmark. Questions.-1. Of what does Denmark chiefly consist? 2. What is said of the surface and soil? 3. Universities and schools? 4. King of Denmark? 5. Iceland and the Faroe Isles? What does Iceland contain? 6. What is the character of the Icelanders? State of sciety Government? Religion? What is said of the capital? Elsinore? CITIES AND TOWNS, COPENHAGEN-the capital. Sleswick-next S. W. of Copenhagen Elsinore-next N. of Copenhagen. Flensborg-nearly N. of Sleswick. Aalborg-next N. W. of Copenhagen. Odense-in the N. of Funen Island. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 17 PRUSSIA. Square miles, 106,500 —Population, 14,100,000.-Pop to sq. m. 132k. 1. Prussia is celebrated for its excellent system of common schlool education, which is regarded by many as the best in the world. 2. It consists chiefly of two divisions entirely detached from each other. The smallest division lies on both sides of the Rhine, in the western part of Germany. 3. The surface is generally level, and consists mostly of extensive plains. 4. The soil in some parts is fertile, but generally poor. The chief productions are grain and cattle. 5. The most important minerals are iron, coal, salt, and amber. 6. The principal manufactures are woollens, linens, silk, and cotton goods, porcelain, and articles of iron and steel. BERLIN, the capital, on the Spree, one of the finest cities in Europe, is celebrated as a seat of literature, science, and the arts, and particularly for its university. Questions.-. For what is Prussia celebrated? 2. Of what does it consist? 3. What is said of the surface? 4. The soil? Chief productions? 5. The most important minerals? 6. The principal manufactures? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of Berlin? CITIES AND TOWNS. BERLIN-the capital, on the Spree. Neisse-next S. S. E. of Breslau. Wittenberg-next S. W. of Berlin. Oppeln-nearly S. E. of Breslau. Torgau-nearly S. of Wittenberg. Posen-nearly N. of Breslau. Halle-next nearly W. of Torgau. Rogasen-nearly N. of Posen. Lutzen-nearly S. of Halle. Bromberg-next N. E. of Rogasen. Spandau-nearly N. W. of Berlin. Thorn-next E. of Bromberg. Potsdam- Dantzic-next N. of Thorn. Brandenburg- next W. S. W. of Spandau Konigsburg-next N. E. of Dantzic. Magdeburg- in order. Memel-nearly N. of Konigsburg. Halberstadt- J Friedland-next S. E. of Konigsburg. Salzwedel-nearly N. of Halberstadt. Eylau-nearly S. of Konigsburg. Schwedt-next N. E. of Berlin. Elbing-nearly S. W. of Konigsburg. Soldin-next S. E. of Schwedt. Coblentz-at thejunction of the Rhine&Moselle Stargard-nearly E. of Schwedt. Treves-next S W. of Coblentz. Stettin-next N. of Schwedt. Arensburg-next N. E. of Coblentz. Anklam — Bonn- on the Rhine next below Cob Greifswald- next N. W. of Stettin in order. Cologne- \ lentz in order. Stralsund- Aix la Chapelle-nearly W. of Cologne. Frankfort-next E. S. E. of Berlin. Crefeld'- ) ne i Custrin-next N. E. of Frankfort. Cleves- earlyN.W.Coloneinorder Crossen- Dusseldorf- Nf Cl d Glogau-j t next S. E. of Frankfort in order. Dussel- nex N of Cologne in orer Liegnitz-nearly S. of Glogau. Elberfeld- nearly N. E. of Cologne in Schweidnitz-next S. E. of Liegnitz. Munster-' order. Glatz —nearly S. of Schweidnitz. Mnd- on the Weser River nearly N. E. Breslau-nearly N. E. of Schweidnitz. nen of Munster. GERMANY. Square miles, 246,909.-Population, 38,601,575.-Pop. to sq. m., 1561. 1. Germany is an extensive country of central Europe, consisting of 39 independent states, united under the Germanic Confederation for mutual protection. 2. It embraces about one-third of the empire of Austria; the greater part of the kingdom of Prussia; Holstein and Lauenburg, belonging to the King of Denmark; Luxemburg, of which the King of Holland is Grand Duke, together with 31 independent states, governed by native German princes, and 4 republics or free cities. 3. Each state has its own local government and laws, but the gel eral interests and defence of the Confederacy are regulated by a Diet, composed of members from the different states, which holds its sessions at Frar tfort on the Mayn, and over which the emperor of Austria presides. ^68 KEY TO PELTON0S OUTLINE MAPS. The following table shows the number of votes each state has in the Diet; also the capital, rank, square miles, population, and prevailing religion of each. STATES. CAPITALS RANK. vo.. V. POP. RELIG. Austria, Vienna, Empire, 4 78,45111,713,950 Cath. Prussia, Berlin, Kingdom, 4 71,296 10,908,100 Prot. Bavaria, Munich, Kingdom, 4 29,638 4,338,370 Cath. Wurtemberg, Stuttgard, Kingdom, 4 7,675 1,646,780 Prot. Saxony, Dresden, Kingdom, 4 5,766 1,665,590 do Hanover, Hanover, Kingdom, 4 14,776 1,737.500 do Baden, Carlsruhe, Grand Duchy, 3 5,851 1,227,260 Cath. Hesse-Darmstadt, Darmstadt, Grand Duchy, 3 3,198 765,000 Prot. Hesse-Cassel, Cassel, Electorate, 3 4,386 721,550 do Holstein and Lauenburg, Gluckstadt, Duchy, 3 3,670 473,096 do Luxemburg, Luxemburg, Grand Duchy, 3 2,420 328,000 Cath. Nassau, Wisbaden, Duchy, 2 1,802 387,570 Prot. iBrunswick, Brunswick, Duchy, 2 1.525 269,000 do Mecklenburg-Schwerin, Schwerin, Grand Duchy, 2 4,755 478,800 do Mecklenburg-Strelitz, New-Strelitz, Grand Duchy, 1,000 87,820 do Oldenburg, Oldenburg, Grand Duchy, 1 2,417 267,660 do Kniphausen, Kniphausen, Lordship, 0 17. 2,859 do Lippe-DDetmold,Detmold, Principality, 1 438 82,970 do Lippe-Shauenburg, Buckeburg, Principality, 1 209 27,500 do Anhalt-Dessau, Dessau, Duchy, 1 345 59,500 do Anhalt-Ccethen, Coathen, Duchy, 1 325 36,500 do Anhalt-Bernburg, Bernburg, Duchy, 1 338 43,700 do Saxe-Altenburg, Altenburg, Duchy, 1 491 113,800 do Saxe-Weimar, Weimar, Grand Duchy, 1 1,410 241,500 do Saxe-Coburg, Gotha, Duchy, 1 810 154,000 do Saxe-Meiningen-Hildburghausen, Meiningen, Duchy, 1 915 148,500 do Schwarzburg-Rudolstadt, Rudolstadt, Principality, 1 366 65,850 do Schwarzburg'Sondershausen, Sondershausen, Principality, 1 375 55,500 do Reuss-Greitz, Greitz, Principality, 1 151 31,500 do Reuss-Schleitz, Lobenstein, Principality, 1 453 59,500 do Waldeck, Arolsen, Principality, 1 465 56,500 do Hess-Homburg, Homburg, Langraviate, 1 154 23,900 do Hohenzollern-Hechingen, Hechingen, Principality, 1 127 20,200 Cath. Hohenzollern-Sigmaringen, Sigmaringen, Principality, 1 383 42,950 do Lichtenstein, Vadutz, Principality, 1 58 6,500 do Frankfort, Frankfort, Republic, 1 95 55,000 Prot. Bremen, Bremen, Republic, 1 75 57,500 do Hamburg, Hamburg, Republic, 1 148 153,000 do Lubeck, Lubeck, Republic, 1 135 46,800 do 4. The surface of the northern part of Germany is low and level; in the interior and southern part, hilly and mountainous. 5. Grain is the staple production of the north. and the vine is extensively cultivated in the south. Fine cattle and sheep are abundant. 6. Germany is rich in minerals, and in the science of mining the Germans excel all other nations. 7. Agriculture is conducted with skill, manufactures are numerous, and cornmerce is extensive. 8. The Germans are distinguished for their industry and perseverance, and the people in the northern states are among the best'educated in Enrope. 9. Germany is chiefly noted for its universities, libraries, museums, and the number of its learned men. FRANKFORT, on the Mayn, is the capital of the Germanic confederation, and of a small republic of the same name. Hamburg, on the Elbe, is the first commercial city in Germany, and is visited by the ships of almost all nations. Questions.-1. Where is Germany situated, and of what does it consist? 2. What does it enbrace? 3. What is said of each state, and of the confederacy? 4. The surface of Germany? 5. Productions? 6. Minerals 7. Agriculture, manufactures, and commerce? 8. For what are the Germans disting* ished? 9. For what is Germany chiefly noted? What is said of Frankfort? Hamburg? DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 169 CITIES AND TOWNS. MUNICH-the capital of Bavaria, on the Iser. GLUCSTADT the capital of Holstein and Augsburg-next N. W. of Munich. U T Lauenburg, on the Elbe. Hohenlinden-next E. of Munich. Altona-next S. E. of Gluckstadt Landshut-next N. E. of Munich on the Iser. Kiel-next N. E. of Gluckstadt. Landaau- next E. of Landshut in order. Lauenburg-in the S. E. part on the Elba Eckmuhl- next N. o Landshut in rder. LUXEMBURG-the capital of Luxemburg. Ratisbon — LandshBastogne-next N. W. of Luxemburg. llngoldstadt- next northward of Munich in Aichstadt- older. WISBADEN-the capital of Nassau. Anspach- next N. W. of Aichstadt in BRuNswICK-the capital of Brunswick, Wurtzburg- $ order. Nuremberg-next N. of Aichstadt. the capital of Mecklinburg Furth- next N. W. of Nuremberg in CHERIN- Schwerin. Schweinfurt- order. Ludwigslust-next S. of Schwerin. Bamberg-N. of Nuremberg. Gustrow-N. E. of Schwerin. Bayreuth-next N. E. of Nuremberg. Wismar-, Amberg-next E. of Nuremberg. Rostock- N. N. E. of Schwerin in order. Spire-on the W. bank of the Rhine. Deux Ponts —W. of Spire. NW STRELITZ capital of Mecklinz burg-Strelitz. STUTTGARD-the capital of Wurtemburg. OLDENBURG-the capital of Oldenburg. Tubingen-next S. W. of Stuttgard. KNIPHAUSEN-the capital of Kniphausen. Hall-next N. E. of Stuttgard. DETMOLD-the capital of Lippe-Detmold. Elwangen-nearly E. of Hall. BUCKESUO the capital of Lippe-Schau. Ulin-next E. S. E. of Stuttgard. enburg. Reutlingen-nearly S. E. of Stuttgard. DEssA —the capital of Anhalt-Dessau. CCETHEN-the capital of Anhalt-Ccethen DRESDEN-the capital of Saxony, on the Elbe. BERNBURG-the capital of Anhalt-Bernburg. Freiberg- ) n fr n rr ALTENBURG-the capital of Saxe-Altenburg Chemnitz- net S. W. of Dresden i order. WEIMAR-the capital of Saxe Weimar. Meissen- nearly N. W. of Dresden in GoTHA-the capital of Saxe-Coburg. Leipzic- $ order. Bautzen-next E. N E. of Dresden. MEINN E- the capital of Saxe-MeininZittau-nearly E. of Dresden. EININGEN- J gen Hildburghausen. Hildburghausen-nearly S. of Meiningen. HANOVER-the capital of Hanover. Efurt- next E. of Gotha and belongs to Hildesheim-next S. E. of Hanover. u Prussia. Gottingen-next S. of Hildesheim. E- next W. of Gotha, and belongs Luneburg-nearly N. E. of Hanover. isenac- to Saxe-Weimar. Verden-next N. W. of Hanover. r- S. E. of Meiningen, and belongs Osnabruck-next S. W. of Verden. g to Saxe-Coburg. Emden-next N. W. of Osnabruck. CRSU-th capital of BadeRUDOLSTADT — the capital of SchwarzburgCARLSRUHE-the capital of Baden. Rudolstadt. Heidelberg-next N. of Carlsruhe.? the capital of SchwarzManheim-next N. W. of Heidelberg. ONDERHAUSEN — burg Sonderhausen. Baden — next S. S. W. of Carlsruhe in GREITZ-the capital of Reuss-Greitz. Freiburg- order. LonENSTEIN-the capital of Reuss-Schleitz. Constance-on Lake Constance. AROLSEN-the capital of Waldec. HoMBURG-the capital of Hess-Homburg. DARMSTADT-the capital of Hesse-Darmstadt. HECNN. ithe capital of HohenzollernWorms-next S. W. of Darmstadt. HEC - Hechingen. Mentz-nearly W. of Darmstadt. SICMARIN EN- the capital of Hohenzollern-......-~ Sigmaringen. CAss L- the capital of Hesse-Cassel, on VADUTz-the capital of Lichtenstein. the Fulda. FRANKFORT-the capital of Frankfort. Hersfeld- nerl f a in ordr BREMEN-the capital of Bremen. Fulda- nearly S.of Casselinder. HAMBURG-the capital of Hamburg. Marburg-nearly S. W. of Cassel. LuBEc —the capital of Lubeck.. cuhaven- near the mouth of the Elbe, cuxhaven — and belongs to Hamburg. 22 ASIiA. SIBERIA, OR RUSSIA IN ASIA. Square miles, 5,300,000.-Population, 7,500,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 11. 1. Siberia occupies nearly one-third of Asia, and is remarkable for its exten sive plains, called steppes. 2. In most parts of the country the climate is cold, and the soil barren. A fev of the southern districts are fertile, and enjoy an agreeable temperature. 3. It is subject to the Russian government, and is used as a place of banish. ment for criminals and prisoners of state. 4. Some of the mountains contain abundant mines of gold, silver, platina, and precious stones. The products of its mines and the rich furs of its animals, give Siberia a valuable commerce. 5. Siberia is inhabited by Russians and savages; the latter roam over the country, and subsist by fishing and the chase. 6. The provinces of Circassia and Georgia lie between the Caspian and Black Seas, and are claimed by Russia. 7. Circassia lies on the northern, and Georgia on the southern side of the Cans casus Mountains. They are peopled by various tribes, who are almost wholly engaged in war and plundering. 8. The men are noted for their activity and valor. The women are celebrated for their beauty and elegance of form, and are often sold by their parents as slaves to the Turks and Persians. OMSK, the capital of Western Siberia, situated on the Irtish, is a well fortified town, and has a military school. Tobolsk, situated on the Irtish at its junction with the Tobol, is the chief commercial town of Siberia, and the principal residence of distinguished exiles. Questions.-1. What is the extent of Siberia, and for what is it remarkable? 2. What is the climate and soil? 3. To what government is it subject, and for what noted? 4. What is said of minerals and commerce? 5. By whom is Siberia inhabited? 6. Where do Circassia and Georgia lie, and by whom are they claimed? 7. How are they situated? By whom are they peopled? 8. For what are the men noted? For what are the women celebrated? State of Society? Government? Religion? What is the capital, and how situated? What is said of Tobolsk? CITIES AND TOWNS. OMSs-the capital, on the Irtish River. Nerchinsk-nearly E. of Irkootsk. Tara- on the Irtish, N. W. of Omsk in Kirensk- on Lena River, N. E. of Irkootsk Tobolsk- order. Vitimsk- J in order. Berezof-? on the Obi River. N. of To- Gigansk-on Lena River, (25 N.) Obdorskoi — bolsk in order. Yakootsk-on Lena River, (25 S.E.) Soorgoot-on the Obi, N. E. of Tobolsk. Olensk-on Olenek River, (10 S. W.) Tomsk-next E. of Tobolsk. Lower Kamtchatka-46 W. Narym-on the Obi, N. W. of Tomsk. Upper Kamtchatka-45 E. Kolhyvan- ~ on the Obi, nearly S. W. of Oofa*-on Volga River, (35 M.) Barnaul- Tomsk in order. Orenboorg-next S. of Oofa. Toorookhansk-on theYenesei, (21 E.) Astrakhan-on the Volga, near its mouth. Yeniseisk-on the Yenisei, (39 N. W ) Kisliar- on the coast of the Caspian Sea Tchoolkova-next N. E. of Yeniseisk. - Derbend- S. of Astrakhan in order. Krasnoyarsk-next S. of Yeniseisk. Teflis-next S. W. of Kisliar. Irkootsk —on the Angara, near Lake Baikal. Erivan-next S. of Teflis. Kiakhta-next S. of Irkootsk. * Or Oufa. 170 DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. "7 CHINESE EMPIRE. Square miles, 5,275,000.-Population, 225,000,000 -Pop. to sq. m., 42?. ]. The Chinese Empire is the most populous, and next to the Russian, the post extensive on the globe. 2. It embraces China, Thibet, Chinese Tartary, ant Corea. Questions.-1. What is said of the Chinese Empire? 2. What does it embrace? CHINA. 1. China is about three-fourths as large as the United States, and consists chiefly of a vast plain, well watered, fertile, and highly cultivated. 2. It is noted for the great antiquity of its government, its dense population the haughty reserve manifested in its intercourse with other nations, and the singularity of its manners and customs. 3. Rice is the chief article of. food; but the most noted production is tea, of which more than sixty million pounds are annually exported to Europe and America. 4. The inland trade of China, carried on by means of the numerous rivers and canals, is very extensive. Commerce with other nations is subject to many restrictions. 5. The Chinese are an industrious and ingenious people, and in the manufacture of fine porcelain, rich silks, and many other articles, they excel Europeans, but their pagan worship and treatment of females lower them in the estimation of Christian nations. 6. The prevailing religion is that of Fo, or Boodhism, a species of idolatry. 7. The art of printing from wood cuts has been practised in China for ages The Chinese have many books on various subjects, but have made but little pro gress in literature and science. 8. The Emperor rules in a patriarchal spirit, and, in his proclamations, blames himself for the evils which afflict his people. 9. The officers of government, called mandarins, rank according to their learning, which alone is regarded as a qualification for office. 10. The Imperial Canal is about 700 miles long, and 30,000 men are said to have been employed 40 years in its construction. 11. The Great Wall, forming the northern boundary of China, is the most extensive work of art on the globe. It is 1500 miles long, 30 feet high, and so broad at the top that six horsemen can ride abreast. It was built 2000 years ago to protect China from the incursions of the Tartars. PEKIN,'the capital of China and the Chinese Empire, is one of the largest cities in the world. It is situated near the north bank of Pei Ho River. Nankin, situated near the right bank of the Yang-tse-kiang, about 120 miles from its mouth, is the first city in manufactures, and is noted for its porcelain tower, nine stories high. Canton, situated on the Hoang Kiang, 32 miles from its mouth, was'till recently the only port to which Europeans were admitted, and is still the chief port for foreign trade. Questions.-1. What is the comparative size of China, and of what does it consist?.2. For what is it noted? 3. The chief article of food? The most noted production? 4. What is said of inland trade? 5. The Chinese? 6. What is the prevailing religion? 7. What is said of printing? 8. The Emperor? 9. The officers of government? 10. The Imperial Canal? 11. The Great Wall I State of society? Government? Religion What is said of Pekin Nankin? Canton? 172 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. CITIES AND TOWNS. PEKIN-the capital, near Pei Ho River. Hangteheoo —S. of Sootcheoo. Teentseen- arly E.f Pekin in order Kingteching — next S. NN of Hangtcheot Yotcheoo* — n' Nantchang — in order. Kaifong-next S. W. of Yotcheoo. Canton-near the mouth of Hoang Kiang-R. Singan-W. of Kaifong. Macaot-S. of Canton. Yengan-N. W. of Kaifong Amoy — on the coast N. E. of Canton in Vootchang-next S. of Kaifong. Footcheoo- order. Nankin-next S. E. of Kaifong. Koueiling- N. W. f Cntonn order. Sootcheoo-next S. E. of Nankin. Koeiyang- - Shanghai-E. of Sootcheoo. Yunnan- Ning Po-S. E. of Sootchoo. Yongtchang- SW. Koeiyang n order. THIBET. 1. Thibet is bounded by ranges of the highest mountains on the globe, and is the source of some of the:argest rivers on the Eastern Continent. 2. The climate is cold and the soil is generally sterile; but some of the valleys are warm and fertile, producing many of the fruits found in southern Europe. 3. The Thibetans are chiefly a pastoral people, and possess large herds of cattle; but in some populous districts they are far advanced in the arts. 4. The most noted animal is the Thibet goat, from the hair of which are made the fine Thibet and Cashmere shawls. 5. Thibet is remarkable as the central seat of Boodhism, called Fo in China, and Shamanism in Tartary. The Grand Lama is the head of this system of religion, and is considered as the Creator himself, dwelling in a human form. When the Grand Lama dies, the priests pretend that his soul passes into the body of an infant, whom they discover by certain signs, and immediately exalt to the throne. LASSA, the capital, is the residence of the Grand Lama, and the resort of pilgrims from all parts of Asia. Jigagungar, nearly S. E. of Lassa, is the most populous city. Ladak, in Little Thibet, on the Indus River. Questions.-1. What is said of Thibet? 2. The climate and soil? 3. The Thibetans? 4. What is the most noted animal? 5. For what is Thibet remarkable? State of society? Government? What is said of the capital?'The most populous city? Where is Ladak? CHINESE TARTARY. 1. Chinese Tartary is an extensive country, consisting chiefly of an elevated plain, bounded by ranges of lofty mountains. 2. It includes the countries of Mantchooria, Mongolia, Soongaria, and Little Bucharia. Mantchooriai embraces the eastern part, Mongoliat the central part, Soongaria* the northwestern part, and Little Bucharia+ the southwestern part. 3. The whole country appears to be better adapted to grazing than agriculture, and is inhabited principally by tribes of Tartars, who live in tents and wander from place to place with their flocks and herds. They raise large numbers of horses, which are the wealth and strength of Tartary. 4. Tartary is subject to China, and the prevailing religion is Shamanism, or Boodhism. Questions.-I. What is said of Chinese Tartary? 2. What does it include? 3. To what is the country best adapted, and by whom inhabited? 4. To what country is it subject, and what is the prevailing religion. * Or Yotehow t These di sions are indicated on the map by a deepe shade of color. mah-cah' -o DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 172 CITIES AND TOWNS. Tondon-on the Amoor, (59 N. E.) Oorga-next S. E. of Mtiimatchin. Saghalien-on the Amoor, W. of Tondon. Turfan-on Yarkund River, (54 S.) Ooanlin*- ) Aksoo-next W. of Turfan. Ningoota- next S. W. of Tondon in order. Gooldsha-next N. E. of Aksoo. Shin-yangt-) Cashgar-nearly W. of Aksoo. Maimutchin —in the N. part, (56 N.) Yarkund-nearly S. W. of Aksoo, COREA. 1. Corea is a large peninsula, situated between China and Japan. 2. The country has a sovereign of its own, but is tributary to the Emperor of Dhina. The people have no intercourse with any nation except the Chinese and Japanese, and consequently very little is known of the country. KINGEITAO, the capital, is situated near the centre of the country Questions.-1. What is said of Corea? 2. Its sovereign The people? Capital? JAPAN. Square miles, 250,000.-Population, 14,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m.. 56. 1. Japan is a small but very populous empire, comprising Niphon, Yesso, Keoo. seoo, Sitkokf, and several smaller islands. 2. The soil is highly cultivated, and produces wheat, rice, sugar, tobacco, and cotton. The tea plant grows wild and luxuriantly. 3. Some of the islands contain rich mines of gold, silver, and copper. 4. The Japanese are jealous of foreigners, and permit none but the Chinese, Coreans; and Dutch, to have intercourse with them. 5. They are the most civilized people in Eastern Asia, and educate their children of both sexes with great strictness. 6. They excel in the manufacture of silk, cotton goods, porcelain, and Japan ware; and also in the working of metals. 7. Boodhism, introduced from China, prevails to some extent; but a native form of idolatry, called Sinto, is the religion of the mass of the people. 8. The government is absolute, and consists of two branches, the military and the ecclesiastical; the Kubo, or general of the army, really governs the country, while the Dairi takes care of religion and education. YEDDO, the capital, on the southeast coast of Niphon, at the head of Ycddo Bay, is one of the most populous cities in the world..Meaco is the residence of Dairi and the chief seat of literature. Questions.-1. What is said of Japan? 2. The soil? 3. Minerals? 4. What is the cha. racter of the Japanese? 5. How do they compare in civilization with the people of Eastern Asia? 6. In what do they excel? 7. What is said of religion? 8. The government? State cf society? Yeddo? Meaco? CITIES AND TOWNS. YEDDO-the capital, on Yeddo Bay. Nangasakill -on the Keoo-seoo Island. Meaco.t-next westward of Yeddo. Matsmay~l-in the S. W. part of Yesso Island. OsacaD-next S. W. of Meaco. CHIN INDIA. Square miles, 900,000.-Population, 20,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 22. 1, Cnin India, or Farther India, situated between China and Hindostan, comprises the empire of Anam, the kingdom of Siam, the peninsula of Malacca, and the empire of Birma. 2. It is a fertile, well-watered region, producing wheat, rice, tobacco, cotton, * WTritten also Ouanlin and Wanlin. t or Chin.yang. t me-ah'-lo. ~ o-salb -'. i nany.gah-sah'-ke. ~ mats'-mv. 174 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTL I'NE MAPS. sugar, indigo, spices, gums, and tropical fruits. It is noted for the richness of its minerals. 3. Chin India abounds in wild animals. The most noted are the elephant, tiger, leopard, rhinoceros, and orang-outang. Elephants of great size and strength abound, and are used as beasts of burden. 4. The governments of Chin India are absolute, despotic monarchies. 5. The Malays, who occupy the peninsula of Malacca, are Mohammedans, but the people are generally worshippers of Boodh, or Guadama, and build richly painted and gilded temples, which are almost the only splendid edifices. Questions.-1. What does Chin India comprise? 2. What does it produce? For what is it noted? 3. In what does it abound? 4. What are the governments? 5. What is the religion? ANAM. 1. The empire of Anam is of recent origin, and embraces Tonkin, Cochin China, Cambodia, and a part of Laos. 2. The people-appear to be industrious and skilful in many of the arts, and their commerce is valuable; but the ordinary customs of pagan nations prevail among them. HUE, the capital, is a well fortified city, on a small river about ten miles from the sea. Questions.-1. What is said of the empire of Anam 1 2. The people? What is the state of society Government? Religion? The capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. Hu —the capital. Cambodia-S. W. of Hue. Saigon-S of Hue. IKesho-in the N. part, nearly N. of Iue. SIAM. 1. Siam is a populous, fertile, and highly cultivated kingdom, and is extremely rich in natural productions. 2. The fruits of this country are noted for their richness and exquisite flavor. Rice is very abundant, and is exported in large quantities. 3. The inhabitants are remarkable for their courtesy, but are exceedingly avaricious and fraudulent in their dealings. BANGKOK, the capital, is situated on the Meinam River, about 30 miles from its mouth, and may be regarded almost as a city floating on the water. Many of the houses are built on bamboo rafts, moored in the river, and can be easily removed from place to place. They are inhabited chiefly by Chinese, who constitute a large portion of the population. Questions.-1. What is said of Siam? 2. The productions 3. The inhabitants? State of society? Government? Religion? What is the capital, and how is it situated? MALACCA. 1. The peninsula of Malacca forms the southern extremity of Chin India, and is chiefly inhabited by various tribes of the Malay race. 2. The Malays are noted for the ferocity of their character. Their chief occupation is piracy and robbery. 3. The soil is not generally fertile, but the mineral productions are of great value. Gold is found in all the rivers, and is also obtained from mines. Tin is also found in abundance. 4. The orang-outang is found in Malacca, and also elephants and tigers. MALACCA, the capital of a colony of the same name, belonging to Great Britain, is situated on the south rest coast. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 175 Singapore, on an island of the-same name, at the southern extremity of the peninsula of Malacca, is an important commercial settlement belonging to Great Britain. Tringano, on the east'coast north of Malacca. Patini, on the coast in the north part. Questions.-1. What is said of Malacca? 2. The Malays? 3. The soil and mineral productions? 4. Animals? Stateofsociety? Government? Religion? What issaidofthe capital? Singapore? BIRMA. 1. Birma includes several kingdoms, and-is one of the most powerful divisions of Southern Asia. 2. It is traversed by numerous streams, which give it great fertility. The soil produces almost every kind of grain and rich tropical fruits. 3. The Birmans are a brave, warlike people, and are noted for activity and ean terprise. 4. Birma is remarkable for white elephants, which are sometimes worshipped. 5. The southern part of Birma is in possession of Great Britain. MONCHOBOO, the capital, is on the Irrawaddy River. Riangoon, on the Delta of the Irrawaddy, is the chief seaport of Birma. Questions.-. What is said of Birma? 2. By what is it traversed? What does it produce? 3. What is the character of the Birmans? 4. For what is Birma remarkable? 5 In whose possession is the southern part? State of society? Government? Religion? What is the capital? The chief seaport? CITIES AND TOWNS. MONCHOBOO —the capital, on the Irrawaddy. Amherst-next S. E. of Rangoon. Umerapoora-S. E. of Monchoboo. Yeh- Ava- ) Tavoy- S. of Amherst in order. Ava- ) Tavoy — Prome-. next S. of Monchoboo in order. Rangoon —) IIINDOSTAN. Square miles, 1,150,000.-Population, 135,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 1171. 1. HIindostan has been noted in all ages for its civilization, singular customs, and rich products. 2. It is the richest and most fertile country in Asia, and, next to China, the most populous. 3. It has almost every variety of surface, soil, and productions. 4. Rice is the great article of food, but other grains are cultivated; cotton, silk, sugar, opium, indigo, and tobacco, are extensively produced; also pepper, cinnamon, coffee, and various kinds of fr —it. 5. Hindostan has long been celebratet for its manufacture of silks and rich cotton gonds. 6. It produces the finest diamonds in the world, which are noted for their hardness and brilliancy. The most important minerals are gold, iron, tin, and zinc. 7. The Hindoos vary in complexion; some of them are black as the negroes of Africa; but in their features they resemble Europeans. They are indolent, dishonest, and superstitious. 8. They are divided into four castes, or classes; 1. The Bramins,'or priests; 2. Soldiers; 3. Merchants and farmers; 4. Sudras, or laborers. 9. These castes are not permitted to intermarry, or even to eat or drink with each other. If any one violates the rules of caste, he is driven from society and regarded as an outcast. L76 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 10. The Hindoos worship Brahma and numerous other idols, and are l.oted for their attachment to their social and religious institutions. 11. Several hundred missionaries, from Great Britainand America, are laboring to introduce Christianity into India, and have printed the Bible in many of the Indian languages. 12. Hindostan is almost wholly under the control of the British East India Company, and is held in subjection by an army, consisting chiefly of native troops, trained and commanded by British officers. 13. Elephants are here trained in great numbers, and rendered almost as useful as horses; tigers, hyenas, and huge serpents, abound in the forests. 14. Ceylon, a beautiful and fertile island, is noted for its cinnamon groves, and a valuable pearl fishery. CALCUTTA, the capital, largest city, and residence of a majority of the Europeans in India, is situated on the Hoogly, an arm of the Ganges, about 100 miles from the sea. Bombay, on Bombay Island, is the western capital of British India, and is noted for its commerce and ship-building. Cashmere, situated in a beautiful valley of the Himalaya Mountains, is noted for the manufacture of rich shawls, made of the hair of the Thibet goat. Questions.-1. For what has Hindostan been noted in all ages? 2. How does it compare with other countries of Asia? 3. What is said of its surface, soil, and productions? 4. What is the chief article of food? What are the other productions? 5. For what has Hindostan tong been celebrated? 6. What is said of its diamonds? Minerals? 7. What is the corn olexion and character of the Hindoos? 8. How are they divided? 9. What are the rules of caste? 10. What is said of Hindoo worship? 11. Missionaries? 12. Under whose con. krol is the greater part of Hindostan? 13. What is said of animals? 14. Ceylon? What is.he state of society? Government? Religion? What is the capital, and how situated? What is said of Bombay? Cashmere V CITIES AND TOWNS. CaLcT ^ - the capital, on the Hoogly, an Bombay-on Bombay Island, (90 N. W.) CALCUTT- arm of the Ganges. Poonah-next S. E. of Bombay. Serampore-N. of Calcutta. Goa- on the coast southward o Dacca-N. E. of Calcutta. Mangalorea Bombay in order. Arracan-S. E. of Dacca. Cochin — Patnar- ton the Ganges, next above Cambay-on the Gulf of Cambay, (79 S. W.) oenares n n BenAllahabadres- Dacca in order Surat-next S. of Cambay. Allahabad~- Dacca m oe Ahmedabad —next N. of Cambay. Lucknow-N. of Allahabad. Baroda-next E. of Cambay. Oude-nearly E. of Lucknow. Oojein-next N. E. of Baroda. Cuttack- next S. W. of Calcutta in Nagpore-next S. E. of Oojein. Juggernaut- cutta Io Tatta- on Indus River, from its mouth Masulipatam- or Hyderabad- in order, (78 E.) Madras- on the coast southward of Gwalior-E. of Hyderabad. Pondicherry- S Masulipatam in order. Agra- ) Tranquebar-S. ofPondicherry. Delhi- next N. of Gwalior in order. Tanjore-S. W of Pondicherry. Paniput- ) Bangalore-N. W. of Pondicherry. Lahore-on Ravee River, (67 S.) Seringapatam'-W. of Pondicherry. Umritseer-next N. E. of Lahore. Mysore- next N. of Seringapatam in Cashmere-N. of Umritseer Hyderabad~- order. BELOOCHISTAN. Square miles, 175,000.-Population, 2,500,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 14. 1. Beloochistan is peopled by a number of small independent tribes, who often plunder and make war with each other. 2. Many of the inhabitants lead a pastoral life, but some of them are engaged in agriculture. 3. The Beloochees are generally hospitable and faithful to their promises, but avaricious, rapacious, and revengeful. KELAT, the capital, is situated on an elevated plain, and is the residence of the principal Khan, or chief, whose supremacy is recognized by the various tribes. DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 177 Questons..What is Said of Beloochistani? 2. How are many of the inhabitants employed? 3. What is the character of the Beloochees? State of society? Government? Religion? What is the capital, and how situated? CITIES AND TOWNS. K.LAT —the capital. Khoola- ELAr —-theKooa- capital. nearly-. W. of Kelat in ordme. G(undava-E. of Kelat. Choubar- of Kelm AFGHANISTAN. Square miles, 325,000.-Population. 6,500,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 20. 1. Afghanistan was once part of the Persian empire. It consists chiefly of mountains and elevated plains. 2. The Afghans are a brave, energetic, and warlike people, noted for their hospitality, but rapacious and revengeful. 3. There are some populous cities, but a large part of the inhabitants are wandering tribes and pay little attention to agriculture, manufactures, or commerce. CABOOL, the capital, is situated on the Cabool River, a branch of the Indus, in the midst of a laYge, well-watered plain, and is surrounded with beautiful gardens. It is a walled city and strongly fortified. Herat, a large, fortified city, situated in the midst of a populous and highly cultivated valley, is the capital of the small kingdom of Herat, which is tributary to the King of Persia. It has an extensive commerce and flourishing manufactures. Questions.-L What is said of Afghanistan? 2. What is the character of the Afghans? 3. Cities and inhabitants? State of society? Government? Religion? CITIES AND TOWNS.:C-anoo_? the capital, on Cabool River, a Ghiznee- S. W eshaweE. branch of the Indus Candahar — next of order. Peshawer-E. of CabooL Herat- capital of the kingdom of Herat, in, l1 S.. the N. W. part. INDEPENDENT TARTARY. Square miles, 700,000.-Population, 7,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 10. 1. Independent Tartary is divided into a number of independent states or khanats, which vary greatly in extent and population, and are governed by chiefs or khans. 2. The principal khanats are Khiva, Khokand, and Bokhara. (See page, 86.) They are fertile districts, inhabited by an industrious people, who are chiefly engaged in agriculture and trade. 3. Independent Tartary consists chiefly of steppes and deserts of moving sand. 4. The Tartars are mostly a pastoral people, living in tents, and wandering from place to place with their flocks and herds. Their favorite amusement is exercising with the bow and lance on their fleet horses. KHIVA, the capital.of a khanat of the same name, is situated in the midst of a fertile country near the river Oxus, called by the natives Amoo. KIHOKAND, the capital of a khanat of the same name, is situated on the Sihon River, and is said to contain 500 mosques and 100 schools, and to be a distinguished seat of Persian literature. BOKHARA, the capital of a khanat of the same name, on a branch of the Oxus, is situated on a rich plain, and surrounded by gardens and trees.. It is the most uommercial town of Central Asia, and, by means of caravans, carries on an active trade with Russia. Turkey, Persia, Afghanistan, India, and. China. It is a celebrated seat of Mohammedan learning, and it is computed that about 10,000 persons attend the different schools and colleges of this city at one time. Questions.-1. How is Independent Tartary divided? 2. What are the principal khanats? 3a Of what does Independent Tartary consist 4. What is said of the Tartars? State of society? Govcrnmept t Religion t What is said of Khiva? Khokand? Bokhara 23 178 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. CITIES AND TOWNS. BO HARA-_ -capital of the khanat of Bok-lGooriev* —N. W. of Khiva.. k h- hara, in the S. part. KHIAN- t capital of the khanat of the Balkh-S. E. of Bokhara.. HO AND- Khokand, in the E. part. Samarcand-nearly E. of Bokhara. Tashkend-N. of Khokand. KIVAr -- capital of the khanat of Khiva, in Toonkat-N. W. of Khokand. V the S. W. part PERSIA. Squays miles, 475,000.-Population 10,500,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 22. 1. Persia was anciently the seat of one of the most powerful and splendid empires in Asia, but much of its ancient splendor has departed, and it scarcely retains a shadow of its former greatness. 2. It is mostly an elevated plain; but the northern and western parts are mountainous and rugged. 3. It is watered by few streams, and many tracts are entirely desert. There are rich valleys among the mountains, and some of the plains are very fertile. 4. The mountains and deserts are peopled by hordes of robbers, who plunder the fertile and cultivated tracts, and discourage agriculture. 5. The chief productions are wheat, rice, cotton, tobacco, rhubarb, wine, fruits, and drugs. 6. The Persians manufacture beautiful carpets, silks, shawls, cottons, and porcelain. 7. The Persians are the most gay, polished, and learned people of the East. They are lively and fond of show, and are noted for flattery and love of display in dress. TEHRAN, the capital, is situated in the midst of a well cultivated plain, and is surrounded by a high and strong wall of earth, flanked with numerous towers. Ispahan, formerly the capital of Persia, and most splendid city of Western Asia, is still a great city in population, and has an extensive trade and important manufactures. Questions.-1. What is said of Persia? 2. Its surface? 3. What is said of its streams and valleys? 4. By whom are the mountains and deserts peopled? 5. The chief productions? 6. What do the Persians manufacture? 7. What is their character? State of so ciety? Covernment? Religion? What is said of Tehran? Ispahan? CITIES AND TOWNS. TETHRAN —the capital. Ispahan-S. of Tehran. Balfroosh-N. E. of Tehran. Yezd-S. E. of Tehran. Meshed-E. of Tehran. Kerman-nearly S. of Yezd. Reshd-on the Caspian Sea, N. W. of Tehran. Shiraz- K norr Casbin-nearly W. of Tehran. Abooshehr Kerman n oder Tabreez-N. W. of Tehran. Ruins of Persepolis-65 S. Ooroomeea-S. W. of Tabreez. ARABIA Square miles, 1,000,000.-Population, 10,000,000.-Pop. to sq. m., 10. 1. Arabia is noted as the birthplace of Mohammed, and for the unchanging character of its people. 2. It consists of vast sandy deserts, interspersed with fertile spots, which, when cultivated, yield various kind of frpit and other products in great perfection. 3. Arabia, from the earliest ages, has been divided into numerous independent tribes and states. Each tribe is under the government of its own sheik, who exercises patriarchal authority. The most important states are Hedjaz, Yemen, Oman, and Nedjed. See page 86. 4. The Bedouins, or wandering Arabs, live in tents, and keep large herds of rorses and camels. 5. They are remarkable for their hospitality and courtesy to those who trust aend visit them; but the stranger, who is treated with lavish kindness in the tent, * Or Gouriev. DEStlRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 17 9 is robbed and murdered without remorse when met in the open plain. They often attack and rob caravans that pass through their country. 6. The Arabs are of a brown complexion, thin and spare in person, but vigorIus, active, and extremely temperate. 7. The Arabian horses are the finest in the world, and are celebrated for their swiftness and beauty. The Arabs take as much care of them as of their children. 8. The camel is the most useful animal, and wonderfully fitted for travelling in the parched desert. It has feet formed to resist the beat of the sand, and can live several days without drinking. 9. Arabia has long been celebrated for the abundance of its odoriferous plants, and is famous for its excellent coffee. It produces wheat, maize, barley, dates, senna-leaves, gum-arabic, indigo, and pearls; but the myrrh, frankincense, and spices, called Arabian, are chiefly imported from the adjacent coast of Africa. MEccA,* the capital of the province of Hedjaz, is noted as the birthplace of loh1amnmed, and the centre of the Moslem religion. It is annually visited by pilgrims from all parts of the Mohammedan world. SANAA,t the capital of Yemen, is a handsome city, and is situated in the midst of a fertile district. MUSCAT, the capital of Oman, on the eastern coast, is the residence of a powerful and intelligent prince, or Iman, who has a strong naval force, and possesses several large islands on the coast of Africa and in the Persian Gulf. It carries on an extensive commerce by sea, and with the interior by caravans. DERREYEH, near the centre of Arabia, is the capital of Nedjed, and of the Wahabees, a sect of Mohammedans. Questions.-1. For what is Arabia noted? 2. Of what does it consist? 3. How is Arabia divided? 4. How do the Bedouins live? 5. For what are they remarkable? 6. What are some of the personal characteristics of the Arabs? 7. What is said of the Arabian horses? 8. What is the most useful animal? 9. For what has.Arabia long been celebrated? What are its productions? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of Mecca' Sanaa? Muscat? Derreyeh? CITIES AND TOWNS. MEccA-the capital of Hedjas, (76 S. W.) Keshin-E. of Sanaa. Jidda-S. W. of Mecca. MUscAT-the capital of Oman, (77 S. E.) Yembo-on the Red Sea, N. W. of Mecca. Harnin- e on the coast S. W. of Muscat in Medina-next N. of Mecca. Hasek- o order. Akaba~-? on the Red Sea, N W. of Medina DERREYEH-the capital of Nedjed, (76 M.) Suez- ~ in order. Menaina-on Bahrein Island, E. of Derreyeh. SANAA-the capital of Yemen, (87 M.) Lahsa- 1Lahsa — t next S. W. of Menaina in order. Loheiall-N. W. of Sanaa. Yemama S. W. of Menana n order. Mocha-nearly S. W. of Sanaa. Ill Katif- next N W Aden-S. S. E. of Saa... of Menana n order. Makulla-nearly S. E. of Sanaa. Ruins of Petra, 63 S. TURKEY IN ASIA. Square miles, 450,000.-Population, 12.000,000.-Pop to sq. m., 2. 1. Turkey in Asia comprises some of the finest and most interesting portions of the Eastern Continent. 2. It has been the seat of more famous cities and renowned empires than any other country on the globe. 3. Babylon,. Ninevah, Bagdad, and Jerusalem-each, at some period, has been the most splendid city in the world. Here stood Baalbect and Palmyra,t once splendid cities, now in ruins; here also were the cities of Tyre and Sidon, noted for their commerce, and Damascus and Antioch, renowned for their wealth and population. 4. The ruins of its former splendor and greatness are scattered over its surface, and, except these, but few traces of its former civilization remain. * Mecca, 76 S. W. t Sanaa. 87 M. T The ruins of Babylon, on the Euphrates, (64 S.,) and Baalbec and Palmyra in Syria, (N of Damascas in order,) are indicated by a number of small dots. ~ ah'-kah-bah. U lo-hay' ya. 18f0 HKEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 5. Turkey is interesting to us chiefly under its ancient names; Asia Minort embraces the northern and western part, Armenia* the northeastern part, Koordistan* the eastern part, Mesopotamia* the southeastern part, lying mostly between the Euphrates and Tigris, and Syria* the southern part. Palestine is in the southern part of Syria. 6. The inhabitants consist of Turks, Armenians, Turkomans, Koords, Arabs, Greeks, and Jews. About one-half of the population are Turks, who chiefly inhabit the cities, and resemble those of Europe, but are less intelligent and enterprising. The Armenians carry on the trade and many of the manufactures. The Turkomans are a wandering, pastoral race, and the Koords, who inhabit the mountainous districts on the borders of Turkey and Persia, are bold and daring robbers. 7. The surface of Turkey is varied, the climate delightful, the soil fertile, and the productions valuable. Turkey is celebrated for its rich carpets. These, with some other manufactures and the valuable productions of the earth, give it considerable commerce. See Turkey in Europe. CONSTANTINOPLE, the capital of the Turkish Empire, is situated on the Bosporus. See page 86. Smyrna, an ancient and celebrated city, and the chief emporium of Asiatic Turkey, is situated on the west coast of Asia Minor, at the extremity of a gulf of its own name, which forms a convenient and capacious harbor. Damascus, situated in a fertile plain, in the eastern part of Syria, is one of the most ancient cities in the world, having existed in the time of Abraham, and has an extensive caravan trade. Questions. —1. What does Turkey in Asia comprise? 2. For what is it noted? 3. What is said of its ancient cities? 4. Its ruins? 5. Its ancient divisions? 6. The inhabitants? 7. Surface, climate, soil, and productions? For what is Turkey celebrated? State of society? Government? Religion What is said of the capital Smyrna? Damascus? CITIES AND TOWNS. CONSTANTINOPLE-the capital, on the Bosporus. Diarbekir6-next S. E. of Tocat. Skutari- next S. E. of Constantinople in Aleppo-next S. W. of Diarbekir. Angora- ( order. Damascus-next S. of Aleppo. Brusa-next S. of Constantinople. Antioch-nearly W. of Aleppo. Smyrna- nearly S. W. of Brusa in LatakiallScala Nova- order. TripoliKutaiyeht- Beyroot- i next S. of Antioch. Karahissar- Acre- I Akshehr- next S. E. of Brusa in order. Jerusalem-J Konieh- Trebizond-on the Black Sea N. of Diarbeki nTarsust d ext of Tarsus. Erhzroom — N. E. of Diarbekir in order. Adaliah-next of Tarsus. KharsAdana-next E. of Tarsus. Bayazid-E. of Erzroom. Kaisarieh — Van-on Lake Van, S. E. of Erzroom. S.vas — next N. E. of Adana in order. Mosul- on Tigris River, S. E. of Diarbe. Tocat- Bagdad- kir in order. Amasia- n f T t inrdr Hillah-on Euphrates R., S. of Bagdad. Sinope-. of T t in o Bassora-next S. E. of Hillah. * These divisions are indicated on the map oy a deeper snaae of color. $ Or Tarsoos. $ koo-ty'-a. ~ dee-ar-be-keer'. lah-ta-kee'a AFERICA. BARBARY STATES. 1. The Barbary States comprise Morocco, Algiers, Tunis, Tripoli, and the re gion called Beled el Jereed, or Land of Dates. 2. The inhabitants consist of Moors, Jews, Turks, and Negroes, who live in the towns, and Arabs and Berbers, who live among the mountains in villages and tents. 3. The Atlas Mountains extend through the country from Morocco to Tripoli. Between the mountains and the coast, the surface is mostly a fertile plain, and 3etween them and the desert are some finely watered valeys. 4. The climate is hot in the lowlands, and temperate in the highlands; but the plague occasionally makes awful ravages. 5. The staple productions are wheat and barley; but grapes, olives, dates, almonds, and other fruits are raised in great perfection. 6. -Locusts occasionally move over the country in immense swarms, destroying every green thing. 7. The people are ignorant and corrupt, the government despotic, and the wandering tribes often rob the villages. Industry is discouraged, and agriculture neglected. 8. These states once had a large share of foreign commerce, and their piratical ships plundered those of all other nations; but this practice no longer exists. 9. Commerce is carried on by sea with Europe, and an active trade by caravans, with the interior of Africa, across the Great Desert. 10. The most noted animals are lions, panthers, and hyenas. Questions.-1. What do the Barbary States comprise? 2. What is said of the inhabitants? 3. The surface? 4. The climate? 5. Productions? 6. Locusts? 7. The people? 8. Piracy? 9. Commerce? 10. Animals? MOROCCO. 1. The empire of Morocco comprises the kingdoms of Morocco, Fez, and Tafilet, lying on the western declivity of the Atlas Mountains. 2. The soil is generally fertile, and the products valuable; but the government is oppressive, and industry is discouraged. 3. The only important manufacture is Morocco leather, which is of a superior quality. MOROCCO, the capital, is situated on a fertile, thickly wooded plain, near the base of the Atlas Mountains. It is enclosed by a strong wall 30 feet high, and nearly 6 miles in circuit, and surrounded by numerous gardens. Questions.-1. What is said of the empire of Morocco? 2. The soil? 3. Manufactures State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of the capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. MoRocco-the capital. Mek'inez-next N. E. of Rabat. Magadore-W. of Morocco. Tangier-next N. of Mekinez. Santa Cruz- nearly S. W. of Mlorocco in Fez-next E. of Rabat. Noon- order. Tafilet-next S. E. of Rabat Rabat-next N. of Morocco ALGIERS. 1. Algiers occupies the site of fhe ancient Numidia. 2. The people were formerly the most enterprising and daring pirates in Bai bary, and maintained a naval force, which, for three centuries, was the terror of all civilized nations. 3. It was conquered in 1830 by the French, who now hold the country as a colony. Much of it is still occupied by wandering tribes. ALGIERS, the capital, is strongly fortified, has a good harbor, ai.d considerable trade. Bona, on the coast, in the northeast part, is noted for the coral fislery. 181 182 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. Quesiions.-. What is said of Algiers? 2. The people? 3. By whom is it held? State of society? Government? Religion? What is said of the capital? Bona CITIES AND TOWNS. ALGIERS-the capital. Constantina- next eastward of Algiers m Oran- nearly S. W. de Algiers in Bona- order. Tlemsen- S order TUNIS. 1. Tunis is the most popu.ous, fertile, and best cultivated of the Barbary States, aad the inhabitants are the most civilized and industrious. 2. Grain, dates, olive-oil, and wool, are exported to some extent, and considerable trade is carried on with the interior of Africa. 3. The ruins of Carthage, once the mistress of the seas, and the rnvalof Rome, are on a promontory about 10 miles northeast of Tunis. TUNIS, the capital, is the most populous, commercial, and civilized town in Barbary. Kairwan, about 80 miles south of Tunis, is noted for the finest mosque in Africa. Questions.-l. What is said of Tunis? 2. Productions? 3. Carthage? State of v.wiety Government? Religion? What is said of the capital? Kairwan? TRIPOLI. 1. Tripoli has a government and people more friendly to Christians, and more desirou's of introducing the improvements of civilized life, than any other state in Barbary. 2. The soil is barren in the interior, but along the coast there are some fertile districts in which agriculture is actively pursued. 3. An extensive commerce is carried on by means of caravans with the inte rior countries of Africa. 4. The Bey rules with despotic sway. He is chosen from among the Turkish officers resident in Tripoli, and is confirmed in his authority by the Sultan ot Turkey. TRIPOLI, the capital, has a good harbor and considerable commerce. Mesurata, on the coast nearly E. of Tripoli. Questions.-1. What is said of Tripoli? 2. The soil'? 3. Commerce? 4. The Bey? State of society? Government? Religion? What is the capital? BARCA. 1. Barca, the ancient Lybia, once celebrated for its productions, is now inhabited by wandering herdsmen, and is subject to Tripoli. DERNEH, on the coast, is the largest town. Cyrene, next west of Derneh, is noted for its ruins, especially for its tombs. Bengazi, west of Cyrene. Questions.-1. What is said of Barca? Which is the largest town? For what is Cyrene noted? BELED EL JEREED. 1. Beled el Jereed extends along the northern edge of the Great Desert south of the Atlas mountains, and comprises several petty states, peopled by various tribes of Berbers and Arabs. 2. The soil is dry and arid, but date trees grow luxuriantly, and cover the country to such an extent, that it is called Beled el Jereed, or the "land of dates." Dates of the finest quality are produced in abundance, and constitute the chief food of the inhabitants. Gadames in the east, Tuggurt in the south, and Eghwatt in the north, are the principal towns. Qiu stions.-1. What is said of Beled el Jereed? 2. The soil and date trees? Dates? DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 18 EGYPT. 1. Egypt is noted for its great antiquity, and the early civilization of its inhajitants. Its mighty pyramids, splendid obelisks, and the ruins of its ancient cities, attest its former greatness. 2. Its pyramids, on the west side of the Nile, near Cairo, are the most stupendous works of man. No one knows when, or for what object they were built. The largest is 693 feet square at the base, and 599 feet high. 3. In the greater part of Egypt it never rains. The Nile annually overflows a large extent of country, and makes the soil rich and productive. In the dry season, the land is watered by canals and heavy dews. 4. The chief productions are wheat, Indian corn, rice, sugar-cane, indigo, tobacco, and cotton. 5. About three-fourths of the inhabitants are Arabs. The Turks, though few in number, are the ruling people. The rest are chiefly Copts, descendants of the ancient Egyptians. 6. Egypt is nominally subject to the Sultan, but is governed by Mohammed Ali, who rules with despotic sway. He has established schools and colleges, and is introducing into Egypt the arts, learning, and civilization of European nations. CAIRO, the capital and largest city in Africa, situated near the right bank of the Nile, carries on an extensive trade by caravans with central Africa, Nubia, Arabia, Syria, and Persia. Alexandria, the chief sea-port and naval station of Europe, was once the most splendid city in the world, and the centre of science and commerce. Among its ruins still stand Cleopatra's Needle and Pompey's Pillar, built of fine granite, the first 58, and the last 95 feet high. Questions.-1. For what is Egypt noted? 2. What is said of its pyramids? 3. The Nile? How is the land watered in the dry season? 4. The chief productions? 5. What is sad ot the inhabitants? 6. To whom is Egypt nominally subject, and by whom governed? State of society? Religion? What is said of Cairo? Alexandria? CITIES AND TOWNS. CAIRo-the capital, near the Nile. Sioot- 1 Damietta-next N. of Cairo. Girge- Rosetta-next N. W. of Cairo. Esne — Alexandria-next S. W. of Rosetta. Asswan-J Seewah-nearly W. of Cairo. Cosseir-on the Red Sea, S. E. of Cairo. El Dakhel — next S. E. of Seewah in Ruins ofThebes- on the Nile, nextN. of El Khargeh- order. Esne.. NUBIA. 1. Nubia abounds with remains of ancient temples, which are either under ground, or cut out of the solid rock. Ebsambul is the most magnificent, and rivals the most splendid of the Egyptian monuments. 2. Nubia consists chiefly of rocky and sandy deserts. The wind often raises the sands of the deserts in clouds and pillars, which move with great swiftness. 3. The soil is fertile only in the valley of the Nile, and produces dhourra, (a coarse kind of grain,) barley, tobacco, cotton, and indigo. 4. The clinlate is dry and intensely hot, and the people are barbarous and ferocious. NEW DON'GOLA, the capital, was once an important town, but is now much decayed. Questions.-1. With what does Nubia abound? 2. Of what does it consist? 3. What is said of the soil? 4. Climate and people? State of society? Government? Religion What is the capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. NEw DONGOLA-the capital. Merawe*)err-on the Nile, N. E. of Dongola. El Makkarif —nex of Old Dongola d Dong - on the Nile, next above New Suakem-rOld Dongola- L Dongola. Shendy- next S. W. of El Makkarif in Khartoom- 5 order. Sennaar-next S. of Khartoom. * mer'-ah-wee. 194 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. ABYSSINIA. 1. Abyssinia, the ancient Ethiopia, is a ruggeo mountain land, intersected Dy deep and fertile valleys. 2. The chief productions are wheat, barley, and teff, a very small grain which afibrds the bread in general use. Salt is the principal mineral. 3. The Abyssinians have long professed Christianity, but it has little influence over their conduct. They are cruel, licentious, and ferocious, and at their feasts eat the raw flesh of animals just slain, while the blood is warm. 4. The country is divided into numerous states, which are almost always at war with each other. Agriculture and the arts are in a rude state. 5. The Galla, a race of warlike savages, who, in their incursions, spare neither age nor sex, have recently conquered the southern and central provinces. GONDAR, the capital, stands on a lofty eminence, and the quantity of trees that surround its numerous churches, give it, when seen at a distance, more the appearance of a forest than a city. Questions.-1. What is said of Abyssinia? 2. The chief productions? 3. What have the Abyssinians long professed? What is their character? 4. How is the country divided? 5. What is said of the Galla? State of society? Government? What is said of the capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. oONDAR-the capital. Adowah-nearly E. of Axoom. Axoom-next N. E. of Gondar. Massua-next N. E. of Axoon. Antalo-next S. E. of Axoom. ADEL, AJAN, AND BERBERA. 1. Adel, Ajan, and Berbera, are inhabited by the Somaulies, an active, industrious race of people, who are described as having a bright olive complexion, with long soft hair, and regular, pleasing features. 2. Adel is but little known. Zeyla, on the coast, is a place of considerable trade, and Hurrur, in the interior, is said to be the residence of the Sultan of the Somaulies. 3. Ajan along the coast is generally sandy and barren, and the fierce character of its inhabitants have prevented it from being much frequented by traders. 4. Berbera, in all ages, has been the country of myrrh, frankincense, and fra. grant gums. Berbera, the chief port, is visited by Arabs and Hindoo traders. Gold and ivory are brought here from the inland districts, twenty days journey. Questions.-1. By whom are Adel, Ajan, and Berbera, inhabited? 2. What is said of'Adel? Zeyla and Hurrur? 3. Ajan? 4. Berbera? What is the chief port, and by whom visited? State of society? Government? Religion? ZANGUEBAR. 1. Zanguebar consists of several distinct states, of which but little is known. 2. The ports are chiefly in possession of native princes, or.the savage Galla, a warlike tribe who have ravaged the whole country. 3. The commerce of this region is carried on chiefly by the Arabs of Muscat in vessels called dows. The chief articles of trade are gold, ivory, ostrich feathers, sugar, cocoa-nut, senna, and aloes. Questions.-1. Of what does Zanguebar consist? 2. In whose possession are the ports? 3. By whom is the commerce of this region chiefly carried on? What are the chief articles of trade? What is the state of society? Government? Religion? CITIES AND TOWNS, Quiloa-on the coast in the S. part. Melinda — Mombaza-next N. of Quiloa. Lamoo- n uban P_ on and near the coast, next Y Brava- - E. of Mombaza in order. Magadoxa —J MOZAMBIQUE. 1. Mozambique, extending along the coast about 1300 miles, and some dis DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 185 Lance into the interior, is claimed by the Portuguese, but their authority over the country is little more than nominal. 2. The chief ports are Mlozambique, Quilimane, Sofala, and Inhambane, held by the Portuguese, who have erected small forts to protect their trade with biie natives for gold, ivory, and slaves. MOZAMBIQUE is the capital of the Portuguese settlement, and the residence of the Governor General. Questions.-1. What is said of Mozambique? 2. What are the chief portt- State of so. ciety? Government? Religion? The capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. MozAMBIQUE-the capital. Tetet-next N. W. of Sena. Quilimane'-next S. W. of Mozambique. Sofalat-next S. W. of Quilimane. Sena-next W. of Quilimane. Inhambane~-next S. of Sofala. MONOMOTAPA. 1. Monomotapa is said to have been at one time a powerful empire, which is now destroyed. 2. It is chiefly occupied by the Maravis, a plundering, warlike tribe, whose chief resides at Zimbao, the capital. The chief towns are Tete in the north, and Manica in the south. Questions.-1. What is said of Monomotapa? 2. By whom is it occupied? What are the chief towns. CAZEMBE. 1. Cazembe, in the southern interior of Africa, is said to be a fertile and populous country. 2. It yields iron, copper, and gold, and carries on considerable trade in ivory and slaves. The country, capital, and chief or sovereign, have the same name. Questions.-1. What is said of Cazembe? 2. What does it yield? CAFFRARIA. 1. Caffraria is inhabited by the Caffrcs, a fine, vigorous, athletic race, with a complexion varying from a copper hue to a deep black. 2. They are divided into several tribes, and their chief employment is war, hunting, and tending their large herds of cattle. Some tribes cultivate minlbeans, pumpkins, sweet potatoes, maize, and tobacco. 3. The Caffres acknowledge the existence of a Supreme Being, but have no form of worship. Port Natal is the chief town. Questions.-1. By whom is Caffraria inhabited? 2. How are they divided, and what is their chief employment? 3. What do they acknowledge? What is the chief town? CAPE COLONY. 1. Cape Colony occupies the most southern part of Africa. It was settled by the Dutch in 1650, but in 1815 it was ceded to the British, who still retain it. 2. The lands of the colony are chiefly occupiedas grazing farms by the Dutch, who raise large herds of cattle. 3. The soil along the coast is fertile, but during a greater part of the year, much of the interior is destitute of vegetation. The chief productions are wheat, barley, and wine. CAPE TOWN, the capital, and largest European settlement in Africa, is the best olace of refreshment for ships between Europe and the East Indies. Questions.-I. What does Cape Colony occupy? When and by whom was it settled? 2 By whom are the lands occupied? 3. What is said of the soil? What is the state of society? Government? Religion? Capital? CITIES AND TOWNS. CAPE rowN-the capital. Zwellendam- Constantine-next S. E. of Cape Town. Graaf Reynet- estward of (.ape Tows Graham's Town. n order ke-le-mah'.nay. t tayl-tay. t so-fab I-lah. in-am'.ban' 24 x66 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. BOSHUANAS,-HOTTENTOTS, AND CIMBEBAS, 1. The Boshuanas belong to the same race as the Caffres. They are both a pastoral and agricultural people, and live in large towns for better protection against hostile neighbors. Kurreechanein the interior, Litarooba in the north, Mashow'in the west, and Lattakoo in the southwest, are the principal towns. 2. The Hottentots are a quiet, inoffensive, ignorant, filthy, and degraded race of beings. Some of them have been much improved by the labors of Christian missionaries, having been instructed in agriculture and some of the most simple arts. Griqua 7own is in the northeast part. 3. Cimbebasas as a desert and dreary coast, but the interior is well adapted to grazing. The inhabitants seem to be a mild and inoffensive race, and possess large herds of cattle. Questions.-1. To what race do the Boshuanas belong? What is their occupation, and where do they live? 2. What is said of the Hottentots? 3. Cimbebas? The inhabitants? LOWER GUINEA. 1. Lower Guinea is divided into numerous small states. The most important are Benguela, Angola, Congo, and Loango. 2. The Portuguese claim possession of the greater part of the coast, and carry on the slave trade to some extent from the principal ports3. Lower Guinea has every variety of surface, and along tne coast a hot, unhealthy climate. The soil is fertile, and yields the richest tropical productions. ST. FELIPE DE BENGUELAIis the capital of the country of tengueia, and is chiefly inhabited by free negroes and slaves. ST. PAUL DE LOANDO is the capital and chief settlement or Angola. ST. SALVADOR, the capital of Congo, has several Catholic churches and many Portuguese inhabitants. LOANGO is the capital of Loango, and was formerly one of the principal slavemarts on the coast of Georgia. Cabendatsoutheast, and Mauywiiattu northwest of Loango, were formerly noted slave marts. Questions.-1. How is Lower Guinea divided? 2. By whom is the greater part claimed? 3. What is said of the surface and climate? Tie soil? What is the state of society in Lower Guinea? What is the government of the several states? Religion? What is said of StL Felipe de Benguela? St. Paul de Loando? St. Salvador? Loango,? Cabenda and Mayumba? UPPER GUINEA. 1. Upper Guinea is divided into a number of kingdoms. The most powerful are Benin, Dahomey,lland Ashantee. 2. Benin is but little known. The natives carry on an active trade in slaves, ivory, salt, and palm-oil. Some parts of the country are fertile, but low, flat, swampy, and very unhealthy to Europeans. 3. BENIN is the capital on an estuary of the Niger. The houses are constructed of clay, and are neatly thatched with reeds, straw, or leaves. Eboe,~south of Benin, is a great slave market. 4. Dahomey consists of an immense plain, rising gradually from the sea to the Kong Mountains. 5. The country is well watered, and the surface is covered with luxuriant vegetation. Oranges, limes, pine-apples, yams, and other tropical fruits, grow wild; and maize, millet, potatoes, indigo, cotton, sugar, tobacco, and spices, are successfully cultivated. 6. Some parts of the country are covered with dense forests, the retreat of lions, leopards, hyenas, elephants, and huge serpents. Deer and domestic anireals are plentiful. 7. The people are warlike and ferocious, and the horrid custom of sacrificing human beings at the decease of the king, under the delusion that they will follow and wait upon him in the other world, prevails to a great extent in both Dahomey and Ashantee. 8. ABOMEY is the capital, and contains about 20,000 inhabitants. kar-re-chain. t ben-gay'-lah. t kah-ben'-da.. mah-yum'-bah. U dah'-ho-may. e'e'.o DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 187 9. Ashantee is an extensive and powerful kingdom, lying along the Gold Coast ut Guinea. Some parts of the coast are sandy, but the greater part of the country is extremely fertile. 10. Near the sea grows the largest tree of the forest, the mighty Baobab; with marks of several thousand years of age. 11. The sugar-cane grows wild. Maize, tobacco, dhourra, millet, yams, rice, oranges, figs, and all the'tropical fruits, are produced in abundance. The country produces aloes, balsams, and a great variety of gums and aromatic plants. Gold is more abundant in Ashantee than any other part of Africa. 12. The character, manners, and customs of the people, are similar to those of Dahomey. 13. The rivers swarm with hippopotami and alligators, and elephants, lions, tigers, leopards, and a great variety of other animals, abound. 14. COOMAssIE is the capital. The streets are wide, regular, and clean, and the houses are mostly built of reeds. Elmina, the most southern town on the coast, is occupied by the Dutch, Cape Coast Castle next east on the coast, by the British, and Christiansborg still far ther east, by the Danes. Each of these places is fortified, and has a small garrison. Queslions.-How is Upper Guinea divided? 2. What is said of Benin? 3. What is the capital 4. Of what does Dahomey consist? 5. What is said of the country? The productions? 6. With what are some parts of the country covered? 7. What is the character of the people? 8. What is the capital of Dahomey? 9. What is said of Ashantee? 10. What noted tree grows there? 11. What are the productions?, 12. What is the character of the people? 13. With what do the rivers swarm, and what animals abound? 14. What is the capital of Ashantee? What is the state of society in Upper Guinea? What is the government of the several kingdoms? The religion? LIBERIA. " 1. The Republic of Liberia was formerly a colony, founded in 1821 by the American Colonization Society, and peopled by free blacks and emancipatea slaves from the United States, and by Africans recaptured from slave vessels. 2. It embraces a number of flourishing towns and villages, in which are estabtished schools and churches, and the inhabitants are industrious and advancing in agriculture and trade. 3. The soil is fruitful, and produces rice, cotton, coffee, sugar, indigo, bananas, and yams. Camwood, palm-oil, ivory, hides, wax, and pepper, are important articles of trade. MONROVIA is the capital. Bassa Cove, Greenville, and Harper, next southeast of Monrovia in order, are among the chief settlements. Questions.-I. What is said of Liberia? 2. What does it embrace? 3. What is said of the soil? What are the important articles of trade? What is the capital? SIERRA LEONE. 1. Sierra Leone is a colony of free negroes, established by British philanthropists in 1787, for the purpose of introducing the Christian religion and civilization into Africa. 2. The population is composed chiefly of liberated slaves, taken from captured slave-ships. The climate is extremely unhealthy, and but few whites reside in the colony. FREETOWN is the capital. Questions.-1. What is said of Sierra Leone 2. Who compose the population? Whai is said of the climate? What is the capital? SENEGAMBIA. 1. Senegambia extends from the Great Desert to Liberia and Guinea, and is inhabited chiefly by the Jaloff, Foolah, and Mandingo tribes, who live in towns, and have some acquaintance with the arts and manufactures. 2. Along the coast the surface is low and level, and the streams scarcely flow, spreading out into unnealthy lakes and marshes. Farther inland the surface i more uneven. 188 EKEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE MAPS. 3. The c.imate is intensely hot, and the forest-trees, along the banks of tre river and the in erior, produce the most valuable gums. 4. The productions are varied and abundant. Some of the most important are cotton, indigo, coffee, cassia, maize, millet, olives, and hemp. On the banks of the Senegal grows the gigantic Baobab, 30 feet in diameter. Among the wild animals are the elephant, lion, hippopotamus, buffalo, tiger, deer, and a great variety of birds and reptiles. 5. The English, French, and Portuguese, have settlements along the coast to trade with the natives for slaves, ivory, gum-arabic, and gold dust. TIMBOO is the capital of Foota Jallon, the largest of the Foolah States. Questions.-1. What is the extent of Senegambia, and by what tribes is it chiefly inhabited 2. What is said of the surface? 3. The climate.and forest trees? 4. The productions Animals? 5. What nations have settlements along the coast? What is the state of society? Government? Religion? The capital? SAHARA, OR GREAT DESERT. 1. Sahara, or the Great Desert, 3000 miles long and 1000 broad, extending nearly across the northern part of Africa, consists chiefly of vast sandy plains, swept by hot winds and parched by a burning sun. 2. A few green and fertile spots, called oases, are scattered over this immense expanse, and serve as resting places for caravans. 3. Fezzan is the largest of the oases, and is tributary to Tripoli. It is chiefly important as the centre of the caravan trade. MZoorzook is the capital. Tibesty S. E., Bilma S., Agdas S. W., and Tooat W. of Fezzan, are the next most important oases. 4. Wandering tribes of robbers often attack caravans of merchants crossing the desert, and travellers sometimes perish with their camels for want of water, or provisions. Questions.-What is said of Sahara, or the Great Desert? 2. Oases? 3. Fezzan? 4 Wandering tribes of robbers CITIES AND TOWNS. MOORZOOK-the capital of Fezzan. Agdas-next W. of Bilma. Ghraat-next S. W. of Moorzook. Agably-next W. of Moorzook. Zuela-.. audenyt-next S. W. of Agably, (16.) gela- next N. E. of Moorzook.in orde iset- next S. W. of Taudeny in Sokna-next N. of Moorzook. Benowm- order. Aboo-next S. E. of Moorzook. Aroana-next S. E. of Taudeny. Bilma-next S. of Moorzook. Walet-next S. W. of Aroan. SOODAN. 1. Soodan comprises several powerful, and numerous small kingdoms, till re. cently but little known to the civilized world. 2. A majority of the population are negroes, the most civilized in Africa; but the ruling people are Moors, who migrated from Barbary many cenc.tuius ago, conquered the negroes, and forced upon them the Mohammedan re.igion, which most of them still retain. 3. Soodan contains many large cities. Agriculture is rudely nracti;ed, the inhabitants have some knowledge of the arts, and in some partJ cf the country display great skill in the manufacture of cotton goods. 4. The climate is hot and unhealthy to strangers. The soil is Fait to be wellwatered and fertile, and the surface so varied in elevation, that the products of both the torrid and temperate zones ripen in different parts of the cnuntry. Rice, wheat, cotton, and indigo, are said to be raised in abundance. 5. The inhabitants carry on an active trade with the nrcthern part of Africain gums, gold, ivory, ostrich feathers, and slaves. Questions.-1. What does Soodan comprise? 2. What is aid of the inhabitants? 3 What does Soodan oontain? What is said of agriculture and the arts? 4. The climate Soil ana surface? Productions? 5. Trade? What is the state oil ociety in Soodan? What is the government in the several kingdoms? Religion? au' -je-la. tou'-de-nee. X ah-roo-an' DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY 189 CITIES AND TOWNS. ) the capital of Kaarta, the most Kano — e f K a in ~ Kr.uaMMoo - western kingdom in Soodan, Zaria* net ". l asna In -rder ) (28 E. 29 W.) EYvot-the capital of Yariba, (44 N.) S Go-the capital~gf Bambarra, (29 M.) Boossa — on the W. & E. bank of the Niger Silla- on the Niger, next E. of Sego in Youri — next N. of Eyeo in order. Jenne- order. KooKAT-the capital of Bornoo, (31 M. & S. TIMBUCToO- the capital of Timbuctoo, (29 Old Bornoo-next N. W. of Kooka. N. E.) Angornoo-_nearly S. of Kooka inorer SAccATOo-the capital of Houssa, (30 M.) M'ora- n S o Kashna-next E. of Saccatoo. BERGOO, DARFOOR, KORDOFAN, AND ETHIOPIA. 1. Bergoo is very little known, but is said to be an extensive and populous kingodom. Wara is the capital. 2. Darfoor is a dry and sandy country, but the tropical rains fertilize the soil, which produces wheat and millet. Camels, horses, cattle, and goats, are the principal animals. Caravans, passing between Darfoor and Egypt, trade in slaves, ivory, ostrich feathers, and other articles. Cobbe is the capital. 3. Kordofan is a country similar to Darfoor. Al Obeid is the capital. 4. Ethiopia is an undefined, unknown, and unexplored region. Questions. —1. What is said of Bergoo? What is the capital? 2. What is said of Darfoor? Animals? Trade? What is the capital? 3. What is said of Kordofan? 4. Ethiopia AFRICAN ISLANDS. 1. MADAGASCAR, one of the largest islands in the world, is traversed by a chaih of lofty mountains, below which is a fine country of hills, valleys, and fertile plains. Rice is the most important agricultural production. It is divided into numerous states, many of which have united under the government. Radama, the late prince, received Christian missionaries, and endeavored to civilize his subjects by introducing among them the arts and sciences; but the present sovereign is hostile to all Christians and their institutions. The inhabitants along the coast are Malays and Arabs, who are partly civilized; the interior is inhabited by savages. TANANARIVOO is the capital. Bembatook N. W., Tamalave E., and Alana>zari S. E. of Tananarivoo, are the principaltowns. 2. MAURITIUS, or the ISLE OF FRANCE, formerly belonged to the French, but was captured in 1810 by the British, who still retain it. Its productions are of a superior quality. Port Louis is the chief town. 3. BOURBON ISLAND belongs to the French. It is noted for its sugar and coffee, and for a volcano which is constantly burning, and serves at night as a lighthouse to mariners. St. Denis is the chief town. 4. SOCOTRA is chiefly noted for the superior quality of its aloes. 5. ST. HELENA, 28 miles in circumference, and presenting to the sea on every side perpendicular walls of rock, from 600 to 1200 feet high, is noted for having been the residence of Napoleon Bonaparte from the time of his exile in 1815, till his death in 1821. Longwood, the residence of Napoleon, stands on the plateau in the middle of Tn extensive park; and the room, in which the conqueror of Austerlitz breathed ais last, was recently occupied as a cart-house and stable. JAMESTOWN, the port and residence of the authorities, is the only town. The inhabitants chiefly reside on the higher and cooler parts of the island. St. Helena belongs to Great Britain. 6. The CAPE VERD ISLANDS belong to Portugal. The climate is hot and unhealthy, the soil mostly dry and arid, and in 1831 a long continued drought proved fatal to many of the inhabitants. The chief production is cotton. Salt is formed in large quantities by natural evaporation. 7. The CANARY ISLANDS belong to Spain, and are noted for their fruits, wines, %ml Canary birds. They contain numerous mountains, of which the most cete. brated )ep k is Teneriffe, 12,000 feet high. * zah-re6-yah.' i-yo. $koo-kah. 190 KEY TO PELTON'S OUTLINE JIAPS. 6. The MADEIRA ISLANDS belong to Portugal. Madeira is a beautiful, healthy and fertile island, and has long been celebrated for its excellent wines. It con sists of a lofty mountain with numerous isolated peaks, whose summits are crowned with heath and pines, and whose slopes on all sides are covered with the richest verdure, and the most beautiful vineyards. Every part not encumbered with rocks is extremely fertile. The hills are covered with luxuriant vegetation, and the most delicate flowers grow on their summits, which are constantly moistened with dew from the clouds overhanging the island. The finest trees and shrubs are every where abundant, and tropical plal.ts, whichhave strayed from the gardens of distant climes, here find a soil congenial as their own. 9. The AZORES, or WESTERN ISLANDS, also belong to Portugal, and are a convenient resort for vessels, navigating the Atlantic. They have a fine climate, and fertile soil, which produces luxuriant crops of grain, pulse, and grapes; the finest oranges, lemons, and fruits of various kinds, are produced in abundance. The oppressive.exactions and tyranny of the proprietors of the soil discourage agriculture and improvement, and industry is almost unknown. The influence of vicious laws, the mildness of the climate, and the productiveness of the soil, encourage ignorance and indolence. Questions.-1. What is said of Madagascar? How is it divided? What is'said of the late prince? The present sovereign? The inhabitants? What is the capital? 2. What is said of Mauritius? Its productions? What is its chief town? 3. To whom does Bourbon Islanu belong? For what is it noted? What is its chief town? 4. For what is Socotra noted? 5. For what is St. Helena noted? What is said of Longwood? Jamestown? 6. To whom do the Cape Verd Islands belong? What is said of the climate and soil? Productions? 7. To whom do the Canary Islands belong, and for what noted? What do they contain? 8. To whom do the Madeira Islands belong? What is said of Madeira? Of what does it consist? 9. What is said of the Azores? Climate and soil? Agriculture and improvement? ISLANDS OF OCEANICA. 1. Australia, formerly called New Holland, is the largest island in the world, and is claimed by Great Britain. It lies on the opposite side of the world from the United States, and has day when we have night, and summer when we have winter. The inhabitants are Oriental negroes, few in number, of a dwarfish size, ill. shaped, and among the most degraded of the human race. The first European settlers were convicts, transported from England to Botany Bay in 1788. Many thousand criminals have since been added, and within a few years voluntary emigrants have increased the white population to nearly 100,000. who have formed settlements along the coast. The greater part of the whites are settled near Sidney in New South Wales, which comprises the southeastern part of the island; a few thousand in Soudh Australia, which comprises a portion of the southern part of the island; and a smaller number in West Australia, which comprises the southwestern part of the island, called Swan River Colony. The soil of the unexplored parts of the island, except some small fertile districts, is, to a great extent, unfit for cultivation; but it is well adapted to the pasturage of sheep, which yield wool of a very fine quality, the staple production, and a source of great wealth. Among the animals are the kangaroo, emeu, duck-bill, and the black swan, which are found only in Australia. SIDNEY, the capital and largest town, has one of the finest harbors in the world. Paramantta, Windsor, and Brisbane, nearly N. of Sidney in order, and Melbourne and Portland Bay, S. Wo of Sidney in order, are the principal towns in New South Wales. Albany, on the south coast, Australind W. of it, and Free. mantle and Perth N. of it in order, are the chief towns in West Australia. 2. VAN DIEMEN'S LAND is a large island, diversified with hills and dales, with a temperate climate, good soil, and fine harbors. It yields wheat, oats, barley, potatoes, and especially fine wool in abundance. The population is nearly 75,000, of whom about one-fourth are convicts, an, three-fourths voluntary emigrants from Great Britain. HCIRART TowN, the capital, is beautifully situated on a fine harbor at the foot DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. 19] of Table Mountain, which rises on the west side of the tow r to the height of nearly 4000 feet. Launceston is in the N, part of the island. 3. PAPUA, or NEW GUINEA, has never been explored in the interior, and even its coast-line, in many parts, is unknown. The natives are Papuans, or Oriental negroes. The whole island, as far as explored, is covered with palm trees, and others of a larger growth, and is the favorite abode of those beautiful birds called Birds of Paradise. 4. BORNEO is the largest island in the world, except Australia. It is watered and fertilized by numerous streams from the mountains in the interior, and is remarkable-for its rich mines of gold and- diamonds, and for the orang-outang, an ape strongly resembling man. The interior is inhabited by various independent tribes, but the Dutch exercise authority over one-third of the coast, and carry on an active commerce, exporting gold, rice, pepper, cinnamon, coffee, camphor, and other products. Borneo in the N. W., Sambas in the W., and Benjarmassin in the S. E., are the chief towns. 5. SUMATRA is the largest island of Malaysia except Borneo, and the products of its soil and mines are of great value. It is noted for its pepper and camphor, which are obtained in large quantities, and extensiyely exported; its productions are rice, cinnamon, sago, coffee, and various kinds of fruit. Sumatra was once noted for its gold, and a considerable quantity is otill exported; it also contains rich mines of copper ore, which are but little worked. The Dutch have possessions on the southwest coast, but a greater part of the island is independent, and is divided into several petty native kingdoms. Some of the interior tribes are cannibals. Acheen in the N. W., Padang on the W. coast, Bencoolen on the S. W. coast, and Palembang in the S. E., are among the chief towns. 6. JAVA is the most cultivated and populous of the Asiatic Islands, and is principally under the control of the Dutch. It is the centre of their trade, as well as the most valuable of their possessions in the East. The soil is exceedingly fertile, and produces rice, coffee, pepper, sugar, spices, cotton, indigo, and tropical fruits in abundance. The Javenese are well acquainted with some of the arts, and display considerable skill in agriculture. Their religion is a mixture of Mohammedanism and Boodhism. BATAVIA, on the N. W. coast of the island, is the capital and seat of government of the Dutch possessions in the East Indies, and the first commercial city in Oceanica. Its streets, like those of the cities of Holland, are lined with trees, and traversed by canals. Djokjokarta*and Soorakarta are S. E. of Batavia in order. 7. CELEBES is singularly irregular in shape, indented by three large bays, separated by four peninsulas. It is divided into a number of small independent states, and the southern part is inhabited by the most energetic and commercial people in the Archipelago. They trade with the Chinese and Dutch; the latter ave some possessions along the coast. 8. The PHILIPPINE ISLANDS comprise Luzon, Mindanao, Palawan, and numerous smaller islands, and are rich in rice, sugar, coffee, tobacco, indigo, and other valuable tropical products. They belong to Spain. The population is extremely various, and consists of a number of distinct tribes. MANILLA, a large and well-built city, is the capital of Luzon and all the Spanish possessions in the Philippine Islands. It has an extensive commerce, and its harbor is sometimes thru gt with European, American, and Chinese vessels.;Mindanao, on Mindanao Island. 9. The MOLUCCAS, or SPICE ISLANDS, are noted for producing those rare spices, the clove and nutmeg, to which the soil is peculiarly adapted. 10. NEW ZEALAND consists of two fine islands, traversed by lofty mountains, and claimed by Great Britain. They have a rich soil, which produces Indian corn, yams, potatoes, and a species of strong flax. The natives belong to the Malay race, and are tall, well-formed, intelligent, and warlike savages. iMary of them have been taught to cead and write ander *jok-yo.ker'-ta. 192 KEY TO PELTONIS OtTLINE MAPS. the instructions of British missionaries, and are advancing in civilization. In 1840 a British colony was planted here, consisting of nearly 1000 persons. AUCKLAND is the capital, and has a spacious harbor. New Plymouth and TWe liihgton are S. of Auckland in order. 11. The FRIENDLY ISLANDS comprise the Navigators, Hapai, Tonga, and Fejee Islands, encircled by dangerous coral reefs. The soil is exceedingly rich, producing, with very little care, the banana, bread-fruit, and yam. In the Fejee Islands, the inhabitants are savage and ferocious; in the Tonga and Hapai Islands, missionaries have established schools, in which are instructed more than 2000 children, and many of the natives have embraced Christianity. 12. The SANDWICH ISLANDS are the most important and interesting group in Polynesia.' Hawaii, formerly called Owhy'hee, is the largest island, and has an area nearly equal to the State of Connecticut. It is noted for the lofty summit of Mouna Roa, 16,000 feet high, and for Kirauea, the greatest and most terrific volcano on the globe. In 1819, the inhabitants of these islands renounced their idols and embraced Christianity. American missionaries have translated the Bible and other books into the language of the natives, established churches and schools in all the principal islands, and taught the people to read and write. HONOLLUL, on the Island of Oahu, is the capital and residence of the king of the Sandwich Islands. It contains about 7000 inhabitants, has a good harbor, and American and European ships are always in its ports. Many of the Sandwich Islanders dress in the European fashion; books and newspapers are printed in the native language at Honolulu, and vessels built there, and manned by natives, traverse the Pacific to the northwest coast of America and to Canton. 13. The SOCIETY AND GEORGIAN ISLANDS are remarkable for being the first in, Polynesia whose inhabitants embraced Christianity. Otaheite, or Tahiti,tthe largest island, and "the brightest gem of the Pacific," rises into mountains in the interior, and the entire surface, from the water's edge to the highest summits, is clothed with perennial verdure, unparalleled for its luxuriant and picturesque appearance. The Society Islanders are indolent, light-hearted, merry, and. fond of social enjoyment. They can generally read and write, and in one of the islands there is a press which has been actively engaged for many years in supplying them with books in their own language. PAPEITIfiS the seat of government and principal port of Otaheite. 14. The islands of Polynesia lie mostly between the tropics, and the climate, tempered by a succession of light sea and land breezes, is uniform and delightful. The most useful productions of these islands are the Bread-fruit-tree, which yields an abundance of food without the labour of man,. cocoa-nuts, yams, bananas, sweet potatoes, and the taro and other nutritious roots. Oranges, limes, citrons, pineapples, guavas, and figs, also abound. Questions-1. What is said of Australia? The natives? Who were the first European settlers in Australia? What is the number of the white population? Where are the greater part of the whites settled? What is n;,t of the soil? Animals? Sidney? 2. What is said of Van Diemen's Land? What does it -.Ad? What is the population? What is said of Hobart Town? 3. What is said of Papua, or New Guinea? 4. Borneo? By whom is the interior inhabited? What are the chief towns? 5. What is said of Sumatra? For What is it noted? What are its other products? For what was Sumatra once noted? Where are the Dutch possessions? 6. What is said of Java? The soil? The Javanese? Batavia? 7. What is said of Celebes? How is it divided? 8. What do the Philippine Is. comprise? What is said of the population? Manilla I 9. For what are the Moluccas, or Spice Is. noted? 10. Of what does New Zealand consist? What is said of the soil and productions? The natives? Auckland? 11. What do the Friendly Is. comprise? What is said of the soil? The inhabitants in the Fejee Is.? The missiona ries in Tonga and Hapai Is.? 12. What is said of the Sandwich Is.? Hawaii? What change took place in these islands in 1819? What is said of Honolulu? 13. For what are the Society and Georgian Is. remarkable? What is said of Otaheite? The Society;'anders'Papeta? 14. Where do the islands of Polynesia lie? What are their useful productions? ki.ra.way'. th. t tah-hee.^e $ pah-pay-e6-te ,4000..~ 1L8 000 ffil~~~~~~~~~~~~~~/ 9,00o 38,000 G I;~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I LI =\F z iIk:].1 o ~1o 310,~l lo 6 lO " 81... TA BLEAU. —Showing the corresponding effects of altitude with that of lati- a. Denotes the region of spices, 5. The region of palms, c. The region of the wine tude, on vegetable life. Also exhibiting the highest travelled road, human habi- grape, d. Cereal grains, e. Pines and birches, f. Grasses and mosses, g. Litehens, tation, existence of animal life, ascent of man, flight of the condor, balloon mosses, and sterility, h. The region of perpetual snow. ageension. &c. Figs, 27000, &c., indicate altitude in feet —10, 20, &c., indicate latitude in degrees PART THIRD. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 1. GEOGRAPHY, in its general acceptation, is a description of the forrm and division of the surface of the earth. 2. Physical Geography embraces a description of the earth's surface; of the atmosphere by which it is surrounded; of the waters forming its oceans, seas, lakes, and rivers; and of those laws which regulate the distribution of its organic beings. In short, it investigates the relations which subsist between the various phenomena of physical science. 3. The earth which we inhabit forms but a small portion of the universe. Yet it is a world complete in itself-a grand theatre, in which a great variety of operations are carried on; all moving with the most admirable harmony and precision-the result of one grand and comprehensive design. 4. To note all the motions, visible objects, and phenomena on its surface, in the sea, and in the air; to arrange them in their several orders; to indicate their characters; to mark their differences; and, finally, to blend them all in one grand harmony, constitute a complete and accurate study of this department of physical science. 5. The earth is a slightly irregular spheroid, with a mean diameter of 7912 miles, and a superficial area of 1481 million square miles, enveloped in an atmosphere about 45 miles in height. It revolves around the' sun at a mean distance of 95 million of miles from the sun's centre, in a civil year of 365 days, 5 hours, 48 minutes, 49.7 seconds. It also rotates in 24 hours about an axis inclined at an angle of 23~ 27' 34".69 to the plane of the ecliptic. 6. Composition of the Globe.-The earth, in its organic and inorganic nature, seems to consist of almost an infinite variety of elements; but chemical analysis has determined that the whole number of simple or individual substances which compose all that variety of rocks, metals, and earths, found upon and under its surface, as well as all the trees and vegetables that grow upon it, and all the men and animals which inhabit it-including all kinds of fish and shells that live in the sea-together 3 4 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. with the waters of the earth, and the atmosphere by which it is surrounded, amount to only about 54, viz: Aluminium, Antimony, Arsenic, Barium, Bismuth, Boron, Bromine, Cadmium, Calcium, Carbon, Cerium, Chlorine, Chromium, Cobalt, Columbium, Copper, Fluorine, Glucinium, Gold, Hydrogen, Iodine, Iridium, Iron, Lead, Lithium, Magnesium, Manganese, Mercury, iIolybdenum, Nickel, Nitrogen, Osmium, Oxygen, Palladium, Phosphorus, Platinum, Potassium, Rhodium, Selenium, Silicium, Silver, Sodium, Strontium, Sulphur, Tellurium, Thorium, Tia, Titanium, Tungsten, Uranium, Vandanium, Yttrium, Zinc, Zirconium. 7. These elementary substances are rarely found by themselves in nature, but combine with each other as binary or ternary compounds. But few of those elements are general-some ten or twelve constitute the great mass of the globe. Take from the earth its oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen, and it is deprived of its atmosphere, all its water, and a portion of its solids. The absence of carbon would divest it entirely of its vegetation, and its immense deposits of coal. Geologists have determined that the compounds of lime form one-fourth of the solid crust of the globe. Silex, Alumine and Potash (the chief elements of granite and schistois slate) constitute whole mountain systems, deserts of sand, santis of the sea, immense deposits of clay, etc. This is a striking illustration of the wisdom and power of the Creator; for who, beside Him, "who brought all things out of nothing," could have made such an endless variety of forms, colors, and modes of existence, out of such simple means. 8. Probable Origin of the Globe.-The science of chemistry has clearly revealed that the almost endless variety of visible compounds are composed of but few elements. Philosophers conceive that the wisdom and power of the Creator of all things are no less strikingly exemplified in the fact, that the laws which preside over these formations are comparatively few; that a certain unerring law may resolve the matter constituting a homogeneous, formless substance or body into spheroidal masses, under very different circumstances and in very different conditions-the same whether in organic or inorganic nature, from the small spheroid (the egg) in the ovary of an insect or bird, up to the golden and glorious orb we inhabit, marvellous, if real-a spider's egg, and a planet in the heavens, called out of the same original condition, and in the process of their development subject to the same law. 9. Most modern astronomers agree in considering the assemblage of stars, planets, and satellites, that form our solar system, as having been at first generally disseninated, or confounded in one celestial body; an obscure, gaseous, formless mass, spread uniformly throughout space. This is the chaotic, the inorganic state, corresponding with the period of which the Scriptures declare, that " In the beginning God created the heavens and the earth; and the earth was without form and void." 10. Eventually the process of development begins; as Herschell conceives, a principle of concentrationT-gravitation-counterbalances the unlimited expansion of the gaseous matter, brings the molecules nearer together, and groups them in a spheroidal mass. This approximation allows the molecules, different in their nature, to act upon each other according to their chemical affinities. The result of this process is the evolution of light and heat. Soon vague or nebulous bodies are detached from the general mass under the form of luminous spheroids; these bodies, then resolving themselves into local agglomerations under the influence of gravitation and chemical combination, separate from each other in distinct spheres. Laplace imagines this phenomena to be effected by the successive separation and agglomeration of the concentric layers of the solar atmosphere. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 5 11. To describe the successive changes the surface of our earth has undergone, would suppose an accurate knowledge based upon historical record; but in this regard we are entirely wanting. The brilliant hypotheses of Herschell and Laplace and the demonstrations of geologists constitute the only sources from which the generally accepted conclusions are drawn. 12. At first, as we have seen, the matter is presented under a single form-gas; next, by gradual concentration and physical combination, induced, perhaps, by change of temperature, it is resolved into three distinct forms-gaseous, liquid, and solid matter, arranged in the order of their densities. The globe is now composed of a solid mass, enveloped first by a liquid, and secondly by a gaseous covering-the ocean and the atmosphere. 13. At the surface only the elements are in contact-the air and the water: the winds, rains, oceanic currents, as well as animal and vegetable life, may exist; but the former are uniform, languid, and apparently useless; the latter of a very low order. 14. Eventually a new difference is added. By the effect, perhaps, of the simple cooling of the globe, or as the result of some internal expansive force, the solid, the earth, is raised above the surface of the waters-in contact no longer with the water alone, but also with the atmosphere. These elements henceforth act and react upon each other. 15. The lands, the seas, and the atmosphere, absorbing the solar heat in an unequal degree, give birth to that complicated variety of phenomena, the winds, storms, oceanic currents, rains, climates, etc. The land at this period comprises only a few Archipelagoes and isolated Islands; the present massive continents are not yet outlined. The most massive of the oldest domains above the surface of the waters, in the regionsof the present continent of Europe, were Scandinavia and a part of Russia, England, Scotland, Ireland France, Germany, Spain, Turkey, with a small portion of a few other States; each were marked by a few islands only. North America, at this time, or a little later, in like manner, presented only a few large islands; the Alleghanies, with the region north-west of the Valley of the Mississippi, and a part of Nova Scotia and Newfoundland, were the only then existing lands of the present continent. All the lowland along the Coast of the Atlantic, the Gulf of Mexico, and the Pacific, with the Valley of the Mississippi, and the Rocky Mountains, were still at the bottom of the sea. 16. This is the early age of the globe. From this period henceforth (from the.primary to the tertiary formations) specialization-progress, characterize every department of physical nature. The lands became more numerous and diversified: the continents are defined; the mountains more elevated; their slopes more regular; the inland seas and lagoons are filling rid drying up; the diluvial torrents, glaciers, and icebergs have done their work, leaving their impress upon the soil. The aerial and oceanic currents are more various and complicated; the climates more diversified; the animals and vegetables have greatly increased in number and species, and improved in type and character; till man, the most highly endowed of all, is created-made to vindicate his birthright and declare himself lord of the whole animal creation. GEOLOGY. 17. Geological Formations.-The antagonistical principles of fire and water, heat and cold, have subjected the crust of the globe to 6 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. incessant changes. The atmosphere, the ocean and the rivers, are constantly acting upon the solid crust, wearing it down into minute particles. These particles are carried down into the bed of the sea, and are there reconsolidated into new strata. An internal igneous process is also forcing up, at intervals of time, and also at different localities, masses of crystalline rock, which tend to elevate certain portions of the earth's surface, and thus compensate for the levelling agencies of the ocean and atmosphere. 18. Popularly, the term "rock" is applied only to the more compact and solid portions of the globe; but geologically, it extends to every kind of formation-to the loose sands, clays, and gravels. Eighty beds of different kinds have been found at a depth of 500 yards. These are divided by.M. Boue into six great leading classes or formations. 1st. The crystalline schistous formation, comprehending all the granitoid rocks. 2d. The primary stratifications, or the transition series, including the carboniferous formations. 3d. The secondary formation, extending from the close of the carboniferous to the close of the cretaceous. 4th. The tertiary formation. 5th. The alluvion, or modern detritus. 6th. The volcanic, igneous rocks, of the tertiary epoch. See map of Geological Structure: The different shades of color represent the different formations. It is needless to say that such maps are merely approximations, yet their importance must be realized, although the soil, subsoil, or the basis of these are somewhat indifferently portrayed. If a general idea is inculcated, an important object is accomplished. 19. The crystalline schistous formation (as the name implies,) consists of rocks of a crystalline nature, and are of igneous origin, as granite, trap, claystone, &c. This class of rocks forms, in many localities, the great depository of metals-gold, silver, tin, and copper. They contain no organic remains. 20. Granite may be considered the lowest of all rocks, o or the basis on which the others I rest. But while it forms a basis for other /wQ^i, rocks, it also penetrates the superincumbent strata in veins of various magnitude, (See fig. 1.) and in many places has been so upheaved, as to form the summits of the loftiest moun21. The primary stratifications, or transi— t.,, tion series, including the carboniferous rocks. T,,,,! hese formations include a great variety of FI. 1. rock. The lower portion of this group are of a slaty structure, resembling some of those of the preceding formation. Above these are beds of a dark brown color, intermixed with fragments of quartz, feldspar, and clay-slate. Associated with these are also beds of limestone and clay-slate. In these rocks organic remains are found in the form of shells, petrified fishes, and marine plants. This constitutes the Silurcan system. Next succeeds the old red sand-stone, or Devonian system. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 7 It is composed of fragments of quartz, intermixed with decomposed feldspar, tinged of a deep red color by the oxide of iron. Next in order is the carboniferous, or coal formation. The lowest layer is of mountain limestone, on which rests beds of coal, variously interstratified with yellowish sand-stone, shale, and iron-stone. 22. The secondary transformation extends from the close of the carboniferous to the close of the cretaceous. This formation commences with the new red sand-stone, succeeding the coal strata; it contains beds of gypsum, sulphate of lime, magnesian limestone, and sometimes deposits of common salt. Next is the oolite-formation. The lower division consists of an argillaceous limestone, of a deep blue color; it contains the remains of large reptiles, fishes, and numerous shells. The last of this series is the cretaceous, or chalk formation. 23. It consists of chalk and green sand, intermixed with siliceous matter; sometimes in the form of large nodules, or flints. All these formations contain organic remains. Hence they are termed palaeozoic. 24. Tertiary formation. This includes various strata of limestone, marl, clay, sand, and gravel, and consists of alternations of marine and fresh water beds. These beds are divided into old (eocene,) middle (miocene,) and more recent (Pliocene.) 25. Alluvial formations are frequently formed by the inundation of rivers, and the draining of lakes. Above these is the more recent soil, composed of earthy matter, and decomposed portions of plants. 26. Volcanic rocks. These, in the form of lavas, are ejected from volcanoes. They are composed essentially of the same material as the preceding rocks: but assume various forms of structure, according to the pressure they have sustained, and the rate at which they cooled and consolidated. Thus lavas may be of a black glossy appearance, of a dull earthy structure, or porous and vesicxular. 27. Physiognomy of the Earth's Surface. —The prominent features of the earth's surface, are the broad expanse of the oceanic masses; the continents, or land masses, with their elevations into high mountains, table-lands, and plains. The delineation of the line of contact between the land and the waters, gives the configuration, and bounds the horizontal dimensions of each; consequently, a depression of the landg a few hundred set, would essentially modify the general aspect of the earth's surface; would cause a great part of North and South America, Europe, Asia, and a portion of Africa to disappear beneath the surface of the waters. 28. Distinctive forms and peculiarities of the oceanic masses. The Pacific is of an oval shape, is the broadest in its area, and indents its shores by large land-locked seas, viz: Behring Sea, Sea of Okhotsk, Sea of Japan, Chinese Sea, Yellow Sea, Vermillion Sea, and the Gulf of Panama. 29. The J4tlantic takes the form of a deep longitudinal valley with nearly parallel sides, which exhitit corresponding projecting and retiring angles 8 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. a disposition to interlock. It is the most indented,,he most articulated of the several oceans, penetrating the continents by large inland seas. Its principal branches are, the Baltic with its gulfs, the German, Mediterranean, Black, ana Caribbean seas, the Gulfs of Guinea and MIexico. 30. The Indian Ocean is of a triangular form, with its vertex turned towards the North. Its branches are those of large gulfs and seas, viz: The Red Sea, Persian Gulf, and the Bay of Bengal. 31. The Arctic and.Antarctic Oceans are the most isolated, surrounding the poles of the earth, and mostly bounded by the astronomical lines of the Arctic and Antarctic circles. They are closed to navigation in their higher latitudes by eternal frosts. 32. Analogous features of the Continental Masses.-A remarkable peculiarity in the configuration of the continents is their resemblance of contour-a tendency to assume a peninsular form; and it is still more so, that almost all the peninsulas tend towards the south. This is the result of some unknown cause, which seems to have acted very extensively. The continents of South America and Africa are peninsulas on a gigantic scale, all tending to wards the South. The Peninsulas of Alaska, California and Florida, in North America; the European Peninsu'ss of Norway, Sweden, Spain, Portugal, Italy, and Greece; and the Asiatic Peninsulas of Ink.y. Tndo China, Corea, and Kamschatka, all tend in the same direction. Another peculiarty in the structure of the Peninsulas is, that they generally terminate boldly in bluffs, promontories or mountains. Greenland's southern termination is the elevated bluff of Cape Farewell; South America terminates in the high promontory of Cape Horn; Africa with the Cape of Good Hope; India with Cape Comorin, the last of the Ghauts; Australia, with Van Dieman's Land. This singular analogy of structure seems to disclose an arrangement, which must have beer. due to a single cause, which Reinhold Foster conceives' to be agreat deluge, or cataclysm rushing from the south-west, dashing violently against the continents, grinding away their sides, till its force was spent against their mountain barriers. This hypothesis, however, is regarded as untenable by modern geologists. 33. Distinctive Characters of the Continents.-The peninsula form of the continents adds greatly to the extent of their.coasts; a circumstance of great importance to civilization and commerce. 34. All the shores of Europe are deeply indented by the Atlantic Ocean, forming a number of inland seas of great magnitude, giving it a greater line of maratime coast, compared with its size, than any other quarter of the globe. It has one mile for every 156 square miles of surface. 35. The shores of Africa present a different feature: the continent is more simple in its form-no marked indentations; the waters of the ocean are not permitted to penetrate its interior; civilization and commerce are confined to its coasts, and the valleys of its more important rivers. It has only one mile of coast for 623 miles of surface. 36. Asia presents only three sides to the ocean. It has extensive peninsulas on its eastern and southern coasts. Whole countries push out into the ocean, as Arabia, India, and China, yet the greater portion of the continent is undivided by the waters of the ocean. It has one mile of coast to 459 square miles of surface. 37. North America, like Europe, is much indented. It has one mile of coast to 228 miles of surface. 38. South America, like Africa, is more simple in its configuration. It has one mile of coast to 376 miles of surface. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 9 39. The following table shows the comparative extent, length of line of shores, and number of square miles for one mile of coast: COUNTRIES. EXTENT LENGTJI OF LINE OF SQUARE MILES FOR ONE OUrNTR IE.' SHORES. MILE OF COAST. Europe, 2,688,000 17,000 156 Asia, 14,126,000 33,000 459 Africa, 8,720,000 16,000 623 Australia, 2,208,000 7,600 290 North America, 5,742,000 24.000 28 South America, 5,136,000 13,600' 376 40. Vertical Dimensions.-The height of the loftiest mountain of the globe (Kunchinchinga, which is 28,176 feet, nearly six miles,) appears quite insignificant, compared with one quarter of the earth's circumference (6,000 miles, the distance from the equator to the poles.) Yet the importance of studying carefully the vertical dimensions of the earth's surface is rendered apparent by comparing the effects of elevation with that of location in regard to latitude. It is quite as important to know whether a country be lifted high into the regions of the atmosphere, or elevated just above the level of the sea, as to know whether it be located near the equator or the poles. 41. An elevation of 300 feet is sufficient to diminish the mean temperature of a place by one degree of Fahrenheit; the same in effect, as if the place were situated 60 miles further north. An elevation of a few thousand feet changes entirely the aspect and character of a country. Vegetable and animal life present almost the same diversity of character in ascending an elevated mountain range under the equator, as in traveling from the equa — tor to the poles. (See page 1.) The foregoing tableau is designed to represent the corresponding temperature of the vertical' regions-with the latitude north or south of the equator-with effects on vegetable life. 42. The elevation of the lands above the sea-level may be divided into, three great classes, viz: mountain systems, table-lands, and plains. 43. Surfaces elevated a little above the level of the ocean, are called' low-lands, or plains; when their elevation is higher, and presents a basis of great thickness, they are called plateaux, or table-lands; still higher elevations, running in linear directions over the surface, on the borders ofL the table-lands, and sometimes standing isolated, constitute the mountain systems. 44. Another feature in the general aspect of the continental masses is, an occasional depression below the sea-level. The Caspian Sea, with its surrounding countries, is below the common level of the ocean. By actual measurement, the level of the Dead Sea is found to be 1,300 feet below the level of the ocean. Several of the lakes of Canada and Italy are similar instances of depression. 45. Analogous Features of the Mountain Systems.Enormous as are the mountain chains, and prodigious as the forces that' elevated them, they bear but a small proportion to the mass of the level continent. Both the high and the low lands have been elevated at swccessive periods; some of the very highest mountain chains are of but recent 2 10 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. geological date-as the Himalayas, Andes, and Rocky Mountains. And some chains that are now far inland, once stood up as islands above the ocean, while marine strata filled their cavities and formed around their bases-as the mountains of the British Isles, France, the Alleghanies of North America, &c. 46. In generalizing upon the mountain systems, there appears to be a very striking connection between the physical geography, cr external aspect of different countries and their geological structure-a critical similarity of outward forms-which indicates similarity in producing causes, and which must also, to a certain extent, indicate identity of structure. Therefore,'from the external appearance of an unexplored country, its geological structure may be inferred. From this, it appears evident that nature has not wrought after an indefinite number of types or models, but on the contrary, her fundamental types are very few: and it follows as a consequence of that law of nature's operations, that analogy of form and contour is peculiar to the constitution of countries though far removed from each other. 47. A difference in the composition of a rock has a.great influence upon its general form, and in the degree and manner in which it has been worn by the weather: thus, Dolomite(a) assumes generally the form of peaks, like saw teeth; Crystalline Schists(b) assume the form of needles, as in the Alps; Slates and Quartiferous Schists take the form of triangular pyramids; Calcareous(c) rocks, a rounded form; Serpentine and Trachyte(d) are often twisted and crumpled; Phonolites(e) assume a pyramidal form; Volcanoes are indicated by blunt cones and craters. Thus mountain peaks often indicate, by their form, their geological structure. 48. Humboldt has established the very remarkable law, that in a part of Asia there is a predominance of auriferous(f) and platiniferous(g) deposits in the mountain chains which have a meridional direction-a law which he had observed in reference to the auriferous alluvions in the Andes, Southern Alleghanies, and in the mountains of Brazil 49. Mountain chains running in the same direction are of similar construction, as in the case of the mountains of Norway, France, Corsica, Russia, New Mexico, Southern Africa, and India, running from N. to S. The principal chain of the Alps, the Balkan, Taurus, Himalaya; the chain of Central Africa, and the Coast chain of New Granada, running from E. to W.; also, the principal chains running from N. E. to S. W., N. N. E. to S. S. W., N. N. W. to S. S. E. 50. One side of a mountain is usually more precipitous than the other, from which result two slopes, unequal in length and inclination, extending to the shores of the continent. Consequently, the line of highest elevation of the continent is not placed in the centre, but on one side; and the common law of relief is, that all the long slopes descend towards the Atlantic and Frozen oceans; all the short and rapid slopes are directed towards the Pacific and Indian oceans. (a) Magnesian Marble. (b) Slate. c) Lime. (d) A variety of Lava. (e) Basalt, or Ringing Stone. (f) Gold. (g) Platina PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 11 51. The elevation of several remarkable localities, with some of the highest altitudes reached by man, is stated in the following list: IXET. Culminating point of the globe, Kunchinginga, 28,176 " " " American Continent, Novada Lorata, Bolivia, - - 25,250 Ascent of Gay Lassac in a balloon, at Paris, in 1804, --- 22.900 " " Charles Green,. 26,000 Highest flight of the Condor of the Andes,......21,000 c point reached by Humboldt, on Chimborazo, in 1820, -. 19,500 " Pass of the Andes, in Bolivia, -... 16,000 snow line of the Himalaya,. 16,500 "," " " Andes, - -. 15,800 Manasa Lake, in Thibet,....... 15,000 Lake Titicaca, Peru, South America, -.. 13,000 Thick woods of pines and birch trees, of large size, in Himalaya, - - - 14,000 Poplars found by Gerard, in the Himalaya, 4 feet in diameter,.- -. 12,000 Highest habitation of man in the old world, table-land of Thibet,.. 13,600 " inhabited spot on the Andes, farm of Antisana, - -. 13,435 Height of the great square of the City of Potosi, - - - -13,314 Pass of St. Maria house, highest permanent habitation of Europe, 9,27, Riobamba Pass, Andes, - -... -. 10,800 Highest growth of Peruvian Bark, -- 9,590 Gieatest height of the Peach, Apricot, and Walnut, growing luxuriantly in the Himalaya, 9,000 Highest carriage-road of Europe, across Mont Stelvio, Alps, - - - 8,850 Tab)le-lands of Quito, - - - - -8,000 Culminating point of Great Britain, Ben Nevis, Inverness-shire, -..4 4,368 Longwood House, residence of Bonaparte, St. Helena, - - - - 2,000 Rock of Gibraltar. - -... 1,439 52. Plateaux, or Table, Lands.-An extensive mass of elevated land, with comparatively level sites, comes under the denomination of Plateaux, or Table Lands. It may have various undulations of hill and vale, be traversed by mountain ridges, and serve as a platform for lofty peaks; but its prevailing character is that of a highly raised region, on which there is a considerable area of plain surface, the whole presenting either gradual slopes or abrupt acclivities, and sometimes terrace-shaped sides to the adjoining low-lands. (See Map of Vertical Dimensions.) 53. Distribution. The Old World is the world of table lands. There they are the most extensive, and the most elevated. In Central Asia, the extent of these elevated regions, with the mountains resting upon them, is more than 2,400 miles long, by 1,500 miles broad, with an elevation of from 5,000 to 14,000 feet. Western Asia is nothing but a plateau from 3,000 to 6,000 feet in height. Africa, south of the Plain of Sahara, seems to be only an enormous pile of uplifted lands. They form two-thirds of the continent. In Europe, they are of small extent, and of moderate elevation. 54. In the New World, the plateaux, with their mountain crests, form only one-third of the area of the continent. 55. The principal plateaux, with their comparitive mean heights, are as follows: PLATEAUX O FEET. PLATEAUXOF FEET. Spain, - 2,240 South Africa, 6,400 Mysore, -- - 2,944 Mexico,..... 7,475 Persia, 4.000 Santa Fe de Bogota, - - 8,700 Gobi, - --- 4,000 Quito, -- - 9,536 Popayon,.-.. 5,760 Bolivia, (Lake Titicaca, - - - 13,000 Abyssinia, - 6,110 Part of the plateau region of Central Asia, not included in the preceding table, is more extenmive, and exceeds the elevation of the loftiest Andean table-lands. But the country at present has been but partially explored, owing to natural difficulties and the jealousy of Oriental governments respecting the intrusion of strangers. 56. Plains.-Plains are discriminated from table-lands by being very little elevated above the sea, in some instances even descending below it. 12 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. To popular apprehension, the term suggests the idea of a perfectly horizontal surface; but geographically, it is applied to an extent of country generally level, compared with mountain districts; however the superficies may gently wave, or prominently undulate, be studded with low hilis, traversed by valleys, or intersected with deep ravines. Understood in this sense, plains constitute a great portion of the earth's surf;:ce, and are the sites of its highest culture, greatest cities, and most numerous population. In the Old World, they constitute (ee-third of the whole area of the continent. 57. The northern portion of Europe and Asia is one vast and almost bcundless plain. From the shores of Holland, through Germany, Russia, and Siberia, the traveler may pass from the Atlantic to the Pacific, a distance of more than 6,000 miles, without encountering an eminence of more than a few hundred feet in height. In Africa, the plains of Sahara are 2,500 miles in length, by 1,000 in breadth. 58. The plains of the New World form two-thirds of its surface. From the Frozen Ocean to the Gulf of Mexico, a distance of nearly 2,400 miles, we pass only insignificant heights. From the llanos of the Orinoco to the banks of "the La Plata, we traverse more than 3,000 miles of low plains, with the slight interruption of the more elevated regions of Brazil. These are prolonged even to the pampas of Patagonia, 600 miles further. 59. Plains, while possessing certain features in common, have characteristic peculiarities; with a view to illustrate their differences of natural condition, they may be considered under their respective local denominations, as lands, heaths, puszta, steppes, deserts, llanos, selvas, pampasg savannahs or prairies, barrens and pine barrens. 60. Distinctive Characters. The heaths'of North Germany, Lower Silesia, Hanover, and Jutland, are sandy tracts, sometimes entirely naked, but generally covered with pine woods, or coated over with " Erica Vulgdris," which gives them the name of heaths. Fertile districts, swamps, and stagnant pools intermingle among them. 61. The landes of France occur between the Gironde and Pyrenees. They are vast sandy downs and levels, either wholly barren, or clothed with heath or pines, interspersed with fens and marshes, and at distant intervals, with meadows and cultivated fields. 62. The great plains of the Middle Danube, occupying the interior of former Hungary, locally called puszta, consist of tracts of rich black loam, with districts of deep sand, susceptible of cultivation; but for many miles, not a tree, shrub, stone, or living thing is to be seen, the monotony of the scene being alone varied by the sand-hillocks shifting with the wind. 63. The Russian term steppe, implies dry, parched. The word is but partially applicable to the districts it denotes. The steppes have no uniform character. Some are richly cultivated, others consist of barren sands; some are studded with low saline plants, others with luxurious plants, intermingled with woods and pasture lands. 64. Deserts.-Tracts of bare sand, gravel, rocky slabs, flints, and siliceous stones, form deserts, which are condemned to eternal sterility. There are many instances of them in the New World.'In the Old World they form nearly a continuous zone, stretching from the Atlantic, through the north of Africa, and Central Asia, towards the Pacific. In them depressions of varying extent occur, called oases, where there are wells and springs, groves of date trees, ferns and grasses. 65. Llanos.-The plains of Venezuela and New Grenada, chiefly on the left of the Orinoco, are called llanos, or level fields. Often in a space of 270 square miles, the surface does not vary a single foot. They are studded here and there with solitary palms, and undergo remarkable PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 13 changes in appearance. In the wet season, from April to the end of October, the tropical rains pour down in torrents, and hundreds of square miles of the llanos are inundated by the floods of the rivers. The water is sometimes 12 feet deep in the hollows, in which so many horses and other animals perish, that the ground smells of musk, an odor peculiar to South American quadrupeds. When the waters subside, these plains, manured by the sediment, are soon covered with the most luxuriant vegetation. Sometimes, (as the Natives re\ate,) at the commencement of the rainy season, the moistened clay is seen to blister and rise slowly into a mound; then, with a violent noise like the outbreak of a small volcano; the heaped-up earth is cast high into the air. The beholder, acquainted with thle me;aning of this spectacle, flies from it for his life, for he knows there will Issue forth a gigantic snake or crocodile, awakened from a torpid state by the first fall of rain. 66. When the dry weather returns, the reptiles hibernate beneath the surface; the grass. is burnt to powder; the air is filled with dust raised by currents occasioned by difference of temperature even where there is no wind. If, by accident, a spark of fire falls on the scorched plains, a conflagration spreads from river to river, destroying every animal, and leaves the clayey soil sterile for years, till vicissitudes of weather crumble the brick-like surface into earth. 67. Selvas, (Forests.)-The plains of the Amazon form another division of the South American low-lands. They are estimated to comprise upwards of 2,000,000 of square miles, of which nearly one-half is woodland, the rest being occupied by clear grassy spaces, lagoons, and marsh lands. 68. Pampas.-This Indian term, signifying flats, designates the third great level region of South America, extending about 1,800 miles south from the selvas, and from the Atlantic to the Andes. It consists of treeless plains, which are, in some instances, sandy or saline wastes, but mostly beds of alluvium, covered with a strong growth of tall grass, lucerne, thistles, and gaudy flowers, presenting also vast lagoons and swamps. 69. Savannahs or Prairies, Barrens, and Pine Barrens.The central part of North America, from the Gulf of Mexico to the Arctic Ocean, may be called a continuous plain, estimated to contain 2,430,000 square miles. In the southern part of this tract, on both sides of the Mississippi, but principally on the west, the prairies occur, apparently boundless plains, of which three kinds are noticed: 1. Bushy prairies, where there are springs, grass, small shrubs, grape vines, and an infinite variety of flowers. 2. Dry prairies, the most common, having neither wood nor water, and no vegetation but grass, weeds, and flowers-called also rolling prairies, from their wavy surface. 3. Moist and well-watered prairies, abounding in pools without issue, left by the floodings of the rainy season, producing tall rank grass. 70. The barrens, near the Alleghanies and Rocky Mountains, resemble the prairies in being grassy and treeless, but are more elevated and dry. 71. The pine barrens, situated on the south-west of the United States, and also in the interior, are monotonous tracts of sand covered with gigan — tic pine trees. 72. Volcanic Phenomena.-The term volcano, derived from Vulcanus, the name which the Romans gave to their imaginary god of fire, denotes a peculiar class of mountains emitting from their summits or sides 14 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. molten mineral masses, with columns of flame, smoke, and ashes. They are aptly styled in various languages, burning mountains. A conical figure, with a cauldron-like hollow at the summit, denominated the crater, is their general physiognomy. Most volcanoes not extinct emit smoke, and jets of aqueous vapor at all times; but the great eruptions occur at distant and irregular intervals. They differ in detail, but have a general resemblance. 73. If the mountain rises above the line of perpetual snow, the approach of a crisis is indicated by its sudden melting, which occasions destructive torrents. Subterraneous sounds are heard at first like a low prolonged moaning, gradually changed into a succession of loud detonations. Vibrations of the soil are felt, sometimes for several weeks beforehand; and as the interior war of elements is about to manifest its violence, the smoke of the hidden furnace rises in a vast, dense, black column from the crater. Unable because of its weight to ascend beyond a certain height in the atmosphere, the summit of the smoky column falls down upon itself, assuming the appearance of a gigantic pine tree. Flashes of red flame, and showers of red hot stones, like the sparks of fire-works, attended by reports as of a great train of artillery, mark the accumulated intensity of the forces at work, till the climax arrives when mineral masses, reduced to complete fluidity, escape in fiery, majestic, and slow winding currents from the interior. 74. A discharge of ashes from the crater, which, borne by the air, falls upon a large area of the surrounding country, commonly terminates a grand eruption. The amount of lava ejected in a single case of volcanic excitement is sometimes enormous. In 1783, during an eruption of Skuptaa Y6kul in Iceland, the lava flowed in two nearly opposite ttreains, 50 miles in one direction and 40 miles in the other, with respective breadths of 15 and 7 miles, with an average depth of 100 feet. 75. Distinctive Characters. Volcanic mountains are either continuously active, intermittent, or extinct. The frequency of eruptions, with their peculiar characteristics, appears to be related to their height. Stromboli, a mountain only 2,175 feet high, has been uninterruptedly active from the dawn of authentic history. The lofty cones of Etna, 10,874 feet, Teneriffe, 12,182, Tunguragua, 16,579, and Cotopaxi, 18,877, have, on the contrary, varying intervals of rest, in some instances amounting to centuries. 76. Among the specialties of volcanic action, may be enumerated eruptions of mud, containing dead fishes and water. On the western peninsula of the Caspian, the soil exhales an inflammable gas, which when ignited represents a burning field, called the fires of Bakau. 77. The Fire Springs (Ho-tsing ) of China, are artificial borings for the purpose of raising water, which is strongly impregnated with salt and nitre, and yields an inflammable gas. When a torch is applied to the opening of these wells, a great stream of fire rises to the height of 20 or 30 feet. 78. The Fire Hills (Ho-chan ) exhibit a light during the night, like that of the aurora. It is supposed to be a volcanic flame proceeding from a deep ravine, which the Chinese have not visited. One of the most awful and sublime volcanoes is that of Kirauea in one of the Sandwich islands. It was seen in a state of high activity in 1834 by Mr. Douglas. He describes it as a deep sunken pit, occupying five square miles, covered with masses of lava which had been in a state of recent fusion. In the midst of these were two lakes of liquid lava; in both there was a vast cauldron in furious ebullition, occasionally spouting to the height of fronm 20 to 70 feet, whence streams of lava, hurrying along in fiery waves, were finally precipitated down an ignited arch, where the force of the lava was partly arrested by the escape of gases, w rich threw back PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 15 huge blocks, and literally spun them into threads of glass, which were carried off by the wind skes ne refuse of a flax-mill. He says the noise could hardly be described, that kll the stsem engines in the world would be a whisper to it. 79. Geysers.-Hot Springs, common to the neighborhood of volcanoes, occur in a remarkable group of fifty or more, in Iceland, about 36 miles from Hecla. The most important of these is the Great Geyser, or Strokr. As is a circular mound of silicious deposits, with a basin at the summit, 60 feet in diameter, and six 61 seven deep. At the bottom of the basin, there is a well 10 feet wide at the mouth, but gradually narrowing to seven or eight, with a perpendicular descent of 70 feet. The grand eruptions are often after intervals of a day or more. Hollow rumbling sounds announce their approach and warn the spectator to retire to a safe distance. The water in the basin boils furiously, and is projected into the air in a succession of jets, accompanied with immense volumes of steam. The power of the Geyser varies, and also the height of the aqueous column. FIG. 2. - 80. The cause of this singular phenomena is thus explained by Mr. Lyell. lie supposes an interior cavity, as at A D, (See Fig. 2,) receiving water fiom the surface by the fissures of F, F, while steam, at an exceedingly high temperature, rises upwards by the fissures at C. The condensed steam raises the temperature of. the water in the lower part of the cavity. The upper part becomes filled with steam under high pressure, which forces the water up the funnel E B, and projects it with more or less violence at the mouth. 81. Causes. Of all the postulates for a general theory of volcanoes, the simplest and best founded, (supported by the fact that the temperature of the earth increases with the depth in every parallel of latitude, and by evidence of the great extent of rock once fused beneath the surface,) is the igneous fluidity of the interior of our planet-a vast sea of melted rock underlaying the cooled and solidified crust, which may remain at rest for ages beneath enormous areas, but is liable to be locally excited and uplifted by the force of compressed power. 82. Distribution. Volcanoes may be characteristically distributed into two great classes or systems, Central and Linear. 16 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 83. A central system consists of several vents grouped around a principal cone, which serves as a common point of eruption, as those of the isles of Palma, Lancerote, and Teneriffe; or they are arranged in an expanded area, as in Iceland. 84. A linear system consists of several vents extending in one direction, at no great distance from each other, apparently the apertures of the same great longitudinal fissure, as the volcanoes of America and the Asiatic isles. 85. Volcanoes are not generally distributed over the several continents; but if a line be drawn, commencing at Cape Horn, along the western coasts of North and South America to the Aleutian isles, thence to Kamschatka, tad along the eastern and southern coast of Asia through India and the southern part of Europe, thence to Iceland, Greenland, and the northern coast of America, it will mark the location of the general linear systems of continental volcanoes. 86. They seem to represent the globe as being rent like an irregular crack in a globular vessel. 87. The whole number of known volcanoes amounts to 424, of which 290 are active, and of these, 200 belong to the shores of the Pacific Ocean. 88. Fissures and Fiords, Caves or Caverns, Tunnels.Deep narrow fissures, yawning chasms, and great chambered cavities, common in mountain districts, are either the results of that prodigious internal expansive force, that has shaped the external covering of the globe, or of the extensive changes produced by the erosive action of air and water, operating through a series of ages. The great chasm at Iconozo, South America, is crossed by a natural arch, 47% feet in length, 9 in breadth, and 318 above the stream Seneca Paz, which passes through it. Sixty- our feet below this bridge there is another, composed of dislodged masses of rock, which have so fallen as to support each other. The dark abyss below is haunted by nocturnal birds, whose doleful cries increase the frightfulness of the scene. A similar instance is that of the bridge over Cedar Creek in Virginia, 210 feet above the water. 89. The coasts of Norway, Iceland, Greenland, and Patagonia, are rent or cracked by enormous fiords, sometimes penetrating far into the interior, and splitting into numerous branches. On the west coast of Greenland, these deep inlets of the sea, now sparkling in sunshine, now shaded in gloom, are hemmed in by walls of rock often 2,000 feet high; these often terminate in glaciers, which are soietimes forced on by the pressure of the upper ice-plains, till they fill the ird, and even project far into the sea like bold headlands. When undermined by the surge, huge masses of ice fall from them, with a crash like thunder, making the sea boil. These icebergs, carried by the currents, are stranded on the Arctic coast, or drawn by currents into lower latitudes. 90. Caverns are perforations open to the daylight at one extremity, with lateral entrances on the sides of the mountain. Sometimes these openings extend entirely through the mountain mass, forming natural shafts and tunnels so straight as to allow the passage of the light through them. 91. True caverns are not found in the older rocks, as granite, gneiss, and slate; but vertical fissures of unknown depth are not uncommon. Grand examples of cavern structure are found in volcanic masses-in the new red sandstone and mountain limestone systems. Among the most remarkable, are Surtsheller in Iceland, Fingals in the Island of Staffa, the Grotto of Antiparos in the Greek Archipelago, Adelsberg in Trieste, Cacahuamilpa in Mexico. Weyer's Cave in Virginia, and the Mammoth Cave of Kentucky. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY., 17 92. Peculiarities. Some caves are perfect summer ice-houses, while in the winter the temperature of the cave is mild, the ice melting. Some caves, situated in volcanic regions, exhale hot sulphurous vapors, as the Grotto del Cano near Naples. From the mouth of some caves, strong currents of air rush forth, sometimes hot, and sometimes exceedingly cold. An instance of this kind occurs in the Alleghany Mountains. The tempests that sometimes rush forth from the great cave of Ouybe in Central Asia, are so violent as to carry off every thing on the road. These are said to be warm in winter, and so dangerous, that the caravans often stop for a whole week, t/l the tempest has subsided. Some caverns contain the remains of animals and birds in enormous quantities; others afford a habitat for nocturnal animals and birds, which issue forth in almost countless numbers on the approach of evening twilight. 93. Many limestone caverns are remarkable for their calcareous formations, which assume a variety of wild, fantastic and beautiful shapes. These are caused by the percolation of water containing carbonate of lime, held in solution by carbonic acid, which becoming disengaged, the lime is deposited. The formations depending from the roof are called Stalactites; those formed on the floors, from the larger drops before deposition has taken place, are termed Stalagmites-when they approach each other and form a junction they exhibit a series of columns. 94. Coralline Formations.-It is a singular circumstance, arising: from the instability of the crust of the earth, that all the smaller tropical pelasgic islands in the Pacific and Indian oceans are either volcanic or coralline, except New Caledonia and the Seychelles. And it is still more singular that in most cases where there are volcanoes, the land is rising by slow degrees above the ocean; whereas, those vast spaces, studded with. coral islands or atolls, are actually sinking below it, and have been for ages. All coral formations are the work of various species of animals or insects. 95. These formations are of four different kinds, namely, lagoon islands. or atolls, encircling reefs, barrier reefs, and coral reefs. They are all nearly confined to the tropical regions-the atolls, to the Pacific and Indian oceans alone. 96..Jn Atoll, or Lagoon island, consists of a chaplet or ring of coral,, enclosing a lagoon or portion of the ocean in its centre. The average breadth of the ring above the surface of the sea is about a quarter of a mile,. oftener less, and it seldom rises higher than 12 feet above the waves.. Hence they are not discernible, even at a small distance, unless whero covered with cocoa-nut or palm trees, which is often the case. 97. Encircling Reefs differ in no respect from atolls, except that tl,/ have one or more islands in their lagoon. First conceive an island, surrounded with still water, with an outer wall or barrier to protect it against: the lashing surges of the ocean. In this wall are gaps or openings, through which ships may enter and find a perfect harbor. These islands having a rich soil, a mild climate, with their quiet lagoons, surrounded by their cora1l fortresses, may be classed among the most beautiful works of nature. 98. Such is the island of Otaheite, (Tahiti) of the Society Group. 3' 18 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 99. Barrier Reefs are of precisely the same structure as the preceding classes, differing only in their position in regard to the land. The grandest coral formation known is the great barrier reef off the north-east coast of Australia. It is 1000 miles long by 200 wide, with an average distance of 25 miles from the shore. 100. Coral Reefs are distinct from all the foregoing; they are merely fringes of coral along the shore. Coral insects cannot exist at a greater depth than 25 or 30 fathoms, and die immediately when left dry. Yet the coral wall is often elevated high above the surface of the waters, and descends precipitously to unfathomable depths, affording incontestible evidence of the elevation and subsidence of certain portions of the solid crust of the globe.. FIG. 3.-AVALANCIHE. 101. Earthquakes.- Earthquakes and volcanic eruptions are undoubtedly phases of the same phenomena. No phenomena are so terrible in their effects, or so fatal to human life as earthquakes. The volcano gives timely notice of its eruption, and confines its ravages to a limited area., PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 19 But the earthquake commences without the slightest warning, and a vast extent of country is involved in disaster by its oscillations. 102. The vibratory movements of earthquakes have been known to extend 4,000 miles in length. 103. The movements of the ground during an earthquake are described as consisting of tremulous, vertical, horizontal, or rotary vibrations, rapidly succeeding each other, sometimes occurring singly, or taking place together. 104. Earthquakes cause the permanent displacement of large areas of land by elevation or subsidence, the opening of extensive fissures, great oceanic waves, and a train of varying incidents dependent upon situations and strength of concussion. 105. Land slips, or Avalanches.-The dislodgments of mountain masses, which fall in a heap of ruins into the subjacent valleys, or a simple slide to a lower level without entire derangement, are not uncommon with certain formations of a loose and solvent texture. Though the work of a few moments as to the actual catastrophe, the predisposing process for the event extends through a series of ages. It is generally due to the solvent power of water percolating by rents and fissures to a stratum of soft sandstone, limestone, or conglomerate, the bases of other strata, and gradually carrying away its material. (See Fig. 3.) In 1248, a part of Mount Grenier, in Savoy, fell, burying five parishes, covering an extent of nine square leagues with its ruins. In 1806, the Vale of Goldau. in the Canton of Zug, with 97 houses and 484 persons, was overwhelmed by the fall of the Rossberg, (Mount Ruffi.) In 1826, after violent rain, following a dry season, an extensive land slip occurred in the White Mountains of New Hampshire. HYDROGRAPHY. 106. Hydrography is a description of the seas, lakes, rivers, and springs: (the waters) of the earth. 107. Water is one of the most important and abundant substances in nature, very widely diffused, and found in each of the three forms which bodies are capable of assuming-vaporous in the atmosphere, solid in ice and snow, and liquid in seas, lakes, and rivers. It is a compound of two gases, oxygen and hydrogen, in the proportion of eight parts of the former to one of the latter. It seldom occurs in a state of purity, but is variously impregnated with ingredients derived from the atmosphere, the strata of the earth in contact with it, and from decomposed and living animal and vegetable substances. When pure, it is tasteless and inodorous. 108. Rain water is the purest found in nature, yet it contains carbonio acid, and air absorbed from the atmosphere, and sometimes minute quantities of iron, nickel, and manganese. 109. Large springs are commonly purer than small ones. Those of granite and siliceous countries are purer than those of limestone, carboniferous, and alluvial countries. 110. The amount of fresh water, compared with the whole aqueous portion of the earth, is quite insignificant. 111. The universal ocean is salt, varying in different localities 20 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 112. From a careful analysis of the water of the English channel by Dr. Schurtzer, the following results were obtained: Water, -.9.6 964.74372 grains. Chloride of sodium, common salt,... 27.05948 " ";' potassium,.7-. 0.76552 s" ~"' magnesium, ~- - - 3.66658 " Bromide of magnesium).. 0.02929 " Sulphate of magnesia,.-.- 2.29578 " " lime....- 0.40662' Carbonate of lime,. o... 0.03301 " 1000.00000 113. The origin of the saline property of oceanic water is a physical question, involved in obscurity. The ocean is supposed to have acquired its saline principle, when the globe was in the act of subsiding from a gaseous state. 114. Salt springs are common, those of pure brine are rare. The salt springs of Cheshire, in England, and of New York, are especially rich. 115. Springs of water containing sulphates and carbonates of lime, magnesia and soda, and the chlorides of calcium, manganese and sodium, are common. 116. Physical Characters of Water.-Water appears at the surface of the earth at every temperature, from the freezing to the boiling point. 117. The mean temperature of ordinary springs is lower than the surrounding atmosphere, if the water is derived from high-lying levels, as is commonly the case; but if it has penetrated deep into the earth, it acquires a temperature which increases with the depth. Thermal and hot springs are from great depths. 118. The mean temperature of the ocean at the surface diminishes from within the tropics as the latitude increases, (more rapidly in the southern than in the northern hemisphere,) till near the poles it renders the sea ice-bound. 119. The oceanic warmth equator does not correspond with the terrestrial equator, but for the most part runs on the north of it, the ocean in the northern hemisphere being warmer than in the southern. At one point in the Gulf of Mexico, the greatest heat is at 280 N. lat., or about 1,500 miles north of the line. (See map, where the temperature of the ocean is marked in degrees at numerous points, where it has been ascertained.) 120. The waters of the globe exhibit various hues, which depend upon a variety of circumstances. 121. The ocean absorbs all the prismatic colors, except that of ultramarine, which is reflected in every direction. This is the true color, in general, when seen apart from atmospheric influence, modified by the depth; but every gleam of sunshine, passing cloud, winds, shoals and sand-banks, affect its tints..,22. Particular parts of the ocean show peculiar colors-the sea is white in the Gulf of Guinea, and black amid the Maldive Islands. Variously purple, red, and rose-colored waters occur in the eastern parts of the Mediterranean, in the Vermilion Sea off California, in the Red Sea, and in tracts along the coasts of Chili, Brazil, and Australia. Green water appears m PHYSICAL GEOGRAPIr. 21 the Persian Gulf, off the Arabian coast, and also in connection with the deepest blue in the Arctic ocean. 123. These appearances are permanent, and so distinct, that ships have been seen partly in blue and partly in green water at the same time. 124. These tints are occasioned by differently colored animalcules, which occur in countless myriads, furnishing sustenance to many of the larger inhabitants of the sea. 125. The phosphorescence of the ocean, as manifested by the bright scintillations of its waves and the bright green sparks in the wake of a ship, is also caused by minute organic beings, which are phosphorescent while alive. 126. Springs.-The rains and melted snows are partly drained from the surface of high grounds into rills and streams, or returned again to the atmosphere by evaporation, or are devoted to the purposes of animal and vegetable life. But a large portion is received into the soil by minute absorption, or percolates through cracks and fissures in the rocks, pursuing a downward course, till arrested by clays and impermeable strata, where the water accumulates, and is forced by hydrostatic pressure to find its way to the surface, occasioning the phenomena of natural springs. 127. Distinctive Characters. Some springs are perennial or constant, discharging a great volume of water, and show no diminution during seasons of drought; others are intermittent, depending upon the character of the season. Reciprocating springs, or those which ebb and flow, are rare. The celebrated ebbing and flowing Well of the Peak, and the farfamed Pool of Siloam, are instances. 128. The temperature of spring water varies from that of ice-water to the boiling point. 129. Springs of fresh water sometimes issue from the bed of the ocean. A powerful jet of this kind occurs in the Gulf of Spezzia, a branch of the Gulf of Genoa. In the Bay of Xagua, on the south-east coast of Cuba, similar springs gush up with such force as to endanger small canoes, while vessels sometimes take in water from them; and the lamertine, or fresh water cetacea, abound in the vicinity. There are other instances. 130. Causes. There must be undoubtedly deep subterranean reservoirs, or rivers, receiving their fresh water from the continents, and making their exit at the bed of the ocean. 131. Rivers.-Rivers have had a greater influence on the location and fortunes of the human race, than almost any other physical cause; and since their velocity has been overcome by steam navigation, they have become the highways of the nations. 132. They frequently rise in lakes, which they unite with the sea; in,ther instances, they spring from small elevations in the plains, from peren. nial sources in the mountains, alpine lakes, melted snow, and glaciers; but the everlasting store-houses of the mightiest floods are from the ice-clad mountains of table-lands. Rivers are constantly increased by tributaries, in descending the mountains and traversing the plains, till at last they flow into the ocean, their ultimate destinatirn and remote origin. " All 22 PPHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. the rivers run into the sea, and yet the sea is not full," because it gives in evaporation an equivalent for what it receives. 133. The hydrographical region of a principal river, or its basin, includes, besides thb bed actually occupied by the water, the whole of the declivities from which tributaries descend, or the entire country drained, which is defined by an imaginary line passing through the sources of its feeders. Each affluent, and each rill flowing into it, has a basin peculiar to itself, defined in the same manner, their united areas constituting the basin of the grand stream. 134. The following list contains all the river basins with an area of 300,000 square miles and upwards: BASIN OF THE RIVER. AREA IN SQUARE MILES Amazon, -.5.- 2,275,000 Nile, - - - - 1,425,000 Mississippi,.. 1,333,000 La Plata,. - 1,242,000 Emptying into the Atlantic Niger,.... 800,000 Ocean, - - - St. Lawrence,.... 526,000 Saskatchawan,...... 478,000 Tocantins, - - - 381,000 Orinoco, -. -. - 360,000 Gariep,.. — -. 360000 Danube,... - - 311,000... Obi, - ~.. 1,250,000 Emptying into the Arctic eneee... 1,00,000 Yenesei, -...1,040,000 Ocean, Lena,.-... 800,000 JMackenzie, - 590,000 Emptying into the Pacific Amour, -800,000 Ocean, - - Yang tse Kiang, - - - 750,000 Hoang-ho,- - - - - - 710,000 Emptying into the Indian) Burrampooter,- - - - 480,000 Ocean, - - - Ganes, 416,000 Indus, - - -- 410,000 The Antarctic Ocean receives no rivers. 135. The ridge or country which divides one basin from another is called the water-parting, the drainage from thence being in different directions. Each slope forms a water-shed. 136. There are instances of river basins so running into each other, as for water communication to subsist naturally between two primary streams. The most remarkable of this kind, long deemed impossible by physical geographers, is the bifurcation of the Orinoco. In the plain of Esmeralda, the Cassiqueare, a branch of the Orinoco, joins the Rio Negro, an important affluent of the Amazon, thus connecting two primary streams. The Cassiqtieare is 100 yards wide where it leaves the Orinoco, and 550 where it falls into the Rio Negro after a course of 180 miles. In 1800, Humboldt ascertained this fact by passing along the natural canal from one river to the other. 137. A descent of one foot in 200 in the bed of a river renders it unnavigable; a greater inclination produces a rapid-still greater, approaching the perpendicular, a cataract. 138. Distinctive Characters. Rivers depend for their magnitude upon various elements-the length of their course, the extent of their basins, the rain-producing character of the climate, and their connection with mountains covered with eternal snow. The Mississippi, following the Missouri branch, has the longest course of any river on the globe; but the Amazon stands at the head of rivers, draining by far the largest area of country, und rolling the greatest volume of water to the ocean. 139. The effect of the junction of two great rivers is not always an expansion of surface, but sometimes a contraction, the depth of the channel being increased, and the velocity of the current. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 23 The Mississippi is more than a mile, and the Missouri half a mile wide at their confluence; hut from thence to the mouth of the Ohio, the medium width of their united waters is only threefouiths of a mile. 140. The Nile is remarkable for not receiving a single brook between its junction with the Tecazza and the Mediterranean, a distance of 1500 miles: 141. Some rivers temporarily disappear in swamps, sands, and underground channels, having in many instances forced their way through obstructing rocks The Rhone and Guadiana are instances. 142. Some rivers traversing alluvial plains carry down immense quantities of solid matter, which form deltas at their mouths. The Ganges, Nile, Mississippi, and others have large deltas. 143. Lakes and Lake Systems. —Their Distribution. The inland waters, denominated lakes, are the largest and most numero in the higher latitudes of the northern hemisphere. 144. A zone, bounded by the parallels 400 and 60~ N. lat., includes the location of the principal lake systems. 145. Small expanses occupy the highest mountain passes; larger sheets are formed on the lower table-lands; but the most extensive are on the great lowlands. ELEVATION OF SOME OF THE PRINCIPAL LAKES. Above the sea-level. Below the sea-level. FEET. FEET. Sir i Rul, Asia,. -. 15,000 Caspian Sea,.. 84 Titicaca, South America, - 12,795 Lake of Tiberias, - 600 Tazana, Africa, - 6,110 Dead Sea, - - 1300 Lake of Geneva,... 1,229 146. The principal lakes may be arranged in four great systems. Two in the Old World, and two in the New. The latter are the largest and most important. 147. A system of lakes, commencing in Great Britain, extends through Germany along the coast of the Baltic, through Finland, North Russia, North Siberia, to Behring Strait. 148. A second system includes the lakes of the Pyrenees, Alps, Appenines of Bavaria, the Austrian empire, and Western and Central Asia. 149. A third system comprises the great Canadian masses of fresh water. 150. A fourth system, north-west of the former, extends from the Lake of the Woods to the icy shores of the Arctic Ocean. 151. Distinctive Characters. Another classification may be made of lakes founded upon their physical differences. First, some have no apparent affluents or outlets. They commonly occupy hollows, extinct volcanic craters, and depend upon subaqueous springs to supply the waste occasioned by evaporation. A second class have outlets, but no apparent affluents, deriving their supplies from subterranean sources. A third class have both affluents and outlets-the common, arrangement. A fourth class receive affluents, but have no outlets; the Caspian Sea, Lake Aral, and the Dead Sea are instances. 152. Some lakes exhibit the phenomena of floating islands,,anomalous amdulations, and other striking peculiarities. 24 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 153. The Lake Zurich is distinguished by the annual appearance of a very minute vegetation upon its surface, exhibiting what is called the flowering of the waters. 154. The Seiches of Lake Geneva consist of a sudden rise in the form of a tidal wave, probably due to a local and transient change of atmospheric pressure. 155. A lake of unknown depth near Boleslau in Bohemia, in winter, is so disturbed by subaqueous winds, that masses of ice are said to be actually thrown up to some height from its surface. 156. The attractive power of mud at the bottom of some of the North American lakes was declared to be so strong, by Capt. Back and others, that in the shallows, boats could scarcely be urged on at all. 157.' One of the bays of Lake Huron seems to be the focus of peculiar electrical phenomena, for whenever traversed, peals of thunder are said to be heard. 158. The Ocean.-The waters which continuously environ the continental and island masses, form a single ocean, but are conveniently divided into several great sections, an arrangement caused by the irregular distribution of the solid and fluid portions of the surface. L.AND HIEMISPHERE. (FIG. 4.) WATER HEMISPHERE UNEQUAL DISTRIBUTION OF LAND AND WATER ON THE SURFACE OF THP GLOBE. If a great circle be drawn through the Coast of Peru and the south of Asla, the surface of the globe will be divided into two hemispheres, the one containing the most extensive land masses, the other being almost entirely covered with water. One side of our globe may be said to be continental, the other oceanic. 159. These sections constitute the Atlantic,'Arctic, Indian, Pacific, and Antarctic oceanic basins. These, in their general character, were described in the article, Physiognomy of the Earth's Surface. Many peculiar and physical characteristics, however, remain to be noticed. 160. The Atlantic ocean is the best known of any, as the highway of the world's commerce, perpetually traversed by hosts of merchant vessels, in which millions of property and thousands of lives are embarked. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 25 161. Its tropical districts exhibit several remarkable phenomena, as the phosphorescence of the sea, the flying-fish chased by the dolphin, successive regions of steady breezes and calms-the-latter interruptedby short pad sudden squalls, and enormous deluges of rain. 162. The South Atlantic has no peculiarities which require notice. A very large portion of the surface of the North Atlantic is occupied by seaweed, (fucus natans,) closely matted together, forming the Grassy Sea, or the Sargasso Sea of the Spanish and Portuguese. This marine vegetation occurs in stripes or banks. Its area is estimated to amount to more than one million square miles. 163. In the spring months, extensive sheets of drift ice and massive icebergs are common in the North Atlantic, floating much nearer the American than the European coast, borne by a current from the Arctic sea, frequently as far south as lat. 400 and 450, being confined to the space between 420 and 500 east long. Deviations from these limits occur, but are very rare. In 1817, many thousand square miles of ice, which for ages had been permanent on the north of Iceland, suddenly broke, from some unknown cause, and drifts occurred in 32~ of east longitude. Again in 1841, the steamer " Great Western" encountered an extensive ice-field between 420 and 430 of latitude, and proceeded along its southern edge from east to west for more than a hundred miles. This was the year in which the ill-fated steamer " President " was lost, most likely surrounded and crushed by the floating ice which came down in peculiar force at that period from the northern regions. 164. The Arctic Ocean being closed to navigation by eternal frosts, its physical characteristics are but partially known. The perilous attempts of those master-spirits of enterprise, Sir John Franklin and others, to explore this ice-enclosed region, have thus far been unsuccessful. 165. The theory of a milder region, an open sea, surrounding the north pole, as recently suggested by Dr. Kane, remains to be substantiated. 166. The Pacific, properly styled the Great Ocean, is chiefly remarkable for its vastness and the number of its islands. 167. The Indian Ocean has no distinctive character independent of phenomena, which belong to the department of meteorology-its hurricanes and monsoons. 168. The Antarctic Ocean presents similar features to the Arctic, but is more completely an icy sea; the drift ice appears to travel farther from the south than from the corresponding pole. 169. Some variations of level are observed between different sections of the universal ocean. 170. The surface of the Red Sea, at certain seasons, is from 24 to 36 feet higher than that of the Mediterranean, arising probably from prevailing winds and currents. 171. The effect of the equatorial current which sweeps across the Atlantic, from the Gulf of Guinea to the Gulf of Mexico, where its farther progress westward is arrested, is to pile up the waters several feet above the level of the ocean. 172. There appears to be a small difference between the level of the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, on the different sides of the Isthmus of Panama. 173. The beds of the oceanic waters exhibit similar inequalities to those which mark the surface of the dry-land-abrupt eminences, gentle slopes, 4 26 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. and deep depressions, the depth of the fluid varying from beyond the reach of the sounding line to the thin stratum that scarcely conceals the sand bank frvm the eye of the navigator. 17 I. Oceanic Movements.-~The ocean is subject to three general movements-waves, tides, and currents, the causes of which are independent. 175. The wave movement is or an inconstant and transitory character, occasioned by winds; that of the tides is regular and periodical, the result of the attractive influence of the moon, modified by that of the sun; while the currents are the effect of various circumstances-permanently Q' alternately flowing-resembling great rivers in the sea. 176. Waves arise from the action of the winds, in contact with the surface of the ocean. Their height or magnitude is in proportion to the intensity and duration of the force exerted. The common saying of waves running mountains high is a popular exaggeration. Forty feet is considered the extreme height of waves, or 20 feet above and below the general level of the ocean. At a comparatively small depth the ocean is tranquil when furious tempests are agitating its surface. The effect of the strongest gale probably does not extend 200 feet below the surface. 177. The tide movement of the ocean is indicated by a great marginal wave or swell which rises and falls generally twice every day on all coasts of the globe, except on those of the Mediterranean Sea where it is sometimes not perceptible. The height to which successive tides rise differs exceedingly in different quarters of the globe, and is everywhere variable. In the open ocean they attain only a few feet; but in confined seas, as in the Bay of Fundy, they sometimes rise 60 or 70 feet. The greatest rise is called the spring-tide and the least the neap-tide. 178. In general, two complete tides occupy an interval of 24 hours, 50 minutes and 28 seconds, corresponding to the time which elapses between two successive passages of the moon to the same meridian. The tide is generally higher in proportion as the moon approaches nearest the earth, or when she is in perigee, and lower when she is most distant from it, or in apogee. 179. Oceanic Currents.-(See Map of the World.) Currents o6 various extent, magnitude and velocity, disturb the tranquillity of the ocean. Some of them depend on permanent, others on ever-varying causes. They are divided into three classes-constant, periodical, and temporary. Constant currents are produced by the combined action of the rotation of the earth, the heat of the sun, and the trade winds. Periodical currents are occasioned by tides, monsoons and other long-continued winds. Temporary currents arise from the tides, melting ice, and storms. 180. Currents of the Atlantic Ocean.-South Atlantic Current. This is a discharge of water from the Indian Ocean, by a current round the Cape, which flows northerly along the coast of Africa nearly as far as the equator. It is much colder than the superincumbent air, and is overhung with mist, occasioned by the condensation of the vapor of the atmosphere. Average breadth, according to Sir James Ross, 60 miles; depth, 1200 feet; velocity, 24 miles per day. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 27 181. Equatorial Current.-This is so called from its course lying under or near the line. It is a continuation of the former, commences at the coast of Congo, flows north-west to the equator, which it reaches about the meridian of Greenwich. It then proceeds across the whole ocean, increasing in extent and velocity till off Cape St. Augustine, South America, it divides into two branches. This is the most powerful and extensive of all the Atlantic currents, and by its nature and position interferes the most of any with navigation, forming a wide and complete bar across the narrow part of the ocean between the shores of Guinea and Brazil. Velocity between the coast of Congo and the Island of Annabon, from 14 to 30 miles per day; in its progress to Cape Palmas, from 52 to 63 miles; between 100 and 16" W. long., from 44 to 80 miles, the strongest part of the stream. Temperature-at least 30 colder than the ocean on each side, because its waters come from a colder region. 182. About the middle of the ocean, in WV. long. 230, the equatorial current sends off a large stream, called from its direction the north-west branch. It may be traced as far north as lat. 280, and sometimes as far as 300. This branch favors thereturn of vessels from the southern hemisphere to Europe. Velocity-about 20 to 24 miles per day up to lat. 100. Off Cape Augustine, where the equatorial current divides, a branch to the south forms the Brazil current, running at the distance of from 200 to 250 miles from the shore, and extending to the out-fall of the La Plata ~iver, sometimes much farther. Velocity-off Rio Janeiro, 30 miles per day; near the La Plata, from 15 to 20 miles. 183. Guiana Current,-the main stream of the equatorial current, continued along the coast of Guiana to the Caribbean Sea, entering it between the islands of Trinidad and Martinique. Velocity varies from 10 to 40 miles per day; it has been found about 90 miles in the strongest part; it decreases towards the coasts. 184. Caribbean Current,-the Guiana current continued through the Caribbean Sea, flowing with a gentle motion through the channel of Yucatan, into the Gulf of Mexico. 185. Current of the Gulf of.exico. The slight flow received from the Caribbean Sea divides into two branches-one, turning to the right, passes Cuba to the Strait of Florida; the other, turning to the left, makes a complete tour of the Gulf of Vera Cruz and the mouth of the Mississippi. Both branches flow gently. The temperature of the Gulf of Mexico is at least 70 higher than that of the Atlantic in the same parallel. It amounts in general to 89", but has been observed 900, being probably the highest temperature of the ocean over the globe. 186. Gulf Stream. The branch currents of the Gulf of Mexico unite at the Strait of Florida, to form the powerful and celebrated stream which carries off the heated water of the Mexican cauldron, and distributes it at great distances. The stream proceeds along the coast of the United States as far as Cape Hatteras. It then gradually turns eastward, mnntatains that direction as far as the Azores, where it bends south, and loses itself a little south of that group of islands. The length of its course from the Strait of Florida to the Azores is about 3,000 geographical miles; but part of the warm waters of the Gulf Stream find their way to the shores of Europe, as far up as the North Cape, and even to Spitzbergen. Velocity-noted as 28 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. high as 120 miles per day, after passing the Narrows of the Straits; 48 to 60 at 1100 miles from its egress; and 30 or more after a course of nearly 3000 miles. Temperature, after issuing from the Gulf, exceeds 860; after running 1100 miles, 810; after 3,000 miles, 760 to 790; at the Azores, 74o. 187. Hudson's Bay Current flows from the Arctic Ocean to the Gulf Stream, which it joins east of the Great Bank of Newfoundland, the polar ice descending by it into the North Atlantic. Velocity-from 36 to 60 miles per day. Temperature has been observed 43~, which is 17~ below that of the adjacent ocean. It bears the name therefore of the Cold Current. Captain Scoresby counted 500 icebergs setting out upon it at once. The Icelanders receive large quantities of drift-wood by the medium of this current, an important benefaction to them in the absence of natural forests. It is supposed that the great rivers of Northern Asia bring it down from the Siberian woods to the ocean, from whence it is transferred to the shores of Iceland. 188. J'orth.itlantic Drift Current comprises that part of the Atlantic east of the Arctic current, and north of the Gulf Stream. The direction is easterly towards Europe; the flow very weak; but the two following currents originate from it. i 189. J.orth Jdfrican and Guinea Current originate between Cape Clear in Ireland, and Cape Finisterre in Spain. It flows south and southeast to Cape St. Vincent, between which and Cape Cantin, in Morocco; thib whole mass of water, as far as long. 200 west, sets into the Strait of Gibraltar. The west part of the current flows south, and at Cape Blanco it extends only 150 to 180 miles from the land. At the Cape Verde Islands it turns south-east, and flows in contact with, but in an opposite direction to the equatorial current, with which its waters probably mix. 190. Rennell's Current commences near Cape Finisterre, runs along the coast of the Bay of Biscay, then shoots across the mouths of the English and Irish Channels, bends round to the west, and through all the intermediate points till it falls into itself, performing a complete rotation. It bears the name of the late Major James Rennell, who first accurately traced its course, and is the current which so often endangers vessels near the Scilly Islands. Velocity-from 24 to 90 miles per day. 191. Southern Connecting Current arises from the drift current of the south-east trade wind, and flows to the Cape of Good I-ope, where it divides, a branch joining the North Atlantic current and another passing into the Indian Ocean. CURRENTS OF THE INDIAN OCEAN. 192. Bengal Current runs principally along the coast of Coromandel, but depends entirely upon the monsoons for its direction and force. It flows in summer, the time of the south-west monsoon, to the north-east in the opposite direction in winter, when the north-east monsoon prevails. Velocity-the greatest in winter, often 50 miles per day; east of Ceylon, from 30 to 70 miles. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 29 193. Malabar Current flows along the coast of Malabar, from Bombay to Cape Comorin; depends upon the monsoons; runs northerly in winter, and southerly in summer. Velocity in winter, very slight; in summer, from 10 to 30 miles per day. 194. United Bengal and JMalabar Current. The Bengal current, flowing through Palk Strait and round Ceylon, joins the Malabar current, the united waters flowing westerly towards Africa, depending however upon the north-east monsoon. 195. Passage Drift Current-the equatorial current of the Indian Ocean. It originates south-west from Australia, flows first northerly to the Tropic of Capricorn, where it bends west and sweeps across the whole ocean. Approaching Madagascar, it becomes narrower, and flows on the north of that island towards the African coast, having previously sent off a branch to the south-west at the Island of Rodriguez. Velocity near Australia, from 20 to 30 miles per day; in the middle of the ocean, from 10 to 20; but north of Madagascar, where it becomes narrow and more powerful, from 45 to 60 miles. 196. Mlozambique Current-the strongest in the Indian Ocean, a continuation of the Passage Drift, which, after having passed Madagascar, and being joined by the weak Bengal and Malabar current, turns south and flows through the Mozambique canal to the southern extremity of Africa. Velocity-from 20 to 50 miles per day, in general; most rapid near the coast off Cape Corrientes, where the velocity is 139 miles per day, (nearly 6 miles per hour.) This is, perhaps, the greatest velocity ever noted of any current. 197. Lagullas, or Cape Current. On the southern extremity of Africa, at the first point of Natal, the Mozambique current is joined by that branch of the Passage Drift which separates from it at Rodriguez; and thus the chief movements of the Indian Ocean here blend, forming a strong current, part of which reaches the Atlantic, and is called the Lagullas current, from the cape and sand-bank of that name. Velocity —greatest at its commencement, from 60 to 110 miles per day; decreases towards the west; mean velocity at the Cape of Good Hope, 33 miles. 198. Counter Current. The preceding current meets with resistance from the great Lagullas bank, about half way between the first point of Natal and the Cape of Good Hope, and unable to pass round, or entirely over it into the Atlantic, a great portion of the water is returned by a counter current to the Indian Ocean. CURRENTS OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN. 199. /ntarctic Drift Current flows from the south polar regions in a north-easterly course towards the coast of South America, where it divides into two branches, nearly opposite the Island of Chiloe. 200. Peruvian, or Humboldt's Current-one of the branches mentioned, first discovered by Humboldt, in 1802. It proceeds northwards along the shores of Chili and Peru, as far as Cape Blanco, where it turns north-west, embraces the Galapagos Group, and expanding from thence in breadth, is lost in the great equatorial current of the Pacific. Velocity —from Valpa 30 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY raiso to Lima, 12 or 18 miles per day; at the Galapagos Islands, it has been noted at from 70 to 120 miles. 201. Cape Horn Current-the second branch from the Antarctic Drift, running south, passing round Cape Horn to the Falkland Isles, and perhaps finally joining the southern connecting current of the Atlantic. Velocity from 54 to 100 miles per day, in lat.%553 to 580; near the coast, mean velocity 24 miles. 202. Equatorial Current-the principal movement of the waters of the Pacific, from east to west, flowing on both sides of the Equator, its limits coinciding with lat. 250 N., and 26' S., making a breadth of 3,000 geographical miles. Velocity —the general mean, 30 miles per day. There are two minor currents within the equatorial, flowing in an opposite direction from west to east. 203. JkHentor's Counter Drift-about the Tropic of Capricon, and the meridian of 800 W., named after the Prussian ship "Mentor," on board of which the first observations were made in 1832. 204. JVorth Equatorial Counter Current-between lat. 50 and 10n N., long. 1150 and 1500 W. 205..iMexican Coast Current-periodical, dependent on the seasonal breezes; flowing south-west in winter, north-west in summer. 206. Japanese Current —formed by the approach of the equatorial current to the coast of Asia. A portion is deflected north by the Island of Formosa, and passes along the east coast of Niphon, finally losing itself in the ocean. Velocity off Niphon, from 50 to 120 miles per day. 207. Carolinean MJonsoon Current-formed by the central portion of the equatorial approaching the Caroline Islands, where it becomes influenced by the monsoons, flowing west in summer, east in winter. 208. Rossel's Drift Current-formed by the southern portion of the equatorial approaching the New Hebrides and New Caledonia, the course changing from west to north-west towards Torres Strait, named after the discoverer, M. Rossel. 209. J\Aew South Wales Current-runs along the coast from 20" S. to Van Dieman's Land; periodical, depending on the winds; flowing south in summer, and north in winter. Velocity from 20 to 30 miles per day. ACTION OF THE OCEANIC WATERS UPON THE LAND. 210. Some idea may be formed of the changes wrought by the ocean in Its angry moods in the course of a few thousand years, from the following chronicle of selected cases: YEARS. 800.-The sea earried off a large quantity of the soil of Heligoland, Islands in the German Ocean, off the mouth of the Elbe, previously of considerable extent, hut subsequently much reduced. 800-900.-Tempests changed the coasts of Brittany; valleys and villages were swallowed ap The Britons have a tradition, which has descended from the fabulous ages, of the destruction of the south-western part of Brittany. 800-950.-Violent storms agitated the Lagunes of Venice. The Isles of Ammiano and Con stlnziaco disappeared. 110;. —Old Maalamocca. a considerable town near Venice, was engulfed by the sea. 1218.-A great inundation destroyed the Gulf of Jadhe. t219-1220.-The Island of Wieringwen wlls formed; the result of violent storms, which caused it to become detached from the main land PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 31 t27T-i17.- -Inundations engulfed the fertile country of Reiderland an alluvial plain at th6 mouth of tle Ems, in the time of the Romans, stretching between Groningen and East Friesland. Two small streams, the Tiam and Eche, which watered this district, disappeared. The town of Torum, a considerable place, was destroyed, along with upwards of fifty market-towns, villages, and monasteries. A new gulf, called Dollart, now occupies their site.'82.-Violent tempests broke the isthmus which united Holland with Friesland, and formed the Zuider Zee. t,500.-Three-fourths of Heligoland were swept away. 1300.-Ciparum, in Istria, was destroyed. 1303.-A great part of Rugen was engulfed, and many villages on the coast of Pomerama. 1337.-An inundation carried off fourteen villages, in the Isle of Cadsand, in Zealand. 1475.-Land near the mouth of the I-umber was swept away, and several villages destroyed. 1570.-A violent storm destroyed half of the village of Scheveningen, north-west of the Hague. The church that once stood in the middle of the village, now stands on the shore. 1634.-An eruption submerged the whole of Nordstrand, a large and populous district, which had originally been a part of the continent, and detached by a previous inroad of the waters. On the evening of the 11th of October, 1634, the sea broke over it, destroying 1,358 houses, churches, and towns, 50,000 head of cattle, and upwards of 6,000 persons. There now remains of this once flourishing and fertile island, the three islets, named Pelnomi, Nordstrand, and Lutze-moor. 1658.-The Island Orisant was annihilated. 1784.-A violent storm, according to M. Hoff, formed the lake Aboukir, in Lower Egypt. 1803.-The sea swept away the last remains of the priory of Crail, in Fifeshire. 211. Effects of Currents.-The great currents have sometimes effsets, or there are changes in the set of the current, due to transitory causes. These may deceive the most skilful commander, and endanger his vessel, when his reckoning gives him a considerable distance from the shore. There are strong local currents, produced by tidal action, which sometimes meet from opposite quarters, and cause a whirlpool, like the celebrated Maelstrom, literally mill-stream, on the coast of Norway, and Hurl Gate in Long Island Sound. 212. The oceanic currents have exerted an important influence in the past history of the globe, and are necessary to its occupation by the human race. The productions of the vegetable kingdom have been widely diffused by the transport of seeds in the water from one region to another. In like manner, animals have been translated involuntarily to a new home on floating ice; and canoes of men and women, driven out to sea by the winds, have got entangled in its powerful streams, and have been borne to lands before without inhabitants, but thenceforth to be established in them. Materials, drifting across the Atlantic to the Azores, strengthened Columbus in his design to navigate it; and led to the opening of the gates of a new world. 213. Currents carry the warm water of the tropics to the polar regions to moderate the cold, and bear the cold water of the poles to the tropics to moderate the heat. It is the warmth of the Gulf Stream, conveyed to the north-west of Europe, that renders that cimate so mild, clothing Britain in " ever-green robes," when, in the same latitude, the shorei of Labrador are encased in ice. Without waves, tides, and currents, the ocean, charged with an immense amount of decomposing animal and vegetable matter, would become a stagnant, fetid pool, giving off noxious exhalations, infecting the whole atmosphere, and reducing the more habitable parts of the earth to Lhe condition of a desert. METEOROLOGY. 214. Meteorology is a description of the atmosphere, and the phenomena dependent on Heat, Light, and Electricity. 215. The Atmosphere, or Sphere of Vapors-is a stratum of gaseous matter which everywhere surrounds the earth, and is the great laboratory of nature in which the various gases exhaled from the earth are 82 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. collected together, and mixed, decomposed, distilled, volatilized, condensed, or precipitated in an endless process, according to fixed laws. It is the assemblage of all substances capable of assuming the aeriform state at the degree of temperature which prevails around the earth. 216. As there is perhaps no substance which cannot be reduced to the aeriform state by intense heat, or rendered solid by intense cold, consequently the condition, quality, or composition of the atmosphere depends very much upon temperature. Pure atmospheric air, however, is essentially composed of certain elements, in definite proportions. Under ordinary circumstances, the composition of 1000 parts of the atmosphere may be stated as follows: Oxygen, - 210.0 Nitrogen,.... 775.0 Aqueous Vapor,... 14.2 Carbonic Acid,.. 0.8 1000.0 The atmosphere has weight, is in a high degree elastic, and is naturally colorless. 217. itmospheric Currents. To understand the causes of atmospheric currents presupposes a knowledge of the distribution of solar heat, with its effects upon the atmosphere. The sun, the source of light and heat, shoots forth his burning rays upon the surface of the earth. The earth being of a globular forli, the direction of the sun's rays is relatively vertical or oblique. The vertical rays are the more intense. The central portion of the earth (that zone lying between the tropics) receives the vertical rays, and is in the greatest degree heated. That portion, lying between the tropics and the poles, receives the oblique rays, their intensity being in inverse proportion to their obliquity. Hence the distribution of solar heat upon the surface of the earth is very unequal. 218. The surface of the earth also absorbs, reflects, and radiates the solar heat in an unequal degree. The lands absorb and radiate more readily than the waters. The sandy desert reflects the solar heat to a greater degree than the alluvial soil. 219. To the unequal distribution, absorption, reflection, and radiation of solar heat, together with the quantity of water the air holds in a state of vapor, may be assigned the causes of that variety of physical phenomena, aerial currents, or winds; and as these deranging causes act with varying intensity, the winds or currents created are also diverse in power and character. 220. The temperature of the atmosphere is not affected, as may be supposed, by the direct solar rays passing through it. The air receives its heat from the earth, by radiation and reflection. The effect of heat upon the air is to expand its volume. 221. When any portion of the earth's surface is more heated than the surrounding districts, the air there ascends and blows over the adjoining cooler and denser strata, causing an upper outward current, while the colder and denser fluid rushes towards the spot where the balance has been lost by expansion, and a lower inward current is produced. It the door of a hot room be opened in winter, there will be an upper current of warm air directed from the heated apartment, and a lower cold current flowing into it. The flame of a candle hold near the ceiling will be directed from within, outwards; if held near the floor, it will be driven from without, inwards; and if placed midway, it will be upright and still. Every conflagration, however calm the air may have been previously, is attended with gusts of wind; the heat causes an ascending current, and the cold air rushes from every direction towards the ire. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. Take an example in nature, of an island situated alone in the midst of the ocean. The land absorbing the solar heat more readily than the water, the island becomes much warmer than the neighboring sea-an ascending current is established, and the fresh air of the sea flows from all directions under the form of a sea-breeze. In the absence of tle solar heat it is the reverse. During the night the island loses heat by radiation, and cools quicker than the sea. The atmosphere, having become heavier, runs into that of the sea under the form of a land-breeze. Thus a constant interchange is established. These phenomena are observed almost daily on nearly all the seaboards. 222. What takes place here on a small scale during a day and a night is exhibited on a majestic scale, in a permanent manner, between the continents and the oceans, from one season to another; between the tropical regions and the temperate and polar regions. 223. All atmospheric currents are the result of difference of temperature. The difference of temperature between day and night gives birth to the diurnal breezes; the difference of temperature between extreme seasons gives rise to the season-breezes or monsoons; the difference of temperature between the tropics and the poles is the cause of the great annual breeze, the trade winds, though modified by the rotary motion of the earth. 224. Classification of Winds.-Permanent breezes prevail within the tropics, called Trade Winds, which maintain nearly the same direction and rate throughout the year. They are termed N. E. in the northern hemisphere from their direction, and S. E. in the southern hemisphere; but both blow more decidedly from the east as they approach the equator. The limits of the N. E. trades are the parallels of 80 and 23~ N. lat.; of the S. E. are the parallels of 3~ N. and 280 S:. Between them, from 3~ to 9a N. lat. is a zone styled the region of calms, in which thick foggy air prevails, with frequent, sudden and copious rains, attended by thunder and lightning. (See Physical map.) ed The regions border- and a FIG. 5. lower, but flowing in opposite directions; and if the earth did not rotate upon its axis, the direction ~~~~~of~~ing on the lower current i the northern hemisphere wtor are and in esthe ern hemisphere froh S. to N. Ton the earth, however, rotates from W. to., aInd the atmosphere surrounding it partakes of this rar ~~~~1mofaction. (See Fig. 5.)there ascends, and flows over' 226. In proceeding from the th e ole equator, the masses of air ow from regions where the rotary motion of the surfae is less, towahere it is poles, from which a colder atmosphere moves to supply its place. Thus two currents are. created in each hemisphere, an upper and a FIG. 5. U~- lower, but flowing in op-. posite directions and if the earth did not rotate upon its axis, the direction of the lower current in the northern hemisphere would be from N. to S., and in the southern hemisphere fiom S. to N. The earth, however, rotates from W. to E., and the atmosphete surrounding it partakes of this rotary motion. (See Fig. 5.) 226. In proceeding from the poles to the equator, the masses of air flow from regions where the rotary motion of the surface is less, to where it is greater; and unable to acquire the new velocity at once, in virtue of a law 5 34 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. of inertia, they are deflected towards the west, just in proportion as the7 do not keep up with the surface towards the east. Hence, instead of being north and south winds, which they would be if the earth were at rest, they become north-east and south-east winds. 227. When these winds approach each other, they tend to produce a purely eastern breeze, but this is not perceptible, because the horizontal motion of the air is neutralized by the vertical motion consequent upon excessive heat and rarefaction. Here is the region of calls, in which there would be an almost perfect calm, but for the great evaporation and violent rains which disturb the equilibrium of the atmosphere, and occasion sudden storms and squalls, attended by thunder and lightning. This zone of calms is entirely north of the equator, extending about 60 in width at a mean. 228. Periodical Winds, or those which prevail at a certain time of the year or day, belong to various districts of the globe. The monsoons of the Indian Ocean, the estesian winds of the Mediterranean, and the land and sea-breezes are of this class. 229. Monsoons. The winds of the Indian Ocean blow in one direction for five months; after an interval of one month, during which calms, light breezes, gales, hurricanes, and thunder storms prevail, the wind changes and blows in the opposite direction for the same time, and so on alternating with great regularity. From April to September, the south-west monsoon prevails.; from October to March, the north-east. The cause of these seasonal breezes is easily understood. 230. During the southern summer months of December, January, and February, Southern Africa receives the vertical rays of the sun, while Southern Asia experiences the low temperature of winter. In virtue of that law by which all aerial currents are established, the air rushes from the colder regions of Southern Asia towards the warmer regions of Africa, and a north-east wind blows as long as the difference of temperature lasts. The reverse takes place when Southern Asia is heated by the sun of the northern summer, and Africa is cooled by the southern winter. The air now flows from the colder region of Africa to the warmer region of Asia, and. a south-west wind prevails. The direction of the monsoons, like the trade winds, is modified by the rotary motion of the earth. 231. The Estesian Winds,,which blow strongly from the north in the Mediterranean in summer, are caused by the high temperature produced by the vertical rays of the sun upon the sandy and flinty soil of the immense desert of Sahara. 232. Variable Winds prevail in mean and high latitudes. The same wind olows but a few days in succession. Between the parallels of 24" and 500 N. lat., the south-west wind blows more frequently than any other throughout the year. Between the same parallels, S. lat., the north-west wind is the prevailing current. 233. The winds of these regions blow from every direction and are very complicated. The endeavor to arrive at causes is in a great measure attended with unsatisfactory results. 234. The Winds of the Deserts. The Samoon or Samiel of Arabia, Nubia, and Persia, the Khlamsin of Egypt, the Harmattan of Senegambia PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. j and Guinea, the Sirocco of the Sahara, the Salano of Spain, are caused usually by the difference of temperature in countries subjcct to extreme heat and drought, and generally partake of that character. 235. The Pampas (or south-west winds) of Buenos Ayres, South America, which originate among the snows of the Andes, are cold winds, and sometimes rush with such incredible velocity over the level pampas, and so suddenly set in, that persons bathing in the La Plata have been drowned, finding it impossible to regain the shore. 236. Hurricanes. Frequently in serene hot weather, in this latitude, a whirling motion of the air takes place, usually indicated by sand, dust, and leaves ascending in spiral columns. Larger and stronger whirls carry up water, animals, and even buildings lying in their course. These whirlwinds are generally caused by the struggle of two winds meeting at an angle in the same manner as whirlpools are formed in water by two currents being abruptly impelled against each other. 237. There are three well known hurricane regions-the West Indies, the Indian Ocean, and the Chinese Sea. - The general course of the WTest Indian hurricanes is from the Leeward Islands \V. N. W., passing around the shores of the Gulf of Mexico, or across it, then following the Gulf Stream and terminating in the Ati:ntic, or exhausting their fury in the United States. They prevail from June to October. They are the most frequent in August. The hurlricanes o(f the Indian Ocean come from the N. E., near Sumatra and Java, and travel to thie S. E. towards Rodriguez and the M!iauritius [slands. They occur chiefly from December to April, Ihe hot season in that hemisphere. In the Chinese Sea, the hurricanes (there called typhoons) range from the shore to about 1503 R. long. Tiley occur from June to November, after an interval of three or four years. Fl.S. 238. Water-Spouts. These singular phenomena, so frequently observed en the ocean, result when two winds of different temperature meet. The winds condense the vapor and give it a whirling motion, so that it descends tapering towards the sea below, and causes the surface of the water 30 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. to ascend in a pointed spiral form till it joins that from above, assuming the appearance of an upright and an inverted cone, being thinner in the centre than either above or below. 239. When a water-spout has a progressive motion, the upper and under part must move in the same direction, and with equal velocity, otherwise it breaks, which frequently happens, when a noise is heard resembling the falling of a cataract. The following is a general description: 240. Under, a dense cloud the sea becomes agitated with violent commotions, the waves dash rapidly towards the centre of the agitated waters, on arriving at which, they rise whirling round in a spiral direction towards the clouds. This conical ascending column is met by another descending column, which moves towards the water and joins it. In many instances the lower column is from 18 to 30 rods in diameter near the base. Each column, however, diminishes towards the centre, where they often unite, their diameters being no more than 4 or 5 feet. If a ball is discharged from a gun or cannon into the centre, it causes the water-spout to break, and its progressive motion is arrested. Lightning is frequently seen to issue from the centre and sides of the water-spout, particularly when it breaks, but no thunder is heard. The winds perform a grand and important part in the economy of nature. They moderate the severity of the northern climates by briningin to them the heat of the south-promote the fecundation of flowers by agitating the branches of plants, at the same time diffusing the productions of the vegetable kingdom by the transport of pol;en and seeds to great distances; and but for the aerial currents, rain would be confined to maritime countries, the interior of continents becoming arid deserts. They serve also to renew the air of cities, where causes of vitiation largely op erate, and prevent that stagnation of the atmosphere which tends physically and mentally to deteriorate the human race. 241. Rain.-If a vessel of water be exposed in open air on a hot day, the quantity of fluid soon sensibly diminishes, or it evaporates, being converted by the heat into invisible vapor, and diffused through the air. In like manner evaporation transpires upon a grand scale from the great collections of water on the earth's surface as well as from the moist ground-subject to diurnal and annual variations, because depending mainly upon temperature. 242. A determinate volume of air, at a given temperature, is capable of receiving a certain quantity of vapor in an invisible state. When it contains all the vapor it is capable of receiving, it is said to be saturated. If the temperature be increased, its capacity for receiving vapor is also increased. On the contrary, if the temperature be reduced, its capacity for vapor is diminished. Like a sponge saturated with water, reduce its volume by pressure, and a part of the water will run out. Decrease of temperature takes the place of pressure in air saturated with moisture, and precipitation or rain is the result. 243. Take an example in nature: A warm, moist south-west wind blowing from the tropics comes in contact with the colder air of the temperate regions, its temperature is lowered, it can no longer contain its full quantity of vapor. A portion of its moisture is soon condensed into. clouds, and then falls in rain. On the contrary, if a wind bearing clouds meet a warmer and dryer air, as is the case in the burning deserts, the heated air, having a much greater capacity for moisture, dissipates all the clouds, and the threatening storm suddenly disappears. 244. If a wind bearing moisture encounter an elevated mountain range, forced to ascend high into the cold regions of the atmosphere, its vapors PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 37 are condensed, and rain falls on the windward slope. The wild passes over to the other side dry and cool, deprived of most of its moisture. This phenomenon is common to all elevated mountain ranges. 245. Distribution of Rain. Since heat is the cause of evaporation, rain is very unequally Aistributed. The following are general laws relative to the distribution of rain. 246. —-1. It decreases from the equator to the poles, because heat, the cause of vapor, diminishes. 2. It decreases from the coast to the interior of a continent, because the land supplies a less quantity of vapor than the sea. 3. In the temperate zones there is less rain on the eastern coasts than on trie western, because the latter are first exposed to the western winds which blow from the ocean and discharge their moisture upon them, but within the tropics more rain falls on the eastern than the western coasts, because of their exposure to the trade winds. 4. More rain falls in mountainous regions than in level districts, because mountains arrest the course of the clouds, and a condensation of vapor ensues from collision with their cold summits. 247. Local Causes. The winds being the bearers of the clouds and vapors, consequently any circumstance that modifies the course or temperature of the winds, affects the condition of precipitation: 1. In Europe, if the wind always blew from the north-east, it would never rain, because it would blow over a great extent of continent; on the contrary, if the wind always blew from the south-west, the rain would be incessant, because it would come loaded with vapors from the Atlantic. 2. If the great mountain barriers of Asia were removed, those immense arid deserts would soon smile with a luxuriant vegetation, because abundant rains from the south and east would be permitted to visit them. Again, suppose the Andes were transferred from the western to the eastern coast of South America, preventing the trade winds from bearing the vapors of the ocean into the.interior of the continent, those excessively fertile valleys of the Amazon and Paraguay would soon become a sterile desert. 248. There are extensive tracts of country in which rain is unknown; in some districts it falls periodically, and in others rain may be said to be constant. (See Tlyetographic map.) 249. The rainless regions of the New World comprise portions of California and Guatemala, the Mexican table-land, and the coast line of Peru; those of the Old World comprehend an immense territory, stretching from Morocco through the Sahara, a part of Egypt, Arabia, Persia, into Beloochistan, with another great zone commencing north of the Hindoo-Koosh and Iihnalayas, including the table-land of Thibet, the desert of Gobi and a portion of Mongolia. In these tracts there is either no rain at all or only a very small quantity-so seldom occurring as to be quite a phenomena. 250. The regions of periodical rain are within the tropics, and have seasons of extreme humidity, alternating with excessive drought. The length of time of the rainy seasons differs in different districts, but lasting generally from three to five months. The rains follow the sun: when the sun is north of the equator, the rains prevail in the northern tropic; when south of the line, in the southern tropic, except in India, where the rainy and dry seasons are regulated by the monsoons. 88 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 251. The regions of constant precipitation in which rain falls at any hour of the day, on any day of the year, are beyond the tropics, except the zone of calms, a narrow belt between the periodic rains of the northern and southern hemispheres, in which heavy showers occur almost daily, accompanied with thundur and lightning. For the districts of seasonal rains, see Hyetographic map. 252. Observations and annotations. The quantity of rain which falls between the tropics in a single month is greater than that of a whole year in higher latitudes. The annual amount of rain at the equator is 95 inches, which falls in 80 days, while at St. Petersburg the annual amount is 17 inches, which falls in 149 days. The following table shows the diminution of the average annual quantity of rain from tha equator to the poles. TROPICAL LATITUDE. INCHES Mnthhabaleshwnr, Western Ghauts, -- 303 San Luis de iMaranhao, Brazil, - - 276 P'trimaribo, Guyana:, 229 Sierre Leone, Guinea,.- o 190 CapeHayti, St. Domingo,.- * -. 128 Adams' Peak, Ceylon,... - - 100 I-avana, Cuba, - ~~- 91 Bonmbay, -... 8t Macao, China, -....... O MEAN AND HIGH LATITUDE. South Slope of tile Alps,...- 58 North France and Belgium, - 2 Sicily, - - -. -.....- 23 Rome, -- -..~ 30 North Germany,'-. -. 20 England,... o 3t1 St. Petersburg,...~ - 17 Uleabu rg, Finland, - - *.e o 13 Eastern Russia, -........ 1 Key West, Florida, -- - -..-.36 Charleston, South Carolina, - - e o 48 Washington, Capitol of U. S., - o o - 36 Marietta, hio, - - -. o 34 Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 4- 7- 47 Providence, Rhode Island, - o.. 42 Cambridge, M;tssnlchusetts, -. 0 o-33 Burlington. Vermlont, -. - - 39 Eastport, Maine, - - -.- o - - 38 New York City,... 3- - - o 253. The mean annual amount in the tropics of the Old World is 73 inches; in the New World, 115 inches; in the mean and high latitude Old World, 31 inches; New WTorld, 37 inches. Generally, countries receiving the greatest amount of rain have comparatively the least number of rainy days, and vice versa. The mean annual amount of rain in the British Isles, is - - - 32 inches, which falls in 156 days. Western France, - 25" " " 152 " Central and North Germany, - 20 "c " " " 150 " HIungary, - - )- - 17" c" "( 111 " Eastern Russia, - - - 14" " " " 90 " 254. Instances of rain without clouds are by no means rare. They may occur when the equilibrium of the atmosphere in its upper regions is intensely disturbed by very cold and warm currents of air coming in collision, condensing the vapor into water without going through the transition statu of vesicular vapors. M. de Nevew was in a shower at Constantinople for ten minutes, when tbe sky was perfeetly serene. M.. Babinet observed the same plenomenon at Paris, May 2, 1842. Severil instaecee have been observed at Paris, Geneva, and other p'aces. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 255. Snow. —Snow is simply the visible vapor of which the clouds are composed, frozen. A quantity of very minute crystals of ice having been formed, they are enlarged by the condensation and freezing of vapor, and merging together, constitute flakes, which increase in size during the period of their descent. When the quantity of moisture, separated from the atmosphere, is not great, flakes are not formed, but the crystals remain detached, float in the air, and give rise to what is called the frost smoke in high latitudes. Snow falls to the ground when the temperature of the atmosphere down to the earth's surface is sufficiently cold; but if the lower strata of air is too warm, it melts in traversing them, and then we have rain below while it snows above. Hence, snow is never seen at the level of the sea within the tropics, and it becomes more abundant with the decrease of temperature towards the poles. Snow-flakes belong to the hexagonal system of crystals, of which several examples are given. (See Physical map.) Captain Scoresby describes 96 varieties. Kaemtz observes that flakes which fall at the same time have generally the same form, hut if there is an interval between two consecutive falls of snow, the forms of the second are found to differ from those of the first, although always alike among themselves. Other aqueous meteors, as dew, mists, fogs, hail, and hoar-frost may be easily understood. They are the results of the ever-changing condition of the atmosphere. 256. Temperature. On observing the temperature of a place, as registered by the thermometer, it is found to be constantly fluctuating through a certain range above and below a standard mean.* 257. The mean temperature of any one day or month at the same place differs from one year to another, but the mean temperature of the whole year remains nearly the same, especially when the average of 10 or 15 years is taken. 258. The mean of any number of unequal quantities is equal to their sum divided by their number; thus the mean temperature of air at any place during a year is equal to the sum of the mean temperature of each month divided by 12. sol o..60-, X o 20 -20 to A1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __~ I I Jaiv. FBeb.}M~tIB jw My:c4Ju; imiJ Ad u. ttpt Oct Nav. Dtec. FIe. 7. 259. Temperature in equatorial regions is distributed quite equally * Fahrenheit's thermometer is used by English and American observers. 40 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. through the whole year, owing to the days and nights being equal. But in higher latitudes, where the length of the day varies greatly, it takes a wide range above and below the annual mean. In Guiana, within the tropics, the difference between the hottest and coldest months in the year is 2" 2' Fahrenheit, in the temperate zone it is about 600, and at Yalutsk, in Siberia, 1140 4'. But even in places having the same latitude the diversity is sometimes very great; at Quebec the summers are as warm as those of Paris, yet the winters are as severe as those of St. Petersburg. (See Fig. 7.) During the Russian expedition to Khiva, in 1840, the thermometer fell 450 helow zero, and for three months the mean temperature was about 1~ Fahrenheit. In June the temperature rose to 1140 8'. Thus, in the course of a few months the troops were exposed to a variation of 1600 of temperature, in a country situated under the same parallel as the Azores, where reigns perpetual spring. 260. In enumerating the causes of climatic variations, or the diversity of temperature and humidity, several may be adduced: 1, the position of a country relative to the sun; 2, its altitude; (See Tableau, page 1;) 3, its position, whether marine or continental; 4, the prevailing winds to which it is exposed; 5, the nature of its soil. 261. A remarkable deviation from the usual climatic state sometimes occurs, spreading over wide districts, though in no known instance extending over an entire hemisphere. The Danes have observed that moderate winters in Iceland usually correspond to intense cold at Copenhagen. Generally, Asia and America are in opposite climatic conditions, while Europe is unaffected by either extreme-these occurring more frequently in winter than in summer. The winter of 1790-91 was very mild in Europe, and very cold in America. The winter of 1794-95 was very severe in Europe, and very mild in North America. In February of 1828, intense cold prevailed in Asia, while in North America it was unusually.mild, and Europe was unaffected by either extreme. In 1829 the cold was intense in Europe, moderate in Asia, while unusual heat prevailed in North America. In 1837 the temperature was mild in Europe and very low in North America. The same alternating condition exists also in regard to humidity. The years of 1816-17 were marked in the history of Western Europe by general famine, occasioned by excessive rains, while Eastern Europe and Asia had abundant harvests. In 1846 the corn crop of Europe was almost entirely cut off by the drought, while America enjoyed a plentiful harvest. 262. Isothermal Lines.-Humboldt was the first to trace on charts lines connecting all points having the same annual temperature, or nearly. A distinct view is hereby afforded of the distribution of temperature, and the powerful operation of other causes besides latitude, in discriminating climates, will at once be seen on examining the curves. (See map of the World.) 263. It will be observed that near the equator the isothermals exhibit no great divergence from the parallels of latitude, but further north their inflections become remarkable, ranging through 250 of latitude. 264. Climatic Zones.-In defining accurately zones of climate, the astronomical lines of the tropics of Cancer and Capricorn, and the Arctic and Antarctic circles are practically useless; because of the divergence of the isothermal lines from the parallels of latitude. 265. Guided by the isotherms, five climatic zones may be discrininated: 1. The hot zone between the isotherms of 800 in bolt hemispheres 2. The warm zone between the isothermseof 800 and 700. 3. The temperate zone between the isotherms of 700 and 300. 4. The cold zone between the isotherms of 300 and 10o. 5. The frigid zone is bounded by the isotherm of 10o. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 41 ELECTRICAL PHENOMENA. 266. Of electricity in itself we know nothing more than that it is a mighty imponderable agent, called simply for convenience, a fluid invisibls when in a latent state, and apparently universally diffused. Information n the theory and details of electrical science must be sought in treatises spes cially devoted to the subject. The science of Meteorology treats of its phenomena, effects and distribution, as developed in the atmosphere. 267. While the earth itself is always charged with negative electricity, the atmosphere, in a clear and cloudless state is almost invariably found to be positively electric. Electricity varies in intensity, being greater in winter than in summer, during the day than by night, and subject also to a kind of diurnal variation; being feeble at sunrise, then increasing for two or three hours, and attains its maximum. It declines towards the middle of the day and attains its maximum in the afternoon. 268. The electricity of the atmosphere is supposed to be due principally to combustion, vegetation and chemical action. Whatever affects the thermometric and vaporous condition of the atmosphere, affects its electrical state. The comparitive intensity of the electricity of the atmosphere in different states of the weather is arranged in the following order by Mr. Crosse, of Broomfield, England. 1. Regular thunder clouds. 8. Clear warm weather. 2. Driving storm, with small rain. 9. Sky obscured by clouds. 3. Fall of snow, or brisk hail-storm. 10. Mackerel, or mottled sky. 4. A smart shower in a cold day. 11. Sultry weather. 5. Hot weather, after some wet days. 12. Cold damp nights. 6. Wet weather, after some dry days. 13. Cold dry N. E. winds. 7. Clear frosty weather. 269. The color of lightning is variously white, orange, and blue. Its hue appears to depend on the intensity, and height in the atmosphere. 270. There is a class of interesting and harmless meteorological phenomena due to the communication of electricity in a strong degree. It becomes visible in the form of pale-colored flames, quivering on the extremities of bodies which are non-conductors, as the points of spears and other military weapons, the manes and tails of horses, the topmasts and yard-arms of ships, called Mariners' Lights, or St. Elmo's Fire. In showers of rain and snow, the drops have been observed to be luminous, owing to a strong charge of electricity in the air. 271. Electricity sympathises generally with light and heat in its geographical distribution, diminishing from the equator to the poles. Hence, it is within the tropics that thunder storms are the most frequent, at the same time the most violent the lightning flashing with a breadth and intensity, and the thunder pealing with an awfulness of which no conception can be formed by the inhabitant of other regions. The coast line of Peru however, where it never thunders or lightens, is a remarkable exception. 272. Mreagnetism.-Magnetism is one of those unseen imponderable existences, which, like heat and electricity, are known only by their effects. 273. Terrestrial magnetism pervades the whole earth, is extremely complicated, and of varying intensity. Its dynamical state is determined by the declination needle, or mariner's compass, and the dipping needle. 6 12 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. The declination needle consists of a magnetized steel bar or needle, so suspended as to revolve in a horizontal direction; the dipping needle moves in a plane perpendicular to the horizon. The north-end of the declination needle points to the north, and the south.end to the south, and is at rest only when in chat position. The direction of the needle is the magnetic meridian of the place of observation. 274. There is a line which encircles the whole earth where the dipping needle remains horizontal, called the magnetic equator, or line of no dip. It crosses the earth's equator in several places, running in a serpentine course. North and south of the magnetic equator, the needle dips more and more till it becomes perpendicular to the horizon in two points, known as the N. and S. magnetic poles. (See Map.) The intensity of magnetic force is measured by the: number of vibrations made by the declination needle in a given time. It is exceedingly variable in different parts of the earth. 275. There are two points in the northern, and two in the southern hemispheres, in which the intensity is greater than anywhere else. One of these foci is in North America, S. W. of Hudson's Bay, another in Northern Siberia, 120' E. long. The southern foci are situated in 20' S. lat. and 3240 E. long., in 600 S. lat., and 1310 2' E. long. Lines of equal variation are called isogonial; lines of equal dip, isoclinial; and lines of equal intensity, isodinamical FIG. 8. AURORA AT BREUILLEPONT —FRANCE. 276. Those meteoric displays frequently seen in the heavens, the Aurora Borealis, (or northern-light,) the Aurora Australis, (or southern-light,) are unquestionably of electro-magnectic origin, as they may be artificially imitated by passing a current of electricity through an exhausted receiver; violent disturbances of the magnetic needle accompany its appearance; and light has been evolved by Faraday through magnetic power. The earth's magnetism is subject to vast and unaccountable commotions or storms of immense extent, which occur at irregular intervals, and are of shori dluration. Instances occured in 1818 and 1841. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 4^ OPTICAL PHENOMENA. 277. Various and interesting effects result from the decomposition, reflection, and refraction of light, in its passage through the atmosphere when in different conditions of medium or density. 278. A ray of light is composed of seven different colors; viz. red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet. 279 All that endless variety and combination of tints displayed by the sky, the flowers of the field, the rich hues of the autumnal woods, and the gorgeous plumage of birds-in short, the colors of all objects, whether opaque bodies or transparent media arise from their varying capacity of absorbing or reflecting certain rays. The reflection of all the rays causes white, and the absorption of all black. 280. The cerulean tint of the sky is caused by the blue rays being more abundantly reflected or scattered by the aerial particles; the greater paleness of the blue arises from the existing vesicular(a) vapor in the lower strata of the atmosphere. 281. In the eastern horizon at sunrise, and in the western at sunset, the color of the sky is usually red or yellow. This is owing to the solar beams having a greater portion of the atmosphere to traverse in order to reach us, most of the blue rays are lost by absorption and reflection in their passage, while the red and yellow, which have the greater momentum, (variously modified by reflected and peculiar atmospheric conditions) are reflected. 282. The golden, rosy, purple and fiery hues of the clouds and sky, are caused by the presence of aqueous and vesicular vapor in the air in different stages of condensation. FIG. 9.-RAINBOW. (a) Vesicle, a minute air-bladder, the film being water. 44 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 283. The scintillation of the stars is also due to the same cause. 284. Rainbows. —A pencil of light on entering a rain-drop undergoes refraction; this pencil or ray consisting of different colors, which possesses different degrees of refrangibility, emerges, after being reflected at the back part of the drop decomposed into its. primitive colors. Thus, from the action of the aqueous globules upon the luminous rays, arises the colored bow we see projected on the cloud. The more brightly the sun shines, and copious the rain, the more vivid and distinct are the colors of the bow. 285. Both solar and lunar rainbows are due to the same cause. FIG. 10. HALOS OR CORONAE. 286. Halos.-Colored circles of varying diameter are occasionally seen surrounding the sun and moon when the sky is invested with light clouds. They are more frequently observed around the moon, but this is simply owing to the sun's light being generally too dazzling to admit of colors being distinguished near his disc. They are caused by the inflection of light by the globules of visible vapor, minute crystals of ice and snow; or that property of rays to bend and divide as they pass near the borders, ridges and angles of surfaces. 287. When the halos are well defined, and closely encircle the luminous body, it is because the atmosphere is surcharged with humidity, large globules being formed. And hence there is truth in the popular remark, that a dense halo portends rain. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 45 288. Parhelia. — F —~- = Luminous ciroles, =_egla dietin and originag -_ arcs, and horizon_'. = n_ tal bands, with ___________________ _ /_________ __. mock-suns (parhei.a,) and mock___________________ _ bmoons, (parasele________ _____ ______ _ri_ nw,) in the neighalways accompanied by -two, borhood of the sun Gapt.______ P-arry which and moon are rare _ _ _==~_B~ ~meteorological spectacles in our /0Mrg ~lso comml on in the to _________ ___________ ___________ _______ _ Exarctic regions, ______~- where snowy spicrystals of ice float abundantly in the FIG. 11. air, the angular forms of the crystals'reflecting and refracting the rays of light in different regular directions and originating the visual variety. 289. In the severe winter of 1615, in Iceland, the sun when seen, was always accompanied by two, four, five, and even nine of these illusions. The above cut represents a remarkable example seen and described by Capt. Parry, which continued from noon until six o'clock in the evening, during his winter sojourn at Melville Island. _~ — J ~__~_~ -~. ~ X-m _ _ _ t FIG. 12. MIRAGE OX TH:E DESERT. 290. Mifrage.- Illusions with reference to terrestrial objects are due to extraordinary reflection and refraction, caused by peculiar conditions of 46 PHYSICAL GEO(LUAPIIY. the air as to density. The mirage,(a) the delusive appearance of water, common in the plains of Asia and Africa on the verge of the horizon, is a well known instance. 291. In Egypt the general aspect of the country is that of a plain, with gentle eminences on which the villages are seated. When the weather is calm and the ground is highly heated, the landscape at a distance assumes the appearance of a pure transparent lake. The villages seem built on islands, their respective objects, houses and trees, are vividly reflected as if in water, and multiplied and enlarged images are produced. So perfect is the representation, that experienced travelers, oppressed with heat and thirst, have accepted it as a reality. This was the case with the French army during the celebrated campaign in Egypt. "Still the same burning sun! no cloud in Heaven! The hot air quivers, and the sultry mist Floats o'er the desert, with a show Of distant waters mocking their distress." 292. The phenomenon as above described depends upon te earth being highly heated, and t'Re resulting evaporation. But the temperature of the air rapidly diminish's from the surface of the ground; hence there are striking diversities iL +he density of the lower strata, and the rays of light are unequally refractc. and reflected at the surfaces of strata of different densities. 293. Instances of the sun and moon being seen above the horizon when actually below it, of mountains and coasts unseen before, brought within sight of the spectator-of persons having their shadows depicted upon the clouds-of vessels being seen sailing in. the air, high above the surface of the water, are not uncommon in certain localities and latitudes. FiG. 13. FATA MORGANA A r REOGIO. (a) Serab is the Arabic term for what the Fiench call mirage. It occurs as a cornmmoo nmblem of deceit in oriental writings. The Koran says, " The actions of unbelievers are like the serab of the plain; he who is thirsty takes it for water, and finds it to be nothing." PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 47' 294. A singular spectacle is occasionally exhibited in the narrow strait between Messina and Reggio. A variety of images, men, houses, cattle, rocks, and trees are seen, pictured on the surface of the water, and in the air immediately over it. Multiplied images of the same object occur, or two images, one in a natural and the other in an inverted position; and they have been observed to be fringed with red, green, blue, and other prismatic colors. This exhibtlon is called by the Siciliansfata morgana, a title of uncertain derivation, but supposed to refer to a vulgar presumption of the spectacle being called into existence by fairy art or an enchanter's wand. FIG. 14. SPECTRE OF THE BROCKEN. 295. Dr. Buchan relates, that while on the cliff near Brighton, England with a companion, watching the sun when rising, Nov. 18, 1804, he saw, just as the solar disc emerged above the surface of the water, the face of the cliff represented precisely opposite to him, with a neighboring wind-mill, his own figure, and that of his friend, all faithfully depicted at some height above the sea. The appearance lasted about ten minutes. There was a dense fog upon the water at the time. 296. As two travelers were standing on the summit of Ben Lomond, August 19, 1820, watching the sunset, the attention of one of the party was arrested by the appearance of two gigantic figures pictured upon the cloud in the east, apparently standing on an enormous pedestal. He pointed out the phenomenon to his companion, and immediately one of the figures was observed to strike the other on the shoulder, and point towards them; they waved their hats and umbrellas, and the shadowy figures made a similar movement, faithfully imitating every gesticulation. The spectacle continued about fifteen minutes. 297. The spectre of Brocken(a)-the colossal figure of a man observed to walk the ridge at sunrise, is an analogous example. (a) OnP, of the Hartz Mountains. *48 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. ___ _ ~ ~_ FIG. 15. REFRACTIONIN THE POLAR SEA. 298. The following details respecting unequal refraction in northern regions produced by the varying temperature and density of adjacent strata of the air, are from Capt. Scoresby. 299. June 19, 1822, the sun was very hot, and the coast suddenly appeared to come fourteen or eighteen miles nearer; the different eminences were so raised that they were seen as easily from the deck of the ship as they were before from the fore-top. The ice in the horizon assumed singular forms; the larger blocks seemed columns; icebergs and fields of ice, a chain of prismatic rocks, and in many places the ice appeared to be in the air at some minutes(a) above the horizon. 300. Ships that were in the neighborhood assumed the most whimsical forms; in some the mainsail seemed reduced to nothing, while the foresail appeared four times larger than it really was. Above distant ships, their images were seen inverted and magnified. The image of a ship that was itself below the horizon was seen for several minutes; a ship even surmounted by two ships, one in the right position, the other inverted. 301. The apparitions in the air, which were once regarded as real or supernatural appearances, take their rise from terrestrial objects, being caused by peculiar reflection. 302. The visions of troops of horses, and armies marching and countermarching in the air, on the clouds, has sprung from some animals pasturing on an opposite height, or travelers quietly pursuing their journey. (a) Minutes of circular motion. ~ ~ ~- J'. ~'~'"'- ~;... ~/ ~. ~ ~:~:, -., _ ~,. -.~ ~ t- J 0. ~,,,,;R- s * ss..'. SM. iACTS F )x'M THE NMUiM`D TE'TT MONIALS RE- CEIVED FROIA I ARIOUS Pl 4-i ITED -n &TES, IN FAVORI OF THE AUTHO.5'd OUTLIL::L -' A Every experienced t(achbr' knows:the a;.:t i teaching Ger gaf hY i-om Ouilirt.e, Maps. o.'s n st (i" thi. e best schools!:/, I saw i/rge, ai,-fly engiaved, i and handsome Outiine Maps, with everything cos>,-e except the nan;:.hich vri; supplied by.3:-scholars at the recitation.. Mr. Pelton's Maps appe'r 0 m3: to be quite as good as any I saw in Europe, t:. perhaps, in some respects, he has improved on the European model. I should be gkad to see them introduced into ah our Institutions where Geography is taught. Prof. C. E. STOWE, D. ).:..t Cincinnn!ri C A full set of "Pelton's Outline Maps" have been in use in the Brockport Co' te -nstitute one term. It is truly an invaluable work.. JULIUS BAT; i A., Late Principal of Brockport Ccleit:: -;-. I have examined "Pelton's Outline Maps," and express n: -: -i a..:.c d opinion th;.t they are preferable to any Outline Maps in use. As a I.'' O' economy, flve times the outlay required for these Mt.ps, could, in my: ili:;, I eAT reed for them, and even then, the parents of the pupils in our schools vN,)ldi.'.-e great 2ainers. I would most cordially recommend them to the Trustees and inhubia.lts of Jur school districts, as most important aids in teaching Geography. J. T. HOGEBO)OM, ESQ. Superintendent of Common Shools in I-lns. Co., N. Y "Pelton's Outline Maps" are superior, in a', re.spects, to any maps of the same class that have come under my obPervatiorl.indl heerfxlly reco!-mmend them to all, who are called to give instruction in Geogr,.. an,. who de.ire to irmpnat to their pupils accurate and permanent hnprrssiols in.-..:.tais inoortai;t b.ll.ch o'f dtllatio-l..1 i.2.;i:t'.' t':.rLa. r7. Le 1 T rBS. I.E, I have eR, a;nod "?elton's O.; tt -.r'MapL.".. A,oiopy oi iem oolld L. in. every Seminary wherr.e.C "T..i ) ri, a:gni. A. CRITTENDEN, A. M. I. t,.: Principal of the Albany:Female Academy, N. Y. "Pelton's Ouli- e 1; a,s': ave ocen purchased for use in this Institution, and are considered a ve-y vi a-' -:' u I teaching Geography. Prof. C. DEWEY, -Principa. of Rochester Collegiate Institute, N. Y. I iave no heditatio;t;a smtng that "Pelton's Outline Maps," which I have had in use ihe last L: morfths, are thel best that have come to my ob.ervat;iop... hop3 to see a set of them placed in eryry School throughout the State.. WM. M. I'GHES, A. M., Principal of Public School, No. 9, Albany. N. Y. ~he supeiioTity of the Author', System of Geography is tlT ic'y attested by the fact, that it has receiver, fromn all Parts of the United State.'. LpirLnba' n.f so many Teachersof the hirghest rspnecta:l;lity and of the greatest e e nc e1. An.';eed are the names of a few who hav giveri it their approval, aid nocr! v tvith mam k.\ of distinTais led faV;or,.:' R,,v ELIPHALE'T Nu r'T, D.3. L. L. D., J. C. YOUr:,. D., \ President { iJnG;on College. Pres't Centbre Co?.:e.e, Danville, K. Rev I. JFERS, D. 1)., Rev. J. P. IUKBrl ^, U. D.,' Pres't of RIIt. ^r's.v i nstituie, N. Y. Late Pres't of i:,kinson CoL,, Carlsle, P'\; Rev-. P. Y. A TE, DD.D, Rev. H. B. BASC:)M, Pfeslt z.:iz d College Ci-i., 0. Pres't of T'ransylvania University. HTOWAR;Di MiALCO M. i.M., Prof. BUCK, Pres't Geo-gc. o' wn College, Ky..NAunda:Li rar? Institute, N. Y.